Contents

Contents i

Classic Account Management Users' Guide 21

Overview 21

About Account Management 22

Logging In 23

Failed Login Attempts 23

Home Page 24

Real-Time Summary 24

Balances 25

Margin Requirements 25

Available for Trading 26

Positions 26

Pending Items 27

Messages 28

Corporate Actions 29

Menus 30

Navigating the Account Management Menus 30

Getting Help 34

Dynamic Help 34

Account Management Users' Guide 34

Navigating Account Management Pages 35

Changing the Active Account 36

Account Selector 38

Using the Account Selector 38

Account Selector for Three-Level Accounts 41

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide i

Contents

Changing the Display Language 43

Printing 44

Logging Out 45

Trade 47

QuickTrade 48

IPO Subscriptions 49

Reports 53

Activity 54

About Activity Statements 54

Statement Cutoff Times 54

Activity by Account Type 54

Activity Statement Archive Policy 55

Viewing Activity Statements 56

Default Statements 56

Creating Customized Statements 59

Customized Statements Profit and Loss Selection 62

Third-Party Downloads 63

If You are Downloading a Zip File Using Internet Explorer 7 or 8 66

Activity Flex Queries 67

Batch Reports 72

Models 73

Quarterly Summaries 76

Trade Confirmations 78

Trade Confirmation Reports 79

Trade Allocations 81

Trade Confirmation Flex Queries 82

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide ii

Contents

PortfolioAnalyst 87

Snapshot PDF Reports 89

Detailed PDF Reports 94

Available Reports in Detailed PDF Reports 98

Running a Performance Attribution Report 105

Understanding the Performance Attribution Report Table 106

Weighting by Sector 106

Returns and Attribution Effects by Sector 106

Understanding the Performance Attribution Charts 106

Understanding the Performance Attribution Scatter Plot 107

Creating Custom Benchmarks 107

About Custom Benchmarks 107

Synopses 110

Creating and Saving a Synopsis 110

Assigning a Synopsis to a Report 111

Editing and Deleting Saved PortfolioAnalyst Reports 113

Viewing External Accounts 114

Account Summaries 115

External Accounts 118

Adding an External Account 118

Vewing and Editing External Accounts 122

Deleting External Accounts 123

Transaction Cost Analysis 125

Understanding the Transaction Cost Analysis 129

Risk 134

Margin Reports 135

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide iii

Contents

Stress Test Report 137

Using the Stress Test Summary Report 138

Value At Risk Report 140

Supplemental Reports 142

Compliance Reports 142

Advisor Fee Cap 143

Broker Exception Reports 144

Client Summary Report 144

P/L Markup Summary 145

Advisor Fee Invoices 146

Broker Client Revenue and Expense Summary 147

Tax 148

Tax Optimizer 149

Tax Forms 150

Position Transfer Basis 152

Forex Cost Basis 153

Settings 156

Delivery 156

Delivery Settings for Activity Statements and Trade Reports 157

SMS Alerts 160

Flex Queries 161

Portfolio Analyst Delivery Settings 162

Broker Client Activity Statements 165

Using the Flex Web Service 166

Flex Web Service Version 2 167

Flex Web Service Version 3 170

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide iv

Contents

Version 3 Error Codes 173

Third-Party Services 174

Trader ID 175

Trader ID Rules 176

Client OATS Settings 178

Funding 181

Viewing Transaction History 182

Request a stop payment of a check withdrawal 184

Cash Deposit Details 185

Cash Withdrawal Details 190

Position Transfers Details 193

Internal Transfer Details 197

Fund Transfers 199

Checking the Status of Your Funds 199

Funds Status 200

Depositing Funds 201

Withdrawing Funds 203

ACH Initiated By Us and Canadian EFT Transactions 207

Transferring Funds Internally 208

Saving Bank Information 209

About Recurring Transactions 211

Canceling a Recurring Transaction 212

Withdrawing Funds to a Third Party 212

Position Transfers 217

ACATS Transfers 218

Requesting a Full ACATS Transfer 218

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide v

Contents

Requesting a Partial ACATS Transfer without a Position Instruction 219

Requesting a Partial ACATS Transfer Using an Existing Position Instruction 221

Creating a Position Instruction for a Partial ACATS Transfer 223

ATON Transfers 224

Requesting a Full ATON Transfer 224

Partial ATON Transfers without Instructions 225

Partial ATON Transfers with Existing Instruction 227

Creating an ATON Position Instruction 229

Checking Position Eligibility for a Full ACATS or ATON Transfer 230

DRS Transfers 233

DWAC Transfers 235

Transferring Positions to an Advisor-Managed Account 236

Transfer International Assets 237

FOP Transfers 241

FOP Transfer without Instruction 241

FOP Transfer Using Existing Instruction 243

Creating Position Instruction for an FOP Transfer 245

US Futures Transfers 246

Transferring Positions Between Master and Sub Accounts 246

Transferring Positions Internally 247

Using CSV Files for Position Transfers 248

Uploading Positions in a CSV File for Partial Position Transfers 249

Rules for Uploading Positions in a CSV File 251

Instructions 253

Bank Information 253

Bank Information Fields 254

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide vi

Contents

Recurring Transactions 260

Position Instructions 262

Settlement Instructions 263

Soft Dollars Disbursement 265

Manage Account 269

Account Information 270

Details 270

Account Details 270

Profile 272

Ownership Percentage Update 278

Guidelines 278

Example 278

Financial Information 281

Regulatory Information 282

Dividend Reinvestment 283

Trading Sub Accounts 285

Broker Declaration 285

Advisor Qualifications 286

Transfer on Death 287

Removing or Modifying a TOD Beneficiary 291

Investor Category 292

Large Trader Identification 292

Tax Information 295

Tax Form Collection 295

Withholding Statement 297

Adding an Owner to an Organization 298

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide vii

Contents

Settings 300

Configure Account 300

Base Currency 300

Institutional Services 302

Account Type 303

Excess Funds Sweep 304

Fees 304

Pricing Structure 305

Request Soft Dollars 306

Request Soft Dollars 306

Soft Dollars Page 306

Soft Payments in Activity Statements 308

Compliance for Advisors 308

Who Can Subscribe to this Service? 308

Using the Service for the First Time 309

Section 13 Subscription Election 309

Section 13 Monitoring Groups 310

Rules for Monitoring Groups 310

Section 13 Handshake Requests 315

Section 13 On Demand Report Request 315

Rules for On Demand Report Generation 316

Section 13 Designate Aggregated Report Recipients 318

Rules for Designating Aggregated Report Recipients 318

Trading Platforms Read-Only Access 319

Paper Trading 320

About Paper Trading Accounts 321

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide viii

Contents

Paper Trading Account Limitations 322

Account Alias 322

How to Close Your Account 323

Close Account 325

Account Closure Status 327

Reopening a Closed Account 328

IRA 329

IRA Conversion to a Roth Account 329

Partial IRA Conversions 330

IRA Recharacterization 331

Partial IRA Recharacterizations 331

IRA Reference 332

IRA Account Types 332

IRA Margin Accounts 332

IRA Account Types 332

IRA Transfer Methods 333

Conversions and Recharacterizations 335

IRA Conversion 335

Eligibility Requirements 335

2010 Changes 336

IRA Recharacterization 336

Timing 336

Reconversion 336

Additional Information 337

Trade Configuration 338

Permissions 339

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide ix

Contents

Trading UK CFDs and Metals 342

Trading Cash Forex 345

Cash Forex Eligibility Requirements 345

Market Data 346

Research 347

Subscriber Status 348

Market Data Assistant 350

Trading Limits 350

Restrictions 352

FYI 352

Alerts 354

Futures Arbitration Agreement 356

Asia Gateway Access 356

Security 358

IP Restrictions 358

Change Password 359

Reset Paper Trading Account Password 360

Change Email Address 362

Change Security Questions 363

Secure Login System 364

Security Device 365

If You Choose Not to Participate in the Secure Login System 367

When Will I Receive My Device 367

Security Device Sharing 367

About Security Devices 369

Security Code Cards 369

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide x

Contents

Digital Security Card+ 370

Withdrawal Limits 371

SLS Opt Out 371

Rules for Opting Out 372

Client Security 373

Voting Subscriptions 374

Audit Trail 375

Access Rights 377

User Access Rights Guide 377

Access Rights Overview 377

Access Rights and Access Groups 378

Security Officers 378

Security Officer Approvals 378

Account-Level Access Rights 379

User Roles 379

Primary and Secondary Authorizers 379

User Access Rights Summary 379

About Security Officers 380

Creating Security Officers During the Account Application Process 380

Adding and Deleting Security Officers 380

Security Officers and Account Management 380

Configure Access Rights 381

Users 383

Individual Account User Rules 384

User Information Displayed on User Access Rights Page 384

Adding a User 385

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xi

Contents

Viewing Pending User Access Rights 389

Viewing Eligible Security Officers on Pending Items 389

Modifying User Access Rights 390

Adding Usernames to a User 392

Deleting a User 393

Add a Security Officer 394

User Roles 394

Adding a User Role 394

Modifying a User Role 395

Deleting a User Role 396

View User Role Details 396

Contents i

Add or Link Accounts xxi

Create Linked Account xxi

If You Do Not Finish the New Account Application xxii

Account Management for Linked Accounts xxii

Link Existing Account xxiii

Guidelines for Linking Existing Accounts xxiii

Account Management for Linked Accounts xxiv

Move, Link or Partition an Account xxv

Important Notes about Linking and DeLinking xxvi

About Partitions xxvi

Authorized Trader xxx

Rules for Linking to and Delinking from an Advisor or Multiple Hedge Fund xxxii

Research Services xxxiii

Research Website Login xxxiii

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xii

Contents

Money Manager xxxiv

Adding a Money Manager xxxiv

Money Manager Assignment xxxiv

Add a Money Manager xxxv

Create a Client Fees Template xxxvii

Modify Client Fees for a Money Manager xxxvii

Modify Trading Permissions xxxix

Change Money Manager Client Account Assignments xliii

Remove a Money Manager xlviii

Wealth Manager Assignment xlix

Trader Referral Program lii

Trader Referral Payout Rules lii

Manage Clients/Funds/Traders 55

Dashboard 57

View Information About All Clients 59

View Client Account Details 61

Changing Account Representatives 70

Additional Advisor Authorizations 72

Additional Broker Authorizations 74

Invest in a Hedge Fund for a Client 76

Duplicate Client Accounts 77

Duplicated Account Settings 79

Upload Documents for Pending Non-Disclosed Broker Clients 80

Create and Link Accounts (for Advisors and Brokers) 82

Create 82

Add Client Account 82

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xiii

Contents

Methods of Completing an Account Application 83

Steps in the Application Process 84

Inviting a Client to Start an Electronic Application 84

Starting a Semi-Electronic Application 86

Downloading Client Disclosures 88

Adding a Fully Disclosed Broker Client Account 88

Adding Advisors, STL and Multiple Hedge Fund Accounts to a Fully Disclosed Broker Account 89

Adding an Advisor Account 89

Adding an STL Account 90

Adding a Multiple Hedge Fund Account 90

Rules for Three-Level Fully Disclosed Broker Accounts 91

Adding a Non-Disclosed Broker Client Account 94

Client Account Templates 95

Advisor/Fund Investment Manager Client Templates 96

Broker Client Templates 99

Set Up a Client Template with a Custom ID 103

Households 103

Rules for Creating Households 104

Link Client Accounts 111

Close Account 112

Close a Non-Disclosed Broker Client Account 114

Account Closure Status 116

Opening Interactive Brokers Asset Management Accounts for Advisor Clients 116

Create (for Multiple Fund Investment Managers) 120

Add Client Account 120

Methods of Completing an Account Application 121

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xiv

Contents

Steps in the Application Process 122

Inviting a Client to Start an Electronic Application 122

Starting a Semi-Electronic Application 124

Downloading Client Disclosures 125

Adding a Fully Disclosed Broker Client Account 126

Adding Advisors, STL and Multiple Hedge Fund Accounts to a Fully Disclosed Broker Account 127

Adding an Advisor Account 127

Adding an STL Account 128

Adding a Multiple Hedge Fund Account 128

Rules for Three-Level Fully Disclosed Broker Accounts 129

Adding Advisor and STL Accounts to an Advisor or Multiple Hedge Fund Account 132

Adding an Advisor Account 133

Adding an STL Account 133

Rules for Three-Level Advisor or Multiple Hedge Fund Accounts 134

Adding a Non-Disclosed Broker Client Account 137

Add a Fund Account or an SMA Account 137

Duplicate Client Accounts 141

Duplicated Account Settings 143

Client Account Templates 144

Advisor/Fund Investment Manager Client Templates 145

Broker Client Templates 148

Set Up a Client Template with a Custom ID 152

Traders 153

Traders 153

Authorized Trader 153

Close Account 155

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xv

Contents

Close a Non-Disclosed Broker Client Account 156

Account Closure Status 158

Client Fees 160

Advisor Client Fees 160

Broker Client Fees 160

Advisor Client Fees 161

Fee Reimbursement 161

Charge Commissions and/or Client Fees to the Advisor Master Account 162

Client Fee Templates 162

Overview of Advisor Client Fees 162

Caps and Limitations 165

Examples 165

Percent of Net Liquidation Value 165

Flat Fee 165

Percent of Annual P&L 165

Percent of Market-to-Market P&L 166

Configure Advisor Client Fees 166

High Water Mark 172

High Water Mark Example 172

`Setting Up High Water Marking 173

Advisor Fee Cap Formulas 177

Client Authorization 177

Advisor Client Invoicing 178

Uploading Invoices 184

Configure Invoice Notifications 186

Advisor Fee Reimbursements 188

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xvi

Contents

Broker Client Fees 193

Rules for Broker Client Fees 193

Client Fee Templates 193

Choice of Pricing Structures for Client Accounts 193

Markup Summary 194

Types of Broker Client Markups 194

Minimum Amount 194

Maximum Amount 195

Ticket Charge 196

Absolute Markup 197

Tiered Absolute Amount 197

% Markup 198

Exchange and Regulatory Fees 199

Interest Markups and Markdowns 200

Markups on Borrow Fees 200

Take Up Fees for Prime Trades 201

Configure Broker Client Fees 202

Client Invoicing 206

Uploading Invoices 211

Markup Summary 212

Client Fee Templates 213

Overview of Client Fee Templates 213

Default Client Fee Templates 214

Fees for SMAs in Multiple Hedge Fund Accounts 218

HFCIP Fees 219

Settings 223

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xvii

Contents

Account Alias 223

Broker Client Approvals 224

Excess Funds Sweep 227

Debit Card For Advisor Clients 228

Trade Configuration 230

Base Currency 230

Account Type 231

Client Trading 232

Permissions 234

Restrictions 235

Trading Limits 235

Security 239

Audit Trail 239

Updating a Client's W8/W9 241

Users 243

Individual Account User Rules 243

User Information Displayed on User Access Rights Page 244

Adding a User 244

Viewing Pending User Access Rights 248

Viewing Eligible Security Officers on Pending Items 249

Modifying User Access Rights 249

Adding Usernames to a User 251

Deleting a User 252

CRM 254

CRM Home Page 255

Individual CRM Contacts 256

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xviii

Contents

Sharing CRM with Another User 257

View, Sort and Search Records 257

View Current Tasks and Events 258

Entering a New Contact, Prospect or Client 260

Edit an Existing Contact, Prospect or Client 264

Additional Functions for Individual Records 266

Set and Reset Your Notes/Tasks Password 276

Set Up and Use a CRM Mailbox 278

Requirements for a Rackspace Mailbox 278

Additional Information 278

Additional Services Available from Rackspace 278

Disclaimer 279

Events 279

CRM Advanced Search 283

CRM Groups 286

Import Contacts 293

Excel File Information 293

CRM Icon Reference 295

Support 297

Client Services Message Center 298

Message Center Window 299

Viewing Tickets and Unread Messages 300

Changing the Display Language 301

Viewing the Legend 301

Creating a New Ticket 302

Modifying a Ticket 303

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xix

Contents

Setting Ticket Notification Preferences 305

Closing a Ticket 306

Viewing Corporate Actions 307

Submitting a Tax Reporting Correction Form 307

Requesting a Trade Cancellation 308

Live Chat 310

Client Services Contact Information 311

Service Tips 312

Knowledge Base 313

Client Services Tools 314

System Status 315

Paper Forms 316

Using Account Management Forms 316

Index 317

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xx

 1
Classic Account Management Users' Guide
Overview
This chapter introduces you to Account Management and provides an overview of common functions. The following top-
ics are included:

l About Account Management

l Logging In
l Home Page
l Menus
l Getting Help
l Navigating Account Management Pages
l Changing the Active Account
l Account Selector
l Changing the Display Language
l Printing
l Logging Out

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 21

Chapter 1 About Account Management

About Account Management

Our Account Management system lets you configure and manage your account from a single window, and gives you con-
venient access to these account and website functions:

l Trade - All accounts can launch Trader Workstation and WebTrader, trade within Account Management using
QuickTrade, and some multiple account structures can access Post-Trade Allocations.
l Reports - Customize and generate reports such as activity statements, margin reports, trade confirmations, and tax
forms.
l Funding - Set up fund and position transfers to and from your account, check the status of your deposits, transfers
and withdrawals; specify client fees for broker or advisor client accounts; submit advisor-calculated fee invoices
for client accounts; authenticate pending bank instruction requests; and more.
l Manage Account - Configure your account, including account- and user-level settings. These include personal, fin-
ancial and regulatory information; IP restrictions; pricing structures; base currency; master account functions;
adding users and defining their access rights; viewing, adding and closing broker or advisor client accounts; and
much more.
l Manage Clients/Funds/Traders - Advisors, Brokers (Fully Disclosed and Non-Disclosed) and SIPP account admin-
istrators access this menu to configure their client accounts. Hedge Fund Investment Managers who manage mul-
tiple funds access this menu as Manage Funds. Proprietary Trading Group STL Account Master Users access this
as the Manage Traders menu. Functions include viewing and adding client accounts and fund accounts; con-
figuring client account trading permissions; specifying client fees for broker or advisor client accounts and SMA
accounts; submitting fee invoices for client accounts; and much more.
l Support - Point of access for submitting and tracking Client Services issues; initiating live chat; and accessing Cli-
ent Services tools.
Note: When navigating through the different pages in Account Management, do NOT use your browser’s
Back button. If you do, you may be logged out of the system. Instead, use the Back button
provided on the Account Management pages.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 22

Chapter 1 Logging In

Logging In
To log into Account Management
1. From our web site, select Account Management from the Login drop-down list on the upper right corner.
The Account Management login screen appears.

2. In the Username field, type your account username.

3. In the Password field, type your account password.
4. Choose Live Account or Paper Account. You can use your live or paper trading account username and password
to log in to your paper trading account.
5. Optionally select a specific destination in Account Management from the Go To drop-down.

If you have a Secure Login System security device, you are prompted to use your security device for authentication
before clicking the Login button. Two index numbers are shown; for each index number, look up the corresponding
value on your security device and enter them in the field provided.

6. Click the Login button. Account Management opens.

If you are having difficulty logging into Account Management, click the Login Problems link. This link opens a page
that contains useful login troubleshooting information.

Your web browser must have cookies enabled before you can log into Account Management.

1. Choose Live Account or Paper Account. You can use your live account username and password to log in to your
paper trading account.

Failed Login Attempts

After ten failed login attempts in 24 hours, your Account Management login will be disabled. If this happens, contact Cli-
ent Services.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 23

Chapter 1 Home Page

Home Page
The Account Management Home page includes the following tabbed pages:

l Summary - The Real-time Summary appears by default on the Home page and includes current balances, margin
requirements and available funds for your account, or in the case of a multiple account structure, for the selected
account.
l Positions - The Positions tab displays all of the positions in your account, or in the case of a multiple account
structure, in the selected account.
l Pending Items - The Pending Items tab displays all pending items, including outstanding document submissions
or funding requests for your account, or in the case of a multiple account structure, for the selected account. The
current number of pending items appears on the Pending Items tab.
l Messages - The Messages tab displays all current Client Services messages, such as responses to inquiries, for your
account, or in the case of a multiple account structure, for the selected account.. The current number of messages
appears on the Message Center tab.
l Corporate Actions - The Corporate Actions tab displays all current corporate actions for your account, or in the
case of a multiple account structure, for the selected account.. The current number of corporate actions appears on
the Corporate Actions tab.

To return to the Home page from any place in Account Management, simply click the red icon on the left side of the
Account Management menu.

The Home page also includes the following:

l Your Account Name and ID are displayed on the bottom left side of the page. Individuals with linked accounts
can use this field to switch between accounts; when you switch to a linked account, Account Management
reloads with data for the selected account.
l The latest news and scheduled webinars are displayed on the right side of the Home page.
l At the bottom right side of the screen, you also have access to dynamic help.

Real-Time Summary
The Real-time Summary gives you a snapshot of important account values for your account or, for multiple account struc-
tures, for the selected account, in real time on the Account Management Home page. The exact time of the current data is
displayed at the top of the page, along with a Refresh button that you can click to update all values on the page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 24

Chapter 1 Balances

You can only click the Refresh button once every 60 seconds. The first "click" of the button occurs when you first log
into Account Management and the Home page appears; this automatically disables the button for 60 seconds. After 60
seconds, you can click the button again to refresh the data on the Home page.

The Real-time Summary includes the following tables:

Balances

The Balances table displays the current Net Liquidation Value, Equity With Loan Value and Cash for your account.
Depending on where your account is based (US, Canada, UK, Japan or India), you will see columns that reflect your
account.

Margin Requirements

The Margin Requirements table displays the Current Initial Margin and Current Maintenance Margin requirements for
your account. Depending on where your account is based (US, Canada, UK, Japan or India), you will see columns that
reflect your account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 25

Chapter 1 Available for Trading

Available for Trading

Displays the Current Available Funds, Current Excess Liquidity, Buying Power and SMA for your account. Depending
on where your account is based (US, Canada, UK, Japan or India), you will see columns that reflect your account.

For more information

l Learn more about these and other important account values in the The Account Window topic in the Trader Work-
station Users' Guide.

Positions
The Positions tab displays all of the positions and cash in your account, or in the case of a multiple account structure, in
the selected account. You can hover your mouse cursor over a symbol to display the full name of the position in a popup
box. Positions are grouped by asset class.

Note: Currently, the Positions tab is only visible to Individual, Joint, Trust, and IRA accounts that are
NOT Advisor or Fully Disclosed clients. If you are a master user in an institution account (Advisor,
Broker, Multiple Hedge Fund, Proprietary Trading Group STL), you can view Positions for your cli-
ents, funds or sub accounts in the Manage Clients/Funds/Traders menu under Accounts > View
> Summary.

For example, here is the Positions tab for an account with cash in several currencies.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 26

Chapter 1 Pending Items

Pending Items
The Pending Items page shows items such as outstanding document submissions or pending funding requests for your
account or, for multiple account structures, for the selected account.

A quick glance at the Pending Items tab under the Home menu lets you know how many pending items you have.

The page displays a "No Pending Items" message if you do not have pending items.

Institutional accounts with pending changes to user access rights or access rights configuration can move their mouse
over those pending items to see a popup with Eligible Security Officers displayed:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 27

Chapter 1 Messages

Messages
The Messages tab displays pending Client Services inquiries for your account or, for multiple account structures, for the
selected account. Pending Client Services inquiries include messages from Client Services in response to inquiry tickets.
A quick glance at the Message Center tab under the Home menu lets you know how many Client Services messages you
have.

The page displays a "No Messages" message if you do not have any Client Services messages.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 28

Chapter 1 Corporate Actions

Corporate Actions
The Corporate Actions tab displays notifications of all upcoming corporate actions that may affect your account or, for
multiple account structures, for the selected account, based on the positions held in the account. This means for example,
that regardless of whether you hold a stock, option, bond, or SSF position in ABC company, you will receive noti-
fication of any and all upcoming corporate actions on ABC stock. We notify you of impending actions up to three
months out, and track 14 different types of voluntary and mandatory corporate actions, including dividends, forward and
reverse splits, spinoffs and issuances, mergers, name/symbol changes, and a variety of tenders and offers.

If you have any notifications of corporate actions, they appear on the Corporate Actions page. A quick glance at the Cor-
porate Actions tab under the Home menu lets you know how many corporate actions you have.

The page displays a "No Messages" message if you do not have any corporate actions.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 29

Chapter 1 Menus

Menus
You access all Account Management functions from the menu bar. You can return to the Home page any time by click-
ing the red icon on the left side of the menu.

Here is the Account Management menu for Individual accounts and some institution accounts (Single Funds, Omnibus
Brokers, Proprietary Trading Group Pool accounts):

The Account Management menu for all other multiple account structures contains an additional menu, Manage Clients:

Each item on the main menu contains a submenu with individual functions and in some cases, additional levels of
menus.

Note: Throughout this guide, we use the convention "Menu > Second-level menu" to describe locations
of functions and pages in Account Management. For example, "Reports > Activity" means the
Activity blue menu item under the Reports menu.

Navigating the Account Management Menus

Getting around in Account Management is easy. Simply click an item on the top-level menu to display the available
blue menu items.

1. Using the Reports menu as an example, first move your mouse directly over the word "Reports" in the main menu.
The second-level menu drops down in a menu panel:

2. Next, move your mouse over the first menu item under Reports, which is Activity. Activity is highlighted in grey
and shows an arrow, indicating that there are additional menu items. Note that at this point, the current page that
is displayed in Account Management does not change (for example, if you started on the Home page, the Home
page is still displayed at this point).

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 30

Chapter 1 Navigating the Account Management Menus

3. Click Activity to view the additional pages available in that menu:

4. Activity is now highlighted in blue, and you can move your mouse over all of the pages available under Activity.

5. Click any page in the Activity menu to display that page. In the image below, the Reports > Activity > State-
ments page is displayed. As soon as the selected page opens, the menu panel hides from view.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 31

Chapter 1 Navigating the Account Management Menus

6. You can now switch to a different page in the Reports > Activity menu by moving your mouse over Reports to
display the menu panel, then moving your mouse over the desired page under Activity.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 32

Chapter 1 Navigating the Account Management Menus

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 33

Chapter 1 Getting Help

Getting Help
You can get additional information about Account Management in the following ways:

l Dynamic Help
l Reference Menu
l Users' Guide

Access Dynamic Help and the Reference Menu using the two icons located on the upper right portion of the Account
Management screen.

Dynamic Help
On most pages, you can display a help panel that contains simple step-by-step instructions. To display the How To help
panel, click the blue and white question mark symbol on the upper right corner of the page. The help panel slides in
from the left side of the screen.

To close the help panel, click the red X.

Account Management Users' Guide

This Guide contains detailed instructions on how to use the different functions in Account Management. Access this
guide from within most dynamic help topics, or from the Reference Menu, or from the Documentation page in the
Traders' University on our website.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 34

Chapter 1 Navigating Account Management Pages

Navigating Account Management Pages

Many Account Management functions contain a sequence of multiple pages, which are connected by Continue and
Back buttons. The presence of a Continue button means that there is another page that contains information that you
need to view or a form that you need to complete. You can use the Back button to return to the previous page in the
sequence.

Note: When navigating through the different pages in Account Management, do NOT use your browser's
Back button. If you do, you may be logged out of the system. Instead, use the Back button
provided on the Account Management pages.

You can also use the menus to navigate to any other page in Account Management, or click the red icon on the left side
of the menu to return to the Account Management Home page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 35

Chapter 1 Changing the Active Account

Changing the Active Account

If you have multiple linked accounts or account partitions and you log in to Account Management, only one account
will be the active account. You can quickly change the active account to another linked account or account partition
from any page in Account Management using the account switching tool at the bottom of the screen. You can switch
between accounts and switch back at any time in Account Management.

Note: This is not the same thing as using the Account Selector at the top of some Account Management
pages. Changing the active account affects all of Account Management while the Account Selector
lets you choose accounts on which to perform certain tasks on specific pages.

Change the Active Account

1. If you have multiple linked accounts or account partitions, a down arrow displays next to the Account ID. Click
the down arrow to display a list of your available accounts by Account ID.

2. Click the account that you want to make the active account. Account Management reloads for the selected
account, which means any task you perform will now be performed in that account. On the Home page, the
account values always apply to the active account. If you have account partitions, click the account listed below
the line that says "Partition."

Change the Display in the Account Switching Tool

By default, the account switching tool displays your Account Title. You can also display your different accounts by
Account ID or Account Alias if you prefer.

1. Click the down arrow to display a list of your available accounts.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 36

Chapter 1 Changing the Active Account

2. Click the left-facing arrow on the left side of account list.

3. Change the display of accounts by selecting the desired radio button. Click ID to display your account list by
Account Title or Alias to display your account list by Account Alias (if you have assigned account aliases to
your account).

4. You can now change the active account or close the account switching tool and change the active account later.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 37

Chapter 1 Account Selector

Account Selector
If you have a master account or any other multiple-account structure, including linked accounts, many of the pages you
access in Account Management, including the Home page, allow you to select or change the account in which to per-
form a given task. On these pages, you will see the Account Selector appear at the top of the page:

Using the Account Selector

Within the Account Selector, there are several ways to search for and select accounts:

l Click the client or sub account ID to select it. Use the scroll bar to view more accounts.
l Use the Search field to search for specific accounts. Enter an Account ID one character at a time to view dynamic
search results.
l Use the Display By: radio buttons to search for accounts by Account ID, Account Title or Account Alias. Match-
ing accounts are displayed below the controls.
If you choose to search by Account Alias and there is no account alias associated with any client or sub
accounts, the Account ID + Account Title will be displayed instead.
On some Account Management pages, you can also search for closed accounts. For example, if you are an Advisor and
you want to generate a statement for a closed client account, you can select the Include Closed Accounts check box to
display closed accounts in the Account Selector.

There are different varieties of the Account Selector, depending on which Account Management page is currently dis-
played and what kind of account you have:

l Most pages allow to you select a single account, then make changes that affect only that one account. On these
pages, you make changes to one account at a time, then click the tab at the top of the page to display the
Account Selector, which you use to change accounts. After you select a client or sub account on one page then
switch to another page, the account you previously selected will remain the active account until you change it.
The following image shows the Fund Transfers page with the Account Selector tab for a Fully Disclosed Broker account.
The information on the page pertains to only the account number shown on the tab.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 38

Chapter 1 Using the Account Selector

The Account Selector expands after you click the tab, allowing you to select another account:

l Some pages allow you to select and make changes to more than one account at a time. On these pages, you use
the Account Selector to select multiple accounts, clicking the check boxes next to each account you wish to
select then clicking the View Accounts button.
The following image shows the Account Selector for the Activity Statements page in an Advisor account. When you
select Reports > Activity Statements from the Account Management menu, the page opens with the multiple selection
Account Selector open. Click one or more accounts to select them; the accounts turn blue in the Account Selector.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 39

Chapter 1 Using the Account Selector

The following image shows a version of the Account Selector that appears on the Manage Clients > Settings > Account
Alias and Manage Clients > Settings > Excess Funds Sweep pages. This Account Selector lets you select more than one
account, but you must click the Select Accounts button to load the page with your selected accounts.

To select different accounts on these pages, click the Account Selector tab, then click the Reload Accounts but-
ton to clear your selections from the Account Selector.

l Some pages allow Advisors and Fully Disclosed Brokers to search for and select households. Once a house-
hold is selected in the Account Selector, the names of the members of the household will appear in the Selector.

To search for a household

o Click the drop-down menu located in the upper left corner the Account Selector, and then click Households.
The Account Selector will update to display only households.
o Click a household to display all of the accounts in that household. For some pages allow you to select more
than one account in a household.
Click Accounts from the drop-down to search for accounts instead of households.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 40

Chapter 1 Account Selector for Three-Level Accounts

The following pages in Account Management support searching and selecting by household:
o Activity Statements
o Activity Flex Queries
o Quarterly Summaries
o Trade Confirmation Flex Queries
o PortfolioAnalyst
o Tax Forms
o Client Invoicing
o Account Alias

Account Selector for Three-Level Accounts

If you are a Fully Disclosed Broker with a three-level account (you have one or more Advisor Master, Proprietary Trad-
ing Group Separate Trading Limit Master or Multiple Hedge Fund Investment Manager in your account structure), the
Account Selector you use on some Account Management pages will let you select an Advisor, STL or Multiple Hedge
Fund Master account, or their client/sub/fund accounts.

You will see this Account Selector behavior on the following pages in Account Management:

l In the Reports menu:

o Activity Statements
o Activity Downloads
o Activity Flex Queries
o Trade Confirmations
o Trade Confirmation Flex Queries
o Margin Reports
o Stress Test Reports

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 41

Chapter 1 Account Selector for Three-Level Accounts

o Tax Forms
l In the Manage Clients menu:
o Accounts > View > Open/Pending/Closed/Rejected

To use the Account Selector on these pages

Select one or more accounts from the Account Selector. In the image below, the Account Selector displays a large num-
ber of "F" accounts, which in this case are Advisors.

If the account you selected is an Advisor with client accounts, a Proprietary Trading Group Master account with its own
STL sub accounts, or a Multiple Hedge Fund Investment Manager with Fund accounts, you are prompted to select that
account or view the client/sub/fund accounts associated with that account.

If you click Select Account, the page loads for the selected account. If you click View Clients, the Account Selector dis-
plays the client/sub/fund accounts associated with the selected account. At this point, you can select one or more of the
client accounts.

For more information

l Adding Advisors, STL Accounts and Multiple Hedge Funds to a Fully Disclosed Broker Account

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 42

Chapter 1 Changing the Display Language

Changing the Display Language

You can change the display language in Account Management and the Client Services Message Center using the Lan-
guage Menu located at the top right of the screen.

To change the display language

1. Log into Account Management.
2. Move your mouse over the globe icon located at the far right of the menu bar.

The language settings panel drops down, showing all possible languages for Account Management.
3. Click the language you want to change.

4. Click the language to which you want to switch the display.

A message appears in two languages - the original language and the newly selected language.
For example, if you change the display language from English to Spanish (Espanol), the following message
appears:

5. Click the green check mark to save your changes and dismiss the message.

If you change your mind, click the red X. Your changes will NOT be saved and the display language will remain
unchanged.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 43

Chapter 1 Printing

Printing
You can print any Account Management page using your web browser's Print functions.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 44

Chapter 1 Logging Out

Logging Out
To log out of Account Management
1. Click the Logout button in the upper right corner of the screen.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 45

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 46
 2
Trade
The Trade menu gives you quick access to trading platforms.

This chapter includes the following topics:

l QuickTrade

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 47

Chapter 2 QuickTrade

QuickTrade
QuickTrade gives you easy access to a simplified trading interface, where you can quickly place orders for a variety of
asset types from within Account Management. QuickTrade works the same way as the Order Management Panel in
WebTrader.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 48

Chapter 2 IPO Subscriptions

IPO Subscriptions
This page lets you access a list of currently active IPOs available in Account Management.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 49

Chapter 2 IPO Subscriptions

To Enter an IPO

1. Log in to Account Management and go to Trade > IPO Subscription.

2. Click Enter IPO next to the desired offering.

3. To Modify or Cancel, click the corresponding icon in the column.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 50

Chapter 2 IPO Subscriptions

4. To add a new conditional offer to buy, click Add.

5. Read the terms and conditions of the offer, then enter the quantity of shares to buy. Click Continue.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 51

Chapter 2 IPO Subscriptions

6. Review the conditional offer screen, then click Submit to return to the IPO summary screen.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 52

 3
Reports
This chapter describes the reporting features of Account Management, including activity statements, trade confirmation
reports and supplemental reports such as margin reports.

This chapter includes the following topics:

l Activity Statements
l Trade Confirmation Reports
l PortfolioAnalyst
l Transaction Cost Analysis
l Risk
l Supplemental Reports
l Tax
l Settings

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 53

Chapter 3 Activity

Activity
The Reports > Activity menu includes the following pages:

l Statements - View and create activity statements. You can run default statements or create your own customized
statements.
l Third-Party Downloads - Download activity statements in one of several formats, such as Quicken.
l Flex Queries - Create highly customized activity statements in text or XML format.
l Batch Reports - View the status of reports queued for batch processing, and run batch reports.
l Models - Advisors and their clients view Model Statements.

About Activity Statements

Activity Statements include information about your account activity, which can be generated on a daily, monthly, and
yearly basis for all accounts.

Information included in an Activity Statement is presented in expandable and collapsible sections with click-down
detail, and you can create customized statements to include or exclude individual sections. You can also choose to
include closed accounts in your statement. You are notified via email when there is account activity.

Activity Statements in Mobile Account Management include information about your account activity, which can be gen-
erated on a daily or monthly basis and for a custom date range for all accounts.

Prices in statements are displayed with a minimum of four decimal places to a maximum of seven decimal places. Sec-
tions that display price include Trades and Open Positions.

Statement Cutoff Times

Statement cutoff time is the time each day at which we stop including executed trades in your statement for the day.
Here are the current statement cutoff times:

l Commodities - 5:15 PM EST

l Securities - 8:20 PM EST
l Forex - 5:00 PM EST
l IB-JP clients - 6:00 AM ET.
Any trades executed before the cutoff times for the asset classes and clients listed above will be reflected in the statement
for that day.

Activity by Account Type

The following figure shows what kind of activity statements are available for each account type.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 54

Chapter 3 Activity Statement Archive Policy

Activity Statement Archive Policy

We provide access to activity statements as follows:

l Daily account statements are available for the four previous calendar years and from the start of the current cal-
endar year.
l Monthly account statements are available for the five previous years (60 prior months).
l Annual account statements are available for the five previous years.
l Custom Date Range account statements are available for the four previous calendar years and from the start of the
current calendar year.
l You can obtain account statements older than this for a processing fee.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 55

Chapter 3 Viewing Activity Statements

Viewing Activity Statements

Activity Statements include information about your account activity, and can be generated on a daily, monthly, and
yearly basis for all accounts.

You view activity statements from Account Management or from the View menu in Trader Workstation. Make a note of
the following guidelines when viewing activity statements:

l Multi-account structures (Advisor, Broker, Institutions) can select one or more accounts from the Account(s) list.
l Monthly statements are generally available by five business days after the close of a month.
l Annual statements are available by January 31 under normal circumstances.

Who can access the Statements page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Broker Non-Disclosed Client User
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund
and you have been granted Reporting access rights.

Default Statements

There are several default statements available for viewing Activity Statements:

l Partition Summary - This default statement is available for account holders who have divided their accounts into
partitions. It contains summary sections at the top for each partition, followed by concatenated statements for each
partition.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 56

Chapter 3 Default Statements

l Default -The primary default statement. It includes Net Asset Value (NAV), Realized and Unrealized and Mark-
to-Market (MTM) performance summaries, deposit and withdrawals, dividends, interest, fees, and other summary
information related to changes in NAV. This default statement supports the Calendar Year period. For accounts
with models, the Default statement includes a Model Summary at the top of the statement followed by the full
Activity Statement for the account.
l Realized Summary -A simpler statement that includes NAV, Positions and realized P&L summaries as well as
other summary information related to changes in NAV.
l MTM Summary - A simpler statement that includes NAV and Position and MTM profit and loss summaries as
well as other summary information related to changes in NAV.
l Commodities Regulatory - The Commodities Regulatory statement breaks out domestic (US) and foreign
cash/holdings for the Commodities segment of your account (required by the CME Group). This type of statement
is available for any accounts that trade futures or futures options.

You can also select one of our legacy default statements:

l Legacy Full - This statement includes ALL sections of an activity statement; this is the only default statement that
supports the Yearly period.
l Legacy Simple - A simpler statement that includes details but excludes MTM P&L.
l Legacy Summary - A simple summary statement that includes only a few sections.
l Multi-Account Summary - A summary statement for linked accounts and multi-account structures.

To view an activity statement from Account Management

1. Click Reports > Activity > Statements.
The Statements page appears by default.

If you have a multiple account structure such as an institution account or multiple linked accounts, use the Account
Selector at the top of the page to select one or more accounts on which to report. To include activity from accounts you

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 57

Chapter 3 Default Statements

have recently closed, select the Include Closed Accounts check box. If you choose to include closed accounts, those
accounts appear in the Account Selector.

2. In the Statements list, select the default statement or one of your own saved customized statements that you want
to view.
3. In the Date(s) fields, select the Period (Daily, Custom Date Range, Monthly or Calendar Year) and a Date.
l For Custom Date Range, select the From and To dates, which define the period covered by the statement.
l For Daily statements, you can select a specific date or the last business day.
l For Monthly statements, you can select the last month or a specific month.
l For Calendar Year (annual) statements, you can select a specific year.
l For Commodity Regulatory Statements, you can select Daily or Custom Date Range. Data is available from
5/29/2015 forward.
4. If you have a multiple account structure, selected more than one account in the Account Selector, and want to
view a consolidated statement, select the Consolidate Selected check box. This check box ONLY appears if you
selected more than one account in the Account Selector (or if you selected one or more accounts in a Household
in the selector). You can also generate statements for all accounts in a single statement (multiple statements are
joined together in a single statement) if you select your own master account in the Account Selector and then
select the Concatenate All check box.
Advisors, Money Managers and Brokers and master account users with reporting access rights who select their own mas-
ter account in the Account Selector have access to client-only consolidated and concatenated statements. Select Con-
solidated (Clients-Only) to generate activity data for all clients combined into a single statement, or Concatenate All
(Clients-Only) to generate statements for all client accounts in a single statement (multiple client statements are joined
together in a single statement).

5. In the Format list, select either HTML/WEB, PDF, CSV or Excel (Legacy), depending on how you want to view
the statement. For our clients who want a format compatible with Microsoft Excel, we recommend selecting CVS;
however, we will continue to make the Excel (Legacy) format available.
6. In the Language list, select your desired language.
7. Click View to generate the activity statement.
If you selected PDF as the Format, you will be prompted to open the generated report or save it to your computer.

8. You can expand and collapse each section of the statement individually. Click the slate blue section heading bar
to expand a section, and click it again to collapse it.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 58

Chapter 3 Creating Customized Statements

Creating Customized Statements

We let you create and save customized statements that enable you to exclude unnecessary information from activity state-
ments. Customized statements let you select only those sections that you want to include in your activity statement, as
well as additional statement options. If you want your customized statements delivered by email or FTP on a daily or
monthly basis, you can also select delivery settings to be saved with the statement.

To create a customized statement

1. Click Reports > Activity > Statements.

The Statements page appears by default.

2. Click the Customize Your Statements bar to expand that section.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 59

Chapter 3 Creating Customized Statements

3. In the Create New/Select to Edit list, select Create New, then enter a name for the statement in the Statement
Name field, or select one of the default statements as the basis for your customized statement (Default, MTM Sum-
mary, Realized Summary or Multi-Account Summary).
o You can also edit an existing statement and save it under a new name. To edit an existing customized state-
ments, select it from the Create New/Select to Edit list.
4. Select the check box next to each section you want to include in an activity statement. Select ALL to include all
sections in your customized statement.
5. In Optional Sections, select the check box next to each section you want to include in your statement.
6. In Section Configurations, select the check box next to each option you want to apply to your statement.

7. In the Profit and Loss list, select the profit and loss format for the statement. Select MTM and Realized P/L, Real-
ized P/L Only, MTM Only, or None.
8. Select one of the following from the Statement Type list:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 60

Chapter 3 Creating Customized Statements

o If you are an Executions Services customer, select either Activity Statement or Execution Settlement.

Execution Settlements show activity by settlement date instead of trade date. If you select Execution Set-
tlement, filter the settlement by broker name or broker account using the fields provided.
o If you are a Prime Services customer,select Activity Statement, Settlement or Projected Settlement. Prime Set-
tlements show activity by settlement date; Projected Prime Settlements show activity by projected settlement
date.
o If you want to view your statements on your mobile device, in the Statement Type list, select Mobile
Summary. The Mobile Summary is a scaled-down statement designed to be viewed on a mobile device.
12. In the Customize Statements Delivery Settings section, specify additional information for customized activity state-
ment that you want to be sent via email. Enter the following information for customized statements that will be
delivered via email:
l Account: Select account ID, ALL or CONSOLIDATED. Select ALL to apply the statement to the master account
and all sub accounts (or linked accounts). A separate email will be sent for each account. (If you select FTP on the
Delivery Settings page in Report Management, all files will be delivered to the FTP site, but the directory will be
appended with the report date for organizational purposes.)

Although email and FTP delivery methods are available, we recommend that Advisors and Brokers choose FTP as
their delivery method for customized statements with ALL accounts selected. Advisors and Brokers who select
email as the delivery method for customized statements with ALL accounts selected, you will get an emailed state-
ments for each client or sub account.
l Activity Period: Select Daily or Monthly.
l Format: Select HTML/WEB, PDF or Excel.
l Language: Select your language from the list.

13. Click Save to save your statement template.

Your customized statement will now appear in the Available Statements drop-down in the View Statements sec-
tion of the page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 61

Chapter 3 Customized Statements Profit and Loss Selection

Customized Statements Profit and Loss Selection

When you create a customized statement, you can select one of the following Profit and Loss options:

l MTM and Realized P/L

l Realized P/L Only
l MTM Only
l None
Your selection affects which sections and which columns appear in certain sections in your statement. Note that default
statements use the MTM and Realized P/L Profit and Loss setting.

The following figure shows how your profit and loss selection affects customized Activity Statements.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 62

 Chapter 3 Third-Party Downloads

Third-Party Downloads
The Activity Downloads page lets you download daily and monthly activity statements into any one of the following
software:

l Microsoft Word
l Microsoft Money
l Quicken
l Tradelog
l GainsKeeper
l Captools (Legacy)

In addition, the following downloads are available upon request:

l Daily Captools Downloads - Daily Captools downloads are available for customers upon request. Note that
Captools downloads are not available to Non-Disclosed Broker Clients. If you request Daily Captools Down-
loads, the Activity Downloads page will contain an additional section for Daily Captools Downloads.
l Daily PortfolioCenter®/MorningstarDownloads for Advisors (for advisor accounts only).

PortfolioCenter is a product of Schwab Performance Technologies, a subsidiary of The Charles Schwab Corporation.

Note: If you are downloading your statements for use in a proprietary program that requires a set format,
use Activity Flex Queries instead of Activity Downloads.

Who can access the Activity Downloads page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 63

Chapter 3 Third-Party Downloads

l Fund
l Administrator who is subscribed (linked) to a client account.

To download activity statements

1. Click Reports > Activity > Downloads.
If you have a multiple account structure such as an institution account or multiple linked accounts, use the Account
Selector at the top of the page to select an account on which to report. To download a statement for a closed account,
select the Include Closed Accounts check box, and then select the closed account.

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

2. Make the following selections:

l In the Date fields, select the Period (Daily, Monthly or Custom Date Range) and a Date. For Custom Date Range,
select the From and To dates, which define the period covered by the statement you want to download. Note that
downloads to Quicken (.OFX format) can go back 90 days.
l Select a download format from the Format drop-down. Advisors can download to PortfolioCenter/Morningstar;
they can download all six files in a single zip file.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 64

Chapter 3 Third-Party Downloads

3. Click Download.
A new browser window opens, informing you that the report was generated successfully.
4. Open the generated report with the appropriate application, or download the report to your computer.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 65

Chapter 3 If You are Downloading a Zip File Using Internet Explorer 7 or
8

If You are Downloading a Zip File Using Internet Explorer 7 or 8

If you are downloading a Zip file using Internet Explorer 7 or 8, verify that automatic prompting for file downloads is
enabled.

To verify that automatic prompting for file downloads is enabled

1. In Internet Explorer, select Internet Options from the Tools menu.
2. In the Internet Options dialog box, select the Security tab.
3. Click the Custom Level... button.
4. Scroll down to the Downloads section.
5. Automatic prompting for file downloads should be enabled.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 66

Chapter 3 Activity Flex Queries

Activity Flex Queries

The Activity Flex Queries page lets you create highly customized report templates for activity statements. Flex queries
let you specify exactly which fields you want to view in your Activity Statement, the time period you want the report to
cover, the order in which you want the fields to display, and the display format, TEXT or XML, in which you want to
view your report.

You can create multiple Flex Queries with different fields for each statement. All of your Flex Queries are stored in
Account Management, and can be easily run from the Activity Flex Queries page. An activity Flex Query is different
from a customized activity statement in that you can customize a Flex Query at the field level, allowing you to include
and exclude detailed field information. Customized statements only let you include and exclude sections.

The Flex Queries page lets you create a new Flex Query or edit an existing Flex Query. Existing Flex Queries are dis-
played in the Saved Flex Queries section of the page. You can also edit default Flex Queries for Trades and Positions,
then use those queries as the basis for your own Flex Queries.

Saved Flex Queries are available for the four previous calendar years and from the start of the current calendar year.

Who can access the Flex Queries page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 67

Chapter 3 Activity Flex Queries

To create an activity Flex Query

1. Click Reports > Activity > Flex Queries.

2. Do any of the following:

o To create a new query, click Create New Flex Query.
o To run an existing query, click Run for the query.
o To edit an existing query, click Edit for the query, then make your changes to the query and click Save
Query.
o To delete an existing query, click Delete.
o To add the Default Trades query, click Create Default Trades Query.
o To add the Default Positions query, click Create Default Positions Query.

Note that when you add a default query to the list, the button disappears from the page. If you delete a default
query from the list, the button re-appears.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 68

Chapter 3 Activity Flex Queries

3. If you clicked Create New Flex Query, a new page appears on which you create your new Flex Query.
If you have a multiple account structure such as an institution account or multiple linked accounts, use the Account
Selector at the top of the page to select one or more accounts on which to report. To include activity from accounts that
you have recently closed, select the Include Closed Accounts check box. If you choose to include closed accounts, those
accounts appear in the Account Selector.

4. Make selections and set options in the General Configuration and Date Configuration sections.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 69

Chapter 3 Activity Flex Queries

o In the Query Name field, enter the name of the Flex Query.
o In the Output Format list, select Text or XML. If you select Text, you must also choose a delimiting character
(comma, pipe or tab character), and optionally choose to include header and trailer records; column headers;
and section code and line descriptors.
o Select other options as required. Note that the Consolidated and All options are only available when the mas-
ter account has been selected in the Account Selector.
o In the Date Configuration section, select the period for the Flex Query, or enter a range of dates in the From
Date and To Date fields. The following periods are available:

Last Business Day

Last Month
Last 30 Calendar Days
Last 365 Calendar Days
Month to Date
Year to Date
Last Business Week (Mon-Fri)
Last N Calendar Days (when you select this option, you must then select a number from 1 to 365 from a drop-
down)
o In the Date Configuration section, select a Date Format, Time Format and Date/Time Separator:

Available date formats are:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 70

Chapter 3 Activity Flex Queries

yyyyMMdd (default)
yyyy-MM-dd
MM/dd/yyyy
MM/dd/yy
dd/MM/yyyy
dd/MM/yy
dd-MMM-yy

Available time formats are:

HHmmss (default)
HH:mm:ss

Available date/time separators are:

; (semi-colon, the default)

, (comma)
'' (single-spaced)
No separator
o Advisors, Money Managers and Brokers and master account users with reporting access rights who select their
own master account in the Account Selector have access to client-only consolidated and concatenated state-
ments. Select Consolidated (Clients-Only) to generate activity data for all clients combined into a single state-
ment, or Concatenate All (Clients-Only) to generate statements for all client accounts in a single statement
(multiple client statements are joined together in a single statement).
5. Advisors who have created models in Trader Workstation can include model information in their Activity Flex
Queries. In the Models section of the page, select one of these options:
l All - Include data for all models joined together. If you select this option, accounts that do not have models will
also be included.
l Consolidated - Include consolidated data for all models and a single account.
l Select a Model - Select this check box to view available models in the Model drop-down list. Select a model
from the drop-down to view a statement for a single model. Only models that have been created in Trader Work-
station for the selected account(s) will appear. If you select the Independent model, accounts that do not have
models will also be included.
6. To specify which fields in which sections to include, click each section to expand it, then select the fields to
include in the Flex Query in each section by highlighting the fields in the Fields Available list, then using the
green right arrow to move the fields to the Fields Included list. Use the green left arrow to move fields from the
Fields Included list (and exclude the fields from the report).

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 71

Chapter 3 Batch Reports

7. Click Save Query.

The saved query will now appear in the list of saved queries on the Activity Flex Queries page.

Batch Reports
Requests for Activity Statements and Activity Flex Queries with a large amount of activity are placed in a queue for
batch processing. Specifically, any Activity Statement or Activity Flex Query request that includes over 20,000 activities
(activities are mostly trades but can also include transfers, dividend payments, corporate actions, etc.) or over 250
accounts will be automatically submitted for batch processing. If you try to view one of these reports, you will receive a
message indicating that it has been submitted for batch processing.

We no longer batch-process statements that are larger than 100 MB due to problems that this causes on our web
server. You can request that your account be configured for FTP delivery of such statements by contacting us at
reportingintegration@interactivebrokers.com.

You can view the status of these requests on the Batch Reports page. Activity Statements and Activity Flex Queries lis-
ted on the Batch Reports page have one of the following statuses:

l Queued - The report has been placed in the queue and will be generated as soon as possible.
l In Progress - The report is currently being generated.
l Completed - The report has been generated and can be viewed/downloaded. Completed batch reports are avail-
able for seven days.
l Failed - The report generation failed.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 72

Chapter 3 Models

To view the status of reports queued for batch processing

1. Click Reports > Activity > Batch Reports.
2. Any report with a status of Completed can be viewed and/or downloaded immediately. Click the View link to
view an HTML or PDF report or download a PDF report or Flex Query.
3. If a batch report has a status of Failed, try running the report again. If it fails again, contact Client Services.
4. Click the Refresh link in the lower right corner of the page to refresh the list of available batch reports.

Models
Models provide an efficient method for advisors to manage multiple trading strategies for their clients without requiring
them to open multiple accounts. Client investments are allocated among instruments in the Model based on the Model's
allocation ratios as defined by the advisor.

Advisors and their clients can view Model Statements in Account Management on the Models page, provided models
have been created in Trader Workstation. Model Statements include additional information about the selected model in
the Account Information section.

Who can access the Models page?

You can access this page if you are a Financial Advisor, a Money Manager or an Advisor Client, or a Fund Investment
Manager or a Fund AND models have been created and saved in your trading platform.

To view a Model statement

1. Click Reports > Activity > Models.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 73

Chapter 3 Models

If you have a multiple account structure such as an institution account or multiple linked accounts, use the Account
Selector at the top of the page to select an account on which to report. To view a model statement for a closed account,
select the Include Closed Accounts check box, and then select the closed account.

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

2. In the Period field, select Daily, Custom Date Range or Monthly.

3. In the Date field, select a date or a month, depending on your Period selection. If you selected Custom Date
Range, enter a From and a To date.
4. In the Format field, select either HTML/WEB or PDF, depending on how you want to view the statement.
5. In the Language field, select your desired language.
6. Select options:
l Consolidated - View a consolidated Model Statement for all models and a single account.
l Concatenate All - View a Model Statement that shows data for all models joined together in a single statement.
l Summary - View a Model Summary statement that summarizes data for all models for one or more accounts.
l Select a Model - Select this check box to view available models in the Model drop-down list. Select a model
from the drop-down to view a statement for a single model. Only models that have been created in Trader Work-
station for the selected account(s) will appear.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 74

Chapter 3 Models

7. Click View to generate the statement.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 75

Chapter 3 Quarterly Summaries

Quarterly Summaries
The Quarterly Summaries page lets advisor clients generate a Brokerage Account Quarterly Activity Summary, which is a
simplified activity statement for quarterly periods. Advisor Masters can view quarterly summaries for their clients. Each
quarter you will receive a hard-copy of the summary by mail. Using the form on this page, you can download the sum-
mary in PDF format.

There are two versions of the Quarterly Advisor Client Activity Summary - a default version and a version for Advisors
who have been granted additional advisor authorizations ("full-service" advisors).

The Quarterly Summary PDF includes the following sections:

l Account Information
l Net Asset Value including Change in NAV
l Open Positions
l Trades
l Deposits and Withdrawals (for Advisors who have been granted additional advisor authorizations only)
l Other Information
l Codes

Who can access the Quarterly Summaries page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User Individual (view only)

l Advisor Master User Organization (view only)
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization

To view a quarterly summary

1. Click Reports > Activity > Quarterly Summaries.
If you are an Advisor Master User, use the Account Selector at the top of the page to select an account on which to
report.

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

2. In the Date field, select the fiscal quarter.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 76

Chapter 3 Quarterly Summaries

3. Click View to generate the summary.

The quarterly summary is generated and displayed as a PDF file in a new browser window.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 77

Chapter 3 Trade Confirmations

Trade Confirmations
The Trade Confirmations menu includes the following tabbed pages:

l Reports - View trade confirmation reports.

l Trade Allocations - View pre-trade and post-trade allocation details.
l Flex Queries - Create highly customized trade confirmation reports in text or XML format.

Real-time trade confirmations are generated for all executions. You can view a trade confirmations report, which lists
trade confirmations separately by asset class.

Trade confirmations are available for the four previous calendar years and from the start of the current calendar year.

Who can access the Trade Confirmations page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund
and you have been granted Reporting access rights.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 78

Chapter 3 Trade Confirmation Reports

Trade Confirmation Reports

To generate a trade confirmation report
1. Click Reports > Trade Confirmations > Reports.
If you have a multiple account structure such as an institution account or multiple linked accounts, use the Account
Selector at the top of the page to select an account on which to report. To generate a Trade Confirmation report for a
closed account, select the Include Closed Accounts check box, and then select the closed account.

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

2. Make the following selections:

l In the Date fields, select the dates for the report.
l In the Format field, select HTML/WEB or PDF.
l In the Language list, select your desired language.

Advisors, Money Managers and Brokers and master account users with reporting access rights who select their own mas-
ter account in the Account Selector have access to client-only consolidated and concatenated reports. Select Con-
solidated (Clients-Only) to generate trade confirmations for all clients combined into a single report, or Concatenate All
(Clients-Only) to generate statements for all client accounts in a single report (multiple client reports are joined together
in a single report).

3. Click View to generate the report.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 79

Chapter 3 Trade Confirmation Reports

If you selected PDF as the Format, you will be prompted to open the generated report or save it to your computer.

Summary rows are marked with a plus sign. Click a summary row to display detail rows; click the summary row again to
close the detail rows.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 80

Chapter 3 Trade Allocations

Trade Allocations
The Trade Allocation Report provides pre-trade and post-trade allocation details. Post-trade allocations should be avail-
able by 6:15 PM Eastern time for the current trading day.

Who can access the Trade Allocations page?

You can access this page if you are a Proprietary Trading Group Master or Sub Account and subscribe to our IBEx-
ecution Service.

To run the Trade Allocations report

1. Click Reports > Trade Confirmations > Trade Allocations.

2. On the Trade Confirmations screen, make the following selections:

l In the Account ID list, select the account for which you want to generate the report.
If you are a Master User, the Account list will not appear. Instead, use the Account Selector to select an account. The
most recent account you selected is the current account when you come to this page.You can switch accounts after you
select an account by clicking the Account Selector tab, then selecting a different account.

l In the From and To Date fields, select the dates for the report.
l To filter the report by a specific broker name, select a broker name in the Broker Name field. Select All to include
all broker names in the report.
l To filter the report by a specific broker account, select All in the Broker Name field and select a specific broker
account in the Broker Account field. Select All to include all broker accounts in the report.
3. Click View to generate the report.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 81

Chapter 3 Trade Confirmation Flex Queries

Trade Confirmation Flex Queries

The Trade Confirms Flex page lets you create multiple, customized report templates for trade confirmations. A trade con-
firmation Flex Query lets you specify the exact fields you want to view in your report, the time period you want the
report to cover, the order in which you want the fields to appear in the report, and the display format for the report.

You can create multiple Flex Queries with different fields for each query. All of your Flex queries are stored in Account
Management. You can also add a default Flex Query, then use it as the basis for your own by editing it.

The Flex Queries page lets you create a new flex query or edit an existing Flex Query. Existing Flex Queries are dis-
played in the Saved Flex Queries section of the page. You can also edit the default Flex Query to use it as the basis for
your own Flex Query.

Saved Flex Queries are available for the four previous calendar years and from the start of the current calendar year.

Who can access the Trade Confirmation Flex Queries page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund
and you have been granted Reporting access rights.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 82

Chapter 3 Trade Confirmation Flex Queries

To create a trade confirmation flex query

1. Click Reports > Trade Confirmations > Flex Queries.

2. Do any of the following:

l To create a new query, click Create New Flex Query.
l To run an existing query, click Run for the query.
l To edit an existing query, click Edit for the query, then make your changes to the query and click Save Query.
l To delete an existing query, click Delete.
l To add the Default Trade Confirmation Flex Query, click Create Default Flex Query.

Note that when you add a default query to the list, the button disappears from the page. If you delete a default
query from the list, the button re-appears.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 83

Chapter 3 Trade Confirmation Flex Queries

3. If you clicked Create New Flex Query, a new page appears on which you create your new Flex Query.
If you have a multiple account structure such as an institution account or multiple linked accounts, use the Account
Selector at the top of the page to select one or more accounts on which to report. To include accounts that you have
recently closed, select the Include Closed Accounts check box. If you choose to include closed accounts, those accounts
appear in the Account Selector.

4. Make selections and set options in the Configuration sections as follows:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 84

Chapter 3 Trade Confirmation Flex Queries

l In the Query Name field, enter the name of the flex query.
l In the Output Format list, select Text or XML. If you select Text, you must also choose a delimiting character
(comma, pipe or tab character), and optionally choose to include header and trailer records; column headers; and
section code and line descriptors.
l Select other options as required. Note that the Consolidated and All options are only available when the master
account has been selected in the Account Selector.
l In the Date Configuration section, select the period for the Flex Query, or enter a range of dates in the From Date
and To Date fields. The following periods are available:
Today
Last Business Day
Last Month

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 85

Chapter 3 Trade Confirmation Flex Queries

Last 30 Calendar Days

Last 365 Calendar Days
Month to Date
Year to Date
Last Business Week (Mon-Fri)
Last N Calendar Days (when you select this option, you must then select a number from 1 to 365 from a drop-
down)
l In the Date Configuration section, select a Date Format, Time Format and Date/Time Separator:
Available date formats are:
yyyyMMdd (default)
yyyy-MM-dd
MM/dd/yyyy
MM/dd/yy
dd/MM/yyyy
dd/MM/yy
dd-MMM-yy
Available time formats are:
HHmmss (default)
HH:mm:ss
Available date/time separators are:
; (semi-colon, the default)
, (comma)
'' (single-spaced)
No separator
l Advisors, Money Managers and Brokers and master account users with reporting access rights who select their
own master account in the Account Selector have access to client-only consolidated and concatenated reports.
Select Consolidated (Clients-Only) to generate trade confirmations for all clients combined into a single report, or
Concatenate All (Clients-Only) to generate statements for all client accounts in a single report (multiple client
reports are joined together in a single report).
5. In the Trade Confirmation Configuration section, Select the fields to include in the Flex Query in by highlighting
the fields in the Fields Available list, then using the green right arrow to move the fields to the Fields Included
list. Use the green left arrow to move fields from the Fields Included list (and exclude the fields from the report).
6. In the Trade Confirmation Configuration section, select your desired level of detail: Symbol Summary, Order or
Execution. Execution is the default setting.
7. Click Save Query.
The saved query will now appear in the list of saved queries on the Trade Confirmation Flex Queries page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 86

Chapter 3 PortfolioAnalyst

PortfolioAnalyst
PortfolioAnalyst allows you to evaluate the performance of your portfolio by creating and saving reports based on a set
of measurement criteria and optionally comparing their data to selected industry benchmarks. Once you create and save
reports, you can run, edit or delete them.

Institutional account Master users (Advisor Masters, Broker Masters, Fund Investment Managers and Proprietary Trading
Group Masters) can also create and save synopses, which are text-based cover letters that you can assign to Port-
folioAnalyst reports.

PortfolioAnalyst lets you:

l Create Detailed Reports - Select any combination of reports for a variety of performance analysis. Save your
reports in PDF or comma-separated values (CSV) format.
l Create Snapshot PDF reports - One-page summaries of an account's return, NAV, asset allocation and distribution
of returns.
l View your portfolios of external investment accounts

You can also create your own custom benchmarks and select them when creating a Snapshot or Detailed report.

Who can access the PortfolioAnalyst page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Broker Non-Disclosed Client User
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund
and you have been granted Reporting access rights.

Here is the PortfolioAnalyst main page:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 87

Chapter 3 PortfolioAnalyst

PortfolioAnalyst currently includes the ability to view your portfolios and positions held at other institutions.

Institution accounts willl see an extra tabbed page for creating and managing synopses).

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 88

Chapter 3 Snapshot PDF Reports

Snapshot PDF Reports

The Snapshot is a one-page report that displays graphs and charts representing an account's return, Net Asset Value
(NAV), asset allocation and distribution of returns. The Snapshot gives you a downloadable and printable summary of an
account’s performance and is suitable for presentation to advisor and broker clients. Optionally, you can include a bench-
mark comparison to compare your own performance against an industry standard benchmark or your own custom bench-
mark.

To create and run a Snapshot PDF report in PortfolioAnalyst

1. Click Reports > PortfolioAnalyst.
PortfolioAnalyst includes default Snapshot PDF reports. These are displayed on the Default Reports tab, which appears
when you first open PortfolioAnalyst. Run these reports or any other in the list by clicking the PDF icon in the Snapshot
column of the Default Reports tab.

2. Click the Custom Reports tab. This tab lists all of your previously created and saved custom PortfolioAnalyst
reports.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 89

Chapter 3 Snapshot PDF Reports

3. Click CREATE REPORT.

4. If you are a Master account user responsible for client or sub accounts or you have multiple linked accounts,
select one or more accounts in the Account Selector.

The report settings appear.

5. Type the name of the new report in the Name field.

6. If you are a Master account user, the Assign Synopsis button appears. Optionally, assign previously created syn-
opses to the PortfolioAnalyst report:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 90

Chapter 3 Snapshot PDF Reports

l Click Assign Synopsis.

l In the Assign Synopsis dialog, select a previously-saved synopsis, select the accounts whose reports to which you
want to attach the synopsis, then click Assign. Click Apply to apply your selections.
7. Select a time period:
l Select Daily, Monthly, Quarterly, Previous Month, Previous Quarter, Month To Date, Year To Date or Since
Inception (since the inception of your account), depending on how you want to view the data.
l If you selected a daily time period, select a starting and ending date (up to a maximum of 60 days) using the cal-
endar popoup. If you selected a monthly time period, select a starting and ending month. If you selected a
quarterly time period, select a starting and ending quarter. Click the icons next to the Starting Period and Ending
Period fields to pick dates from a calendar.

Analysis results include data available from January 2008 to the present.
8. For Performance Measure, select Time Weighted Return or Money-Weighted Return.
l Time-Weighted Return (TWR):Select this metric to view the percent return produced over time independent of
contributions or withdrawals. TWR eliminates the impact of the timing of fund cash flows and isolates the portion
of a portfolio's return that is attributable solely to the manager's actions. TWR is typically used for public fund
managers because they normally do not control cash flowing into or out of their funds.
l Money-Weighted Return (MWR): Select this metric to view the performance of your portfolio during the spe-
cified report period. MWR is calculated using the Modified Deitz method and is influenced by the time of
decisions to contribute or withdraw funds, as well as the decisions made by the portfolio manager of a fund.
9. Select Snapshot as the Report Type.
10. Choose how you want your account number to appear on your report in the Account Number Display section:
l Use Account Number: Select this option to include your Account ID on your report.
l Use Account Alias: Select this option to include your Account Alias on your report if you want to hide the
actual Account ID.
11. If you are an Advisor, Money Manager, Broker, Proprietary Trading Group STL Account Master or you have mul-
tiple linked accounts and you have selected multiple accounts in the Account Selector, you have the option of cre-
ated a consolidated Snapshot report for all of the selected accounts.
l Click the Consolidate check box to create create a consolidated Snapshot report, which includes a single set of
data from all of the accounts that you have selected.
l If you select only one account in the Account Selector, click the Consolidate All check box to create a con-
solidated report which includes a single set of data from all accounts.
12. Optionally, you can include a benchmark comparison in your Snapshot report. When you select the Snapshot
radio button, the Select Benchmarks section appears.
Select up to three benchmarks from the list of Available benchmarks (including your own custom benchmarks) then click
the right arrow button to move them into the Selected list. Select one or more benchmarks using the Ctrl+click keyboard
combination. Move benchmarks out of the Selected list by selecting them then clicking the left arrow button.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 91

Chapter 3 Snapshot PDF Reports

13. Click SAVE to save the report. Once you save a report, it will appear in the list of saved PDF reports.
14. Click CANCEL to cancel the report.
15. View the report by clicking the Run icon in the list of saved reports. Your report appears in a new window.
If there is a negative Net Asset Value during the time period you select for your Snapshot report, the report will not be
generated.

The Snapshot includes the following sections:

l Account Information: Displays your account name and number, account alias if you have one, your base cur-
rency, account type and the specified time period.
l Return Over Time: Displays a line chart showing the account's return percentage over the specified time period.
l Net Asset Value: Displays a bar chart showing the account's Net Asset Value over the specified time period.
l Distribution of Returns: Displays a bar chart showing the range of return percentage for each day, month or
quarter in the specified time period and the number of times the return performance fell within that range for the
entire period.
l Key Statistics: Displays several statistics for the specified time period, including beginning and ending NAV,
return percentages (depending on your selected time period), the best return and the worst return.
l Asset Allocation: Displays two pie charts, one representing the account's asset allocation at the beginning of the
specified time period and one representing the account's asset allocation at the end of the specified time period.

The following example shows a typical Snapshot report.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 92

Chapter 3 Snapshot PDF Reports

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 93

Chapter 3 Detailed PDF Reports

Detailed PDF Reports

Detailed PDF reports let you select any combination of reports, including benchmark comparisons, for a variety of per-
formance analyses. You can also create your own custom benchmarks.

To create and run a Detailed report in PortfolioAnalyst

1. Click Reports > PortfolioAnalyst.
PortfolioAnalyst includes default PDF and CSV-formatted Detailed reports. These are displayed on the Default Reports
tab, which appears when you first open PortfolioAnalyst. Run these reports or any other in the list by clicking the PDF
or CSV icons in the Detailed column of the Default Reports tab.

2. Click the Custom Reports tab. This tab lists all of your previously created and saved custom PortfolioAnalyst
reports.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 94

Chapter 3 Detailed PDF Reports

3. Click Create Report.

4. If you are a Master account user responsible for client or sub accounts or you have multiple linked accounts,
select one or more accounts in the Account Selector.

The report settings appear.

5. Type the name of the new report in the Name field.

6. If you are a Master account user, the Assign Synopsis button appears. Optionally, assign previously created syn-
opses to the PortfolioAnalyst report:
l Click Assign Synopsis.
l In the Assign Synopsis dialog, select a previously-saved synopsis, select the accounts whose reports to which you
want to attach the synopsis, then click Assign. Click Apply to apply your selections.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 95

Chapter 3 Detailed PDF Reports

7. Select a time period:

a. Select Daily, Monthly, Quarterly, Previous Month, Previous Quarter, Month To Date, Year To Date or Since
Inception (since the inception of your account), depending on how you want to view the data.
b. If you selected a daily time period, select a starting and ending date (up to a maximum of 60 days) using the cal-
endar popup. If you selected a monthly time period, select a starting and ending month. If you selected a quarterly
time period, select a starting and ending quarter. Click the icons next to the Starting Period and Ending Period
fields to pick dates from a calendar.

Analysis results include data available from January 2009 to the present.
8. Select Detailed as the Report Type.
9. Select the output format for the report (CSV or PDF).
10. For Performance Measure, Time-Weighted Return (TWR) is already selected for you, select Time Weighted
Return or Money-Weighted Return.
l Money-Weighted Return (MWR): Select this metric to view the performance of your portfolio during the spe-
cified report period. MWR is calculated using the Modified Deitz method and is influenced by the time of
decisions to contribute or withdraw funds, as well as the decisions made by the portfolio manager of a fund.
l Time-Weighted Return (TWR): Select this metric to view the percent return produced over time independent of
contributions or withdrawals. TWR eliminates the impact of the timing of fund cash flows and isolates the portion
of a portfolio's return that is attributable solely to the manager's actions. TWR is typically used for public fund
managers because they normally do not control cash flowing into or out of their funds.
11. Choose how you want your account number to appear on your report:
l Use Account Number: Select this option to include your Account ID on your report.
l Use Account Alias: Select this option to include your Account Alias on your report if you want to hide the
actual Account ID.
12. Optionally, you can include cover page and table of contents with your Detailed PDF report by checking the
appropriate Optional Pages check boxes.
13. If you are an Advisor, Money Manager, Broker, Proprietary Trading Group STL Account Master or you have mul-
tiple linked accounts and you have selected multiple accounts in the Account Selector, you have the option of cre-
ated a consolidated Snapshot report for all of the selected accounts.
l Click the Consolidate check box to create create a consolidated Detailed report, which includes a single set of
data from all of the accounts that you have selected.
l If you select only one account in the Account Selector, click the Consolidate All check box to create a con-
solidated report which includes a single set of data from all accounts.
If you have selected the Consolidate or Consolidate All check box, you can select the Breakdown of Accounts report,
which provides key account values for the accounts that you have chosen to consolidate.

14. Detailed PDF reports can contain the following distinct reports for each selected account. Click the check box to
include a report. Note that this section is not available in Snapshot reports.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 96

Chapter 3 Detailed PDF Reports

See Available Reports in Detailed PDF Reports for descriptions of these reports.

15. If you select any of the benchmark reports, the Select Benchmarks section appears.
Select up to three benchmarks from the list of Available benchmarks (including your own custom benchmarks) then click
the right arrow button to move them into the Selected list. Select one or more benchmarks using the Ctrl+click keyboard
combination. Move benchmarks out of the Selected list by selecting them then clicking the left arrow button.

The same set of benchmarks will apply to all the benchmark reports that you select.

16. Click Save to save the report. Once you save a report, it will appear in the list of saved reports.
17. View the report by clicking the Run icon in the list of saved reports. Your report appears in a new window. For
CSV-formatted reports, you will be prompted to save the report to your computer, where you can open the file in
a program like Microsoft Excel.
If there is a negative Net Asset Value during the time period you select for your Detailed report, the report will not be
generated.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 97

Chapter 3 Available Reports in Detailed PDF Reports

Available Reports in Detailed PDF Reports

When create a Detailed PDF Report, you can select any of the following reports to include in the final PDF report:

Report Description
Breakdown of Accounts Available only to institution accounts and multiple linked accounts
who have selected multiple accounts and the Consolidate option,
this report shows the Beginning and Ending NAV, Return, and the
total amounts of Deposits, Withdrawals, Dividends, Interest and
Fees for each selected account.

Account Overview Displays general settings, including account name and number,
account alias, base currency and the specified time period. It also dis-
plays the performance of your portfolio for the specified time period,
including beginning and ending Net Asset Value (NAV) and return per-
centage based on your selected time period and performance meas-
urement (TWR or MWR).

A color-coded bar chart plots NAV over time, and a color-coded line
chart shows the return percentage (TWR or MWR) over the same
time scale. Additional performance statistics are also included in the
Overview section.

Open Position Summary Shows all current open positions in the selected account(s). The
report output shows two pie charts: the five long open positions that
have the highest market value, and the five short positions with the
highest market value.

The output also displays a table of all open positions sorted by

product, then currency, then symbol. The table includes the quantity,
closing price, current market value and the percent of your total Net
Asset Value for that position.

If you select this report but there are no open positions during the spe-
cified time period, the report will be omitted from your results.

Allocation by Asset Class Displays a color-coded bar chart and table that illustrates the NAV of
all assets in your portfolio for each day, month or quarter in the spe-
cified time period.

If you select this report but there are no open positions during the spe-
cified time period, the report will be omitted from your results.

Allocation by Sector Displays a color-coded bar chart and table that illustrates the NAV of
stocks and options in your portfolio by sector for each day, month or
quarter in the specified time period.

If you select this report but there are no open positions during the spe-
cified period, the report will be omitted from your results.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 98

Chapter 3 Available Reports in Detailed PDF Reports

Report Description
Allocation by Region Displays color-coded pie charts and accompanying tables. One pair
of pie charts shows the percentage and amount of the portfolio’s long
and short positions allocated to assets in those regions. The second
pair of pie charts shows the countries with the highest percentage
and amount of long and short position allocation to assets (Weight
%). The tables display the same data. If there are more than five coun-
tries to which positions are allocated, the additional countries appear
in the Other category.

Time Period Performance Stat- Shows the performance of your portfolio for a specified time period as
istics a line chart and a text summary. The line chart plots the return per-
centage for the selected performance measure (TWR or MWR) over
time. The text summary includes the beginning and ending NAV, the
return percentage (TWR or MWR) for the time period, the one- and
three-month return percentage (the three-month return only appears if
the time period is at least six months), and the best and worst return
percentage of the period.

Reports with a monthly time period display one- and three-month

returns. Reports with a daily time period display five- and ten-day
returns. Reports with a quarterly time period display one- and two-
quarter returns. The line chart and text summary are identical to those
in the Account Overview report.

Time Period Benchmark Com- Select up to three global industry benchmarks against which you
parison want to compare your performance results over a specified time
period. The report output displays a color-coded line chart comparing
the return percentage (TWR or MWR) of your portfolio over time with
that of the selected benchmarks. The line chart plots the return per-
centage for each day, month or quarter over the specified time period,
and also displays the average return percentage for the entire time
period.

Returns for ETFs and indices selected as benchmarks include

dividends.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 99

Chapter 3 Available Reports in Detailed PDF Reports

Report Description
Cumulative Performance Stat- Shows the cumulative performance of your portfolio over a specified
istics time period as a line chart and a text summary. The line chart plots
the return percentage for the selected performance measure (TWR or
MWR) over time. The text summary includes the beginning and end-
ing NAV, the return percentage (TWR or MWR) for the time period,
the one- and three-month return percentage (the three-month return
only appears if the time period is at least six months), and the best
and worst return percentage of the period.

Reports with a monthly time period display one- and three-month

returns. Reports with a daily time period display five- and ten-day
returns. Reports with a quarterly time period display one- and two-
quarter returns. The line chart and text summary are identical to those
in the Account Overview report.

Cumulative Benchmark Com- Select up to three global industry benchmarks against which you
parison want to compare cumulative performance results over a specified
time period.

The report output displays a color-coded line chart comparing the

cumulative return percentage (TWR or MWR) of your portfolio over
time with that of the selected benchmarks. The line chart plots the
cumulative return percentage over the specified time period, aggreg-
ating the return percentage for each successive day, month or quarter
in the time period.

Returns for ETFs and indices selected as benchmarks include

dividends.

Risk Measures Shows the current risk of your portfolio in a line chart and text sum-
mary. The line chart plots Value-Added Monthly Index (VAMI) over
the specified time period. VAMI is an index that tracks the monthly
performance of your portfolio based on a hypothetical initial $1000
investment.

The text summary shows a variety of risk measures, including Max

Drawdown, Peak-to-Valley Drawdown, Recover, Sharpe Ratio,
Sortino Ratio, Calmar Ratio, Standard Deviation, Downside Devi-
ation, Mean Return, Positive Periods and Negative Periods.

In addition, this report includes a Distribution of Returns bar chart

showing the range of return percentage for each day, month or quarter
in the specified time period and the number of times the return per-
formance fell within that range for the entire period.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 100

Chapter 3 Available Reports in Detailed PDF Reports

Report Description
Risk Measures Benchmark Com- Select up to three global industry benchmarks against which you
parison want to compare the current risk of your portfolio in a line chart and
text summary.

The line chart plots Value-Added Monthly Index (VAMI) over the spe-
cified time period for your portfolio and for your selected benchmarks.
VAMI is an index that tracks the monthly performance of your port-
folio based on a hypothetical initial $1000 investment.

The text summary shows a variety of risk measures for your portfolio
and for your selected benchmarks, including Max Drawdown, Peak-
to-Valley Drawdown, Recover, Sharpe Ratio, Sortino Ratio, Calmar
Ratio, Standard Deviation, Downside Deviation, Mean Return, Pos-
itive Periods and Negative Periods.

In addition, this report includes a Distribution of Returns bar chart

showing the range of return percentage for each day, month or quarter
in the specified time period and the number of times the return per-
formance fell within that range for the entire period.

Returns for ETFs and indices selected as benchmarks include

dividends.

Performance Attribution Shows how your asset allocation and selection of securities affects
your portfolio’s performance when compared to the performance of
the S&P 500 Index over a specified time period.

This report includes a summary table that shows how you out-
performed or underperformed the S&P 500, as well as two charts and
a scatter plot. For more information about this report, see Running a
Performance Attribution Report.

Performance by Asset Class Displays a color-coded bar chart that illustrates the cumulative con-
tribution to your portfolio's return by asset class for each day, month
or quarter in the specified time period. Each color-coded bar in the
chart represents the contribution of all asset classes to each day/-
month/quarter in the specified time period .The table shows the return
for each asset class for each day/month/quarter in the specified time
period.

Performance by Sector Displays a color-coded bar chart and table that illustrate the con-
tribution to your portfolio's return by sector for each day, month or
quarter in the specified time period. The bars in the bar chart are color-
coded by sector. The table shows the values depicted in the chart.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 101

Chapter 3 Available Reports in Detailed PDF Reports

Report Description
Performance by Symbol Displays four charts, a table and two heat maps representing the per-
formance of the symbols in your portfolio:

l Top Five Contributors - This chart displays the five symbols

with the highest contribution to your portfolio's return.
l Bottom Five Contributors - This chart displays the five symbols
with the lowest contribution to your portfolio's return.
l Contribution by Sector - This bar chart displays the con-
tribution of each sector to your portfolio's return.
l Contribution by Asset Class - This bar chart displays each the
contribution of each asset class to your portfolio's return.
l Table - Shows data for all open or closed symbols grouped by
asset class, including sector, Average Weight, Return, Con-
tribution to Return, and Unrealized and Realized P&L in dollar
amounts.
l Sector Composition Heat Map - This is a visual representation
of each sector's contribution to return. Each sector block shows
the contribution to return of each symbol in that sector. The lar-
ger the block, the larger the contribution to return.
l Portfolio Heat Map - This is a visual representation of the con-
tribution to return of each symbol in your portfolio. Green indic-
ates a positive return while red indicates a negative return.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 102

Chapter 3 Available Reports in Detailed PDF Reports

Report Description
Historical Performance Shows the history of your portfolio's performance in a variety of
charts and tables on three pages:

l The first page of the report includes two charts, a History bar
chart that shows the cumulative return percentage at different
points in time in the history of your account (MTD, QTD,
YTD, 1 year, 3 year, 5 year and since inception), a table that
displays the same data as the History chart, and a line chart that
shows the cumulative return percentages since the inception of
your account.
l The second page of the report includes two tables. One table
displays the monthly returns of your account for the past five
years (or since the inception of your account if it is less than
five years old). The second table shows the quarterly returns of
your account for the last five years (or since the inception of
your account if it is less than five years old).
l The third page of the report includes a bar chart and a table.
The bar chart displays the return percentage of your portfolio
for the year-to-date and for each of the last five years, or fewer
years if your account has been open for less than five years. The
table displays the data from the chart.
This report will only include 1 Year, 3 Year, 5 Year, Yearly, Quarterly
and Monthly returns if there is data available for the account for the
full period.

Historical Performance Bench- Select up to three global industry benchmarks against which you
mark Comparison want to compare the history of your portfolio's performance. This
report includes the same charts and tables as the Historical Per-
formance Report described above.

Returns for ETFs and indices selected as benchmarks include

dividends.

This report will only include 1 Year, 3 Year, 5 Year, Yearly, Quarterly
and Monthly returns if there is data available for the accoun-
t/benchmark for the full period.

Trade Summary Shows information for all trades made in the selected time period,
grouped by asset type and then by currency. Information includes
symbol; description; sector; and quantity, average price and pro-
ceeds from buys and sells.

Deposits and Withdrawals Shows the inbound and outbound cash and position transfers (includ-
ing cash deposit and withdrawals) in your account for a specified time
period. This report displays a table that includes the date, type,
description and amount of each inbound and outbound cash and pos-
ition transfer in the time period of the report.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 103

Chapter 3 Available Reports in Detailed PDF Reports

Report Description
Dividends The Dividends report shows all dividends that occurred in your
account during a specified time period, including dividend payments,
dividend cancellations, payments in lieu, short term and long term
capital gains. The report includes a table and a bar chart. Each line
item in the table includes the pay date, ex-date, symbol, note, quant-
ity, dividend per share, estimated forward dividend yield %, estimated
annual dividend and amount during the specified time period.

The report also includes a color coded stacked bar chart illustrating
the distributions of dividends during the time period.

Interest Details Lists all interest that occurred in your account during the specified
time period. Each line item in the table includes the date, description
and amount.

Corporate Actions Lists all corporate actions that occurred in your account during the
specified time period. Each line item includes the date, type, descrip-
tion and quantity. If you select this report and you have no corporate
actions in the specified time period, this report will not appear in your
Detailed Report.

Fee Summary Lists all fees that were charged to your account in the specified time
period. Each line item includes the date, description and amount of
the fee. The amounts are totaled at the bottom of the list.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 104

Chapter 3 Running a Performance Attribution Report

Running a Performance Attribution Report

The Performance Attribution Report helps you determine how your asset allocation and selection of securities affects
your portfolio’s performance when compared to the performance of the S&P 500 Index.

To run a Detailed PDF Report with the Performance Attribution Report, set up your Detailed PDF Report as you nor-
mally would, and select Performance Attribution in the Select Report(s) section of the page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 105

 Chapter 3 Understanding the Performance Attribution Report Table

Understanding the Performance Attribution Report Table

The first part of the Performance Attribution Report contains two tables:

l Weighting by Sector
l Returns and Attribution Effects by Sector

Weighting by Sector

This table shows how your portfolio is allocated among ten different sectors, cash and unclassified (anything not
included in one of the other sectors), and how that allocation compares to the S&P 500 Index. The table has three parts:
Beginning Weight, Ending Weight and Average Weight.

These tables show the beginning, ending and average weight for each sector in your portfolio and the S&P 500, and the
difference (positive or negative) between the two, represented by a percentage. You can use this table to see how under
or overweighted your portfolio is in each sector compared to the S&P 500.

Returns and Attribution Effects by Sector

This table lets you compare your returns in each of the ten sectors, plus cash and unclassified, to those of the S&P 500,
and view the attribution effects of your sector allocation and stock selection within each sector. Attribution effects let
you see why your returns in a particular sector were better or worse than those of the S&P 500.

The Period Return part of the table shows the absolute return percentage for each sector in your portfolio and for the S&P
500, and the difference (positive or negative) between the two.

The Contribution to Return part of the table measures the contribution of each sector to the overall return. The table also
illustrates the contribution of return for the account of each sector versus the S&P 500. The standard calculation used to
derive the Contribution to Return is:

Period Return x Beginning Weight = Contribution to Return

The attribution effect part of the table shows the attribution effects of sector allocation (Allocation column), the attri-
bution effects of security selection within each sector (Selection column), and the total attribution effects for the period
of the report. The attribution effect dissects the return and illustrates the reason for your outperformance or under-
performance.

The allocation effect determines whether the overweighting or underweighting of sectors relative to a benchmark con-
tributes positively or negatively to the the account’s return. Positive allocation occurs when the portfolio is overweighted
in a sector that outperforms the benchmark, and underweighted in a sector that underperforms the benchmark.

The selection effect measures the account’s ability to select securities within a sector relative to the benchmark. A pos-
itive selection will occur if the account made better stock selections within the sector compared to the benchmark.

Understanding the Performance Attribution Charts

The second page of the Performance Attribution Report shows two charts:

l Cumulative Attribution Effect - This line chart that plots return percentage over time and covers the entire time
period of the report.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 106

 Chapter 3 Understanding the Performance Attribution Scatter Plot

l Attribution Effect - This chart that shows the allocation, selection and total attribution effect percentages for each
period in the report.

Understanding the Performance Attribution Scatter Plot

The third page of the Performance Attribution Report displays a scatter plot that shows average weight versus percent
contribution return for each sector plus cash and unclassified. The scatter plots lets you see at a glance how your weight-
ing (sector allocation) and contribution to return for each sector compares to the S&P 500 for the period of the return.

There are four quadrants in the scatter plot; each sector is represented somewhere in the four quadrants based on its aver-
age weight and contribution to return (both values are taken from the tables on the first page of this report).

The following illustration shows how to interpret the scatter plot results; depending on the quadrant in which each sector
appears, its average weight percent and contribution to return percent either under- or overperformed the S&P 500 for the
period of the report.

Creating Custom Benchmarks

While PortfolioAnalyst provides a large number of standard industry benchmarks for you to choose in a Snapshot or
Detailed Report against which your portfolio's performance can be compared, there may be situations when a standard
benchmark does not provide and adequate basis for comparison. In these situations, you can create your own custom
benchmarks in PortfolioAnalyst.

About Custom Benchmarks

Custom benchmarks allow you to combine existing benchmarks already available in PortfolioAnalyst, the combined
weight of which must equal 100%. When you select benchmarks for a specific benchmark comparison report, you can
choose up to three existing benchmarks including any of your own custom benchmarks.

The return formula for a custom benchmark is calculated as:

Σ(Benchmark Weight X Benchmark Return)

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 107

Chapter 3 About Custom Benchmarks

Here is an example of a custom benchmark. In this example, a custom benchmark has been created by combining three
existing standard benchmarks:

Index Weight Return

Russell 2000 40% 20.00%

S&P 500 40% 10.00%

S&P US High Yield Corporate Bond 20% 6.00%

Based on the weights and returns of each component benchmark, the return for this custom benchmark is 13.20%, cal-
culated as:

(.40 x .20) + (.40 x .10) + (.20 x .06) = 13.20%

Observe the following guidelines when creating custom benchmarks:

l You cannot use an existing custom benchmark as part of a new custom benchmark. Only the standard benchmarks
can be used when creating a custom benchmark.
l You must include at least two standard benchmarks when creating a custom benchmark.
l You can add any number of standard benchmarks to a custom benchmarks, as long as the total weight equals
100%.
l Each standard benchmark included in a custom benchmark must have a weight between 0 and 100. No standard
benchmark in a custom benchmark can have a weight of either 0 or 100.
l You can add multiple standard benchmarks at a time to a custom benchmark.

To create a custom benchmark

1. Click Reports > PortfolioAnalyst.
2. Click the Custom Benchmarks tab. The Custom Benchmarks tab lists all of your saved custom benchmarks. If
you have not saved any custom benchmarks, the list will be empty. For example, the abbreviation for the
S&P 500 Index is SPX.

3. Click Create Custom Benchmark.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 108

Chapter 3 About Custom Benchmarks

4. Type the name of the custom benchmark in the Name field, and type an abbreviation in the Abbreviation field.
5. In the list of available benchmarks, select the first benchmark you would like to include, and then click Add
Benchmark. You can type the first few characters of the desired benchmark in the entry box above the list of
benchmarks or type the abbreviation of the desired benchmark. Note that you can select multiple standard bench-
marks at a time and add them all at once to your custom benchmark.
The benchmark is added to the Selected list.

6. Continue selecting and add benchmarks to your custom benchmark as required. Click the Xto delete a benchmark
from the list of selected benchmarks.
7. When you have finished adding benchmarks, enter the weight of each benchmark in the field provided. All bench-
mark weights must equal 100.

8. Click Save to save your custom benchmark. It will now be listed on the Custom Benchmarks tab, where you can
edit or delete it.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 109

Chapter 3 Synopses

9. When you select benchmarks for a Detailed report, you will be able to select your custom benchmark. Custom
benchmarks are always listed first in the list of benchmarks.

Synopses
Institutional account Master users (Advisor Masters, Broker Masters, Fund Investment Managers and Proprietary Trading
Group Masters) can create and save synopses, which are text-based cover letters, and then assign them to Port-
folioAnalyst reports.

Creating and Saving a Synopsis

You can create, save, edit or delete a synopsis from within PortfolioAnalyst.

To create and save a synopsis

1. Click Reports > PortfolioAnalyst.
2. Click CREATE REPORT or click the edit icon for any saved report.
3. Click the Synopses tab. The Manage Synopses tab displays all of your previously saved synopses. From this
tabbed page, you can view or edit an existing synopsis, delete a synopsis or create a new synopsis.

4. Click CREATE SYNOPSIS.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 110

Chapter 3 Assigning a Synopsis to a Report

5. Enter the name of the synopsis in the Title field.

6. Type the text of the synopsis in the Text area up to a maximum of 3000 characters.
7. Click SAVE. Click CANCEL to cancel the operation.
You will now be able to assign this synopsis to a PortfolioAnalyst report.

Assigning a Synopsis to a Report

When you are creating a new PortfolioAnalyst report or editing an existing report AND you have selected multiple cli-
ent, sub or linked accounts in the Account Selector, you can attach a synopsis (cover letter) to the report.

To assign a synopsis to a report

1. Click Reports > PortfolioAnalyst.
2. Click CREATE REPORT or click the edit icon for any saved report.
3. If you are a Master account user responsible for client or sub accounts or you have multiple linked accounts,
select one or more accounts in the Account Selector.
4. Enter or edit the report settings as required.
5. Click Assign Synopsis.
6. In the Assign Synopsis dialog, select a previously-saved synopsis, select the accounts whose reports to which you
want to attach the synopsis, then click Assign.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 111

Chapter 3 Assigning a Synopsis to a Report

7. Click Apply to apply your selections to the report.

8. Finish entering or editing the PortfolioAnalyst report settings as required, then save the report.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 112

Chapter 3 Editing and Deleting Saved PortfolioAnalyst Reports

Editing and Deleting Saved PortfolioAnalyst Reports

To delete a saved report
1. Click Reports > PortfolioAnalyst.
2. Click the Custom Reports tab.

3. Click the Delete icon in the list of saved reports to delete the report.

To edit a saved report

1. Click Reports > PortfolioAnalyst.
2. Click the Custom Reports tab.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 113

Chapter 3 Viewing External Accounts

3. Click the Edit icon in the list of saved reports, then modify the report as required.
4. Click SAVE when you are done editing the report.

Viewing External Accounts

PortfolioAnalyst lets you view accounts held at financial institutions, including investment and non-investment accounts,
other than us at a glance, and drill down to see the value of the positions.

To do this, you use the following two tabbed pages in PortfolioAnalyst:

l Summary - View the prior value, current value, percent change in value and returns for your external accounts,
and drill down to view the value of individual positions.
l External Accounts - Add, view, edit and delete investment accounts from financial institutions other than us.

Note: External accounts are currently NOT available to Advisor and Broker Masters, Money Managers
and Non-disclosed Broker clients. Advisors and Brokers can view their clients' external accounts if
the client has provided authorization to do so.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 114

Chapter 3 Account Summaries

Account Summaries
The PortfolioAnalyst Summary tab lets you:

l View the current and prior values and returns for your IB and external accounts. View a consolidated summary of
all accounts or view a summary for each financial institution.
l Drill down to view the current and prior values of each position in each asset class. View a consolidated summary
of all positions for all accounts or view specific positions for each financial institution.
l Drill down to view transactions for any symbol.

To use the Summary tab

1. Click Reports > PortfolioAnalyst.
2. Click the Summary tab.
By default, the Summary tab displays the categories in which you have added external accounts (Banking, Credit Cards,
Investment, etc.), along with prior and current values for all of your accounts in each category. This is the Consolidated
view.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 115

Chapter 3 Account Summaries

If you have not added any external accounts, the Summary page will show your account(s) held here by default.

3. Click a category to view all financial institutions that you have added.

4. Select the current time period from the Time Period drop-down:
l Daily
l Month to Date
l Year to Date
l Custom Period - When you select this option, you must also enter a starting and ending date.
The values and percent change in value will reflect your time period selection.

5. Change the view in the View By drop-down (by default, the view shows financial institutions):

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 116

Chapter 3 Account Summaries

l Consolidated - Displays prior and current values and percent change for all asset classes in all accounts.
l Financial Institution - Displays prior and current values and percent change for each financial institution. Click
the down arrow next to a financial institution to display all of the accounts that you have under for that insti-
tution.
If you have multiple accounts for a financial institution, you can click the name of the institution to expand the view to
include all accounts.

6. You can drill down to view positions in both the Consolidated and Financial Institution views:
l In Financial Institution view, click the individual account to display the asset classes in that account.

l Then click an asset class to drill down to the individual positions. Click a link in the breadcrumb display to
quickly go back to a previous view. You can also change the Time Period.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 117

Chapter 3 External Accounts

l In Consolidated view, click an asset class to view all of the positions in that asset class for all of your accounts.
Click a link in the breadcrumb display to quickly go back to a previous view. You can also change the Time
Period.

External Accounts
The PortfolioAnalyst External Accounts tab lets you:

l Add external investment accounts;

l View and edit external investment accounts that you have already added;
l Delete external investment accounts from PortfolioAnalyst.

Adding an External Account

To add an external investment account to PortfolioAnalyst

1. Click Reports > PortfolioAnalyst.
2. Click the External Accounts tab.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 118

Chapter 3 Adding an External Account

3. Click Add Accounts.

4. A disclaimer opens in a popup window. Read the disclaimer and then click Yes to close the window.
5. Select the financial institution from the list.

You can type the name of financial institution where the external account is maintained in the search field. This
is a smart search field; once you start typing the name of the institution, matching institutions appear in the list
below the field.
6. Once you have selected your financial institution from the list, click Next.
7. Type the username and password for your account at the selected financial institution. Type your password a
second time, and then click Next

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 119

Chapter 3 Adding an External Account

8. Select the accounts held at the selected financial institution that you want to add to PortfolioAnalyst. For
example, you may have several different accounts at another financial institution but you only want to add one of
them to PortfolioAnalyst.

o Click the check box next to each account that you want to add.
o For each account that you want to add, select the type of account: Investment:Brokerage or Invest-
ment:Retirement. Click the down arrow to view the drop-down menu, and then make your selections. Each
type has several additional types associated with it. For example, you can select Retirement and then select
IRA as the type of Retirement.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 120

Chapter 3 Adding an External Account

9. If the account is successfully added, a confirmation screen opens that lists the account(s) you just added, includ-
ing the account ID and current balance.

10. Click Close to stop adding accounts or Add More Accounts to add more external accounts.
Note: It usually takes until the next business day to load your external account portfolio data, which you
can see on the Summary tab.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 121

Chapter 3 Vewing and Editing External Accounts

Vewing and Editing External Accounts

The Manage Accounts screen lets you view and edit the external accounts that you have added to PortfolioAnalyst.

To view and edit external accounts

1. Click Reports > PortfolioAnalyst.
2. Click the External Accounts tab.

3. Click MANAGE ACCOUNTS.

All external accounts that you have added to PortfolioAnalyst are listed along with their current balances. Icons on the
right side of the display let you add or delete accounts under each financial institution.

4. To change the account type of an external account:

l Click the down arrow on the left side of the account number whose type you want to change. The account
expands to display the current account type.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 122

Chapter 3 Deleting External Accounts

l Use the drop-down menus to change the account type.

l Click Save when you have made all of your changes.
5. To add or delete accounts under a financial institution:
l Delete all accounts under a financial institution by clicking the red minus sign icon on the financial institution
row (the gray-colored row with multiple icons).
l Delete an individual account under a financial institution by clicking the minus sign icon on the specific account
row.
l To add an account under an existing financial institution, click the plus sign icon. You will be prompted to add
an account as described here.
6. To log in to an external account that you have added to PortfolioAnalyst, click the window icon on the financial
institution row (the last icon on the right). The login page for that account will open in a new browser page.

Deleting External Accounts

You can easily delete external accounts from PortfolioAnalyst. For example, you may no longer maintain an external
account that you previously added.

To delete external accounts

1. Click Reports > PortfolioAnalyst.
2. Click the External Accounts tab.

3. To delete ALL external accounts from PortfolioAnalyst, click DELETE ALL ACCOUNTS.

Click Yes in the confirmation popup that opens to complete the operation.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 123

Chapter 3 Deleting External Accounts

4. To delete individual accounts (for example, you may have added multiple accounts under a specific financial insti-
tution but no longer maintain one of them):
a. Click Manage Accounts.
b. Clicking the red minus sign icon on the specific account row.
c. In the confirmation popup, click Delete Institution to complete the operation.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 124

Chapter 3 Transaction Cost Analysis

Transaction Cost Analysis

Transaction Cost Analysis is a dynamic and interactive analysis of your trades marked to various benchmarks grouped in
different categories or on a per-order basis. Transaction Cost Analysis applies to trades of any instrument type and is typ-
ically available ten minutes after a trade is executed. Performance metrics are expressed as basis points (bps) of value
traded.

Each executed trade in the period of the analysis is marked to a series of performance benchmarks with the results dis-
played in multiple interactive tables. You can drill down in a variety of categories, including trade date, order side,
exchange, trade price and underlying, to see how each trade performed when compared to the benchmark. The per-
formance of a trade is calculated by marking the trade price to each benchmark. A positive number indicates that the
trade worked in your favor; a negative number indicates that the trade did not work in your favor.

You can also add or remove columns from tables using the Configure Columns feature.

Note: Combinations are not supported in the Transaction Cost Analysis.

See Understanding the Transaction Cost Analysis for a complete description of each column heading and performance
benchmark used in the analysis results.

Who can access the Transaction Cost Analysis page?

You can access this page if you have trading access and you have been granted Reporting access rights.

To run a Transaction Cost Analysis

1. Click Reports > Transaction Cost Analysis.

2. Select a start date and an end date from the From Date and To Date drop-down lists, then click Submit to gen-
erate your analysis.
The page displays the results of your analysis in the Instrument Type and Marketability section in the Summary Analysis.
All performance numbers are in basis points, and volume is in shares or contracts, as applicable. Negative numbers appear
in parentheses.

Sort the data by any column by clicking the column heading.

Here is an example of transaction cost analysis Summary Analysis results.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 125

Chapter 3 Transaction Cost Analysis

3. Click a category (expanding items are indicated by a plus sign) to drill down to view more detailed data by instru-
ment type and marketability. Detailed results are displayed in additional tables:
l By Trade Date
l By Trade Side
l By Exchange
l By Trade Size
l By Trade Price
l By Underlying
l By Order Live Time in Seconds
l By Order Type
l By Average Delta

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 126

Chapter 3 Transaction Cost Analysis

In addition, an Outlier Analysis is added to the results in the bottom half of the screen. The Outlier Analysis shows an
analysis of the Top and Bottom orders for each of the performance benchmarks. You can jump quickly to the Outlier Ana-
lysis from the link at the top of the screen.

4. Filter the results further within each of the detailed breakdowns by clicking the appropriate category.
5. Remove individual filters by clicking the X icon next to a filter link in the Current Active Filters display located
at the top of the screen. You can remove any filter in any order at any time. The report data refreshes to reflect the
change in the Current Active Filters.
For example, suppose your Current Active Filters display looks like this:

You remove the Trade Size: 500 à 1000 filter by clicking the X icon to the left of the filter link. The Current Active Fil-
ters changes to look like this (and the report data refreshes to indicate the new Current Active Filters):

l To return to the original Summary Analysis table and remove all filters, click the X icon next to Remove All in
the Current Active Filters display.
l To choose a different date range, click Change Date Range in the upper right corner of the page.

6. View detailed data for the orders in the current view by clicking the View Order Details link at the top of the
screen.
Click the Back link at the upper right corner of the screen to return to the original report view. Order Details
shows data only for the orders that are visible in the current view using the current active filters. For example, if
you are viewing all marketable stock orders and there are 300 orders, the Order Details will include details for
those 300 orders. If your current active filters are showing only ten orders, then the Order Details will include
details for those ten orders.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 127

Chapter 3 Transaction Cost Analysis

7. You can configure columns for the Summary Analysis table, for all of the detailed tables, for the Outlier Analysis
tables and for the Order Details table. When you configure columns for the detail tables, your changes apply to
all detail tables.
l Click the Configure Columns link located above and to the right of each configurable table.

l All current columns are listed in the Columns Included box on the right. Columns that you can add are listed in
the Columns available box on the left. To add a column, click the column name on the left to select it, and then
click the green right-facing arrow to move the selected column name to the list of Columns Included. To remove a
column, click the column name on the right to select it, and then click the left-facing arrow to move the selected
column name to the list of Columns Available. You can select more than one column name at a time using the
Control+click keyboard-mouse combination.
l Click Save to update the tables with the modified columns.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 128

Chapter 3 Understanding the Transaction Cost Analysis

When you log in for the first time, we display all columns by default. If you choose to remove all columns, we will still
display the default columns. Any changes applied to Summary Analysis columns will also be applied to the Details table
columns and vice versa.

8. Optionally, print the current view of the report by clicking the Print link in the upper right corner of the screen,
including the Order Details page.

Understanding the Transaction Cost Analysis

Transaction Cost Analysis lets you analyze the cost of the decision to trade over a specified time period with respect to
various benchmarks.

Each executed trade in the period of the analysis is marked to a series of performance benchmarks with the results dis-
played in multiple interactive tables. You can drill down in a variety of categories, including trade date, order side,
exchange, trade price and underlying, to see how each trade performed when compared to the benchmark. The per-
formance of a trade is calculated by marking the trade price to each benchmark. A positive number indicates that the
trade worked in your favor; a negative number indicates that the trade did not work in your favor.

Marketability

Indicates whether an order was marketable or not. A marketable order is either a market order or is an order that is bought
at a price that is greater than or equal to the prevailing ask price (or sold at a price that is less than or equal to the pre-
vailing bid price) when the order is submitted.

Transaction Cost

Every trade has costs associated with the transaction. There are explicit costs like commissions and exchange fees etc,
and there are implicit costs that depend primarily on the characteristics of the trade relative to prevailing market con-
ditions and trading strategy.

The Transaction Cost Analysis report compares trades to various industry standard benchmarks and some unique meas-
ures, allowing you to evaluate the quality of the executions.

Basis Points

Unit of measure that describes the percentage change in the value or rate of a financial instrument. One basis point =
0.01%, or 0.0001 in decimal form. Performance metrics are expressed as basis points (bps) of value traded.

Currency

All commissions are in your account's base currency. When we add notional value and total premium, those will also be
in account's base currency. The trade price will stay in traded currency.

Methodology

We mark each trade to a series of benchmarks such as price improvement, arrival price and more. We aggregate trades
weighted by volume and present overall performance as well as various tables that show performance broken down by
various criteria such as trade date, trade price, underlying, exchange and more.

Negative numbers are indicated by parentheses.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 129

Chapter 3 Understanding the Transaction Cost Analysis

You can drill down into reports by clicking categories, essentially filtering the results as required; the current active fil-
ters are always displayed at the top of the page and you can remove any individual filter by clicking the X icon next the
filter. Detailed tables show data for the following:

o By Trade Date
o By Trade Side
o By Exchange
o By Trade Size
o By Trade Price
o By Underlying
o By Order Live Time in Seconds
o By Order Type
o By Average Delta

You can also view the details of each order in the Order Details table, which opens on a new page.

Outliers for each performance benchmark are displayed in the Outlier Analysis section, which shows an analysis of the
Top and Bottom symbols for all performance benchmarks.

Report Columns

The following table shows all of the columns in the Transaction Cost Analysis report and their descriptions, including all
of the performance benchmarks.

Column Definition

Orders Number of executed orders.

Total% In Detail views, this column follows the Orders

column. It shows the line item's percentage of
the total number of executed orders. For
example, in the By Trade Side breakdown, sup-
pose there are 40 Buy orders and 60 Sell orders.
The Total% of Buy orders would be 40, or 40%
of the total number of orders, and the Total% of
Sell orders would be 60, or 60% of the total num-
ber of orders.

Trades Number of individual fills/executions.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 130

Chapter 3 Understanding the Transaction Cost Analysis

Total% In Detail views, this column follows the Trades

column. It shows the line item's percentage of
the total number of fills/executions. For
example, in the By Trade Side breakdown, sup-
pose there are 232 trades that were Buys and
341 trades that were Sells. The Total% of Buy
trades would be 40.5, or 40.5% of the total num-
ber of trades, and the Total% of Sell trades
would be 59.5, or 59.5% of the total number of
trades.

Qty Number of executed shares/contracts.

Total% In Detail views, this column follows the Quantity

column. It shows the line item's percentage of
the total number of shares or contracts
executed. For example, in the By Trade Side
breakdown, suppose there are 79,853 shares
traded that were Buys and 11,662 shares traded
that were Sells. The Total% of Buy shares
would be 40.5, or 40.5% of the total number of
shares traded, and the Total% of Sell shares
would be 59.5, or 59.5% of the total number of
shares executed.

Performance Benchmarks

Price Improvement Basis points that your orders were filled better
(worse) than then National Best Bid (for sell
orders) or Offer (for buy orders) at time each
order was submitted. Market prices may change
while the order is executing, particularly if the
order is executed in parts. A negative number
does not mean that the order was not submitted
at the National Best Bid and Offer.

Arrival Price Basis points that your orders were filled better
(worse) than the midpoint of the National Best
Bid and Offer at time each order was submitted.
Market prices may change while the order is
executing, particularly if the order is executed in
parts. A negative number does not mean that
the order was not submitted at the National Best
Bid and Offer.

vs Trade +1 min Basis points that your orders were filled better
(worse) than the midpoint of the National Best
Bid and Offer one minute after each trade.

vs Trade +10 min Basis points that your orders were filled better
(worse) than the midpoint of the National Best
Bid and Offer ten minutes after each trade.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 131

Chapter 3 Understanding the Transaction Cost Analysis

vs Close Basis points that your orders were filled better

(worse) than the Close price of each security on
the day the order was executed.

vs VWAP Basis points that your orders were filled better

(worse) than the VWAP (volume weighted aver-
age price) for each order's security measured
between the time of each order's submission
and the time the order is completed or cancelled.

vs Daily VWAP Basis points that your orders were filled better
(worse) than the VWAP (volume weighted aver-
age price) for each order's security measured
over the entire day of trading that the order was
executed.

vs Daily Range Percentage of today's High and Low price range

that the trade captured. For example, a buy at
the day's low captures 100% of the daily range.
This is calculated as the average across
included orders of:
Buy Orders: (Daily High - Execution Price) /
(Daily High - Daily Low)
Sell Orders: (Execution Price - Daily Low) /
(Daily High - Daily Low)

Fill Rates

Filled/Total Qty Average across included orders of:

Fill Quantity/Total Quantity.

Fill Rate/sec Average across included orders of:

Fill Quantity / Total Quantity per second.

Feasible Fill Rate Percentage of an order that could be filled con-

sidering the size available at the NBBO.

Commissions

Commission Sum of commissions for all included orders.

Commission/Share Average commission per share/contract.

Order Details

Ticker Symbol.

Submit Date The date on which the order was placed.

Submit Time The time at which the order was placed.

Time Zone Time zone for the order time.

Live Time Duration the order was live.

Type The order type (Market, Limit, etc.).

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 132

Chapter 3 Understanding the Transaction Cost Analysis

Side Identifies the order as a Buy or Sell.

Order Qty Order quantity.

Trades Number of individual fills/executions.

Trade Qty Trade quantity.

Average Price Average trade price.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 133

Chapter 3 Risk

Risk
The Risk menu gives you access to the following reports:

l Margin Reports
l Stress Test Report
l Value at Risk Report

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 134

Chapter 3 Margin Reports

Margin Reports
You can see real-time margin summary amounts displayed in the Account window in Trader Workstation. For position
margin requirements, however, you can view margin reports in Account Management. At 16:15 ET each day, we record
your margin and equity information for positions across all asset classes and exchanges for the margin report.

Margin reports show the margin requirements for all open single and combination positions. The report displays Avail-
able Funds (to determine if you can put on a new trade) and Excess Liquidity (when excess is depleted, you risk liquid-
ation). Note that because information on your statements is displayed "as of" the cut-off time for each individual
exchange, the information in your margin report may be different from that displayed on your statements.

Margin reports in Account Management are the only place where you can view the margin requirements for com-
bination/spread positions. Margin reports are available for the previous 180 days.

Who can access the Margin Reports page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To generate a Margin report

1. Click Reports > Risk > Margin. The Margin Reports page appears by default.
If you have a multiple account structure such as an institution account or multiple linked accounts, use the Account
Selector at the top of the page to select an account on which to report. To generate a Margin report for a closed account,
select the Include Closed Accounts check box, and then select the closed account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 135

Chapter 3 Margin Reports

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

2. On the Margin Reports screen, make the following selections:

l In the Type field, select Default or Commodities Regulatory. The Commodities Regulatory Margin report breaks
out domestic (US) and foreign cash/holdings for the Commodities segment of your account (required by the CME
Group). This type of margin report is available for any accounts that trade futures or futures options.
l In the Report Date field, select the date for the report.
l In the Format field, select HTML/WEB, PDF or CSV (for a comma-separated values file).
l In the Language field, select your language.

3. Click View to generate the report.

If you selected PDF or CVS as the Format, you will be prompted to save the file to your computer.

You can expand and collapse each section of the report individually. Click the slate blue section heading bar to expand
a section, and click it again to collapse it.

The following figures show two views of a typical Margin report. The first figure shows the report with all sections col-
lapsed, while the second shows the Margin Detail section of the report expanded. Note the links in the upper right corner
of the report; these links let you expand all sections in the report, collapse all sections in the report, and print the report.

For more information

l Margin Report Reference

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 136

Chapter 3 Stress Test Report

Stress Test Report

The Stress Test report lets you see the change in the Profit and Loss (PNL) of your positions if the underlying price of
each of your positions declines by 3%, 5%, 10%, 20% and 30% and independently increases by 3%, 5%, 10%, 20% and
30%.

Who can access the Stress Test page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To generate a Stress Test report

1. Click Reports > Risk > Stress Test.
If you have a multiple account structure such as an institution account or multiple linked accounts, use the Account
Selector at the top of the page to select an account on which to report.

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

2. In the Date field, select the date for the report.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 137

Chapter 3 Using the Stress Test Summary Report

3. Click View to generate the report.

Using the Stress Test Summary Report

The Stress Test Summary report lets you see the change in the PNL of your positions if the underlying price of each of
your positions declines by 3%, 5%, 10%, 20% and 30% and independently increases by 3%, 5%, 10%, 20% and 30%.
The results are based on theoretical pricing models and do not take into account coincidental changes in volatility or
other variables that affect derivative prices.

The report shows:

l The Net Liquidation Value (NLV) of your account on the close, in USD.
l The cash balance of your account, in USD.
l Equity of all stock and derivatives, equity index derivatives and mutual funds, with P&L (displayed as “PNL” in
the report) in USD.
To use the report, click the radio button that corresponds to the up or down price change you want to see (+/- 3, 5, 10,
20 or 30%). The PNL for each position is updated by the selected percentage.

Note: Certain positions are shown in the report but not valued under the stress scenarios of -30%/+30%
changes in the underlying price. You must evaluate your own risk for these positions and include
them in the totals provided.

The following figure shows an example of a Stress Test report, with -30% selected.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 138

Chapter 3 Using the Stress Test Summary Report

For more information

l Stress Test Report Reference

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 139

Chapter 3 Value At Risk Report

Value At Risk Report

Value at Risk is a number that represents an estimate of how much your portfolio may lose due to market movements for
a particular time horizon and for a given confidence level (probability of occurrence). This report is completed overnight
for a one-day horizon only. The report is based on account and, where applicable, sub-portfolios, and supports con-
solidated data for Advisor and Broker client accounts.

Note: To find on-demand VAR, use the VaR tab in the Risk Navigator in IB TWS. On-demand VAR sup-
ports multi-day VaR, shows the Expected Shortfall, and allows you to choose between Monte Carlo
and Historical VaRs.

Confidence Level

The Value at Risk report computes your Value at Risk (VAR) at a 99.5% confidence level using two simulation meth-
ods, Variance-Covariance and Historical. A 99.5% confidence levels means that 99.5% of the time, your losses will be
lower than the VAR number (shown in this report as P/L), while 0.5% of the time, your portfolio will experience greater
losses.

Value At Risk Simulation

The Value at Risk report breaks your portfolio into sub-portfolios, each with exposure to a distinct set of risk factors.
These numbers are generated by simulating scenarios of risk factor movements (e.g. stock price, FX rates, etc), using his-
torical volatility and correlation experienced in the recent past.

For each symbol in a sub-portfolio and for each currency, we compute the simulated price, the percent difference between
the price and the simulated price, and the monetary difference between the simulated value and the closing value. The
simulations show the market outcome that was found at the 99.5% confidence level. Specifically, it shows the price of
the underlying in that scenario, the percentage price change versus the previous close and the P&L for the sub-portfolio
(the underlying and its derivatives) that results from that market outcome.

Who can access the Value At Risk Report page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 140

Chapter 3 Value At Risk Report

l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization

l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund
l Administrator who is subscribed (linked) to a client account.

To generate a Value at Risk Summary report

1. Click Reports > Risk > Value at Risk.
If you have a multiple account structure such as an institution account or multiple linked accounts, use the Account
Selector at the top of the page to select an account on which to report.

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

2. Select a date and language, then click View. Note that this report is always generated as an HTML/Web page.

Here is an example of a Value at Risk report.

For more information

l Value At Risk Report Reference

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 141

Chapter 3 Supplemental Reports

Supplemental Reports
The Supplemental menu gives you access to the following reports:

l Broker Exception Report

l Compliance Reports
l Advisor Fee Cap Report
l Client Summary Report
l P/L Markup Summary Report
l Advisor Fee Invoices
l Broker Client Revenue and Expense Summary Report

Compliance Reports
Advisors use the Compliance Reports page to view and download Form 13F (Information Required of Institutional
Investors) and Form 13D/G (Beneficial Ownership Report) compliance reports.

Who can access the Compliance Reports page?

You can access this page if you are a Registered Investment Advisor.

To use the Compliance Reports page

1. Click Reports > Supplemental > Compliance.

2. For each report, select the date and the output format (.CSV or MS Excel), and then click View Report.
You will be prompted to view or save the report file to your computer.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 142

Chapter 3 Advisor Fee Cap

Advisor Fee Cap

We cap the amount of fees an advisor can charge a client, up to a maximum of 25% of the client’s average equity in a
given year. The Advisor Fee Cap report displays the amount of available fee cap by client.

Who can access the Advisor Fee Cap page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User Individual

l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Investment Manager Master User

To generate an advisor fee cap report

1. Click Reports > Supplemental > Fee Cap.

2. On the Advisor Fee Cap page, make the following selections:

o In the Account(s) list, select the account for which you want to generate the report.
o In the Date(s) field, select the date for the report.
o In the Section(s) field, select ALL.
3. Click View to generate the report.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 143

Chapter 3 Broker Exception Reports

Broker Exception Reports

The Broker Exception Report provides snapshots of your top 40-performing clients over different time periods and based
on specific criteria. View Daily, Month-to-Date (MTD) and Year-to-Date (YTD) reports of your top 40 Highest Com-
missions customers, top 40 Highest P/L customers, and top 40 Lowest P/L customers. Daily reports also include the top
40 Highest Equity customers.

Who can access the Broker Exception page?

You can access this page if you are a Broker Master User with Reports access.

To generate a Broker Exception report

1. Click Reports > Supplemental > Broker Exception.

2. Select the date for the report from the Date field drop-down, then click View.
The report will appear in a new browser window.

Client Summary Report

Advisors, Brokers and Fund Investment Managers can run this snapshot of client balances and performance over a one-
day period. Because information on client’s statements is displayed “as of” the cut-off time for each individual exchange,
it should be noted that information on your client summary report may not equal information on your client’s statements.

Who can access the Client Summary page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master Users

l Advisor Client Users (Individuals) with Report Management access
l Broker Master User
l Fund Investment Manager

To generate a Client Summary report

1. Click Reports > Supplemental > Client Summary.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 144

Chapter 3 P/L Markup Summary

2. Make the following selections:

l In the Date field, select the date for the report.
l In the Language field, select your language .
3. Click View to generate the report.

P/L Markup Summary

This report shows a summary of client profit and loss (P/L) used to determine quarterly and annual performance fees paid
to an Advisor for a single client account or for all client accounts.

Who can access the P/L Markup Summary page?

You can access this page if you are an Advisor Master User.

To generate a P/L Markup Calculation Summary report

1. Click Reports > Supplemental > P/L Markup.
2. Use the Account Selector at the top of the page to select an account on which to report. To view a model state-
ment for a closed account, select the Include Closed Accounts check box, and then select the closed account.

To change the selected account, click the tab to open the Account Selector, and then click a different account.

3. Make the following selections:

l In the Date field, select the date for the report.
l In the Language field, select your language .

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 145

Chapter 3 Advisor Fee Invoices

4. Click View to generate the report.

Advisor Fee Invoices

Advisors use the Fee Invoices page to view fee invoices for specific clients and dates.

To view fee invoices:

1. Click Reports > Supplemental > Fee Invoice.
2. Select an account from the Account Selector.

3. Select a date, and then click View.

The invoice for the selected account appears in a new browser tab or window.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 146

Chapter 3 Broker Client Revenue and Expense Summary

Broker Client Revenue and Expense Summary

Brokers run this report to view a snapshot of client daily, month-to-date and year-to-date expenses, revenues, net revenue,
gross margin and aggregate client MTM.

Who can access the Broker Client Revenue and Expense Summary page?
You can access this page if you are a Broker Master.

To generate a Revenue and Expense Summary report

1. Click Reports > Supplemental > Client Revenue & Expense.

2. Make the following selections:

l In the Report Date field, select the date for the report.
l In the Language field, select your language .
3. Click View to generate the report

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 147

Chapter 3 Tax

Tax
The Tax menu gives you access to the following pages:

l Tax Optimizer
l Tax Forms
l Position Transfer Basis
l Forex Cost Basis

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 148

Chapter 3 Tax Optimizer

Tax Optimizer
Use the Tax Optimizer page to launch the Tax Optimizer Java-based application, which lets you manage your stock,
option, bond, warrant and single-stock future gains and losses for tax purposes. Specifically, the Tax Optimizer lets you
select one of several tax lot-matching algorithms to:

l Change the default tax lot-matching method for your account.

l Change the default tax lot-matching method for the current or prior trading day.
l Change the default tax lot-matching method for a specific symbol for the current or prior trading day.
l Run real-time "what if" scenarios that let you change the lot-matching method on the fly to immediately see the
effect on your gains and losses.
l Manually match specific sales to open tax lots for the current or prior trading day.

Who can access the Tax Optimizer page?

All users can access the Tax Optimizer except Canadian customers, whose accounts are automatically assigned to our IB
Canada (IB-CA) entity.

To run the Tax Optimizer

Note: You must have the Java Runtime Environment minimum version 1.6 installed on your computer to
be able to run the Tax Optimizer.

1. Click Reports > Tax > Tax Optimizer.

2. Select either the current or prior trading day from the Trading Day drop-down.
3. Click Launch.
4. You are prompted to open the file taxoptimizer.jnlp. Depending on your web browser, click Open or OK to open
the file.
The Tax Optimizer opens.

If you log out of Account Management while the Tax Optimizer is open, you will not be able to save your changes in
the Tax Optimizer.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 149

Chapter 3 Tax Forms

Tax Forms
You can view and print annual tax forms for the last five years on the Tax Forms page. Note that tax forms are not
required or generated for US corporations. Tax forms available on this page include:

l Individuals, joint account holders and trusts in the United States will have access to 1099 forms, a Gain Loss
Report and a Dividend Report.
l Canadian individuals, primary joint account holders and trusts will have access to Forms T3, T5, and T5008 as
well as a Dividend Report. Quebec residents will also receive a Form RL-3.
Note: Some Canadian accounts have two separate sets of 2013 tax forms that correspond to two separate
accounts, one open account and one closed account. We only display the set of tax forms for one of
those accounts on this page. To see the tax forms for your other account, use the Account Selector
at the top of this page as follows:

1. Click the tab to open the Account Selector.

2. Click the Include Closed Accounts check box to see your closed account.
3. Click the account in the Account Selector. The tax forms for that account will now appear on the
page.

If you do not see the Account Selector, then you only have one set of tax forms.

l Non-US and non-Canadian individuals, primary joint account holders and trusts will receive Forms 1042S as well
as a Dividend Report.

Who can access the Tax Forms page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 150

Chapter 3 Tax Forms

To view and print tax forms

1. Click Reports > Tax > Tax Forms.
If you have a multiple account structure such as an institution account or multiple linked accounts, use the Account
Selector at the top of the page to select an account on which to report. To view tax forms for a closed account, select the
Include Closed Accounts check box, and then select the closed account.

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

2. For each tax form you want to view, select the year and display format (HTML/Web or MS Excel), then click
View Form or View Report.
Here is an example of the Tax Forms page. The Tax Forms page for your account may have different forms available.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 151

Chapter 3 Position Transfer Basis

Position Transfer Basis

The Position Transfer Cost Basis page lets you specify the cost basis for positions transferred into your account using
ACATS (Automated Customer Account Transfer Service), ATON (Account Transfer Online Notification), or FOP (Free of
Payment).Under the FIFO cost basis accounting method, a closing transaction is matched with the cost basis of the earli-
est transaction in the position to determine realized profit or loss. The FIFO cost basis method is used throughout the US
for stocks, security options, single stock futures and Forex.

Who can access the Position Transfer Basis page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To specify the position transfer basis for an ACATS, ATON or FOP transfer
1. Click Reports > Tax > Position Transfer Basis.
If you have a multiple account structure such as an institution account or multiple linked accounts, use the Account
Selector at the top of the page to select an account.

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 152

Chapter 3 Forex Cost Basis

2. If there are eligible transactions, select a transfer date from the list, then click Continue.

3. Update the cost basis for your transfer:

l Enter the number of shares or contracts for the position in the Quantity field.
l Enter the date of purchase for the position in the Date field.
l Enter the total cost basis for the entire position in the Total Cost field.
l Select a currency for the position. You can select the asset trading currency, your base currency or USD. Avail-
able selectable currencies are the asset trading currency, your base currency and USD. For new tax lots, the asset
trading currency is the default currency. The asset trading currency is displayed on the symbol row. For old tax
lots that may not have a currency, USD is the default currency.
l Optionally delete a tax lot by clicking the Delete link.
4. Click the Edit link to break the position into multiple purchase dates and times.
5. Click Continue to submit your cost basis update.

Forex Cost Basis

This page lets you update the cost basis for your Forex balances as of December 31, 2009.

Who Can Access the Forex Cost Basis Page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 153

Chapter 3 Forex Cost Basis

l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User

l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To update your Forex cost basis

1. Click Reports>Tax > Forex Cost Basis.
If you have a multiple account structure such as an institution account or multiple linked accounts, use the Account
Selector at the top of the page to select an account.

To change the selected account, click the tab to open the Account Selector, and then click a different account.

The Forex Cost Basis page opens, displaying all of your Forex balances as of December 31, 2009.

If you do not have any Forex balances as of December 31, 2009, a message to that effect appears, and there will be noth-
ing that you can do on this page.

2. Click Edit.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 154

Chapter 3 Forex Cost Basis

3. Enter the cost basis for each Forex balance in the fields provided. Be sure to enter the cost basis in the opposite
sign of the balance. That is, if the quantity is a positive number, enter a negative cost basis.
4. Click Update.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 155

Chapter 3 Settings

Settings
The Reports > Settings menu gives you access to report-related settings, including delivery settings, on the following
pages:

l Activity Statements and Trade Reports - Select notification and delivery settings for your customized activity
statements.
l SMS Alerts - Enable SMS (Short Message Service) alerts to be able to receive alerts on your mobile device.
l Flex Queries - Set notification and delivery settings for your saved Flex Queries.
l Flex Web Service - Access your pre-configured flex queries via HTTPS protocol without logging into Account
Management.
l Third Party Services - Activate or deactivate third-party services such as Mint, which let you download your activ-
ity data to those services.
l Trader ID - Enable the Trader ID field in Activity Statements, Activity Flex Queries, Trade Confirmation Reports
and Trade Confirmation Flex Queries.
l Broker Client Activity Statements - Brokers can select delivery settings for the their clients' activity statements.
l Client OATS Settings - Broker Master Users can configure the OATS settings their client accounts.

Delivery
The Report > Settings > Delivery menu contains the following pages:

l Activity Statements and Trade Reports - Select notification and delivery settings for your customized activity
statements.
l SMS Alerts - Enable SMS (Short Message Service) alerts to be able to receive alerts on your mobile device.
l Flex Queries - Set notification and delivery settings for your saved Flex Queries.
l PortfolioAnalyst - Configure delivery settings for your PortfolioAnalyst reports.
l Broker Client Activity Statements - Brokers can select delivery settings for the their clients' activity statements.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 156

Chapter 3 Delivery Settings for Activity Statements and Trade Reports

Delivery Settings for Activity Statements and Trade

Reports
The Activity Statements and Trade Reports page lets you set up notification preferences for daily and monthly Activity
Statements and for Daily Trade Reports, and specify your preferred delivery method for your customized Activity State-
ments. Non-disclosed Broker Masters can also specify delivery settings for client statements.

Additional Guidelines

l Notifications are delivered only when there is trading activity.

l In multi-account structures (for example, Registered Advisors, Fully Disclosed Brokers or Non-disclosed Brokers),
these notifications are for the master account only. They are not consolidated across all client accounts.
l Using a Registered Advisor as an example, the daily Activity Statement or Daily Trade Report would only be
delivered to the master account user if there were trade allocations. The daily Activity Statement or Daily Trade
Report would not be delivered to a Fully Disclosed or Non-disclosed Broker Master.
l Multi-account structures looking to receive daily or monthly statements on a consolidated basis should set up a
customized activity statement for the master account user.

Who can access the Activity Statements and Trade Confirmations page?
You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Client User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 157

Chapter 3 Delivery Settings for Activity Statements and Trade Reports

To enter notification and delivery settings

1. Click Reports > Settings > Delivery > Activity Statements & Trade Reports.

2. Set your Activity Statement and Trade Report notification preferences:

l Daily Trade Reports, select the Email Notification with Statement check box to receive notification with the
actual report via email, or select Disable Notification if you do not want to be notified when a new Daily Trade
Report is available. Note that the Client Services Message Center and Email Notification Only options are not
available for Daily Trade Reports.
l For Activity Statements, select your preferred method of notification by clicking the radio button for Email Noti-
fication Only, Email Notification with Statement or Client Services Message Center. Note that you cannot dis-
able notification for Monthly Activity Statements.
Registration is immediate upon submitting the page, and you will receive daily statements beginning the next
business day, and monthly statements within the first week following the end of the month.
3. Select your preferred delivery method and enable delivery for each customized statement that you have created.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 158

Chapter 3 Delivery Settings for Activity Statements and Trade Reports

l Select Email or FTP as the Delivery Mode.

l Click the Encryption check box to encrypt your statements.
Note: You must request FTP delivery and Encryption to enable those options. Contact your Sales
Representative to make these requests.

l For each statement listed, click the Enable Delivery check box to enable delivery using the selected delivery
mode.
Note: Although email and FTP delivery methods are available, we recommend that Advisors and
Brokers choose FTP as their delivery method for customized statements with ALL accounts
selected on the Activity Statements page. Advisors and Brokers who select email as the
delivery method for customized statements with ALL accounts selected will get an emailed
statement for each client or sub account.

4. If you are a Broker Master with non-disclosed clients, specify delivery settings for your client accounts in the
Statement Delivery section:
l FTP is the default Delivery Mode. You must send a request to us to enable FTP delivery.
Files delivered to the FTP site are removed after 100 days.

l Select a language from the Language drop-down.

While we use English as the default language for Activity Statements for legal purposes, you have the option of
selecting a different language. If you select a different language, we will provide statements in two languages,
English, and your selected language.
l Select the Enable Delivery check box to enable delivery of Daily and Monthly Client Activity Statements to the
Master account. Daily statements are delivered only when there is activity in the client account.
5. Click Submit.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 159

Chapter 3 SMS Alerts

SMS Alerts
This page lets you enable delivery of alerts via SMS (Short Message Service) on your mobile device. This option is only
available if you have set up a valid SMS address on the Alert Notification page.

Who can access the SMS Alerts page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Client User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To enable delivery of SMS alerts

1. Click Reports > Settings > Delivery > SMS Alerts.

2. Click the check box for each alert you want to receive via SMS.
3. Click Submit.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 160

Chapter 3 Flex Queries

Flex Queries
Use this page to set your preferred delivery mode for your Activity Flex Queries and Trade Confirmation Flex Queries.
Note that delivery settings are only available on this page for your saved Flex Queries.

Who can access the Flex Queries Delivery Settings page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Client User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To configure delivery settings for your saved Flex Queries

1. Click Reports > Settings > Delivery > Flex Queries.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 161

Chapter 3 Portfolio Analyst Delivery Settings

2. Select your preferred delivery method and enable delivery for each saved Flex Query that you have created.
o Select Email or FTP as the Delivery Mode.
o Click the Encryption check box to encrypt your statements.
Note: You must request FTP delivery and Encryption to enable those options. Contact your Sales
Representative to make these requests.

o For each Flex Query listed, click the Enable Delivery check box to enable delivery using the selected deliv-
ery mode.
3. Click Submit.

Portfolio Analyst Delivery Settings

Use this page to set your preferred delivery mode for default PortfolioAnalyst reports and your saved PortfolioAnalyst
reports that have a time period of MTD, YTD, or since inception. Advisor Masters, Money Managers and Broker Masters
can set their preferred delivery mode for consolidated default reports and their own saved consolidated reports with YTD
and MTD time periods.

Selected reports are delivered as follows:

Delivery
Time Period of Report
Frequency
MTD Daily

YTD Daily

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 162

Chapter 3 Portfolio Analyst Delivery Settings

Delivery
Time Period of Report
Frequency
Since Inception Daily

Default Consolidated Reports

30 Day Consolidated Daily

1 Quarter Consolidated Quarterly

12 Month Consolidated Monthly

Who can access the PortfolioAnalyst Delivery Settings page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Broker Non-Disclosed Client User
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund
and you have been granted Reporting access rights.

To configure delivery settings for PortfolioAnalyst

1. Click Reports > Settings > Delivery > PortfolioAnalyst.
The Delivery Settings for PortfolioAnalyst page opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 163

Chapter 3 Portfolio Analyst Delivery Settings

2. Select your preferred delivery method and enable delivery for each PortfolioAnalyst report listed on the page.
l Select Email or FTP as the Delivery Method.
l Click the Encryption check box to encrypt your statements.
You must request FTP delivery and Encryption to enable those options. Contact your Sales Representative to make these
requests.

l For each report listed, click the check box to enable delivery using the selected delivery mode.
3. Click Submit.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 164

Chapter 3 Broker Client Activity Statements

Broker Client Activity Statements

If you are a Broker Master with non-disclosed clients, you can specify delivery settings for your clients' statements on the
Delivery Settings for Broker Client Activity Statements page.

You can specify these delivery settings:

l Enable FTP delivery of daily and monthly client activity statements. Daily statements are delivered only when
there is activity in the client account.
l Select a language other than English.

Who can access the Delivery Settings for Broker Client Activity Statements page?
You can access this page if you are a Non-Disclosed Broker Master User.

To specify delivery settings

1. FTP is the default delivery method for broker client activity statements. You must send a request to us to enable
FTP delivery. To do this, click Support, then create a ticket in the Message Center to send your request to us.
2. When FTP delivery has been enabled, log into Account Management, then click Reports > Settings > Broker Cli-
ent Activity Statements.
The Delivery Settings for Broker Client Activity Statements page opens.

3. Select a language from the Language drop-down.

l While we use English as the default language for Activity Statements for legal purposes, you have the option of
selecting a different language. If you select a different language, we will provide statements in two languages,
English, and your selected language.
4. Select the Enable Delivery check box to enable delivery of Daily and Monthly Client Activity Statements to the
Master account. Daily statements are delivered only when there is activity in the client account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 165

Chapter 3 Using the Flex Web Service

Using the Flex Web Service

The Flex Web Service lets you access your pre-configured flex queries via HTTPS protocol without logging into
Account Management. This feature lets you write automated client software in your preferred language, which can
request previously defined Flex queries.

There are currently two versions of the Flex Web Service available:

l Version 2 - Version 2 is the default version if you do not specify a specific version in your query.
l Version 3 - Version 3 returns more meaningful error messages.

Who Can Access the Flex Web Service Page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 166

Chapter 3 Flex Web Service Version 2

Flex Web Service Version 2

To use the Flex Web Service Version 2

1. Click Reports > Settings > FlexWeb Service.

2. Activate the Flex Web Service by clicking the Click Here to Activate link.
The page refreshes, indicating a status of ACTIVE for the Flex Web Service, and lets you generate a confirmation
number, which you will need to initiate Flex requests and retrieve Flex reports.

3. Generate a new token:

a. In the Should Expire After list, select the amount of time before the token expires. The token is valid for a 6 hour
period by default.
b. In the Valid For IP Address field, enter an IP address to restrict the token to that IP address. If you leave this field
blank, there will be no IP address restrictions.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 167

Chapter 3 Flex Web Service Version 2

c. Click Generate New Token.

The page refreshes, updating the Current Token Details section with information about your newly-generated
token. When you generate a new token, you invalidate the current token.
4. Initiate an automated Flex Web Service request:
A. Make sure you have the following information:
Your current token (displayed in the Current Token Details section of the page)
The Flex Query ID generated when you created the Flex query.
Programmatic access requires the User-Agent HTTP header to be set. Accepted values are: Blackberry or Java.

b. Type the following URL in your browser’s Address field:

https://g-
dcdyn.interactivebrokers.com/Universal/servlet/FlexStatementService.SendRequest?t=TOKEN&q=QUERY_
ID&v=2
Where:
TOKEN is your current token
QUERY_ID is the Flex Query ID
v=2 specifies that you are using Flex Web Service Version 2. Note that if you omit this parameter, the system will
use Version 2.
You will receive an XML response from us containing the following information:

l Reference Code - If the request was successful, the XML response will contain a numeric reference code. This
code will be used to retrieve the generated Flex query. If the request was unsuccessful, you will receive an error
message as the code.
l Response URL - This is the URL to be used to retrieve the Flex report.
Here is a sample successful XML response using Version 2:

<FlexStatementResponse timestamp="28 August, 2012 11:26 AM EDT">

<code>5372466165</code>
<url>https://gdcdyn.interactivebrokers.com/Universal/servlet/FlexStatementService.GetStatement</url>
</FlexStatementResponse>

Here is a sample unsuccessful XML response Version 2:

<FlexStatementResponse timestamp="28 August, 2012 11:26 AM EDT">

<code>Invalid request or unable to validate request.</code>
<url>https://gdcdyn.interactivebrokers.com/Universal/servlet/FlexStatementService.GetStatement</url>
</FlexStatementResponse>

5. Retrieve the Flex data:

a. Be sure that you have your current token number, and the reference code you received as part of the response to
your initial request.
b. Type the following URL in your browser’s Address field:
https://gdcdyn.interactivebrokers.com/Universal/servlet/FlexStatement
Service.GetStatement?q=REFERENCE_CODE&t=TOKEN
&v=VERSION

Where:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 168

Chapter 3 Flex Web Service Version 2

REFERENCE_CODE is the code you received as part of the response when you placed the request
TOKEN is your current token
VERSION is the version of the Flex Web Service Version you are using. You can set this to 2 or 3. Note that if
you do not specify a Version, the system will use Version 2.
You will receive the Flex data as the response if the request was successful. Otherwise, you will receive a XML based
response informing you that the request was invalid. Here is an example of an unsuccessful request to retrieve the Flex
data:

<FlexStatementResponse timestamp="28 August, 2012 11:26 AM EDT">

<Code>Invalid Request or unable to validate request</Code>
</FlexStatementResponse>

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 169

Chapter 3 Flex Web Service Version 3

Flex Web Service Version 3

To use the Flex Web Service Version 3

1. Click Reports > Settings > FlexWeb Service.

2. Activate the Flex Web Service by clicking the Click Here to Activate link.
The page refreshes, indicating a status of ACTIVE for the Flex Web Service, and lets you generate a confirmation
number, which you will need to initiate Flex requests and retrieve Flex reports.

3. Generate a new token:

a. In the Should Expire After list, select the amount of time before the token expires. The token is valid for a 6 hour
period by default.
b. In the Valid For IP Address field, enter an IP address to restrict the token to that IP address. If you leave this field
blank, there will be no IP address restrictions.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 170

Chapter 3 Flex Web Service Version 3

c. Click Generate New Token.

The page refreshes, updating the Current Token Details section with information about your newly-generated
token. When you generate a new token, you invalidate the current token.
4. Initiate an automated Flex Web Service request:
a. Make sure you have the following information:
Your current token (displayed in the Current Token Details section of the page)
The Flex Query ID generated when you created the Flex query.
Programmatic access requires the User-Agent HTTP header to be set. Accepted values are: Blackberry or Java.

b. Type the following URL in your browser’s Address field:

https://g-
dcdyn.interactivebrokers.com/Universal/servlet/FlexStatementService.SendRequest?t=TOKEN&q=QUERY_
ID&v=3
Where:
TOKEN is your current token
QUERY_ID is the Flex Query ID
v=3 specifies that you are using Flex Web Service Version 3. Note that if you do not specify a Version, the sys-
tem will use Version 2.
You will receive an XML response from us containing the following information:

l Status - If the request was successful, Status will be Success. If the request was unsuccessful, Status will be Fail.
l Reference Code - If the request was successful, the XML response will contain a numeric reference code. This
code will be used to retrieve the generated Flex query.
l Response URL - This is the URL to be used to retrieve the Flex report.
Here is a sample successful XML response Version 3:

<FlexStatementResponse timestamp="28 August, 2012 10:37 AM EDT">

<Status>Success</Status>
<ReferenceCode>1234567890</ReferenceCode>
<url>https://gdcdyn.interactivebrokers.com/Universal/servlet/FlexStatementService.GetStatement</url>
</FlexStatementResponse>

If the request was unsuccessful, the response will contain the following parameters:

<Status>Fail</Status>
<ErrorCode>XXXX</ErrorCode>
where XXXX = a numeric error code.
<ErrorMessage>TEXT</ErrorMessage>
Where TEXT is a text description of the specific error.

Here is a sample unsuccessful XML response Version 3:

<FlexStatementResponse timestamp="28 August, 2012 10:37 AM EDT">

<Status>Fail</Status>
<ErrorCode>1012</ErrorCode>
<ErrorMessage>Token has expired.</ErrorMessage>
</FlexStatementResponse>

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 171

Chapter 3 Flex Web Service Version 3

5. Retrieve the Flex data:

a. Be sure that you have your current token number, and the reference code you received as part of the response to
your initial request.
b. Type the following URL in your browser’s Address field:
https://gdcdyn.interactivebrokers.com/Universal/servlet/FlexStatement
Service.GetStatement?q=REFERENCE_CODE&t=TOKEN
&v=VERSION

Where:
REFERENCE_CODE is the code you received as part of the response when you placed the request
TOKEN is your current token
VERSION is the version of the Flex Web Service Version you are using. You can set this to 2 or 3. Note that if
you do not specify a Version, the system will use Version 2.
You will receive the Flex data as the response if the request was successful. Otherwise, you will receive a XML based
response informing you that the request was invalid. Here is an example of an unsuccessful request to retrieve the Flex
data using Version 3:

<FlexStatementResponse timestamp="28 August, 2012 10:37 AM EDT">

<Status>Fail</Status>
<ErrorCode>1015</ErrorCode>
<ErrorMessage>Token is invalid.</ErrorMessage>
</FlexStatementResponse>

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 172

Chapter 3 Version 3 Error Codes

Version 3 Error Codes

The following table lists all of the error codes and error descriptions returned in the ErrorCode and ErrorMessage para-
meters used by Version 3 of the Flex Web Service.

ErrorCode ErrorMessage
1001 Statement could not be generated
at this time. Please try again
shortly.

1003 Statement is not available.

1004 Statement is incomplete at this

time. Please try again shortly.

1005 Settlement data is not ready at

this time. Please try again
shortly.

1006 FIFO P/L data is not ready at this

time. Please try again shortly.

1007 MTM P/L data is not ready at this

time. Please try again shortly.

1008 MTM and FIFO P/L data is not

ready at this time. Please try
again shortly.

1009 The server is under heavy load.

Statement could not be generated
at this time. Please try again
shortly.

1010 Legacy Flex Queries are no

longer supported. Please convert
over to Activity Flex.

1011 Service account is inactive.

1012 Token has expired.

1013 IP restriction.

1014 Query is invalid.

1015 Token is invalid.

1016 Account in invalid.

1017 Reference code is invalid.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 173

Chapter 3 Third-Party Services

ErrorCode ErrorMessage
1018 Too many requests have been
made from this token. Please try
again shortly.

Note: Limited to
one request
per second,
10 requests
per minute
(per token).

1019 Statement generation in pro-

gress. Please try again shortly.

1020 Invalid request or unable to val-

idate request.

1021 Statement could not be retrieved

at this time. Please try again
shortly.

Third-Party Services
Use this page to activate or deactivate third-party services, which lets customers download their activity data. Currently,
we support the following third-party services for activity data:

l Mint Service
l CashEdge/Fiserv Aggregation Services
l TradeLog

Who Can Access the Third-Party Services Page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

To activate a third-party service

1. Click Reports > Settings > Third-Party Services.
The Third-Party Services page opens.

2. Click the Activate link for the third-party service you want to use.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 174

Chapter 3 Trader ID

The Service Credentials appear and the Activate link changes to Deactivate. These include a unique token and a query
ID. The status of the service is also added to the Flex Query Delivery Settings page.

Because third-party services use the Flex Web Service, when you activate a third-party service, the Flex Web Service is
also activated. For the purpose of using the third-party service, you do not have to do anything with the Flex Web Ser-
vice. For more information about the Flex Web Service, see Using the Flex Web Service.

3. Write down the Token and Query ID.

4. Log into the third-party service that you are using and follow the instructions there to retrieve your activity data.

To deactivate a third-party service

1. Click Reports > Settings > Third-Party Services.
The Third-Party Services page opens.

2. Click the Deactivate link for the third-party service.

The service is deactivated and the Deactivate link changes to Activate. Also, the third-party service status is updated on
the Flex Query Delivery Settings page.

When you deactivate a third-party service, the Flex Web Service is also deactivated. You can still activate the Flex Web
Service without activating a third-party service if you need to use the Flex Web Service.

Trader ID
Trader ID identifies the person who executed a trade without revealing his or her username. Institutional account master
users use this page to enable Trader ID and view a list of all Trader IDs and their corresponding users, usernames and

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 175

Chapter 3 Trader ID Rules

account IDs.

Once enabled, all users for the master and client/sub accounts will be assigned a unique Trader ID; and the Trader ID
field will be displayed in the Trades section of Activity Statements, Trade Confirmation Reports, Activity and Trade Con-
firmation Flex Queries.

Trader ID Rules

Trader IDs consist of a letter prefix followed by a number in sequence for each username. The letter prefixes are:

l M - Indicates a username associated with the Master account.

l C - Indicates a username associated with a client or sub account.
Who can access the Trader ID page?
You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User

l Proprietary Trading Group Master User (STL accounts)
l Broker Master User
l Investment Manager Master User (multiple fund accounts)

To enable Trader ID
1. Click Reports > Settings > Trader ID.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 176

Chapter 3 Trader ID Rules

2. Click the Enable radio button.

3. Click Submit.
All users associated with the master account and client/sub accounts will be assigned a unique Trader ID. Once assigned,
the Trader IDs will appear on the Trader ID page as shown above.

Trades reported on Activity Statements, Trade Confirmations and Flex Queries will show the Trader ID associated with
the username of the person who submitted the trade.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 177

Chapter 3 Client OATS Settings

Client OATS Settings

The Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA) established the Order Audit Trail System (OATS) as an integrated
audit trail of order, quote and trade information for Nasdaq securities. I-BROKERS are required to supervise the OATS
settings of their client accounts. The Client OATS Settings page displays all open and pending client accounts and the
OATS Master Default Settings. You use this page to configure the OATS settings for your client accounts:

l Override the Master Default Settings for institutional accounts.

l Respond to flashing red alerts for pending client accounts.
l Modify OATS permissions for a specific client account.

Who can access the Client OATS Settings page?

You can access this page if you are a Broker Master User

l and you are a member of FINRA and/or have clients who are members of FINRA
l and you want us to do OATS reporting to FINRA for you and/or your clients.

To override the OATS Master Default Settings for an institutional account

1. Click Reports > Client OATS Settings.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 178

Chapter 3 Client OATS Settings

2. In the list of Open Client Accounts, click the desired Client Account number.

3. In the Account Type list, select RETAIL or WHOLESALE. If you select WHOLESALE, the FINRA Member list
becomes available.
4. In the FINRA Member list, select YES or NO. If you select YES, the FINRA Member Type list becomes available.
5. In the FINRA Member Type list, select NO, OATS Reporting or OATS Non-Reporting. If you select OATS Report-
ing or OATS Non-Reporting, the MPID field becomes available.
6. In the MPID field, type the Market Participant Identifier code to be used for this client account.
7. In the Enable OATS at IB TWS Level list, select Yes or No as required. Click Continue to save your changes.
Click Back to return to the Client OATS Settings page without saving your changes.

To respond to flashing red alerts for pending client accounts

1. Click Reports > Client OATS Settings.
2. An IBroker must resolve all alerts marked in the list of pending accounts that have a flashing red 'YES' in the
ALERT column. In the example below, an IBroker would click the Approve link to respond to the alert.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 179

Chapter 3 Client OATS Settings

To modify OATS permissions for a specific client account.

1. Click Reports > Client OATS Settings.
2. Click the OATS Permissions tab.

3. Click the Modify link for the client whose permissions you wish to change.

4. Modify the settings on the page as required. Click Continue to save your changes.
If you need to make further changes, click Back, then make corrections before submitting.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 180

 4
Funding
This chapter describes how to use the Funds Management functions in the Account Management system. Funds Man-
agement lets you check the status of your deposits, transfers and withdrawals; enter deposit notifications and set up with-
drawals; create bank instructions for fund and position transfers, settlement instructions for cash and position transactions
and recurring instructions for recurring transactions; and authenticate pending fund management requests.

This chapter includes the following topics:

l Viewing Transaction History

l Fund Transfers
l Position Transfers
l Instructions
l Soft Dollars Disbursement

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 181

Chapter 4 Viewing Transaction History

Viewing Transaction History

The Transaction History page lets you view information about cash deposits, cash withdrawals, inbound and outbound
position transfers and internal transfers for your account or for a client or sub account that you manage.

On the Transaction History page, you can:

l View summary information about your transactions, and adjust the time period for which you want to view trans-
actions from the past 10 days to the past 90 days using a slider.
l Search for any transaction by Account ID, transaction type or transaction method.
l Sort the list of transactions by any column.
l View additional details about each transaction in a popup window.
l Cancel a transaction from the details popup window.
l Modify a pending deposit notification.
l Elect to stop payment on a check withdrawal.
l Export the transaction history to Microsoft Excel.
l Print the transaction history.

Who can access the Transaction History page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

Click the following links to see complete descriptions of the fields displayed in the details popup window for each type
of transaction.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 182

Chapter 4 Viewing Transaction History

l Cash Deposits
l Cash Withdrawals
l Position Transfers
l Internal Transfers (including hedge fund investment and redemption requests from the Hedge Fund Investor Site)

To view summary information about your transactions

1. Click Funding > Transaction History.

2. By default, the Transaction History page shows all of your funding transactions for the past ten days. You can
adjust that up to the past 90 days by adjusting the time slider. Click and drag the ball on the slider right or left
with your mouse to change the time. The page updates to display all of your funding transactions for the selected
period.

3. By default, transactions are displayed by date in descending order. Change the sort order by clicking any column
heading. To change the sort order from descending to ascending, click the column heading again.
For example, if you want to view all deposits listed together, click the Type column heading.

4. Search for a specific transaction by Account ID, Account Title, Transaction Type (deposit, withdrawal, etc.) or
Transaction Method (check, wire, etc.) by typing the search criteria in the Smart Search field. The Smart Search
starts searching as soon as you begin typing (you do not have to type an entire ID or word). Search words are not
case sensitive.

5. View additional details about any transaction by clicking the transaction row. Transaction details appear in a
popup window.
6. From the transaction detail popup window, perform any of the following optional operations:
l Print the transaction details by clicking Print button.
l Cancel any transaction that has a status of Pending or Not Confirmed.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 183

Chapter 4 Request a stop payment of a check withdrawal

l In some cases, you may need to modify a deposit notification before any funds have actually been moved. You
can modify any check or wire deposit notification that you have already submitted and have a status of Pending.
For example, you might submit a deposit notification for a wire deposit, but then realize that you typed the wrong
amount.
l Stop payment on a check withdrawal
Close the popup window by clicking the red X icon in the upper corner.

DO NOT CLICK THE CANCEL BUTTON AS THAT WILL CANCEL THE TRANSACTION.

To cancel a transaction
1. Find the funding transaction that you want to cancel. If necessary, re-sort the columns or use the smart search to
find the transaction.
2. Click the transaction to open the details popup window.
For example, here are the details of a pending wire withdrawal.

3. Click the Cancel button. Do not click the red X icon as that only closes the popup window.
4. Click OK when prompted to confirm your cancel request.
5. Click the red X icon to close the popup window. Note that the status of the transaction on the Transaction His-
tory page has changed to Cancelled.

To modify a deposit notification

Note: Remember, deposit notifications do not actually move your funds. They only notify us of your
intention to deposit funds using the deposit method you selected.

1. Find the funding transaction that you want to mdify. If necessary, re-sort the columns or use the smart search to
find the transaction.
2. Click the transaction to open the details popup window.
3. Click Modify.Editable fields change to text boxes.
4. Modify the information that you need to change, then click Submit.
5. Click OK when prompted to confirm your request.
6. Click the red X icon to close the popup window.

Request a stop payment of a check withdrawal

You can submit a request to stop payment of a check withdrawal on the Transaction History page. Stop payment requests
are subject to the following rules:

l Stop payments can only be requested for check withdrawals.

l You can request a stop payment for check withdrawals from the last 90 days only. On the Transaction History
page, all check withdrawals from the last 90 days are displayed.
l You cannot request more than one stop payment for a single check withdrawal.
l The option to stop payment only appears when a check withdrawal transaction’s status is Processing.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 184

Chapter 4 Cash Deposit Details

To request a stop payment of a check withdrawal

1. Click any check withdrawal to display the transaction details in a popup window.
2. Click the Stop Payment button.
3. A confirmation message appears. Click OK to continue with your stop payment request.
4. Select a reason for the stop payment, then click Continue. Available reasons include:
l Non-receipt
l Incorrect address
l Lost/stolen/damage
l I did not request
5. Read the Stop Payment Affidavit, then type your name in the field provided and click Continue. This indicates
that you are signing the affidavit.

An email containing a confirmation number is sent to you.

6. Enter the confirmation number from the email, then click Continue to complete the stop payment request process
and return to the Transaction History page.

To export the transaction history to Microsoft Excel

Click the Export button located in the upper right section of the page. You are prompted to save or download the .XLS
page to your computer (depending on your web browser). Once saved, you can open that file in Microsoft Excel.

To print the transaction history

Click the Print button located in the upper right section of the page. The Transaction History as currently displayed will
print.

Cash Deposit Details

Cash deposit details display the following information for each deposit transaction listed on the Transaction History
page:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 185

Chapter 4 Cash Deposit Details

Column Description
Type The deposit type appears at
the top of the transaction
details popup window:

l Check
l Wire (could be a
bank or broker wire)
l Bill Payment Check
l ACH - Initiated at
Your Bank
l ACH - Initiated By
Us
l Canadian EFT
Action Buttons Depending on the type and
status of the transaction,
one or more of the following
buttons appear at the top of
the transaction details
popup window:

l Print - Click to print

the transaction
details.
l Modify - Click to
modify a transaction.
l Submit - Click to sub-
mit changes to a trans-
action.
l Cancel - Click to can-
cel a transaction.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 186

Chapter 4 Cash Deposit Details

Column Description
Current Status The current status of the
transaction. Can be one of
the following:

l Cancelled - The
deposit was can-
celled.
l Rejected - The
deposit was rejected
by us.
l Expired - The deposit
expired before it
arrived. All trans-
actions that have not
been confirmed expire
after ten business
days.
l Funds Received - The
transaction was pro-
cessed and the funds
have been received.
l Pending Receipt -
You have notified us
of a deposit but it has
not yet arrived, and
the transaction has
not expired, been can-
celled or rejected.
l Hold - The deposit
has arrived but has
not yet been credited
to your account.
l Available - The
deposit has been cred-
ited to your account
and the funds are now
available.
Date Requested The date on which you noti-
fied us of the deposit.
Transaction ID A unique identifier assigned
to the transaction by us.
Account ID Your Account ID.
Account Title The name of your account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 187

Chapter 4 Cash Deposit Details

Column Description
Amount The amount and currency of
the transaction.
Delivering Institution The bank or delivering insti-
tution where the transaction
originated.
Account Number Your account number at
your bank or delivering insti-
tution.
Routing Number The ABA or routing number
at your bank or delivering
institution.
Check Number For check deposits, the num-
ber printed on the check.
IRA Deposit Type The type of IRA deposit:

l Contribution
l Rollover
And for a Rollover, the type
of IRA:
l Traditional IRA
l Roth IRA
l SEP IRA
Tax Year of Contribution The tax year of the
IRA contribution.
Date Received The date on which the
deposit arrived.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 188

 Chapter 4 Cash Deposit Details

Column Description
Date Available for Trading The date on which the depos-
ited funds were credited to
your account:

l For checks and bill

payment checks, this
is the Arrival Date +
seven business days.
l For bank checks,
bank wire transfers
and broker wire trans-
fers, this is the same
as the Arrival Date.
l For ACH - Initiated
By Us, ACH at Your
Bank or Canadian
EFT, this is the
Arrival Date + four
business days.
Date Available For With- The date on which the depos-
drawal ited funds are available for
you to withdraw.
Date Available For With- For ACH Initiated by Us and
drawal - Orginal Bank Canadian EFT deposits
only, this is the date on
which deposited funds are
available to withdraw to the
bank or delivering institution
where the deposit ori-
ginated.
Date Available For With- For ACH Initiated by Us and
drawal - Other Bank1 Canadian EFT deposits
only, the date on which
deposited funds are avail-
able to withdraw to a bank
that is not where the deposit
originated.

1 For security purposes, ACH deposits initiated by the customer via our website are restricted from being sent to anywhere
other than originating bank/bank account for 40 business days. This withdrawal hold period is not applicable if the trans-
fer was initiated via the customer's bank or if the funds are being sent back to the originating bank and bank account.
Similarly, Canadian Electronic Funds Transfers initiated by the customer via the website are restricted from being sent to
anywhere other than originating bank/bank account for 60 business days. This withdrawal hold period is not applicable
if the transfer was initiated via the customer's bank or if the funds are being sent back to the originating account, bank
and deposit method.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 189

Chapter 4 Cash Withdrawal Details

Cash Withdrawal Details

Cash withdrawal details display the following information for each deposit transaction listed on the Transaction History
page:

Column Description
Type The withdrawal type
appears at the top of the
transaction details popup
window:

l Check
l Wire Transfer – Bank
l Wire Transfer –
Broker
l ACH By Us
l Canadian EFT
Action Buttons The following buttons
appear at the top of the
transaction details popup
window:

l Print - Click to print

the transaction
details.
l Modify - Click to
modify a transaction.
l Cancel - Click to can-
cel a transaction.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 190

Chapter 4 Cash Withdrawal Details

Column Description
Current Status The current status of the
transaction. Can be one of
the following:

l Cancelled - The trans-

action was cancelled.
l Rejected - The trans-
action was rejected
by us.
l Expired - The with-
drawal expired before
it was sent. All trans-
actions that have not
been confirmed
expire after ten busi-
ness days.
l Not Confirmed -
Your funding request
has not been con-
firmed. This also may
include
"The required number
of Financial Author-
izers have not author-
ized this request." if
your account requires
deposit transactions
to be authorized.
l Pending - Your with-
drawal request has
been received and is
being reviewed.
l Pending Advisor -
Your withdrawal
request has been
received by us, but
has not been
approved by your
advisor. If your
advisor doesn't
approve within three
business days, the
funds will auto-
matically be released.
l Sent - The funds have

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 191

Chapter 4 Cash Withdrawal Details

Column Description
been withdrawn from
your account.
l Call Client Services -
There is an issue with
your transaction
request that you must
resolve by calling Cli-
ent Services. Click
Support > Contacts
for instructions on
contacting Client Ser-
vices.

Date Requested The date on which you

requested the withdrawal.
Transaction ID A unique identifier assigned
to the transaction by us.
Account ID Your Account ID.

Account Title The name of your account.

Amount The amount and currency of

the transaction.
Federal Tax Withholding The amount of Federal
Amount taxes (and tax rate) withheld
from a withdrawal from an
IRA account.
State Tax Withholding The amount of state taxes
Amount (and tax rate) withheld from
a withdrawal from an
IRA account.
Receiving Institution The bank or delivering insti-
tution where the funds are
sent.
Date Processed The date on which the with-
drawal was processed.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 192

Chapter 4 Position Transfers Details

Position Transfers Details

Position transfer details display the following information for each inbound and outbound position transfer listed on the
Transaction History page:

Column Description

Type One of the following types

of inbound or outbound pos-
ition transfers:

l ACATS – US Secur-
ities
l Free of Payment
(FOP) – US Stocks
l Direct Registration
System (DRS) – US
Stocks
l Deposit/Withdraw
at Custodian
(DWAC)
l ATON – Canadian
Securities
l To Another Account
l To an Advisor-Man-
aged Account
l Free Delivery -
A free delivery trans-
action not initiated
in Account Man-
agement.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 193

Chapter 4 Position Transfers Details

Column Description

Action Buttons The following buttons

appear at the top of the
transaction details popup
window:

l Print - Click to print

the transaction
details.
l Modify - Click to
modify a trans-
action.
l Cancel - Click to
cancel a transaction.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 194

Chapter 4 Position Transfers Details

Column Description

Current Status The current status of the

transaction. Can be one of
the following:

l Cancelled - The
transfer was can-
celled.
l Rejected - The trans-
fer was rejected by
us.
l Expired - The trans-
fer expired before it
was sent. All trans-
actions that have
not been confirmed
expire after ten busi-
ness days.
l Acknowledged -
The contra broker
has confirmed
receipt of the
ACATS or ATON
transfer instructions.
l Resubmitted - The
contra broker was
unable to confirm
the initial instruc-
tions for the ACATS
or ATON transfer.
l Pending Receipt -
The transfer has not
yet arrived, and has
not expired, been
cancelled or rejec-
ted.
l Available - The
transferred positions
and/or funds have
been credited to
your account and
are now available.
l Hold - The transfer
is on hold. Contact
Client Services.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 195

Chapter 4 Position Transfers Details

Column Description

Click Support >

Contacts for instruc-
tions on contacting
Client Services.

Date Requested The date on which you

requested the position
transfer.

Transaction ID A unique identifier

assigned to the transaction
by us.

Account ID Your Account ID.

Account Title The name of your account.

Cash/Positions Full Transfer or Partial

Transfer. For Partial Trans-
fers, moving your mouse
over the text “Partial Trans-
fer” displays details of the
transfer.

Delivering Institution For inbound transfers only -

The bank or institution
where the transaction ori-
ginated.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 196

Chapter 4 Internal Transfer Details

Column Description

Account Number at Insti- The account number at the

tution bank or insitution where
the transaction originated.

Receiving Institution The bank or institution

receiving the transferred
positions and/or funds.

Date Processed For outbound transfers

only - The date on which
we processed the transfer.

Date Available for Trading For inbound transfers only -

The date on which the
transferred positions
and/or funds were credited
to your account. This is the
arrival date.

Date Available For With- For inbound transfers only -

drawal The date on which the
transferred positions
and/or funds were or will be
available. This is ten days
after the arrival date.

Internal Transfer Details

Internal transfer details display the following information for each internal transfer listed on the Transaction History
page:

Column Description
Action Buttons The following buttons
appear at the top of the
transaction details popup
window:

l Print - Click to print

the transaction
details.
l Modify - Click to
modify a transaction.
l Cancel - Click to can-
cel a transaction.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 197

Chapter 4 Internal Transfer Details

Column Description
Current Status The current status of the
transaction. Can be one of
the following:

l Approved - The
internal transfer has
been approved and
the funds have been
transferred..
l Cancelled - The trans-
action was cancelled.
l Rejected - The trans-
action was rejected
by us.
l Pending - The funds
have not yet been
transferred to the des-
tination account.
Date Requested The date on which you
requested the internal trans-
fer.
Transaction ID A unique identifier assigned
to the transaction by us.
Account ID Your Account ID.

Account Title The name of your account.

Amount The amount and currency

of the transaction.
From The source account of the
internal transfer.
To The destination account of
the internal transfer.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 198

Chapter 4 Fund Transfers

Fund Transfers
The Fund Transfers menu lets you view the funds status of your account, and initiate deposit notifications, withdrawals
and internal fund transfers. Specifically, you can:

l Check the status of your funds, including cash balance and cash available for withdrawal.
l Notify us of a deposit of funds
l Request a withdrawal of funds
l Transfer Funds Internally

In addition, you can:

l Save bank information

l Create recurring transactions
l Request a wire withdrawal of funds from your account to a third party

Who can access the Fund Transfers page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Organization (master and client account)
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Broker Non-Disclosed Client User
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

Checking the Status of Your Funds

To check the status of your funds

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 199

Chapter 4 Funds Status

1. Click Funding > Fund Transfers.

2. If you have a master account, use the Account Selector to search for client or sub accounts by Account ID,
Account Title or Account Alias, then click the client or sub account whose fund status you want to view.
Funds status for the selected account appears at the top of the page.

Funds Status

The Fund Transfers page displays the following fund status information:

Field Description Notes

Cash Balance The current debit or credit All non-base currency balances are
balance of cash posted to converted into your base currency.
your account. Shown in
your account’s base cur-
rency.

Cash Available for The total amount of cash in The balance available for withdrawal
Withdrawal your account that may be may be less than your total Cash
(assuming margin withdrawn, assuming you Balance. For example, for a margin
loan) have a margin loan. Shown account, cash balances are being
in your account’s base cur- used to satisfy your margin require-
rency. ment, or for a cash account, any por-
tion of that balance represents
proceeds from trades that have not
yet settled. In addition, there is a
withdrawal hold period of three busi-
ness days placed on deposits made
by either wire transfer or bank
check.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 200

Chapter 4 Depositing Funds

Field Description Notes

Withdrawable The total amount of cash in For security purposes, ACH depos-
Cash your account that may be its initiated by the customer from our
Subject to Ori- withdrawn with restrictions website are restricted from being
gination Restric- on where the withdrawal sent anywhere other than to the ori-
tion can be sent. Shown in your ginating bank/bank account for 40
account’s base currency. business days. This withdrawal hold
period is not applicable if the transfer
was initiated from the customer's
bank or if the funds are being sent
back to the originating bank and
bank account.

Similarly, Canadian Electronic

Funds Transfers initiated by the cus-
tomer from our website are restric-
ted from being sent anywhere other
than to the originating bank/bank
account for 60 business days. This
withdrawal hold period is not applic-
able if the transfer was initiated via
the customer's bank or if the funds
are being sent back to the originating
account, bank and deposit method.

Deposit Not Yet The total balance of depos- Deposits made by ACH, Canadian
Posted its received but subject to Electronic Funds Transfer and
a credit hold. These depos- check are subject to a credit hold
its are not included in any period prior to those funds being pos-
other account balance dis- ted to the customer's account.
played. Shown in your
account’s base currency.

Depositing Funds
The Fund Transfers page lets you notify us of a deposit of funds into your account. A deposit notification does not actu-
ally move funds; you must make arrangements with your bank or broker to deposit the funds.

We support the following types of deposits:

l Wire
l Check (all checks, including retirement checks)
l Online bill payment check
l Automated Clearing House (ACH) transfer initiated By Us
l ACH transfer initiated by your bank
l Canadian Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT) initiated by Us(Canada only)
l AUD Bill payment (BPAY - for Australian Dollars only)

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 201

Chapter 4 Depositing Funds

l Direct Rollover (IRA accounts only)

l Trustee-to-Trustee (IRA accounts only)

Deposit notifications are easy to complete. All required information appears as a form that you complete on a single page
- as you fill in a field or make a selection, the next part of the notification form appears.

Short Video

To notify us of a deposit
1. Click Funding > Fund Transfers.
2. If you have a master account, use the Account Selector to search for client or sub accounts by Account ID,
Account Title or Account Alias, then select the desired client or sub account.
3. In the Transaction Type list, select Deposit.
4. Select your currency from the Currency list.
5. In the Method list, select a deposit type.
6. Type the amount of your intended deposit in the Amount field. Note that you do not enter an amount when you
first set up an ACH Initiated By Us or Canadian EFT deposit.
7. You are asked if you want to use previously saved bank information.
Select one of the following:

l Yes - Use saved bank information for new transfer request

Select this option if you want to use previously saved bank information for this deposit request.
l No - Create new transfer request with new bank information
Select this option if you want to save new bank information for this deposit request. This option is automatically
selected if you do not have any saved any bank information.
If you select No, complete all the fields that appear, which vary depending on the withdrawal method you selected.

The fields vary depending on your previous selections.

8. Be sure to enter a Name for the bank instruction that will be saved with your bank information. You will be able
to use this bank instruction for future deposit notifications without having to re-enter your bank information.
You can view all of your saved bank instructions on the Bank Information page.

9. Decide if you want to save the information as a recurring transaction.

If you would like to save this as a recurring transaction, click Yes, then complete all the fields and selections in that sec-
tion.

You can view all of your saved recurring transactions on the Recurring Transactions page.

If you do not want to save this transaction as a recurring transaction, click No.

10. Click Continue to submit your deposit notification.

Or click Cancel to cancel the transaction.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 202

Chapter 4 Withdrawing Funds

Depending on the type of deposit notification you selected, a page appears with additional instructions that describe
what you need to provide to your bank to complete the actual deposit of funds.

11. Click Funding > View Transaction History at any time to view the status of your deposit notification.

Withdrawing Funds
The Fund Transfers page lets you request a withdrawal of funds from your account or an internal fund transfer to another
account here. We support the following kinds of withdrawal requests:

l Wire
l US ACH transfer initiated By Us (US accounts only)
l Check (only available for US currency; your mailing address must be in the US)
l Canadian EFT transfer (Canadian accounts only)
l SEPA (Single Euro Payments Area) Initiated By Us

The following rules apply to withdrawals:

l Accounts that do not participate in our Secure Login System are limited in the amount of money that can be with-
drawn. Account holders without a security device are limited to a maximum withdrawal of 50,000 USD per day
and a maximum withdrawal of 100,000 USD in five business days. For more information, see Withdrawal Limits.
l Typically withdrawal requests submitted prior to the cut-off will be sent that day, under normal business cir-
cumstances; however, in certain cases a withdrawal request may be subject for further review which may result in
a delay. We apologize for any inconvenience.
l There is no charge for the first withdrawal (of any kind) in a calendar month; however, we will charge withdrawal
fees for any subsequent withdrawal.
l All withdrawals will be sent in the name of the account holder.

To request a cash withdrawal from your account

1. Click Funding > Fund Transfers.
2. If you have a master account, use the Account Selector to search for client or sub accounts by Account ID,
Account Title or Account Alias, then select the desired client or sub account.
3. In the Transaction Type list, select Withdraw.

4. Select your currency from the Currency list.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 203

Chapter 4 Withdrawing Funds

5. In the Method list, select a withdrawal type.

6. Type the amount of your withdrawal in the Amount field. Note that you do not enter an amount when you first
set up an ACH Initiated By Us or Canadian EFT deposit.

7. If you have previously saved any bank information as bank instructions, you are asked if you want to use one.

Select one of the following:

l Yes - Use saved bank information for new transfer request

Select this option if you want to use previously saved bank information for this withdrawal request.
l No - Create new bank information only
Select this option if you only want to create new saved bank information without transferring any funds (for
example, if you are a non-US customer who is closing an account).
The following image shows a Wire withdrawal using a saved bank instruction.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 204

Chapter 4 Withdrawing Funds

If you select No, complete all the fields that appear, which vary depending on the withdrawal method you selected.

If you select Wire as the withdrawal method, you are prompted to select a Wire Type:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 205

Chapter 4 Withdrawing Funds

Then you are prompted to select your bank's country:

8. If you do not know your bank's routing number, click the Search button next to the routing number field.

Then enter information about your bank in the popup window and click Continue.

A list of all banks along with their routing numbers appears. Select your specific bank. The routing number for the bank
you select will be entered into the routing number field for you.

9. Be sure to enter a Name for the bank instruction that will be saved with your bank information. You will be able
to use this bank instruction for future withdrawals without having to re-enter your bank information.
You can view all of your saved bank instructions on the Bank Information page.

10. Decide if you want to save the information as a recurring transaction.

11. If you would like to save this as a recurring transaction, click Yes, then complete all the fields and selections in
that section.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 206

Chapter 4 ACH Initiated By Us and Canadian EFT Transactions

If you do not want to save this transaction as a recurring transaction, click No.

12. Click Continue to submit your withdrawal request. An email with a confirmation number is immediately sent to
your email address.

Or click Cancel to cancel the transaction.

The Verify Your Identity page appears with additional information about your withdrawal request.

13. Enter your username, password and the confirmation number sent to your email address. Click Confirm.

If you did not receive a confirmation number, click the Resend button to receive a new one.

14. Click Funding > View Transaction History at any time to view the status of your deposit notification.

ACH Initiated By Us and Canadian EFT Transactions

The process of requesting ACH Initiated By Us and Canadian EFT deposit notifications and withdrawals is somewhat dif-
ferent from other transaction methods.

The process for these transactions is described below:

1. On the Funding > Fund Transfers page, after you select the transaction type, currency and the transaction
method, you enter and save your bank information just as you would for any other funding deposit or withdrawal
method. Note that you do not enter an amount.
2. Once you submit this request, which authorizes us and your bank to electronically transfer funds between the two
accounts, we will issue test transactions in the form of small debit and credit amounts to your bank account. Note
that this request does not actually move your funds.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 207

Chapter 4 Transferring Funds Internally

3. You must then verify these test transactions. This verification process ensures that the person entering bank inform-
ation is the legitimate owner of the bank account to be used in the transaction.
4. Now that the verification process has been completed, you can submit an ACH Initiated By Us deposit or Cana-
dian EFT deposit notification or withdrawal request on the Fund Transfers page using the bank information that
you’ve already saved. This request will include the actual amount and will move your funds.

Transferring Funds Internally

The Fund Transfers page lets you transfer funds internally from your account or an internal fund transfer to another
account here. We support the following kinds of internal fund transfers:

l Internal fund transfer to another account (all account structures) with matching Account Name, Account Title, and
Tax ID.
l Linked accounts can use this type of transfer. However, multiple accounts that are eligible to be linked but are
not currently linked cannot use this type of transfer; these account holders will receive an error message.
l Internal fund transfer between a master and sub account. The account types are eligible:
o Proprietary Trading Groups - Separate Trading Limit accounts.
o Non-disclosed Brokers.
o Separate Trading Limit accounts can also transfer funds between two sub accounts.
l Internal fund transfer to a client or sub account. The following account types are eligible:
o Advisor Masters can transfer funds to a client account with trading privileges or a client account with a match-
ing Account Name, Account Title and Tax ID.
o Investment Manager Masters (Fund Advisors) can transfer funds to an Omnibus Fund sub account, and to any
client/sub account with a matching Account Name, Account Title and Tax ID.
o Fully Disclosed Brokers.

To request a cash withdrawal from your account

1. Click Funding > Fund Transfers.
2. In the Transaction list, select Internal Transfers.

The Internal Funds Transfers section appears.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 208

Chapter 4 Saving Bank Information

3. Select the source account number from the Source Account Number drop-down list.
If there are any destination accounts eligible to receive an internal funds transfer, the Destination Account Number drop-
down list appears.

4. Enter the amount of the transfer, the currency and select the Destination Account Number.
5. Click Continue.
l Click Cancel at any time to cancel the transaction.
6. Verify that the details of the internal funds transfer are correct, then click Continue.
7. You will immediately receive an email notification containing a confirmation number. Enter the confirmation
number where indicated on the Internal Funds Transfer page, then click Confirm
l If you did not receive a confirmation number, click Resend Confirmation Number to receive a new one.

Saving Bank Information

As the name implies, bank information contains information about the financial institution involved in a funding trans-
action in your account.

When you set up a deposit notification or withdrawal on the Fund Transfers page, you are prompted to save the inform-
ation about your financial institution. This bank information is saved as a bank instruction and you can view all of your
bank instructions on the Funding > Bank Instructions page.

For example, the following image shows a wire deposit being set up for the first time. After you select the transaction
type, currency, enter the amount of the transaction and select the method, you are prompted to enter information about
your bank, including the name of the bank instruction to be saved.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 209

Chapter 4 Saving Bank Information

Note: All deposit and withdrawal types EXCEPT check withdrawals require that you enter your bank
information, including a name for the bank instruction, before you submit the transaction. You can
still save bank information for check withdrawals as bank instructions, however.

Once your transaction request has been submitted, the bank information you entered is saved as a bank instruction. The
next time you set up a funding transaction and complete the first four fields (Transaction Type, Currency, Amount and
Method), you will be prompted to use a saved bank instruction, as shown in the following image.

If you answer no, you will be prompted to enter bank information, including a bank instruction name, which will be
saved when you submit the transaction request.

If you answer yes, you are prompted to select a saved bank instruction, as shown in the image below. In this example,
there are three bank instructions already saved.

Use the Bank Information page to delete bank instructions you no longer need to use.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 210

Chapter 4 About Recurring Transactions

About Recurring Transactions

The last step in setting up a deposit or withdrawal transaction before you submit the transaction request is the option to
create a recurring transaction based on your transaction request.

l You can view and delete existing recurring transactions.

l You can set up all deposit and withdrawal transaction types to be recurring transactions EXCEPT Direct
Rollovers and Trustee-to-Trustee deposits, which are only available for IRA accounts.

In a funding transaction request, after you enter all of the information about your financial institution, you are prompted
to create a recurring transaction:

If you answer no, you can submit the transaction request and no recurring transaction will be created. If you answer yes,
the recurring transaction fields appear:

To set up a recurring transaction, you specify the following information:

l A name. This is the name of the saved recurring transaction and it appears in the list on the Recurring Trans-
actions page.
l Frequency - Schedule the transaction to recur at monthly, quarterly or annual intervals.
l A start date, in the format mm/dd/yyyy, or use the calendar icon to select a date. This indicates the first date that
the recurring transaction should be processed.
l An end date, in the format mm/dd/yyyy, or use the calendar icon to select a date. This indicates the last date that
the recurring transaction should be processed.
l If you have an IRA account, you must also specify:
o For deposits, tax year (current only) and deposit type (Contribution only).
o For withdrawals, the percentage of tax to be withheld the distribution type.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 211

Chapter 4 Canceling a Recurring Transaction

l You can also specify that a recurring transaction has no end date and therefore will not expire until you delete it.
You do this by selecting the Endlesscheck box.

When you submit your transaction request, the recurring transaction information you entered will also be saved and the
transaction will recur at the frequency and on the start date that you entered.

Note: In the event the transaction falls on a US non-business day under normal circumstances, we will pro-
cess the request on the business day prior to the recurring transaction date. In the even this pro-
cessing leads to multiple withdrawals during the same month, the account holder will be assessed
withdrawal fees.

Canceling a Recurring Transaction

To cancel a recurring transaction, delete the recurring transaction from the Recurring Transaction page.

Withdrawing Funds to a Third Party

The Fund Transfers page lets you request a wire withdrawal of funds from your account to an eligible third party. Only
wire withdrawals are allowed. A third-party withdrawal is a two-step process:

1. Enter third-party information and submit it to us for approval.

2. Upon approval of the payee information, create and submit a third-party withdrawal request using the approved
information as the bank information for the withdrawal. Note that the actual withdrawal request is also subject to
approval.

Who is eligible to withdraw funds to a third party?

The following IB LLC, IB UK, IB HK and IB Canada accounts are eligible to withdraw funds to a third party:

l Individual, Joint and Trust accounts - The primary account holder and any account user with funding access rights
in an Individual account, either account holder in a Joint account, and any trustee in a Trust account with funding
access rights can enter third- party withdrawal payee information and initiate third-party wire withdrawals.
l Advisor accounts - Only the Registered Advisor is allowed to enter third-party withdrawal payee information and
initiate third-party withdrawal requests.
l Proprietary Trading Group STL account master users and Pool accounts - The master user and any account user
with funding access rights can enter third-party withdrawal payee information and initiate third-party wire with-
drawals. Officers, traders or owners of the proprietary trading organization are not eligible unless they have fund-
ing access rights.
l Hedge Fund Accounts - The Fund Investment Manager and any account user with funding access rights can enter
third-party withdrawal payee information and initiate third-party wire withdrawals. The Hedge Fund can request
third-party withdrawals to vendors and administrators but not to individual investors of the Fund or the Invest-
ment Manager.
l Fully Disclosed Broker accounts - The individual users with funding access rights can enter third-party with-
drawal payee information and initiate third-party wire withdrawal requests.
The following accounts are NOT eligible to withdraw funds to a third party:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 212

Chapter 4 Withdrawing Funds to a Third Party

l Master and client accounts under an unregistered Advisor account (Friends and Family account and Family Office
account with an unregistered Advisor)
l IRA accounts
l Non-disclosed and Omnibus Broker accounts
l In a Proprietary Trading Group account, any user OTHER than the master user and other than users with funding
access rights.

To enter third-party information and submit it to us

1. Click Funding > Fund Transfers.
2. If you have a master account, use the Account Selector to search for client or sub accounts by Account ID,
Account Title or Account Alias, then select the desired client or sub account.
3. In the Transaction Type list, select Third Party Withdrawal.

4. Select your currency from the Currency list.

Wire is pre-selected for you as the withdrawal method.

5. In the Wire Type section, select a wire type.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 213

Chapter 4 Withdrawing Funds to a Third Party

6. Select the country of the financial institution that will receive the wire on behalf of the third party.

7. Fill in the rest of the information about the financial institution that will receive the wire on behalf of the third
party.

8. If you do not know your bank's routing number, click the Search button next to the routing number field.
Then enter information about your bank in the popup window and click Continue.

A list of all banks along with their routing numbers appears. Select your specific bank. The routing number for the bank
you select will be entered into the routing number field for you.

9. Fill in the information about the third-party payee.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 214

Chapter 4 Withdrawing Funds to a Third Party

10. Enter a Name for the bank instruction that will be saved with your bank information.

11. Click Continue to submit the third-party payee information to us for approval.
You will be notified when we approve the information.

To withdraw funds to a third party via a wire transfer

1. Click Funding > Fund Transfers.
2. If you have a master account, use the Account Selector to search for client or sub accounts by Account ID,
Account Title or Account Alias, then select the desired client or sub account.
3. In the Transaction Type list, select Third Party Withdrawal.
4. Select your currency from the Currency list.
Wire is preselected for you as the withdrawal method.

5. You are asked if you want to use previously saved bank information. From the drop-down, select the approved
bank information that you previously submitted for your third-party withdrawal.
6. Type the amount of your withdrawal in the Amount field.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 215

Chapter 4 Withdrawing Funds to a Third Party

7. Click Continue to submit your third-party withdrawal request.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 216

Chapter 4 Position Transfers

Position Transfers
The Position Transfers menu lets you transfer positions to and from your account. We support the following types of pos-
ition transfers in Account Management:

l Automated Customer Account Transfer Service (ACATS)

l Account Transfer on Notification (ATON) for Canadian securities
l DRS - Direct Registration System
l DWAC - Deposit/Withdraw at Custodian
l Transfer Assets to an Advisor-Managed Account
l Transfer International Assets
l Free of Payment (FOP) for US stocks
l US futures
l Transfer Positions Internally
l Position Transfer Between Master and Sub

When you request an ACATS, ATON or FOP position transfer, you have the option of creating and/or using a Position
Instruction.

Who can access the Position Transfers page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Organization (master and client account)
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client Users
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Broker Non-Disclosed Client User
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 217

Chapter 4 ACATS Transfers

ACATS Transfers
The Position Transfers page lets you transfer US stocks, warrants, options US mutual funds, US bonds and cash held at
another brokerage firm to us through the National Securities Clearing Corporation's (NSCC) Automated Customer
Account Transfer Service (ACATS).

When you select ACATS as the transfer method on the Position Transfers page, you can:

l Request a Full ACATS transfer, in which all of your assets are transferred from a third-party broker to
your account.
l Request a Partial ACATS transfer without a Position Instruction, in which you transfer only some of your assets
and cash from a third-party broker to your account and you do not use an optional Position Instruction.
l Request a Partial ACATS transfer using a Position Instruction, in which you use a previously-created Position
Instruction to transfer only some of your assets and cash from a third-party broker to your account.
l Create a new Position Instruction, which lets you save and reuse third-party broker information for future Partial
ACATS transfers.

Note: Your Account Name, Tax Identification Number and Customer Type (i.e. individual, joint, Roth
IRA), must exactly match the third-party broker account in order for the transfer to take place.

Requesting a Full ACATS Transfer

To request a full ACATS transfer

1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. If you have a master account or multiple accounts, use the Account Selector to search for and select the account
for which you want to request a position transfer.
3. In the Transfer Method list, select ACATS.
4. In the Type list, select Full.
The Check Eligibility button appears.

5. Optionally, check the eligibility of your positions by clicking the Check Eligibility button. For details, see
Checking Position Eligibility for a Full ACATS of ATON Transfer.
6. In the Source list, select your third-party broker. You can type the first two or three letters of the broker’s name to
quickly jump to that broker in the list.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 218

Chapter 4 Requesting a Partial ACATS Transfer without a Position Instruc-
tion

The ACATS Request page appears.

7. In the Account Information section, verify that your Account Title, Account Number, Tax ID Number and Cus-
tomer Type exactly matches the information in your third-party broker account
8. In the Account Number field, type the account number for your third-party broker account exactly as it appears on
your statement from your delivering firm.
9. In the Assets To Be Transferred section, click the appropriate radio button to answer Yes or No to the three ques-
tions.
10. Click Continue.
11. On the page that appears, type your signature in the Signature field, and then click Continue.
12. On the Confirmation page, enter the confirmation number that you received via email in the Confirmation Num-
ber field, then click Confirm.
If you do not receive a Confirmation Number by email, please check your junk email folder as sometimes email fil-
ters block messages.
Or click Resend Confirmation Number to receive another confirmation email.
Or click Cancel to cancel the transfer request.

Requesting a Partial ACATS Transfer without a Position Instruction

Note: See Position Instructions for information about viewing and deleting position instructions.
ACATS Position Instructions can only be used with Partial ACATS transfers.

To request a partial ACATS transfer without a Position Instruction

1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. If you have a master account or multiple accounts, use the Account Selector to search for and select the account
for which you want to request a position transfer.
3. In the Transfer Method list, select ACATS.
4. In the Type list, select Partial.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 219

Chapter 4 Requesting a Partial ACATS Transfer without a Position Instruc-
tion

5. In the Source list, select your third-party broker. You can type the first two or three letters of the broker’s name to
quickly jump to that broker in the list.
The ACATS Request page appears.

6. In the Account Number field, type the account number for your third-party broker account exactly as it appears on
your statement from your delivering firm.
7. In the Assets To Be Transferred section, click the appropriate radio button to answer Yes or No to the three ques-
tions.
8. Click Continue.
The Partial ACATS Transfer page appears.

9. Select an asset type to transfer, then click the Add button.

10. Enter the required information for each asset to be transferred, then click Add.

Each time you click Add, the partial asset you specified is added to the list of assets to transfer.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 220

Chapter 4 Requesting a Partial ACATS Transfer Using an Existing Pos-
ition Instruction

11. Click Remove to remove an asset from the list.

12. When the list of assets to be transferred is complete, click Finish.
13. Repeat the steps above for each asset type.
14. On the ACATS Signature page, review the information on the page. Delete assets from the list or add more assets
to transfer as required. Then type your name in the Signature field and click Continue.
15. On the Confirmation page, enter the confirmation number that you received via email in the Confirmation Num-
ber field, then click Confirm.
If you do not receive a Confirmation Number by email, please check your junk email folder as sometimes email fil-
ters block messages.
Or click Resend Confirmation Number to receive another confirmation email.
Or click Cancel to cancel the transfer request.

Requesting a Partial ACATS Transfer Using an Existing Position Instruction

Note: See Position Instructions for information about viewing and deleting position instructions.
ACATS Position Instructions can only be used with Partial ACATS transfers.

To request a partial ACATS transfer using an existing Position Instruction

1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. If you have a master account or multiple accounts, use the Account Selector to search for and select the account
for which you want to request a position transfer.
3. In the Transfer Method list, select ACATS.
4. In the Type list, select Use/Create Instruction.This option allows you to use an existing Position Instruction or cre-
ate a new one.
5. In the Instruction list, select a previously-created Position Instruction from the list.
The instruction details appear on the screen and you can immediately begin adding assets to your partial ACATS
transfer.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 221

Chapter 4 Requesting a Partial ACATS Transfer Using an Existing Pos-
ition Instruction

6. Select an asset type to transfer, then click the Add button.

7. Enter the required information for each asset to be transferred, then click Add.

Each time you click Add, the partial asset you specified is added to the list of assets to transfer.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 222

Chapter 4 Creating a Position Instruction for a Partial ACATS Transfer

8. Click Remove to remove an asset from the list.

9. When the list of assets to be transferred is complete, click Finish.
10. Repeat Steps 6-9 for each asset type.
11. On the ACATS Signature page, review the information on the page. Delete assets from the list or add more assets
to transfer as required. Then type your name in the Signature field and click Continue.
12. On the Confirmation page, enter the confirmation number that you received via email in the Confirmation Num-
ber field, then click Confirm.
If you do not receive a Confirmation Number by email, please check your junk email folder as sometimes email fil-
ters block messages.
Or click Resend Confirmation Number to receive another confirmation email.
Or click Cancel to cancel the transfer request.

Creating a Position Instruction for a Partial ACATS Transfer

Note: See Position Instructions for information about viewing and deleting position instructions.
ACATS Position Instructions can only be used with Partial ACATS transfers.

To create a new Position Instruction

1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. If you have a master account, in the Client/Sub Account Selection area, use the radio buttons to search for client
or sub accounts by Account ID, Account Title or Account Alias, then click the client or sub account whose trans-
action history you want to view.
3. In the Transfer Method list, select ACATS.
4. In the Type list, select Use/Create Instruction.This option allows you to use an existing Position Instruction or cre-
ate a new one.
5. In the Instruction list, select Add New Instruction.
If you select this option, you will be prompted to create and save the new instruction first, and then you will have
to start a new position transfer request and select the instruction you just created. Note that you can only use Pos-
ition Instructions for partial ACATS transfers.
6. Read the important information on the screen, then enter the name of the new Position Instruction. This is the
name that will appear in the Instruction list after the new instruction is saved.
7. Select your third-party broker from the Source list, then enter your account number with the selected broker.
8. In the Assets To Be Transferred section, click the appropriate radio button to answer Yes or No to the three ques-
tions.
9. Click Continue.
10. On the ACATS Signature page, review the information on the page, and then type your name in the Signature
field and click Continue.
11. On the next page, verify your identity by typing your password and the confirmation number we emailed you in
the fields provided.
If you do not receive a Confirmation Number by email, please check your junk email folder as sometimes email fil-
ters block messages.
Or click Resend Confirmation Number to receive another confirmation email.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 223

Chapter 4 ATON Transfers

12. Your new Position Instruction has been created. Now return to the Funding > Position Transfers page and begin a
new partial ACATS transfer using your newly-created Position Instruction.

ATON Transfers
The Position Transfers page lets you transfer US or Canadian stocks, options and cash held at another brokerage firm to
us through ATON, the Canadian equivalent of ACATS.

When you select ATON as the transfer method on the Position Transfers page, you can:

l Request a Full ATON transfer, in which all of your assets are transferred from a third-party broker to your account.
l Request a Partial ATON transfer without a Position Instruction, in which you transfer only some of your assets
and cash from a third-party broker to your account and you do not use an optional Position Instruction.
l Request a Partial ATON transfer using a Position Instruction, in which you use a previously-created Position
Instruction to transfer only some of your assets and cash from a third-party broker to your account.
l Create a new Position Instruction, which lets you save and reuse third-party broker information for future Partial
ATON transfers.

Note: Your Account Name, Tax Identification Number and Customer Type (i.e. individual, joint, Roth
IRA), must exactly match the third-party broker account in order for the transfer to take place.

Requesting a Full ATON Transfer

To request a full ATON transfer

1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. If you have a master account or multiple accounts, use the Account Selector to search for and select the account
for which you want to request a position transfer.
3. In the Transfer Method list, select ATON.
4. In the Type list, select Full.
The Check Eligibility button appears.

5. Optionally, check the eligibility of your positions by clicking the Check Eligibility button. For details, see
Checking Position Eligibility for a Full ACATS of ATON Transfer.
6. In the Source list, select your third-party broker. You can type the first two or three letters of the broker’s name to
quickly jump to that broker in the list.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 224

Chapter 4 Partial ATON Transfers without Instructions

The ATON Request page appears.

7. In the Account Information section, verify that your Account Title, Account Number, Tax ID Number and Cus-
tomer Type exactly matches the information in your third-party broker account
8. In the Third Party Broker Account Information section, type the account number for your third-party broker
account exactly as it appears on your statement from your delivering firm.
9. In the Assets To Be Transferred section, click the appropriate radio button to answer Yes or No to the three ques-
tions.
10. Click Continue.
11. On the page that appears, type your signature in the Signature field, and then click Continue.
12. On the Confirmation page, enter the confirmation number that you received via email in the Confirmation Num-
ber field, then click Confirm.
If you do not receive a Confirmation Number by email, please check your junk email folder as sometimes email fil-
ters block messages.
Or click Resend Confirmation Number to receive another confirmation email.
Or click Cancel to cancel the transfer request.

Partial ATON Transfers without Instructions

Note: See Position Instructions for information about viewing and deleting position instructions. ATON
Position Instructions can only be used with Partial ATON transfers.

To request a partial ATON transfer without a Position Instruction

1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. If you have a master account or multiple accounts, use the Account Selector to search for and select the account
for which you want to request a position transfer.
3. In the Transfer Method list, select ATON.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 225

Chapter 4 Partial ATON Transfers without Instructions

4. In the Type list, select Partial.

5. In the Source list, select your third-party broker. You can type the first two or three letters of the broker’s name to
quickly jump to that broker in the list.
The ATON Request page appears.

6. In the Third Party Broker Account Information section, type the account number for your third-party broker
account exactly as it appears on your statement from your delivering firm.
7. In the Assets To Be Transferred section, click the appropriate radio button to answer Yes or No to the three ques-
tions.
8. Click Continue.
The Partial ATON Transfer page appears.

9. Select an asset type to transfer, then click the Add button.

10. Enter the required information for each asset to be transferred, then click Add.

Each time you click Add, the partial asset you specified is added to the list of assets to transfer.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 226

Chapter 4 Partial ATON Transfers with Existing Instruction

11. Click Remove to remove an asset from the list.

12. When the list of assets to be transferred is complete, click Finish.
13. Repeat Steps 10-14 for each asset type.
14. On the ATON Signature page, review the information on the page. Delete assets from the list or add more assets
to transfer as required. Then type your name in the Signature field and click Continue.
15. On the Confirmation page, enter the confirmation number that you received via email in the Confirmation Num-
ber field, then click Confirm.
If you do not receive a Confirmation Number by email, please check your junk email folder as sometimes email fil-
ters block messages.
Or click Resend Confirmation Number to receive another confirmation email.
Or click Cancel to cancel the transfer request.

Partial ATON Transfers with Existing Instruction

Note: See Position Instructions for information about viewing and deleting position instructions. ATON
Position Instructions can only be used with Partial ATON transfers.

To request a partial ATON transfer using an existing Position Instruction

1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. If you have a master account or multiple accounts, use the Account Selector to search for and select the account
for which you want to request a position transfer.
3. In the Transfer Method list, select ATON.
4. In the Type list, select Use/Create Instruction.This option allows you to use an existing Position Instruction or cre-
ate a new one.
5. In the Instruction list, select a previously-created Position Instruction from the list.
The instruction details appear on the screen and you can immediately begin adding assets to your partial ATON
transfer.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 227

Chapter 4 Partial ATON Transfers with Existing Instruction

6. Select an asset type to transfer, then click the Add button.

7. Enter the required information for each asset to be transferred, then click Add.

Each time you click Add, the partial asset you specified is added to the list of assets to transfer.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 228

Chapter 4 Creating an ATON Position Instruction

8. Click Remove to remove an asset from the list.

9. When the list of assets to be transferred is complete, click Finish.
10. Repeat Steps 6-9 for each asset type.
11. On the ATON Signature page, review the information on the page. Delete assets from the list or add more assets
to transfer as required. Then type your name in the Signature field and click Continue.
12. On the Confirmation page, enter the confirmation number that you received via email in the Confirmation Num-
ber field, then click Confirm.
If you do not receive a Confirmation Number by email, please check your junk email folder as sometimes email fil-
ters block messages.
Or click Resend Confirmation Number to receive another confirmation email.
Or click Cancel to cancel the transfer request.

Creating an ATON Position Instruction

Note: See Position Instructions for information about viewing and deleting position instructions. ATON
Position Instructions can only be used with Partial ATON transfers.

To create a new ATON Position Instruction

1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. If you have a master account, in the Client/Sub Account Selection area, use the radio buttons to search for client
or sub accounts by Account ID, Account Title or Account Alias, then click the client or sub account whose trans-
action history you want to view.
3. In the Transfer Method list, select ATON.
4. In the Type list, select Use/Create Instruction.This option allows you to use an existing Position Instruction or cre-
ate a new one.
5. In the Instruction list, select Add New Instruction.
If you select this option, you will be prompted to create and save the new instruction first, and then you will have
to start a new position transfer request and select the instruction you just created. Note that you can only use Pos-
ition Instructions for partial ATON transfers.
6. Read the important information on the screen, then enter the name of the new Position Instruction. This is the
name that will appear in the Instruction list after the new instruction is saved.
7. Select your third-party broker from the Source list, then enter your account number with the selected broker.
8. In the Assets To Be Transferred section, click the appropriate radio button to answer Yes or No to the three ques-
tions.
9. Click Continue.
10. On the ATON Signature page, review the information on the page, and then type your name in the Signature field
and click Continue.
11. On the next page, verify your identity by typing your password and the confirmation number we emailed you in
the fields provided.
If you do not receive a Confirmation Number by email, please check your junk email folder as sometimes email fil-
ters block messages.
Or click Resend Confirmation Number to receive another confirmation email.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 229

Chapter 4 Checking Position Eligibility for a Full ACATS or ATON
Transfer

12. Your new Position Instruction has been created. Now return to the Funding > Position Transfers page and begin a
new partial ATON transfer using your newly-created Position Instruction.

Checking Position Eligibility for a Full ACATS or ATON Transfer

Whenever you want to request a full ACATS or full ATON position transfer, you can perform a position eligibility
check to verify that the positions you want to transfer are eligible for your selected transfer method.

There are two ways to check position eligibility:

l Manually enter position details

l Upload a .CSV file

To manually check position eligibility for a full ACATS or full ATON position transfer
1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. Select either ACATS or ATON as the Transfer Method.
3. Select Full as the Type.
The Check Eligibility button appears.

4. Click Check Eligibility.

5. Click Enter Contract Details.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 230

Chapter 4 Checking Position Eligibility for a Full ACATS or ATON
Transfer

6. Select the asset class (type of position) from the drop-down.

7. Add positions by filling in the fields for each symbol, then clicking the +Add button.
8. When you are done, click Submit.
The Transfer Eligibility Summary opens.

The Transfer Eligibility Summary lists all of the positions you entered and marks eligible positions with a check mark in
the Eligible column. The Eligible column is blank for ineligible positions .

9. Perform one of these optional steps:

l Click Export to save the data to a .CSV file, which you can use to submit a partial ACATS or ATON request.
l Click Print to print the list.
10. Click Finish to complete the eligibility check.
11. If all of the positions you entered are eligible for the transfer, you can submit a new request for a full ACATS or a
full ATON transfer.

To upload positions in a .CSV file

1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. Select either ACATS or ATON as the Transfer Method.
3. Select Full as the Type.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 231

Chapter 4 Checking Position Eligibility for a Full ACATS or ATON
Transfer

The Check Eligibility button appears.

4. Click Check Eligibility.

5. Click Upload File.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 232

Chapter 4 DRS Transfers

6. Be sure you have already prepared and reviewed your .CSV file. The Upload File window lists the formatting
requirements for your .CSV file.
To avoid errors, you should also review the rules for uploading positions in a .CSV file before you upload your file.

7. Click Browse, then select the .CSV file you have prepared for this position transfer request. The name of the file
that you select will appear next to the Browse button.
8. Click Upload.
A summary of the positions in your .CSV file and their eligibility for your selected transfer method appears in the Trans-
fer Eligibility Summary window.

9. Optionally, click Print to print the eligibility summary.

10. Click Finish.

DRS Transfers
The Position Transfers page lets you transfer stocks and warrants using DRS (Direct Registration System) between a
Transfer Agent and your account. DRS provides registered owners with the option of holding their assets on the books
and records of the Transfer Agent in book-entry form. Through DRS, assets can be electronically transferred to and from
the transfer agent and broker/dealer..

Note: Your Account Name, Tax Identification Number and Customer Type (i.e. individual, joint, Roth
IRA), must exactly match the third-party broker account in order for the transfer to take place.

To request a DRS transfer

1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. If you have a master account or multiple accounts, use the Account Selector to search for and select the account
for which you want to request a position transfer.
3. In the Transfer Method list, select DRS - Direct Registration System.
4. In the Type list, select Deposit.
The DRS Request page appears.

5. In the Account Information section, verify that your Account Title, Account Number, Tax ID Number and Cus-
tomer Type exactly matches the information in your third-party broker account.
6. In the Transfer Agent Account Information section enter the account number for your Transfer Agent account,
then click Continue.
The DRS Transfer page appears.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 233

Chapter 4 DRS Transfers

7. Select an asset type to transfer, then click the Add button.

8. Enter the required information for each asset to be transferred, then click Add.

Each time you click Add, the asset you specified is added to the list of assets to transfer.

9. Click Remove to remove an asset from the list.

10. When the list of assets to be transferred is complete, click Finish.
11. Repeat Steps 7-10 for each asset type.
12. On the DRS Signature page, review the information on the page. Delete assets from the list or add more assets to
transfer as required. Then type your name in the Signature field and click Continue.
13. On the next page, verify your identity by typing your password and the confirmation number we emailed you in
the fields provided.
If you do not receive a Confirmation Number by email, please check your junk email folder as sometimes email

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 234

Chapter 4 DWAC Transfers

filters block messages.

Or click Resend Confirmation Number to receive another confirmation email.
Or click Cancel to cancel the transfer request.

DWAC Transfers
The Position Transfers page lets you transfer stocks and warrants using DWAC (Deposit/Withdrawal at Custodian)
between a Transfer Agent and your account. DWAC is an automated system for deposits and withdrawals of securities at
DTC.

The cut-off time for submitting a DWAC transfer request is 3:45 PM EST. Any requests submitted after that time
will be processed on the next business day.

Note: Your Account Name, Tax Identification Number and Customer Type (i.e. individual, joint, Roth
IRA), must exactly match the third-party broker account in order for the transfer to take place.

To request a DWAC transfer

1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. If you have a master account or multiple accounts, use the Account Selector to search for and select the account
for which you want to request a position transfer.
3. In the Transfer Method list, select DWAC - Deposit/Withdrawal at Custodian.
4. In the Type list, select one of the following:
l Deposit - Select this option to transfer assets from a Transfer Agent to your account.
l Withdraw - Select this option to transfer assets from your account to a Transfer Agent.
The DWAC Request page appears.

5. In the Account Information section, verify that your Account Title, Account Number, Tax ID Number and Cus-
tomer Type exactly matches the information in your third-party broker account.
6. In the Transfer Agent Account Information section enter the account number for your Transfer Agent account,
then click Continue. Optionally enter a Reference ID.
The DWAC Transfer page appears.

7. Select an asset type to transfer, then click the Add button.

8. Enter the required information for each asset to be transferred, then click Add.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 235

Chapter 4 Transferring Positions to an Advisor-Managed Account

Each time you click Add, the asset you specified is added to the list of assets to transfer.

9. Click Remove to remove an asset from the list.

10. When the list of assets to be transferred is complete, click Finish.
11. Repeat Steps 7-10 for each asset type.
12. On the DWAC Signature page, review the information on the page. Delete assets from the list or add more assets
to transfer as required. Then type your name in the Signature field and click Continue.
13. On the next page, verify your identity by typing your password and the confirmation number we emailed you in
the fields provided.
If you do not receive a Confirmation Number by email, please check your junk email folder as sometimes email fil-
ters block messages.
Or click Resend Confirmation Number to receive another confirmation email.
Or click Cancel to cancel the transfer request.

Transferring Positions to an Advisor-Managed Account

Individual account holders can transfer all or some of their assets from their existing account to an Advisor-managed
account or segment.

To transfer all of your assets into an Advisor-managed account

1. Identify an Advisor-managed account you want to join as a client, then request that Advisor to initiate a client
account invitation.
2. Complete or have the Advisor complete the Advisor Client Account Application.
The Account Titles and Tax IDs for your existing account and the new Advisor Client account must match.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 236

Chapter 4 Transfer International Assets

3. Once your Advisor Client Account is open, log into Account Management with the username and password of
your original account.
4. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
5. In the Transfer Method list, select Advisor-Managed Account Asset Transfer.
6. Enter the following information in the fields provided:
l The username of the destination account (the destination account is the Advisor-Managed account).
l The password of the destination account.
l The account ID of the destination account.
7. Click Continue.
8. Confirm your identity by entering the confirmation number sent to you via email, then click Confirm.
Your original account will be closed when your assets are transferred to an Advisor-managed account.
Note: You can also create a new Advisor- or Broker-managed account or account partition while retaining
your existing account. For more information see Linking to an Advisor- or Broker-Managed
Account,

Transfer International Assets

The Position Transfer page lets you transfer assets from Asia and Europe into your account. You can requests inbound
international transfers only. As part of this request process, you must use a previously-create Position Instruction or create
a new instruction.

At any time during this procedure, you can click Cancel to cancel the request and start over.

Advisors and Fully Disclosed Brokers can request inbound international asset transfers for a client account but the client
must create a position transfer instruction first and the Advisor or Broker must use those instructions.

To request an inbound transfer of Asian or European positions

1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. If you have a master account or multiple accounts, use the Account Selector to search for and select the account
for which you want to request a position transfer.
3. In the Transfer Method list, select International Assets.
4. In the Type list, select Deposit.
5. You must create a Position Instruction to transfer international assets. In the Instruction list, do one of the fol-
lowing:
l If you have not yet created a Position Instruction, select Add New Instruction.
l If you have already created a Position Instruction (for example, you created a new instruction as part of a previous
request to transfer international assets), select the instruction.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 237

Chapter 4 Transfer International Assets

6. If you selected Add New Instruction, complete the Create Transfer Instruction section. After you complete your
transfer request, the instruction will be saved in our system and available to you for future international position
transfers.

7. Complete the Third Party Broker Account Information section, and then click Continue. This section describes the
brokerage firm where the positions to be transferred are currently located.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 238

Chapter 4 Transfer International Assets

8. On the next page, select the search criteria for the assets you to be transferred from the Search for drop-down.
Search for Stocks/ETFs, Bonds, Structured Products or Options.

9. Complete all relevant fields for the assets to be transferred, and then click Search.
l For Stocks, you can choose to search by Symbol, ISIN or CUSIP.
l For Bonds and Structured Products, you can search by ISIN.
l For Options, you can search by underlying symbol.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 239

Chapter 4 Transfer International Assets

For example, to search for stocks by symbol, select the Search by Symbol radio button and then enter the symbol and
quantity and optionally, the exchange and currency, and then click Search.

To search for options, enter the underlying symbol, quantity, select Put or Call, and enter the strike and expiration date,
and then click Search.

10. A popup appears with all possible asset matches. Click the radio button that corresponds to the correct asset.

11. The asset is added to the screen. Add more assets to transfer by selecting another item from the Search for drop-
down and clicking Search.
12. To remove an asset from the screen (for example, if for any reason you decide not to transfer a particular asset or if
you selected the wrong asset), click the X next to the asset.
13. When you are finished adding assets, click Continue.
14. Click OK.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 240

Chapter 4 FOP Transfers

FOP Transfers
The Position Transfers page lets you use a Free of Payment (FOP) transfer to move long US stock, warrant and US Bond
positions from another US bank or broker that is a member of the DTC to your account, (deposit) or from your account to
another US bank or broker that is a member of the DTC (withdraw).

When you select FOP as the transfer method on the Position Transfers page, you can:

l Request an FOP transfer without a Position Instruction, in which you request an FOP transfer without using an
FOP Position Instruction.
l Request a FOP transfer using a Position Instruction, in which request an FOP transfer using a previously-created
Position Instruction.
l Create a new Position Instruction, which lets you save and reuse third-party broker information for future FOP
transfers.

Note: Your Account Name, Tax Identification Number and Customer Type (i.e. individual, joint, Roth
IRA), must exactly match the third-party broker account in order for the transfer to take place.

FOP Transfer without Instruction

Note: See Position Instructions for information about viewing and deleting position instructions.

To request an FOP transfer without using a Position Instruction

1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. If you have a master account or multiple accounts, use the Account Selector to search for and select the account
for which you want to request a position transfer.
3. In the Transfer Method list, select Free of Payment.
4. In the Type list, select one of the following options:
l Withdraw - Select this option to transfer US stock positions from your account to a US bank or broker that is a
member of the DTC.
l Deposit - Select this option to transfer US stock positions from a US bank or broker that is a member of the DTC
to your account.
You must contact your third-party broker to initiate a Deposit-type transfer.

5. In the Source list, select your third-party broker. You can type the first two or three letters of the broker’s name to
quickly jump to that broker in the list.
The FOP Request page appears.
6. In the Account Information section, verify that your Account Title, Account Number, Tax ID Number and Cus-
tomer Type exactly matches the information in your third-party broker account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 241

Chapter 4 FOP Transfer without Instruction

7. In the Third Party Broker Account Information section, type the account number for your third-party broker
account exactly as it appears on your statement from your delivering firm, then click Continue.
The FOP Transfer page appears.

8. Select an asset type to transfer, then click the Add button.

9. Enter the required information for each asset to be transferred, then click Add.

Each time you click Add, the asset you specified is added to the list of assets to transfer.

10. Click Remove to remove an asset from the list.

11. When the list of assets to be transferred is complete, click Finish.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 242

Chapter 4 FOP Transfer Using Existing Instruction

12. Repeat Steps 8-11 for each asset type.

13. On the FOP Signature page, review the information on the page. Delete assets from the list or add more assets to
transfer as required. Then type your name in the Signature field and click Continue.
14. On the next page, verify your identity by typing your password and the confirmation number we emailed you in
the fields provided.
If you do not receive a Confirmation Number by email, please check your junk email folder as sometimes email fil-
ters block messages.
Or click Resend Confirmation Number to receive another confirmation email.
Or click Cancel to cancel the transfer request.

FOP Transfer Using Existing Instruction

Note: See Position Instructions for information about viewing and deleting position instructions.

To request an FOP transfer without using a Position Instruction

1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. If you have a master account or multiple accounts, use the Account Selector to search for and select the account
for which you want to request a position transfer.
3. In the Transfer Method list, select Free of Payment.
4. In the Type list, select Use Instruction. This option allows you to use an existing Position Instruction or create a
new one.
5. In the Instruction list, select a previously-created Position Instruction from the list.
The instruction details appear on the screen.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 243

Chapter 4 FOP Transfer Using Existing Instruction

6. Select Withdraw or Deposit as the FOP Type, then begin adding assets to your FOP transfer.
7. Select an asset type to transfer, then click the Add button.
8. Enter the required information for each asset to be transferred, then click Add.

Each time you click Add, the asset you specified is added to the list of assets to transfer.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 244

Chapter 4 Creating Position Instruction for an FOP Transfer

9. Click Remove to remove an asset from the list.

10. When the list of assets to be transferred is complete, click Finish.
11. Repeat Steps 7-10 for each asset type.
12. On the FOP Signature page, review the information on the page. Delete assets from the list or add more assets to
transfer as required. Then type your name in the Signature field and click Continue.
13. On the next page, verify your identity by typing your password and the confirmation number we emailed you in
the fields provided.
If you do not receive a Confirmation Number by email, please check your junk email folder as sometimes email fil-
ters block messages.
Or click Resend Confirmation Number to receive another confirmation email.
Or click Cancel to cancel the transfer request.

Creating Position Instruction for an FOP Transfer

Note: See Position Instructions for information about viewing and deleting position instructions.

To create a new FOP Position Instruction

1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. If you have a master account, in the Client/Sub Account Selection area, use the radio buttons to search for client
or sub accounts by Account ID, Account Title or Account Alias, then click the client or sub account whose trans-
action history you want to view.
3. In the Transfer Method list, select Free of Payment.
4. In the Type list, select Use/Create Instruction.This option allows you to use an existing Position Instruction or cre-
ate a new one.
5. In the Instruction list, select Add New Instruction.
If you select this option, you will be prompted to create and save the new instruction first, and then you will have
to start a new position transfer request and select the instruction you just created.
6. Read the important information on the screen, then enter the name of the new Position Instruction. This is the
name that will appear in the Instruction list after the new instruction is saved.
7. Select your third-party broker from the Source list, then enter your account number with the selected broker.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 245

Chapter 4 US Futures Transfers

8. Click Continue.
9. On the FOP Signature page, review the information on the page, and then type your name in the Signature field
and click Continue.
10. On the next page, verify your identity by typing your password and the confirmation number we emailed you in
the fields provided.
If you do not receive a Confirmation Number by email, please check your junk email folder as sometimes email fil-
ters block messages.
Or click Resend Confirmation Number to receive another confirmation email.
11. Your new Position Instruction has been created. Now return to the Funding > Position Transfers page and begin a
new FOP transfer using your newly-created Position Instruction.

US Futures Transfers
The Position Transfers page lets you transfer US futures positions and cash held from a third-party broker to your
account. This process requires you to print out and complete a form, then fax the completed form to us.

If you are transferring more than one account, please complete one form for each account that you are transferring. The
type of account at your current broker should match the account receiving the assets. If the account types do not match,
please complete a new account application.

To transfer US futures to your account

1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. If you have a master account or multiple accounts, use the Account Selector to search for and select the account
for which you want to request a position transfer.
3. In the Transfer Method list, select US Futures.
The Transfer of Assets Form appears.
4. Print the form.
5. Complete the form, then fax it to us at the fax number indicated on the upper left corner of the form.

Transferring Positions Between Master and Sub Accounts

Non-disclosed brokers and STL account users with fund management access for the Master Account can transfer positions
between the master account and its sub accounts, and between two sub accounts. Requests submitted during regular trad-
ing hours will transfer immediately. Requests submitted outside of regular trading hours will be processed the next busi-
ness day.

To transfer positions between master and sub accounts

1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. If you have a master account, in the Client/Sub Account Selection area, use the radio buttons to search for client
or sub accounts by Account ID, Account Title or Account Alias, then click the client or sub account whose trans-
action history you want to view.
3. In the Transfer Method list, select Position Transfer Between Master and Sub.
The screen displays all position transfers for your account.
4. To request a new position transfer between your master account and a sub account, click Request New Transfer.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 246

Chapter 4 Transferring Positions Internally

5. Select the source account from the drop-down list, then click Continue.
6. Select the destination account from the drop-down list, then click Continue.
The screen displays the symbol, asset class and available quantity of all positions held by the source account.
7. Provide transfer details as follows:
l To transfer all positions to the selected sub account, select the Transfer all positionscheck box, then click
Continue.
l To transfer some but not all positions to the selected sub account, enter the number to transfer in the Transfer
Quantity field for each symbol listed, then click Continue.
l For symbols whose positions you do not want to transfer, leave the Transfer Quantity field blank.
8. Verify that the transfer information is correct, then click Confirm.
9. Confirm your identity by entering the confirmation number sent to you via email, then click Confirm.
The positions are transferred.

Transferring Positions Internally

The Fund Transfers page lets you transfer positions internally from your account to another account here. The following
rules apply to internal position transfers:

l Account Titles of both accounts must match.

l The country of legal residence of both accounts must match.
l For US account holders, the US tax ID (Social Security number) of both accounts must match.
l For non-US Individual account holders, the ID number, ID type (passport, driver's license, national ID, or alien ID)
and ID-issuing country must match. For joint non-US account holders, the IDs of both first and second holder
must match.
l For non-US Organization account holders, the government-issued ID and issuing country of both accounts must
match.
l Linked accounts can use this type of position transfer.
l Position Transfer Requests are processed during regular trading hours. Requests submitted outside regular trading
hours will be processed the next business day.
l The receiving account must be funded prior to the position transfer.

To transfer positions internally

1. Click Funding > Position Transfers.
2. In the Transaction list, select Transfer Positions Internally.
The Internal Position Transfers page appears.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 247

Chapter 4 Using CSV Files for Position Transfers

3. Select the source account from the Origin Account Number list, then click Continue.
l Or click Cancel to cancel the transaction.
4. Select the destination account from Destination account number list, then click Continue.
5. Type the username and password of the destination account in the fields provided, then click Continue.
6. All available positions in the destination account are displayed on the screen, including symbol, asset class and
available quantity. Complete the position transfer information by entering the number of each symbol that you
want to transfer in the Transfer Quantity field, then click Continue.
7. For any position that you do NOT want to transfer, leave the Transfer Quantity field blank.
8. Verify the position transfer information, then click Continue to complete your internal position transfer request.
Position transfer requests are processed during regular business hours. Requests submitted at other times will be processed
on the next business day.

Using CSV Files for Position Transfers

When you want to submit a position transfer request, you can prepare and upload a .CSV (comma-separated values) file
to:

l Submit a partial ACATS, ATON, DRS, DWAC or FOP position transfer;

l Check if the positions you want to transfer in a full ACATS or ATON position transfer are eligible to be trans-
ferred (this does not actually transfer positions).

We recommend using Microsoft Excel to create your upload file, then saving the file as a *.csv file.

Note: You do not have to upload a CSV file to do a partial position transfer or check the eligibility of
your positions for a full transfer. You can still manually enter positions in partial position transfer,
and you can manually enter positions to check their eligibility for a full ACATS or ATON position
transfer.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 248

Chapter 4 Uploading Positions in a CSV File for Partial Position Transfers

Uploading Positions in a CSV File for Partial Position Transfers

You can upload a *.CSV (comma-separated values) file to submit a partial position transfer request for any of the fol-
lowing position transfer methods:

l ACATS
l ATON
l DRS
l DWAC
l FOP

To upload positions in a .CSV file for a partial position transfer

1. Follow the instructions for starting a partial position transfer request using ACATS or ATON, a position transfer
deposit or withdrawal using DWAC or FOP, or a position transfer deposit using DRS.
2. After you complete the required information for your position transfer request on the first page and click
Continue, the Transfer page for your selected transfer method opens.
Here is an image of the Transfer page for an FOP position transfer:

3. Click Upload File.

The Upload File window opens. This window is identical for all eligible position transfers.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 249

Chapter 4 Uploading Positions in a CSV File for Partial Position Transfers

4. Be sure you have already prepared and reviewed your .CSV file. The Upload File window lists the formatting
requirements for your .CSV file.
To avoid errors, you should also review the rules for uploading positions in a .CSV file before you upload your file.

5. Click Browse, then select the .CSV file you have prepared for this position transfer request. The name of the file
that you select will appear next to the Browse button.
6. Click Upload.
l If your CSV file contains option entries for which our system has found multiple matching assets (this may hap-
pen if you have a mini-option and an option with matching details), the following window opens:

l This window lists all of the options in your .CSV file with multiple matching assets. For each underlying, select
the correct instrument in the Select Contract column. Click Continue when you are done.
Provided there are no errors, a summary of the positions in your .CSV file and their eligibility for your selected transfer
method appears in the Transfer Eligibility Summary window.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 250

Chapter 4 Rules for Uploading Positions in a CSV File

7. To include a position that is marked as Eligible in your position transfer, click the check box under the Include in
Transfer column.
To include all positions, click the check box located at the far right of the asset class heading.
8. Optionally, click Print to print the eligibility summary.
9. Click Finish.

Rules for Uploading Positions in a CSV File

Observe the following rules when creating your *.CSV (comma separated values) file for either a position eligibility
check for a full transfer or for a partial ACATS, ATON, DRS, DWAC or FOP position transfer:

l The file you upload must a CSV-formatted file. Although we will process any uploaded file that is formatted as a
CSV file, including files saved with a .txt extenstion, a .csv extension, or no extension, we recommend that you
create your upload file in Microsoft Excel and save it as a *.csv file.
l Enter all dates using the yyyymmdd format.
l All entries are case-insensitive (i.e. short = SHORT = ShOrT, etc).
l All quantities and cash amounts can accept the word All to indicate to transfer everything.
l When adding a stock, the Non-US indicator:
o Defaults to N if not provided;
o Will include US and Non-US exchanges if set to Y in an ACATS request;
o Will only include Canadian exchanges if set to Y in an ATON request;
o Is ignored in DRS, DWAC, and FOP transfers.
l When adding an option, the Non-US indicator:
o Defaults to N if not provided;
o Will only include Canadian instruments if set to Y in an ATON request;
o Is ignored in ACATS, DRS, DWAC, and FOP transfers.
l When adding Cash, the currency field:
o Defaults to USD;
o Can be set to CAD or USD in ATON requests;

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 251

Chapter 4 Rules for Uploading Positions in a CSV File

o Is ignored in ACATS requests.

l ACATS supports stocks, warrants, options, mutual funds, bonds and cash.
l ATON supports stocks, warrants, options and cash.
l DRS, DWAC and FOP support stocks, warrants and bonds.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 252

Chapter 4 Instructions

Instructions
The Instructions menu includes the following tabbed pages:

l Bank Information - View and delete saved bank information used for deposits and withdrawals.
l Recurring Transactions - View and delete instructions for recurring transactions.
l Position - Create, edit and delete optional position instructions for ACATS, ATON, FOP, DRS and
DWAC position transfers.
l Settlement - View settlement instructions for recurring transfers of US stocks.

Bank Information
The Bank Information page lets you view and delete saved bank information. You cannot create new bank information
on this page. You save bank information when you set up a deposit notification or a withdrawal on the Fund Transfers
page.

Saved bank information contains information about a financial institution that you use in deposit notifications and/or
withdrawals.

To view and delete bank information

1. Click Funding > Instructions > Bank Information.
If you have a multiple account structure such as an institution account or multiple linked accounts, use the Account
Selector at the top of the page to select an account.

To change the selected account, click the tab to open the Account Selector, and then click a different account.

Bank information is grouped into categories: Deposits, Withdrawals and information that can be used for both deposits
and withdrawals (ACH/SEPA Initiated by Us).

2. Click the bank information you want to view to expand it.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 253

Chapter 4 Bank Information Fields

3. To change the name of saved bank information, click the blue pencil icon on that row, then type a new name
from 5 to 25 characters long. Click Submit to save your change.
4. To delete bank information, click the X on that row, then click OK to confirm the deletion.

To modify bank information

You cannot modify saved bank information. You must delete the bank information, then save bank information when
prompted on the Fund Transfers page during deposit or withdrawal transactions.

Bank Information Fields

The following table shows all the information that is saved in a bank instruction for each type of transaction. Note that
check withdrawals do not require that you enter and save bank information.

Transaction Type and

Field Notes
Method
Deposits

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 254

Chapter 4 Bank Information Fields

Transaction Type and

Field Notes
Method
ACH from US Bank Sending Institution The name of
the financial
institution
that will be
sending the
funds to your
Account.

Bank's ABA Number or The routing or

SWIFT/BIC Code transit num-
ber for your
bank.

Bank Account Number or For countries

IBAN outside the
US. This field
is optional.

Name The name of

the instruc-
tion. This
appears on
the Bank
Instructions
page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 255

Chapter 4 Bank Information Fields

Transaction Type and

Field Notes
Method
ACH Initiated By Us Bank Country The country
in which the
bank is loc-
ated.

Bank Account Number Your bank

account num-
ber.

Bank Account Type Checking or

Savings.

Bank Routing Transit Num- This is also

ber (RTN) known as
ABA Routing
Number
(ABA).

Type of Instruction One of the fol-

lowing:

ACH Debit &

Credit - For
future depos-
its and with-
drawals
between us
and your
bank.

ACH Credit
Only - For
future with-
drawals from
your account
with us to
your bank.

Name The name of

the instruc-
tion. This
appears on
the Bank
Instructions
page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 256

Chapter 4 Bank Information Fields

Transaction Type and

Field Notes
Method
Bill Payment Sending Institution The name of
the financial
institution
that will be
sending the
funds to your
Account.

Bank's ABA Number or The routing or

SWIFT/BIC Code transit num-
ber for your
bank.

Bank Account Number or For countries

IBAN outside the
US. This field
is optional.

Check Sending Institution The name of

(Information for check depos- the financial
its only) institution
that will be
sending the
funds to your
Account.

Bank's ABA Number or The routing or

SWIFT/BIC Code transit num-
ber for your
bank.

Bank Account Number or This field is

IBAN optional.

Name The name of

the instruc-
tion. This
appears on
the Bank
Instructions
page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 257

Chapter 4 Bank Information Fields

Transaction Type and

Field Notes
Method
Wire Sending Institution The name of
the financial
institution
that will be
sending the
funds to your
Account.

Bank's ABA Number or The routing or

SWIFT/BIC Code transit num-
ber for your
bank.

Name The name of

the instruc-
tion. This
appears on
the Bank
Instructions
page.

Withdrawals

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 258

Chapter 4 Bank Information Fields

Transaction Type and

Field Notes
Method
ACH Initiated By Us Bank Country The country
in which the
bank is loc-
ated.

Bank Account Number Your bank

account num-
ber.

Bank Account Type Checking or

Savings.

Bank Routing Transit Num- This is also

ber (RTN) known as
ABA Routing
Number
(ABA).

Type of Instruction One of the fol-

lowing:

ACH Debit &

Credit - For
future depos-
its and with-
drawals
between us
and your
bank.

ACH Credit
Only - For
future with-
drawals from
your account
to your bank.

Name The name of

the instruc-
tion. This
appears on
the Bank
Instructions
page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 259

Chapter 4 Recurring Transactions

Transaction Type and

Field Notes
Method
Wire Wire Type One of the fol-
lowing:

Bank
Mutual Fund
Brokerage
Firm
Credit Union
Other

Bank Country The country

in which the
bank is loc-
ated.

Account Number Your account

number.

International Banking For countries

Account Number (IBAN) outside the
US where
applicable.

SWIFT/BIC Code Where applic-

able.

ABA Routing Number Where applic-

able.

Name The name of

the instruc-
tion. This
appears on
the Bank
Instructions
page.

Recurring Transactions
The Recurring Transactions page lets you view and delete instructions for saved recurring transactions. You cannot cre-
ate new recurring transactions on this page. When you delete an instruction for a recurring transaction, you also cancel
the recurring transaction. You are always given the opportunity to create a recurring transaction when you finish setting
up a deposit notification or a withdrawal on the Fund Transfers page using saved bank information (also called a bank
instruction).

A recurring transaction contains instructions to us about a transaction that you want to repeat on a regular basis. It
includes the frequency of recurrence, amount of the transaction, transaction type, start and end dates and an instruction
name.

For each saved recurring transaction, the Recurring Transactions page displays:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 260

Chapter 4 Recurring Transactions

l The name of the instruction that you entered on the Fund Transfers page.
l The frequency of recurrence (Monthly, Quarterly or Annually).
l The date on which the recurring transaction starts.
l The date on which the recurring transaction ends.
l The transaction method (Wire, ACH, etc.)
l The amount of the transaction.

To delete a recurring transaction

1. Click Funding > Instructions > Recurring Transactions.
If you have a multiple account structure such as an institution account or multiple linked accounts, use the Account
Selector at the top of the page to select an account.

To change the selected account, click the tab to open the Account Selector, and then click a different account.

2. Click the X in the Action column for the recurring transaction that you want to delete.

3. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

The Action column for the deleted recurring transaction will now display Deleted and the recurring transaction is now
canceled. The next time you open the Recurring Transactions page, the deleted item will no longer be displayed.

To modify a recurring transaction

You cannot modify a recurring transaction. If you want to modify a recurring transaction, you must delete the recurring
transaction, then create a new recurring transaction on the Fund Transfers page when you finish setting up the deposit or
withdrawal using saved bank information (also called a bank instruction).

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 261

Chapter 4 Position Instructions

Position Instructions
Position Instructions are optional instructions that you can create and use when you create certain types of position trans-
fers. The Position Instructions page lets you view and delete existing Position Instructions.

Note: You cannot create a new instruction on Position Instruction page. You can only create a Position
Instruction on the Position Transfer page after you select either ACATS, FOP or ATON as the trans-
fer method.

A Position Instruction is a convenient way to re-use third-party broker information for the following types of position
transfers:

l Automated Customer Account Transfer Service (ACATS) - Partial transfers only

l Free of Payment (FOP) for US stocks
l Account Transfer on Notification (ATON) for Canadian securities - Partial transfers only

When you request one of those types of position transfers on the Position Transfers page, you have the option of creating
a new Position Instruction or using an existing Position Instruction.

Who can access the Position Instructions page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Organization (master and client account)
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Non-Disclosed Client User
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To use the Position Instructions page

1. Click Funding > Instructions > Position.
If you have a multiple account structure such as an institution account or multiple linked accounts, use the Account
Selector at the top of the page to select an account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 262

Chapter 4 Settlement Instructions

To change the selected account, click the tab to open the Account Selector, and then click a different account.

The page displays all ACATS, ATON and FOP position instructions that you have created, sorted by transfer type.

2. Click the pen icon to view an instruction.

Note that you cannot directly modify the instruction. To modify an existing instruction, you must first delete the instruc-
tion on this page, then create a new instruction on the Position Transfer page.

3. To delete an existing instruction, click the X for the instruction.

Settlement Instructions
Use this page to view available settlement instructions for your account. To contact us with questions or to add, remove
or edit this information, contact us at primeserve@interactivebrokers.com.

Who can access the Settlement Instructions page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 263

Chapter 4 Settlement Instructions

l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User

l Advisor Master User Organization (master and client account)
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Non-Disclosed Client User
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 264

Chapter 4 Soft Dollars Disbursement

Soft Dollars Disbursement

Use the Soft Dollars Disbursement page to request disbursements to soft dollars vendors and view existing disbursements
and invoices and elect to pay market data subscriptions with accumulated soft dollars. This page is only accessible after
soft dollar vendor accounts have been set up here.

The Soft Dollars page only appears AFTER you have signed and submitted the Soft Dollars Agreement on the Request
Soft Dollars page.

Who can access the Soft Dollars Disbursement page?

You can access this page only if you are a Fund Investment Manager or a Registered Professional Advisor and your soft
dollar vendors have been set up and approved.

To request a Soft Dollar disbursement

1. Click Funding > Soft Dollars Disbursement.
2. Use the Account Selector to search for client or sub accounts by Account ID, Account Title or Account Alias,
then click the account whose soft dollar disbursements you want to view.
The Soft Dollars page opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 265

Chapter 4 Soft Dollars Disbursement

The page shows:

l The total accumulated soft dollars for the selected account (Current Balance);
l All past soft dollar disbursements to each soft dollars vendor, including the vendor name and the total amount dis-
bursed. If there are no past disbursements to the selected vendor, the total amount disbursed is shown as zero.
3. View all soft dollar payments to a specific vendor by clicking the View Breakdown button. A popup window
opens to show all payments to that vendor. Click the red X to close the popup window.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 266

Chapter 4 Soft Dollars Disbursement

4. View any individual invoice for a specific vendor by clicking the View link in the Invoice Details column.
5. Request a disbursement to a soft dollar vendor by clicking the Request Disbursement button for a specific
vendor.
6. In the dialog, enter information into all fields. Upload your invoice by clicking the Browse button in the Upload
Invoice field, and then selecting the invoice file on your computer. Click Submit.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 267

Chapter 4 Soft Dollars Disbursement

7. In the Use Soft Dollars to Pay Market Data section, click the Yes radio to pay your market data fees with accu-
mulated soft dollars.
l Your market data fees will be paid out of your accumulated soft dollars ONLY if there are enough accumulated
soft dollars at the time the market data fee is charged. If there is not enough accumulated soft dollars at the time
the market data fee is charged to your account, soft dollars will NOT be used. Also, if you pay for market data for
client accounts, then you cannot use soft dollars to pay for that market data.
l Click the No radio button if you do not want to use your accumulated soft dollars to pay for your market data
fees.

8. Click Submit to complete your request.

For more information

l Request Soft Dollars

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 268

 5
Manage Account
This chapter describes how to configure you account using the different account- and user-level settings in the Manage
Account menu.

This chapter includes the following topics:

l Account Information - Modify personal information for individuals or entities associated with your account,
modify your financial and regulatory information, update your W8 or W9 tax form, print a summary of your
account details, view client accounts and invite clients to open accounts, and more.
l Settings - Configure all settings for your account, including base currency, pricing structure, margin account
upgrades, paper trading account, account aliases, white branding and more.
l Trade Configuration - Access all trade-related configuration functions, including trading permissions, research and
market data subscriptions.
l Security - Configure security-related settings for your account, including your account password, IP restrictions,
sign up to vote in our online polls, request or share a Secure Login Device, and more.
l Access Rights - Add users and set their Account Management access rights, create user roles, and Security Officers
can view account-level access rights and configure the number of authorizers.
l Add or Link Accounts - Create new accounts that are linked to you account, link existing multiple accounts
under a single username and password, or link your account to an Advisor- or Broker-managed account. Pro-
prietary Trading Group Master Users (Pool account) and Single Hedge Funds can also add sub accounts for author-
ized traders to their organizations.
l Research Services - Access research provider websites with your account email address to get additional services.
l Money Manager - Advisors acting as Wealth Managers can shop for Money Managers at the Money Manager Mar-
ketplace and assign them to trade client accounts, while Money Managers can sell their trading expertise to
Wealth Managers.
l Trader Referral - Lets our clients earn a cash bonus by referring new clients.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 269

Chapter 5 Account Information

Account Information
The Account Information menu includes the following pages:

l Details - Modify personal, financial and regulatory information, and print a summary of your account settings.
l Trading Sub Accounts - Proprietary Trading Group Master Users can view and create sub accounts for authorized
traders.
l Broker Declaration - Update your broker registration information.
l Advisor Qualifications - Update your advisor registration information.
l Transfer on Death - Register Transfer-On-Death beneficiaries.
l Investor Category - Answer a series of questions to determine if you qualify to trade a wider range of trading
products.
l Large Trader Identification - Add SEC Large Trader ID's to your account.
l EMIR and LEI Information - Account holders who are subject to the EMIR regulation can change their EMIR elec-
tion.
l Tax Information - Update your W-8/W-9 tax form.

Details
The Details menu includes the following pages:

l Account Details - View and print a summary of your account settings.

l Profile - Change personal information, such as name and address, and your regulatory information for any indi-
vidual or entity associated with your account.
l Financial Information - Change financial information such as investment objectives and net worth.
l Regulatory Information - Update the regulatory information for your account.

In addition, you can enable or disable dividend reinvestment for your own account from the Account Details page.

Account Details
The Print Account Details page lets you view and print a summary of all of your account settings. The following inform-
ation is included in the account summary:

l Account configuration, including country, customer type and base currency

l Individual and Single Hedge Fund accounts can enable and disable Dividend Reinvestment.
l Customer type and, for Master account users, an account structure diagram.
l Financial information, including investment objectives, net worth and annual income
l Investment experience
l Trading permissions, including the account type
l Market data, including products, countries and bundles

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 270

Chapter 5 Account Details

l Account holder details, including name, address and other personal information
l Accredited investor qualifications
l Regulatory information

Who can access the Print Account Details page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To view account details

1. Click Manage Account > Account Information > Details > Account Details.
2. Do one of the following:
o To print your account details, click the Print Account Details button.
o To print a PDF file of your account application, click PDF Account Application.
o To view your account details, click a section heading to expand that section.
You can open this page by clicking the Account Details link in the Account ID menu, located in the upper right corner
of the screen.

The following figure shows a typical Account Details page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 271

Chapter 5 Profile

Profile
The Profile page lets you modify information for individuals or entities associated with your account. You can modify
the following information:

l Name and address

l Personal information such as birthday and marital status
l Legal identification
l Employment information
l Regulatory information
l Phone numbers
l Tax Identification Number

Who can access the Profile page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 272

Chapter 5 Profile

l Advisor Master User Organization

l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To update information on the Profile page

1. Click Manage Account > Account Information > Details > Profile.

Depending on the type of account you have, you can:

l Modify your own account information.

l Modify the account information for an existing individual or entity associated with your account.
l If you are a Trust account (Individual or Advisor Client), or a Partnership account, you can update the
beneficiary ownership percentage. Trust accounts can add Entity Trustees, including Employee inform-
ation.
2. Do one of the following:
l To modify the account information for an existing individual or entity associated with your account, click
the appropriate Modify link, then modify the information on each page as required, clicking Continue
when you are finished with each page.
l Add individual or entity account users by clicking the Add Individual or Add Entity button, respectively.
If you add an entity trustee, you also can add information about an employee of that entity on an addi-
tional page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 273

Chapter 5 Profile

l To update the regulatory information for an existing individual or entity associated with your account,
click the appropriate Modify link, then click Continue until the Regulatory Information page opens. Click
Continue when you are finished updating the information.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 274

Chapter 5 Profile

3. To add or edit phone numbers, and to designate a phone number as the one you want to use to receive messages
from us, click Edit Phone Numbers.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 275

Chapter 5 Profile

l On the Edit Phone Numbers page, select the type of phone number (Home, Work, Mobile, etc.), your country and
the number.
l Click Add Number to add a new number to your account. For example, if you want to add a new mobile phone
number.
l Click the Use for Messaging check box to designate a mobile phone as the one you want to use to receive text
messages from us.
l Click Time to indicate a specific period of time during which you want to use a specific phone number, and a
time zone.
4. Click Continue to make more changes on the next page, which includes date of birth, country of citizenship, Tax
ID numbers and other similar identifying information.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 276

Chapter 5 Profile

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 277

 Chapter 5 Ownership Percentage Update

5. Click Continue when you have finished making changes.

6. Verify your information on the next page, and then click Back.
If you need to make further changes, click Back, then make corrections before submitting.

7. Enter the confirmation number sent to you via email, then click Continue.
If you have not received a confirmation number, click Request Confirmation Number to request that a new con-
firmation number be sent to your email address on record.

Ownership Percentage Update

Non-US partnerships that want us to withhold their taxes can use this page to update all partnerships in their organ-
ization, the ownership percentages of all partnerships, and the effective date of those partnerships and their ownership per-
centages. This page also lets you see the history of your ownership percentages.

Who can access the Ownership Percentage Update page?

You can access this page ONLY if you are a non-US partnership AND you want us to withhold your taxes.

Guidelines

Observe the following guidelines when using this page:

l Each partnership must add up to 100% ownership percentage. If they do not, you will receive an error message.
l Each offshore partner must enter a Form W8-BEN.
l Each onshore partner must enter a Form W9.
l A parent partner

Example

To understand how this page works, consider this example. A Non-US partnership (shown as "Applicant" in the screen
below) has four equal partners: Signatory Enterprises, Treasurer Enterprises, Zumstein Enterprises, and Robles Enterprises.
Each of the four legal entity partner owns 20% of the partnership entity Applicant. In addition, Signatory is an entity
partnership with Bruce, Reydesel and Joan as partners. In this partnership, Bruce owns 50% while the other two indi-
viduals own 25% each. In this example, there are two separate partnerships and each partnership's ownership percentage
equals 100%. Also, all partnerships were effective as of July 7, 2014.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 278

Chapter 5 Example

To update your ownership percentage

1. Click Manage Account > Account Information > Details > Ownership Percentage.
The Ownership Percentage Update page opens. All partners are listed.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 279

Chapter 5 Example

2. For each partner, indicate the parent partner in the Parent Partnership drop-down.
For example, in an entity in which four partners each own 25% of the entity, the parent entity itself would be the
"parent partner" of each of those four partners. For second-level partnerships within the entity, the parent partner
would be one of the main partners of the entity.
3. Enter the ownership percentage of each partner in each partnership. Each partnership's ownership percentage must
equal 100%. As soon as you finish entering all percentages, the screen displays the total. If the ownership per-
centages of all partnerships does NOT equal 100%, you will receive an error message when you click Continue.
For example, if you have two partnerships (a parent, or top-level, partnership, and a second-level partnership), the
ownership percentage of EACH partnership must equal 100%.
4. Enter the effective date of the partnerships. Use the pop-up calendar tool to select a date.
5. Click Add Date to optionally add more ownership percentages with a different effective date if the partnerships or
ownership percentages of your partnerships change.
6. Click Remove Date to remove the ownership percentages for a specific date.
7. View the history of your ownership percentage on the bottom half of the page.
8. Click Continue to submit your information.
If the ownership percentages of all partnerships does NOT equal 100%, you will receive an error message when
you click Continue.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 280

Chapter 5 Financial Information

Financial Information
The Financial Information page lets you change the following financial information for your account, which you ori-
ginally entered into your account application:

l Investment objectives
l Investment experience
l Net worth and annual income

Who can access the Financial Information page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To change your financial information

1. Click Manage Account > Account Information > Details > Financial Information.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 281

Chapter 5 Regulatory Information

2. Update your investment objectives, investment experience and financial information as required, then click Back.
Single and Joint account customers also access a section called Additional Sources of Income. Select one or more addi-
tional sources of income from the list of possible sources, then enter the annual percent of income and description for
each selected income source.

3. Verify your changes, then click Continue.

4. If you need to make further changes, click Back, then make corrections before submitting.
5. Enter the confirmation number sent to you via email, then click Continue.

If you have not received a confirmation number, click Request Confirmation Number to have a confirmation
number sent to your email address on record.

Regulatory Information
The Regulatory Information page lets you update the regulatory information for your account.

Who can access the Regulatory Information page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint or Trust Account User

To update your regulatory information

1. Click Manage Account > Account Information > Details > Regulatory Information.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 282

Chapter 5 Dividend Reinvestment

2. Update your regulatory information as required, then click Continue. For each question on the page, answer Yes
or No using the radio buttons.
3. Verify your changes, then click Continue.
If you need to make further changes, click Back, then make corrections before submitting.

4. Enter the confirmation number sent to you via email, then click Continue.
If you have not received a confirmation number, click Request Confirm # to have a confirmation number sent to
your email address on record.

Dividend Reinvestment
Dividend reinvestment is an option that lets you automatically invest cash dividends from common and preferred stocks
in the underlying stock. You can turn automatic dividend reinvestment on or off at the account level only; that is, you
cannot choose which dividends to reinvest. Dividend reinvestment is disabled by default.

Rules

l Dividend Reinvestment is available to IB LLC and IB UK clients only.

l Only US-listed common and preferred stocks are eligible for Dividend Reinvestment.
l On the morning of the trading day following confirmation of the our receipt of a dividend payment on a stock,
we will use the dividend payment (or cash-in-lieu of dividend payment if you have a margin account and your
shares are on loan at the time of the dividend payment) to purchase additional shares of that stock.
l We will charge our customary commission for the purchase.
l Purchased shares will be allocated to clients on a pro rata basis (based on the dividend amount to which each par-
ticipating client is entitled). In the event that the purchase executes in multiple smaller trades, you will receive
the weighted-average price of such shares.
l If your account is in a margin deficit and can’t initiate new positions, dividends will not be reinvested, even if
you have dividend reinvestment enabled.

To enable and disable automatic dividend reinvestment

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 283

Chapter 5 Dividend Reinvestment

1. Depending on your account, access the dividend reinvestment option from the following pages in Account Man-
agement:
l Individual, Joint, Trust, IRA, Small Business Accounts - Manage Account > Account Information > Details >
Account Details. Enable dividend reinvestment by clicking the Edit link in the Account Configuration section.
l Proprietary Trading Group STL Master User - Manage Traders > Traders > View. Enable automatic rein-
vestment for an individual trading sub account by clicking the blue pen icon in the Dividend Reinvestment
column.
l Advisor and Broker Master Users - Manage Clients > Dashboard. On the Dashboard, click the account row for
the desired client account to open the Client Account Details page. Enable dividend reinvestment by clicking the
Edit link in the Account Configuration section.
2. In the popup window that opens, read the important information, type your signature in the field provided, and
then click Continue. Click the X in the upper right corner to close the popup window.
Automatic dividend reinvestment is effective the next day.

3. To disable automatic dividend reinvestment, click the same link you used to enable the option.
4. In the popup window that opens, click Unsubscribe. Click the X in the upper right corner to close the popup win-
dow.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 284

Chapter 5 Trading Sub Accounts

Trading Sub Accounts

The Trading Sub Accounts page lets you view sub accounts for authorized traders to access Trader Workstation and man-
age market data subscriptions in Account Management.

Who can access the Trading Sub Accounts page?

You can access this page only if you are a Proprietary Trading Group Master User.

To view trading sub accounts

1. Click Manage Account > Account Information > Trading Sub Accounts.
The Trading Sub Accounts page opens, displaying all sub accounts for authorized traders, including the account name,
account number, username and current status.

2. If the current status of a sub account is “Application in progress,” a link may appear in the Status column that lets
you complete the next step in the application process.

Broker Declaration
The Broker Declaration page lets Broker Master Users update their broker registration information.

Who can access the Broker Declaration page?

You can access this page if you are a Broker Master User.

To update your broker registration information

1. Click Manage Account, Account Information, then click Broker Declaration.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 285

Chapter 5 Advisor Qualifications

2. Modify the information in the form as required, then click Continue.

3. Verify that the information is correct, then click Continue.
If you need to make further changes, click Back, then make corrections before submitting.

4. Enter the confirmation number that was sent to you via email, then click Continue to submit your changes.

Advisor Qualifications
The Professional Advisor Qualifications page lets you modify your advisor registration information. In order to be a Pro-
fessional Advisor, you must qualify to trade Securities or Commodities Products. You do not need to qualify for both.

Who can access the Advisor Qualifications page?

You can access this page if you are an Advisor Master User Individual or Organization.

To modify your advisor registration information

1. Click Manage Account > Account Information > Advisor Qualifications.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 286

Chapter 5 Transfer on Death

2. Make changes as required, then click Back.

3. Verify your information, then click Back to submit your changes.
If you need to make further changes, click Back, then make corrections before submitting.

Transfer on Death
Use the Transfer on Death page to register one or more beneficiaries (called “TOD Beneficiaries”) to whom you want to
directly pass your account assets upon your death without having to go through probate. When you register a Transfer on
Death beneficiary, the executor or administrator of your estate will only have to submit a Transfer on Death Beneficiary
Distribution Form with a certified copy of the death certificate to ensure that your assets transfer to the beneficiary or
beneficiaries that you have designated.

The following rules apply to Transfer on Death registration:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 287

Chapter 5 Transfer on Death

l Only United States-based Single accounts are eligible for Transfer on Death registration. IRA accounts are NOT
eligible.
l Your beneficiary (or beneficiaries) can be a natural person or other entity, such as a trust, corporation or guard-
ianship. Minors can be beneficiaries only if a custodian, trustee, or guardian is named for the minor.
l You must designate at least one and up to six Primary beneficiaries, and can designate one or more optional con-
tingent or Secondary beneficiaries. When you register a beneficiary, you select the percent ownership of your
assets to that beneficiary. The percent ownership among all Primary beneficiaries must equal 100%. The percent
ownership of all Secondary beneficiaries, if you choose to include them in your Transfer of Death registration,
must also equal 100%.
l If you are married and reside in a community property state, you must obtain your spouse’s consent if you are not
naming your spouse as the sole primary beneficiary. You and your spouse should consult a legal and tax pro-
fessional.
l When you complete the Transfer on Death registration, the title of your account will be amended to include your
Transfer on Death Beneficiary (for example, “John Doe, TOD Mary Smith”).
l At the completion of the online registration process, you will be prompted to complete a Transfer On Death
Agreement and send it to us. Be sure to send us a new signed Agreement anytime you change or remove TOD
beneficiaries.

Note: Some US states do not allow Transfer on Death registration or may have specific restrictions. You
and your spouse should consult a legal and tax professional.

Who can access the Transfer on Death page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l US-based Individual Account User with a single account or multiple linked accounts. Joint, Trust and
IRA Accounts cannot access this page.

To register a Transfer on Death beneficiary

1. Click Manage Account > Account Information > Transfer On Death.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 288

Chapter 5 Transfer on Death

2. Select a beneficiary type to begin the registration process:

o Click Add Individual Beneficiary to register an individual person as a beneficiary.
o Click Add Entity Beneficiary to register an entity such as a trust, corporation or guardianship as a beneficiary.
3. Enter information about the beneficiary in the fields on the next page:
o For an individual beneficiary, the Add Beneficiary page displays.
Note: To update your marital status, click Manage Account > Account Information > Details.

o For an entity beneficiary, the Add Entity Beneficiary page displays.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 289

Chapter 5 Transfer on Death

o If you are registering only one beneficiary, enter 100 in the Percent of Ownership field to assign all of your
assets to that person or entity. If you plan on registering additional beneficiaries, enter the appropriate percent
amount of ownership for this beneficiary. The percent of ownership for all beneficiaries must equal 100.
o You must designate at least one and up to six Primary beneficiaries, and can designate one or more optional
contingent or Secondary beneficiaries.

In the Beneficiary Type field, select Primary to make this person or entity the primary beneficiary, or Sec-
ondary to make this person or entity a contingent beneficiary.
Note: If you are a non-U.S resident, you will be required to provide a copy of the national iden-
tification document that shows the identification number that you have provided. The doc-
ument must include person's photograph and date of birth.

8. Click Back.
The beneficiary whose information you just entered is displayed on the TOD Beneficiaries page.

9. Specify what to do if any primary beneficiary predeceases the account owner by selecting one of the radio buttons
on the TOD Beneficiaries page:
l Pass the shares to the remaining primary beneficiary(s) pro rata (proportionate to the designated percentages).
l Pass the shares to the secondary beneficiaries.
10. Click Back.
11. You will receive an email containing a confirmation number that must be entered to confirm your TOD bene-
ficiary registration. Once you have entered the confirmation number, click Back.
12. Click the Transfer on Death Agreement link. A prepopulated form displays. Read the agreement carefully, then
print the form, sign it and send it to us.

When we approve your request, your Transfer on Death beneficiary registration will be complete.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 290

Chapter 5 Removing or Modifying a TOD Beneficiary

Note: You are also required to send us a new signed Transfer on Death Agreement anytime you modify or
remove TOD beneficiaries. To do this, see Removing or Modifying a TOD Beneficiary.

Removing or Modifying a TOD Beneficiary

To remove or modify a TOD beneficiary

1. Click Manage Account > Account Information > Transfer On Death.

2. To remove a beneficiary, on the TOD Beneficiaries page, click the Remove link on the row listing the beneficiary.

3. To modify a beneficiary, on the TOD Beneficiaries page, click the Modify link on the row listing the beneficiary,
then modify the information as required and click Continue.

If prompted, enter the confirmation number sent to your email address and click Continue.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 291

Chapter 5 Investor Category

Investor Category
The Investor Category page lets you answer a series of questions to determine if you qualify to trade a wider range of
trading products than would be available to a standard investor. You see will this as a Pending Item on the Account Man-
agement home page until you complete the page.

The Investor Category page presents four different investment categories:

l Accredited Investor
l Qualified Purchaser
l Qualified Institutional Buyer
l Eligible Contract Participant

Each section contains questions that helps us determine whether you qualify to trade additional products. If you answer
“Yes” in any section, the section expands with additional questions, which you must also answer.

Who can access the Investor Category page?

ALL account structures can access this page EXCEPT:

Canada customers, India customers, Japan customers, and all Non-Disclosed and Omnibus Broker Client accounts.

To use the Investor Category page

1. Click Manage Account > Account Information > Investor Category.
2. In each section, answer the question by clicking the Yes or No radio button.
If you answer yes, the section expands displays additional questions which vary based on your account structure and fin-
ancial information.

3. Answer all questions in all sections by clicking the appropriate radio button.
4. Type your signature in the Signature field, then click Continue.

Large Trader Identification

A "Large Trader" is any U.S. or non-U.S. person or entity that trades or controls trading (in one or more accounts ) in U.S.
exchange-listed stock AND option trans actions equaling or exceeding:

l 2 million shares or $20 million during any calendar day;

l 20 million shares or $200 million during any calendar month.

Use this page to:

l Add one or more SEC Large Trader ID Numbers to your account .

l Add a Large Trader ID "Suffix" to a Large Trader ID Number (usually us ed to distinguish separate entities in a
corporate structure).
l Deactivate, reactivate or terminate an existing Large Trader ID Number.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 292

Chapter 5 Large Trader Identification

Note: For security purposes , you cannot change a Large Trader ID Number or Suffix online once you
have provided it to us. If a Large Trader ID Number or Suffix listed above for your account is incor-
rect contact Client Services.

Who can access the Large Trader Identification page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User (STL accounts)
l Broker Master User (Fully Disclosed and Non-Disclosed)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Investment Manager Master User (Multiple Fund Account)

To add a Large Trader ID Number to your account

1. Click Manage Account > Account Information > Large Trader Identification.
If you have not yet added a Large Trader ID to your account, a page with general information about Large Trader IDs
appears.

If you have already added Large Trader ID's to your account, a page appears with all of your Large Trader IDs displayed.

2. Click the Add Large Trader ID button.

3. In the Add Large Trader ID dialog, enter the Large Trader ID that you received from the SEC.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 293

Chapter 5 Large Trader Identification

4. Optionally, add a suffix to your Large Trader ID Number. For example, you might want to add suffixes to Large
Trader ID's to distinguish separate entities in a corporate structure.
5. Click OK. The newly-added Large Trader ID (and optional suffix) is added to the list of IDs on the main page.

To add a suffix to Large Trader ID Number

You can add suffixes to Large Trader IDs only if you have not already done so.

1. Click Manage Account > Account Information > Large Trader Identification.
2. Click the Add Suffix button for each Large Trader ID to which you want to add a suffix.
3. In the Add Suffix dialog, type the suffix then click OK.

The suffix is added to the Large Trader ID and appears on the main page.

To deactivate, reactivate or terminate a Large Trader ID Number

1. Click Manage Account > Account Information > Large Trader Identification.
2. Click the blue pen icon in the Status column for the Large Trader ID that you want to deactivate, reactivate or ter-
minate.
3. Click the appropriate radio button, then click OK.
Active IDs give you the choice of Deactivate or Terminate. Inactive IDs give you the choice of Activate or Terminate.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 294

Chapter 5 Tax Information

Tax Information
The Tax Information menu includes the following pages:

l Tax Form Collection - Review important tax-related information and update your W-8/W-9 tax form.
l Withholding Statement - Proprietary Trading Group and Small Business accounts verify information about and
modify the ownership percentages of all of the owners of their organization.

Tax Form Collection

The Tax Form Collection page lets account holders review and update important tax-related information and lets account
holders who are legal residents and citizens of the US (the US is your country of organization formation and organization
registration) fill out or update an IRS Form W-9, Request for Taxpayer Identification Number and Certification or, if you
are not a US legal resident and not a US citizen, IRS Form W-8.

New owners who have been recently added to an organization must log in to Account Management and complete this
form.

Who can access the Tax Form Collection page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To use the Tax Form Collection page

1. Click Manage Account > Account Information > Tax Information > Tax Forms.
The Tax Form Collection page opens, displaying a form with tax-related information that should already be completed
(unless you are a new owner who has been recently added to an organization, in which case you must fill out the form).

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 295

Chapter 5 Tax Form Collection

Advisors and brokers can check the status of client updates to this page on the Dashboard Pending Items tab.

2. Review the information and update as required. Click Back.

3. IRS Form W-9 or W-8 opens.
4. To access the IRS instructions for the form, click the Form Instructions link in the upper right corner of the page.
The following figure shows part of the W-9 form.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 296

Chapter 5 Withholding Statement

Withholding Statement
For each owner, this page displays:

l Name and address

l Tax Identification Number
l Tax statuses
l Percentage of ownership

Who can access the Withholding Statement page?

You can access this page if you are a:

l Proprietary Trading Group Master User

l Small Business Account User

To use this page

1. Click Manage Account > Account Information > Tax Information > Withholding Statement.
2. Verify all of the information.
3. Enter an effective date.
4. If necessary, modify the ownership percentages. Note that the total ownership percentage for all owners must
equal 100.
5. Type your signature and then click Continue.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 297

Chapter 5 Adding an Owner to an Organization

If the status of any owner is INCOMPLETE, that owner has not completed the form on the Tax Form Collection page , a
regulatory requirement for all owners of organizations. All owners of an organization will be prompted to complete this
form upon logging into Account Management. Once the Tax Form Collection page has been completed and submitted, it
will remain available in Account Management for that owner.

For more information about adding owners to your organization in Account Management, see Adding an Owner to an
Organization.

Adding an Owner to an Organization

Proprietary Trading Group Master account users and Small Business account users can add owners to their organizations
in Account Management.

To add an owner to an organization

1. Click Manage Account > Account Information > Details > Profile.

2. Add a new owner (individual or entity) by clicking the Add Individual or Add Entity button.
3. Fill in all required fields on all pages.
l For Association Type, select Owner.
l Enter the ownership percentage of the new owner.
4. Once you have completed and submitted the new owner information, the new owner receives his or her own user-
name and password.
5. The new owner logs in to Account Management, completes the one-time required Tax Form Collection page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 298

Chapter 5 Adding an Owner to an Organization

6. Verify that the new owner and ownership percentage has been added to your account on the Withholding State-
ment page by clicking Manage Account > Account Information > Tax Information > Withholding Statement.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 299

Chapter 5 Settings

Settings
The Account Settings menu includes account-level configuration functions on the following pages:

l Configure Account - Opens a submenu that lets you configure your base currency, institutional services and
account type (upgrade to a margin account).
l Fees - Opens a submenu that lets you select your pricing structure and configure soft dollars.
l Compliance - Advisors can subscribe to RIA Compliance Initiative Section 13 monitoring and reporting.
l Mobile - Enable read-only mode in trading platforms.
l Paper Trading Account - Open a paper trading account.
l Account Alias - Create an alias for your account.
l Close Account - Close your account, view the status of your account closure, or re-open a closed account.
l IRA - Opens a submenu that lets you perform full or partial conversions to a Roth IRA account, and perform full
recharacterizations from a Roth IRA account.

Configure Account
The Configure Account tab includes the following pages:

l Base Currency - Modify the base currency for your account.

l Services - Institutional account holders can change their institutional services (Clear, Prime or Execution).
l Account Type - Upgrade a cash account to a Margin account, or upgrade a Margin account to a Portfolio Margin
account.
l Excess Funds Sweep - Configure the transfer of excess margin funds between your securities and commodities
account segments.

Base Currency
The Base Currency page lets you modify the base currency for your account. Your base currency determines the currency
of translation for your statements, the currency used for determination of margin requirement, and for a Cash Account, the
currency of products you are allowed to trade. In addition, charges related to market data and research, inactivity fees,
and commissions on Forex trades are also charged in your base currency.

Who can access the Base Currency page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 300

Chapter 5 Base Currency

l Advisor Client User Organization

l Proprietary Trading Group Master User (can modify the base currency for the master and sub accounts)
l Broker Master User (can modify the base currency for the master and non-disclosed client accounts)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To modify the base currency for an account

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Configure Account > Base Currency. The Base Currency appears by
default.

2. Select the radio button next to your desired base currency, then click Continue.
3. Verify your selection, then click Continue to submit your currency change request.
If you need to make further changes, click Back, then make corrections before submitting.
Note that base currency changes do not take effect until the next trading day.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 301

Chapter 5 Institutional Services

Institutional Services
We give institutional clients the flexibility to execute and/or clear trades on our platform or with numerous third-party
brokers via the following services:

l Clear - Clients requiring the lowest transaction costs, real-time risk management and efficient trade processing
can both execute, clear, and hold custody of their trades here. This service is available to Canadian clients.
l Prime - Clients execute and clear here, and also take in trades executed with other third-party brokers. This ser-
vice is available to Canadian clients.
l Execution - Trades are executed here using our superior price execution technology, and then given up to a third-
party broker. This service is not available to Canadian clients.
These services can be mixed and matched, and added at any time to fit with our institutional customers’ changing needs.
All services utilize our real-time margin system which prevents unauthorized trading by continuously enforcing limits for
each account, and automatically liquidating positions if any individual account violates its limits at any time.

Who can access the Institutional Services page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User (master user cannot change the Account Type of the master
account)
l Advisor Master User (can only view the Account Type of client accounts and cannot change it for the master
account)
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Broker Master User (can also change the Account Type of Non-Disclosed client accounts)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Investment Manager Master User (can only view the Account Type of client accounts and cannot change it for
the master account)
l Fund

To upgrade or change your institutional service

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Configure Account > Institutional Services
The Institutional Services page opens for the selected account ID.

2. Select the check box next to the Institutional Service to which you want to subscribe.
3. Make any other changes on the page as required to modify your trading permissions, then click Continue.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 302

Chapter 5 Account Type

4. Depending on the products that you have requested permission to trade, you are prompted to sign a risk dis-
closure, as required by law. Complete the online Disclosure Form(s) by typing your name in the Signature field,
then click Continue.
5. Click the link(s) to read the complete agreements and/or disclosures, then click the Accept radio button to
acknowledge your acceptance of the terms of the agreements and disclosures and click Continue.
A Final Acknowledgments/Confirmation page opens, listing your current and requested trading permissions and the cur-
rent status of each. If approved, your trading permissions will be listed with a status of Approved.

Account Type
Use the Account Type page to upgrade your Cash account to a Margin account, or upgrade your Margin account to a
Portfolio Margin account. Before you can upgrade to a margin account, you must meet the eligibility requirements of
those accounts.

Who can access the Account Type page?

You can change your account type on this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User (master user cannot change the Account Type of the master
account)
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Broker Master User (can also change the Account Type of Non-Disclosed client accounts)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Fund

To upgrade to a margin account

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Configure Account > Account Type.

2. In the Account Type drop-down, select the type of margin account to which you want to upgrade.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 303

Chapter 5 Excess Funds Sweep

To upgrade to a Portfolio Margin account, you must be approved to trade options.

3. Click Continue.

Excess Funds Sweep

Your Universal Account is authorized to trade both securities products and commodities/futures products and therefore
consists of two underlying accounts or account segments: a securities account governed by rules of the U.S. Securities
and Exchange Commission (SEC) and a futures account governed by rules of the U.S. Commodity Futures Trading Com-
mission (CFTC). As part of the Universal Account service, you have authorized us to automatically transfer funds as
necessary between your securities account and your futures account in order to satisfy margin requirements in either
account.

Use the Excess Funds Sweep page to configure how you want us to handle the transfer of your excess funds between the
two segments of your account. You can choose to sweep the funds to either the securities account or the commodities
account, or choose not to sweep funds at all.

Note the following:

l All customer deposits are initially received into your securities account and will remain in that account unless
you choose to sweep excess funds to your commodities account.
l If you are identified as a securities pattern day trader, then we strongly recommend that you choose to sweep
excess funds into your securities account.
l Regardless of your choice, we will generally keep a small buffer of excess margin funds in each account in order
to prevent excessive transfers back and forth as your margined securities and futures positions fluctuate in value.
Who can access the Excess Funds Sweep page?
All accounts can access this page EXCEPT:

l Advisor Master User

l Investment Manager Master User

To set your excess funds sweep method

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Configure Account > Excess Funds Sweep.
2. Read the important information on the page, then select a sweep method by clicking one of the radio buttons.
l Do not sweep excess funds
l Sweep excess funds into my securities account
l Sweep excess funds into my commodities account
3. Click Continue. Your setting is saved immediately.

Fees
The Fees tab includes the following pages:

l Pricing Structure - Select your pricing structure for stocks/ETFs/Warrants and for futures.
l Soft Dollar Configuration - Configure your soft dollars, if you are participating in our Soft Dollars program.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 304

Chapter 5 Pricing Structure

Pricing Structure
The Pricing Structure page lets you modify your pricing structure for stocks, warrants and ETFs; and futures.

Who can access the Pricing Structure page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To modify the pricing structure for your account

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Fees > Pricing Structure.

2. Select Fixed or Tiered for all stocks, ETFs and warrants.

3. Select Fixed or Tiered for futures, then click Continue.
4. Verify your information, then click Continue to submit your changes.
If you need to make further changes, click Back, then make corrections before submitting.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 305

 Chapter 5 Request Soft Dollars

Request Soft Dollars

We offer registered professional advisors and hedge and mutual funds the flexibility to offset the costs of purchasing
approved research products and services using soft dollars. Soft dollars are brokerage commissions that are used to pur-
chase research products and services from vendors. You can set up soft dollar payments in five tiers for stocks and for
options.

Contact us to set up soft dollar vendors and to disburse accumulated soft dollars to vendors by sending an email to soft-
dollarsgroup@interactivebrokers.com.

Who can access the Request Soft Dollars page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Registered Professional Advisor

l Multiple Hedge Fund Investment Manager Master User or Single Hedge Fund
Request Soft Dollars

The first time you access the Soft Dollars feature in Account Management, only the Request Soft Dollars link appears in
the Manage Account > Settings > Fees menu.

Soft Dollars Page

The Soft Dollars page lets you set up a five-tiered schedule for soft dollars. Markups must be between 0 and 0.05 dollars
per share for stocks. At the time of your trade, you specify which soft dollar tier to use; the soft dollar amount will be
based on the tier you select. Currently, only US stocks and options are eligible for soft dollars.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 306

Chapter 5 Soft Dollars Page

The Soft Dollars page only appears AFTER you have signed and submitted the Soft Dollars Agreement on the Request
Soft Dollars page.

To set up soft dollar tiers

1. In Account Management, click Manage Account > Settings > Fees > Request Soft Dollars. Type your signature
in the field provided on the agreement, and then submit the form electronically.
2. Contact us via email at softdollarsgroup@interactivebrokers.com to request that accounts be set up for each
vendor to whom you want to disburse soft dollars.
3. Once the vendor accounts are set up, log in to Account Management, then click Manage Account > Settings >
Fees > Soft Dollar Configuration.
The Soft Dollars page shows the current and last soft dollar commission schedules for stocks and options. There
are five tiers of soft dollar commissions for stocks and for options. The first time you use soft dollars in Account
Management, these fields are set to 0 (zero).

4. Enter values in the Soft Dollar Commission fields for each tier. Values are in dollars per share and must be
between 0 and 0.05.
The dollar amounts for the five tiers must be in ascending order, with the lowest amount in Tier 1 and the highest
amount in Tier 5. If you enter soft dollar amounts in non-ascending order, the system automatically rearranges the
amounts in ascending order for you.

Please note that this tier selection is used to calculate the total gross commissions, and the soft dollar disbursement
amount is the remainder once all commissions have been deducted. Let's look at a simple example on a stock order using
the Fixed Rate commission structure. Suppose you set a soft dollar Tier 5 for stocks to 0.05. In IB TWS, on a stock order
for 1000 shares with Tier 5 selected, total client commissions would be 1000 shares x 0.05 (Tier Rate) = $50.00. The

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 307

 Chapter 5 Soft Payments in Activity Statements

Fixed Rate commission on this order of $.005/share is 1000 x .005 = $5.00. The soft dollar amount would be equal to
$45.00 for this order.

5. Click Back.
6. Confirm your soft dollar markup schedules by clicking Back. The Account Management home page opens.
Soft Payments in Activity Statements

If you have set up and are using soft dollars, your activity statements will show all of your soft dollar payments in the
Soft Dollar Activity section of your statement. You can also choose to include or omit this section when you create cus-
tomized activity statements and Activity Flex queries.

Compliance for Advisors

Through our Advisor Compliance Obligations Reporting System, we now provide Section 13 monitoring, alerts and on-
demand reporting for advisors trading through us that they may need to file Form 13F or Schedules 13D/13G with the
U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) because of the types and amount of positions held in their client and
proprietary accounts. This system was designed to support Form 13F and Schedule 13D/G monitoring and reporting for
advisory firms with multiple advisors.

You must activate the service before you can subscribe to alerts and on-demand reporting. Once you subscribe to this ser-
vice, we monitor your aggregate sub account and proprietary positions for thresholds specified in Section 13 of the
Exchange Act. You can elect to receive alerts and/or reports when your positions exceed these thresholds. You are then
required to file the appropriate form or schedule with the SEC.

We currently support the following filings:

l Form 13F - Reporting equity positions in managed portfolios of more than $100 million.
l Schedules 13D/13G - Reporting significant acquisition and ownership positions.
The Compliance menu includes these pages, which represent different functions in our Advisor Compliance Initiative sys-
tem:

l Section 13 Subscription Election

l Section 13 Monitoring Groups
l Section 13 Handshake Requests
l Section 13 On Demand Report Request
l Section 13 Designate Aggregated Report Recipients

Who Can Subscribe to this Service?

You are eligible to subscribe to this service if you are an account user with Compliance Functions user access rights for
one of the following types of advisor accounts:

l Registered Advisor
l Non-Registered Advisor
l Friends and Family Advisor
l Hedge Fund Investment Manager

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 308

Chapter 5 Using the Service for the First Time

l Family Office Advisor

l Money Manager

Using the Service for the First Time

If you have never used our Section 13 monitoring and reporting service before, the next time you log in to Account Man-
agement, you will be given the opportunity to activate the service.

Upon logging in, the Section 13 Subscription Election page opens. To activate the service, click the Yes radio button. If
you select No, we send you a message in the Message Center confirming your choice (you can always subscribe later). If
you select Ask me later, you will continue to see this page when you log in to Account Management.

Section 13 Subscription Election

This page lets advisors subscribe to Form 13F and Schedule 13D/13G alerts. Note that advisors must subscribe to a report
on this page before they can enable their account to receive the report on the Section 13 Designate Aggregated Report
Recipients page.

To subscribe to these alerts:

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Compliance > Section 13 > Subscription Election.

2. Click Yes or No and then click Continue.

3. Click Yes or No for each type of alert, reminder and report that you would like to receive.
4. Choose how you would like to receive these alerts: via email and in the Message Center or only in the Message
Center.
Click Confirm.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 309

 Chapter 5 Section 13 Monitoring Groups

Section 13 Monitoring Groups

This page lets advisors and their Compliance Users group advisor accounts for the purpose of aggregating their asso-
ciated client accounts' positions and trades. These groups are called "monitoring groups." A monitoring group is based on
a monitoring type: Form 13F or Schedule 13D/G.

On the Section 13 Monitoring Groups page, you can:

l Create a new monitoring group

l Add advisor accounts with the same tax ID to a monitoring group
l Remove an account from a monitoring group
l Delete a monitoring group
l Initiate a handshake request to add other advisors with different Tax IDs from your own to a monitoring group
Rules for Monitoring Groups

l An account can only belong to one group of a specific monitoring group, i.e. an account cannot belong to two
Form 13F groups or two Schedule 13D/13G groups.
l Once an account is removed from a group or the entire group is deleted, the account is available for inclusion into
another group.
l An account with the same tax ID as the account creating a group can be included in the group either by the spe-
cial selection or by handshake. Accounts that do not have the same tax ID can only be included through a hand-
shake.
l Two groups of the same monitoring type cannot have the same name.
l You can create as many groups of the same monitoring type as needed.

To create a new monitoring group

You must create a monitoring group before you add accounts to it.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 310

Chapter 5 Rules for Monitoring Groups

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Compliance > Section 13 > Monitoring Groups.

2. Enter a group name.

3. Select the monitoring type: Form 13 or Schedule 13D/13G.
4. Click Create.
The new group appears in Details of Groups table.

To add advisor accounts with the same tax ID to a monitoring group

After you have created a monitoring group, you can add one or more advisor accounts with the same tax ID to the group.

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Compliance > Section 13 > Monitoring Groups.
2. In the table, click the Edit icon (pencil) for the group to which you want to add an account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 311

Chapter 5 Rules for Monitoring Groups

3. Click Add Accounts.

The Monitoring Group Account Aggregation page opens, and displays your account ID along with the account IDs of
advisors with the same tax ID. All account IDs are checked by default.

4. Make sure that only the advisor account IDs that you want to add to the group are checked, and then click Sub-
mit.
The Monitoring Groups page opens with the selected advisor account ID added to the group in the table.

To remove an account from a monitoring group

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Compliance > Section 13 > Monitoring Groups.
2. In the table, click the Edit icon (pencil) for the group from which you want to delete an account.
The members of the selected group are displayed above the buttons.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 312

Chapter 5 Rules for Monitoring Groups

3. Click the Delete icon (cylinder with the red x) next to the account you want to remove from the group, and then
click Save.

To delete a monitoring group

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Compliance > Section 13 > Monitoring Groups.
2. In the table, click the Delete icon (cylinder with the red x) for the group you want to delete.

Initiate a handshake request

In some cases, you may want to a monitoring group to include advisor accounts whose tax IDs do not match the tax IDs
of the other accounts in the group. In these cases, you initiate a handshake request to add the advisor to the monitoring
group. For example, your advisory firm may use consulting advisors who have their own tax IDs.

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Compliance > Section 13 > Monitoring Groups.
2. In the table, click the Edit icon (pencil) for the group to which you want to add an account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 313

Chapter 5 Rules for Monitoring Groups

3. Click Add Accounts.

The Monitoring Group Account Aggregation page opens, showing all advisor accounts with matching tax IDs. They are
checked by default.

4. Click Yes to indicate that you would like your firm's positions aggregated with the positions managed by any
other advisor account held at IB for Section 13 reporting purposes (i.e., those whose tax IDs do not match the
other accounts in the monitoring group).

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 314

Chapter 5 Section 13 Handshake Requests

5. Enter the account ID of the other advisor and the name of the other advisor's firm.
6. Click Search to view the matching account.
7. Type a note to the other advisor in the text box that appears, and then click Submit.
8. Click Manage Account > Settings > Compliance > Section 13 > Handshake Requests to confirm that your
request was submitted.
9. The other advisor will receive your request as a message in the Message Center the next time he or she logs in to
Account Management. This other advisor will accept or decline the request on the Section 13 Handshake
Requests page. Once the other advisor accepts the request, his or her account will be included in the monitoring
group.

Section 13 Handshake Requests

Use this page to view all of your handshake requests, which you initiate from the Monitoring Groups page to add other
advisors whose tax IDs are not the same as your own to a monitoring group. Advisors who receive handshake requests
view them and accept or decline them on this page.

Section 13 On Demand Report Request

Use this page to submit requests for Form 13F and Schedules 13D/G reports and view the status of all report requests.
There are two ways to request a report:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 315

 Chapter 5 Rules for On Demand Report Generation

l Select a monitoring group from a drop-down list of available groups. This lets you request a report for a group of
which you are not a member but are the owner (creator).
l Select a monitoring type (Form 13F or Schedules 13D/G) and enter report parameters. The system will get the asso-
ciated group for your account (you are the user that requested the report) and will run the report on that group. If
your account is not part of a group, the system will run the report for your advisor account.
You can cancel a report request whose status is Pending.

Rules for On Demand Report Generation

l If you submit a report request by monitoring group, only the members of that group will be able to view the
report.
l A group owner (the advisor who created the monitoring group) can make an on demand report request for that
group.
l If you submit a report request by monitoring type, the system automatically selects the monitoring group of that
type of which you are a member. If you are not a member of a group and you request a report monitoring type, the
system will run the report for only you and your clients.
l For Schedule 13D/G reporting, the starting date must be one year or less from the current date.
l For Schedule 13D/G reporting, the date range must not exceed 60 days.
l You cannot submit duplicate report requests (report requests with identical parameters) for reports that are pending
generation. Once the report is generated, you can submit another report request with the same parameters.

To submit an on demand report request by group

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Compliance > Section 13 > On Demand Reporting.
The Section 13 On Demand Report Request page opens, showing all current report requests.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 316

Chapter 5 Rules for On Demand Report Generation

2. Select a monitoring group from the Select Group info drop-down. The Monitoring Type will be automatically set
to the correct monitoring type for that group.
l For Form 13F, select the year and quarter.
l For Schedules 13D/G, enter a CUSIP, a starting date and an ending date.
3. Click Generate Report.
4. View the report on the Reports > Supplemental > Compliance page in Account Management.

To submit an on demand report request by monitoring type

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Compliance > Section 13 > On Demand Reporting.
2. Select a monitoring type from the drop-down.
3. If you selected Form 13F, select the year and quarter.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 317

 Chapter 5 Section 13 Designate Aggregated Report Recipients

If you selected Schedules 13D/G, enter a CUSIP, a starting date and an ending date.

4. Click Generate Report.

5. View the report on the Reports > Supplemental > Compliance page in Account Management.

To cancel a report request

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Compliance > Section 13 > On Demand Reporting.
2. In the list of report requests, click the red X icon in the Actions column to cancel any report request whose status
is Pending.

Section 13 Designate Aggregated Report Recipients

Use this page to enable or disable aggregated reports for specific accounts in monitoring groups. For example, if you set
up a monitoring group for Form 13F reporting with three advisors, but you only want two of the advisors in the group to
receive the aggregated reports, you would come to the Section 13 Designate Aggregated Report Recipients page to dis-
able reporting for the advisor in the monitoring group who you do not want to receive the report. The advisor for whom
you disable reporting on this page will still get the report that is specific to his or her clients, but will not have access to
the client positions associated with the other advisors in the group.

Rules for Designating Aggregated Report Recipients

l You cannot enable an account to be a report recipient if that group is not subscribed to the service on the Section
13 Subscription Election page.
l You cannot select a monitoring group that has no members.

To enable or disable an account to be a report recipient

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 318

Chapter 5 Trading Platforms Read-Only Access

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Compliance > Section 13 > Report Recipients.
2. Select the monitoring group from the drop-down. the Monitoring Type for the selected group is automatically
selected.
3. In the list of members of the selected group, select Enable or Disable in the Actions column as desired.

Trading Platforms Read-Only Access

This page lets you enable or disable read-only access to trading platforms.

Read-only access gives you access to your account in any trading platform without requiring you to log in. When your
account is in read-only mode, you will be able to view real time market data, account balances and activity in our trad-
ing platform. To trade, you will need to log in.

When read-only access is enabled, it can be activated and deactivated from the Configuration screen. When disabled, the
feature is not accessible.

Who can access the Trading Platforms Read-Only Access page?

You can access this page if you have Trader Workstation access rights.

To enable or disable Read-Only Access

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Mobile.

2. Do one of the following:

l To enable read-only access, click the Enable radio button.
When read-only mode is enabled, "Enable" changes to "Enabled."
Read-only mode is enabled by default.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 319

Chapter 5 Paper Trading

l To disable read-only access, click the Disable radio button.

When read-only mode is disabled, "Disable" changes to "Disabled."
3. Click Continue.
4. When read-only access is enabled, when you open a trading platform, you will be asked if you want to use read-
only mode. When you have in read-only access enabled, you will not have to log back into the trading platform
to view market data, account balances or activity.

Paper Trading
Paper trading lets you use the full range of trading facilities in a simulated environment using real market conditions. Use
this page to request a Paper Trading Account.

Who can access the Paper Trading page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Broker Non-Disclosed Client User
l Broker Omnibus Client User
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To open a paper trading account

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Paper Trading.
2. Read the text on the page, which contains important information about paper trading accounts, then click
Continue.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 320

Chapter 5 About Paper Trading Accounts

3. Type a five-character paper trading account username in the field provided.

4. Type a paper trading account password in the field provided. The password must be from six to eight characters
and must contain at least one number and no spaces.
5. Re-type the password in the field provided, then click Back. The system will generate a full username for you
when you click Back.
6. You are prompted to click Yes to confirm your request for a paper trading account, or click No to cancel your
request.
Be sure to write down your username and password; your password will not be shown on the screen again.

About Paper Trading Accounts

Paper Trading Accounts work as described below.

l It works just like your production account. You can use most order types, trade all instruments available through
our trading platform, and experiment with almost every aspect of the platform.
l The PaperTrader interface clearly indicates that you are working in a simulated account. If you do not see this,
you are trading in your production account and will be liable for all trades that fill.
l New individual account holders automatically receive a paper trading account. Existing account holders with a
paper trading account can log in to TWS with their production account and select either production or paper trad-
ing account without having to use their paper trading account login credentials. Note that Advisors, Brokers,
Advisor and Broker clients, Hedge Funds, Administrators, Referrers and residents of India and Japan will still
have to log in to their paper trading accounts with their paper trading account credentials.
l Trades entered into this paper trading account will not actually execute on any exchange or settle at a clearing
house. However, the price of your executions will be determined by real market prices and sizes.
l Trading permissions, market data subscriptions, base currency, and other account configurations are the same as
specified for your regular account.
l A paper trading account statement will be provided each day and is available by logging into Account Man-
agement with your Paper Trading Account login and accessing the Reports menu.
l All paper trading accounts start with USD 1,000,000 of paper trading Equity with Loan Value, and this equity
will fluctuate as if the trades had executed in the real market.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 321

Chapter 5 Paper Trading Account Limitations

l You may reset your cash equity at any time in Account Management for your Paper Trading Account. You can
reset your paper trading cash equity to up to five times your production account value. Please note that reset
requests should be entered before 16:00 ET in order to take effect for the next business day.

Paper Trading Account Limitations

Although a Paper Trading Account simulates most aspects of a production account, you may encounter some differences
due to its construction as a simulator with no execution or clearing abilities. These differences include but are not limited
to:

l No support for some order types including: VWAP, Auction, RFQ, and Pegged to Market.
l Fills are simulated from the top of the book; no deep book access.
l Limited combo and EFP trading.
l Stops and other complex order types are always simulated in paper trading; this may result in slightly different
behavior from a production account.
l Penny trading for US Options is not supported. You will be able to submit the order but it will not receive a
penny fill.
l The trade simulator will reject the remainder of any exchange-directed market order that partially executes. This
may or may not match behavior of a real-world exchange. Market orders received while there is no quote on the
opposite side will be held until the market data arrives (i.e. until the first partial fill).
l Mutual Fund trading is not supported in a Paper Trader Account.

Account Alias
The Account Alias page lets you define an alias for your account. For example, you might want to define an account
alias that is easier to remember than your account ID. If you are a master user, you can define an alias for any client or
sub accounts that you manage. If you create an account alias, it will appear on your account statements and if your an
Advisor Master, the account aliases will also be reflected in our trading platform.

Who can access the Account Alias page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Advisor Master User (master account only)
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User (master account only)
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Investment Manager Master User (master account only)

To define an account alias

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Account Alias.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 322

Chapter 5 How to Close Your Account

2. Type the account alias in the Account Alias field, then click Continue.
The page refreshes and displays a confirmation message.

How to Close Your Account

Complete the following steps to close your account. Note that for USD-based accounts, we will initiate an ACH transfer
based on an ACH bank instruction you have on file. If you have more than one ACH bank instruction on file, you will
have the opportunity to select one. If you do not have any ACH bank instructions, we will issue a check to your U.S.
mailing address on file. For all non-USD based accounts, we will issue a wire based on the banking instruction on file.

1. Liquidate or Transfer Positions

Accounts with positions cannot be closed. You must either liquidate, or trans-
fer all positions to another brokerage firm. Please contact your broker for trans-
fer instructions.

To check your positions, log in to Account Management and select Reports

> Activity. View your latest statement to verify that all positions have been
liquidated or transferred.
2. Convert Foreign Currencies
Closing withdrawals may only be made in your base currency. You must con-
vert any foreign currency you may hold back to your account's base currency.
Be sure to check your statement and consider any dividend or interest accru-
als. The conversion can be processed using the Trader Workstation FXTrader.
IB will automatically convert non-Base currency balances when you submit a
close account request and the balances are below USD 1,000 equivalent. If
you need assistance with the conversion process please contact our Trade
Desk.
3. Verify Bank Wire Instructions
For all non-USD based accounts, we will issue a wire based on the saved
bank information (instruction) on file. If you do not have any saved bank
information (instruction) for a Wire Withdrawal, create one.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 323

Chapter 5 How to Close Your Account

4. Return Secure Login Device

If you participate in the Secure Login System, you must return your secure
login device. Cash balances will be reduced by the cost of the device
(between USD 20 and USD 150 depending on device) until the secure login
device is returned.
5. IRA Accounts Withdrawals
IRA account holders will need to complete an IRA Withdrawal on the Fund-
ing > Fund Transfers page in Account Management and specify the type of
withdrawal for government tax reporting purposes.
6. Ensure Recent Deposits Have Cleared
All recent deposits, such as ACH, check and wire transfers, must have time to
clear according to the Customer Deposit Credit and Hold Periods policy
before your request to close your account can be honored.
See the Funding Reference for details on credit and hold periods:
7. Check Statements and Tax Forms
To access activity statements and tax forms, log in to Account Management
and open the Reports menu.

Note: This information will only be available for a limited

time after your account is closed. You will need to save
your username and password for future access to state-
ments.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 324

Chapter 5 Close Account

8. Close Account

1. After you have completed all of the previous steps, log in to Account
Management and select Manage Account > Settings > Close Account.
o For USD-based accounts only, we will initiate an ACH transfer if
you have an existing ACH bank instruction. If you have more than
one ACH bank instruction, select the ACH bank instruction you
wish to use from the drop-down list on the Close Account page.
o For USD-based accounts only, if you do not have an existing ACH
bank instruction, you can either create one in Account Man-
agement on the Fund Transfers page or we will issue a check to
your U.S. mailing address on file. In the latter case, confirm that we
have your correct U.S. mailing address by checking the address dis-
played on the Close Account page.

To make changes, open the Profile page in Account Management

by selecting Manage Account > Account Information > Details.
2. Specify the reason you are closing your account by clicking the appro-
priate check boxes.
3. Click the Submit button to submit your request.
Your account will generally be held open for up to three months after
you receive your closing withdrawal to collect any possible future
fees, dividends, interest, or corporate actions. After that time, your
account will be closed permanently.
4. Check back to see if any balance has been created on future state-
ments.
5. You can view the status of your request to close your account by log-
ging in to Account Management and selecting Manage Account > Set-
tings > Close Account > Status.

Note: If the above criteria are not met, our system will be unable to process your account closure request.
Inactivity fees will continue to be deducted from an account until the above steps are completed,
including the return of any Secure Login System device. Also note that funds held to secure the
return of the security device may not be withdrawn until the device has been returned, and will be
applied to meet any inactivity or market data fees.

Close Account
Use the Close Account page to submit a request to close an account. If you have one or more open client accounts, your
request to close your account will not be processed until all client accounts are closed.

For USD-based accounts, we will initiate an ACH transfer based on an ACH bank instruction you have on file. If you
have more than one ACH bank instruction on file, you will have the opportunity to select one. If you do not have any

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 325

Chapter 5 Close Account

ACH bank instructions, we will issue a check to your U.S. mailing address on file. For all non-USD based accounts, we
will issue a wire based on the banking instruction on file.

Note: These instructions describe how to use the Close Account page in Account Management. The
instructions on the Close Account page summarize the steps that you must take to close your
account. For a more detailed description of the account closure process, see How to Close Your
Account.

Who can access the Close Account page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User (master account only)
l Broker Master User (master and non-disclosed client accounts)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To close an account from Account Management

1. Click Manage Account > Settings > Close Account. The Close Account Request page appears by default.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 326

Chapter 5 Account Closure Status

2. If you have a master account, use the Account Selector to search for client or sub accounts by Account ID,
Account Title or Account Alias, then click the client or sub account you want to close.
You must close all client accounts that you manage before you can close your own account.

3. Read the instructions on the page carefully. If your account is USD-based, we will initiate an ACH transfer based
on an ACH bank instruction you have on file. If you have more than one ACH bank instruction on file, select the
one you want to use from the drop-down list.
If you do not have an ACH bank instruction on file, we will issue a check. Verify your US mailing address dis-
played on the screen.
4. Specify the reason you are closing your account by clicking the appropriate check boxes.
5. Click Submit.
6. Click Cancel on the next page if you change your mind and do not want to close the account.
The Close Account page will display the status of your request.

Account Closure Status

The Closure Status page lets our clients who have submitted requests to close their accounts view the status of their
request. Only those accounts will have access to this page.

To check the status of account closure request

1. Log into Account Management. Note that Account Management for closed accounts displays an abbreviated
menu.
2. Click Manage Account > Settings > Closure Status.
The Closure Status page displays.
Any pending or outstanding items required to close your account are displayed on the screen.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 327

Chapter 5 Reopening a Closed Account

Reopening a Closed Account

The Reopen Account page lets you re-open an account that has been closed. If you close your account, you can continue
to access Account Management with your account username and password. For example, you may want to access state-
ments, check fund status or change your password after your account has been closed. Only closed accounts have access
to this page.

To submit a request to reopen your account, you must meet the following requirements:

l The date your account was originally opened must be after January 1, 2002. If your account was opened before
that date, you cannot re-open it using the Reopen Account page in Account Management.
l Your account must be AML-compliant. This means that your account must meet our Anti-Money Laundering
requirements. (Most closed accounts meet this requirement, but some may not.)
l If you are submitting a request to re-open a client or sub account, the Master account must be open.

Who can access the Reopen Account page?

You can access this page if your account is closed or a request to close your account has been submitted, and you meet
the requirements listed above.

To submit a request to re-open your account

1. Login into Account Management. Note that Account Management for closed accounts displays an abbreviated
menu.
2. Click Manage Account > Settings > Reopen Account.
The Reopen Account page displays.
Note: Before you can submit your request to re-open your account, you must update your trading
permissions (which products you want to trade in which countries), and your market data
subscriptions.

3. Click the Update Trading Permissions link.

4. Follow the instructions on the screen to select the products you wish to trade and the countries in which to trade
them.
If the account does not meet the trading experience, knowledge or financial criteria required to trade the products you
select, we provide a specific error message and a link to submit a request to update this information.

5. Click Manage Account , Account Settings, Close Account, then Reopen to display the Reopen Account page
again.
6. Click the Update Market Data Subscriptions link.
7. Follow the instructions on the screen to select market data subscriptions.
Note: If your account has an expired W-8 form (if it was completed more than four years before the
date of your re-open request), an Update W-8 link appears. Click the link and submit an
updated W-8, then return to the Reopen Account page and complete your request.

8. Click Manage Account , Account Settings, Close Account, then Reopen to display the Reopen Account page
again.
9. Click Back.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 328

Chapter 5 IRA

10. You will receive a confirmation number via email. Enter this confirmation number on the screen in the field
provided on the Reopen Account page.
The screen updates to inform you that your request has been submitted and is pending approval.

IRA
The IRA tab includes the following pages:

l IRA Conversion to a Roth Account - Perform a full conversion from your Traditional, Rollover or SEP IRA
account to a Roth IRA account.
l Partial IRA Conversion - Perform a partial IRA conversion.
l IRA Recharacterization - Perform a recharacterization from your Roth account to an Traditional, Rollover or SEP
IRA account.
l Partial IRA Recharacterization - Perform a partial IRA recharacterization.

For more information about our IRA accounts, see IRA Reference.

IRA Conversion to a Roth Account

Use this page to perform a full conversion from your Traditional, Rollover or SEP IRA account to a Roth IRA account. In
a full conversion, all assets in your Traditional or SEP IRA account are transferred to your Roth IRA account.

The following rules and procedures apply to IRA conversions:

l For IRA Conversions from another Custodian/Trustee, you must open an Roth IRA account if you do not already
have one.
l For IRA Conversions from a Traditional IRA or Rollover or SEP IRA account, you must open a Roth IRA if you
do not already have one.
l We only allow full conversions. For instructions on how to perform a partial conversion, see Partial IRA Con-
versions
l If you request a full conversion, your existing Traditional/SEP IRA account will be closed upon completion of the
transfer.
l A conversion to a Roth IRA is subject to federal and possibly state income tax withholding, unless you elect not
to have withholding apply. You may either elect not to withhold federal income tax or you may elect to withhold
at a rate not less than 10%.
l If federal income tax is withheld, state income tax may also be withheld. Where state income tax applies, the rate
will be no less than the state's minimum withholding requirement. Your state of residence (the legal address for
your IRA account), will determine your state income tax withholding requirement.

Consult your tax advisor about your tax withholding requirement.

l To qualify for an IRA conversion, the total cash available in your Traditional or SEP IRA account must be greater
than the federal tax amount + the state tax amount + 2% of total assets being converted. Stated as an equation,
this requirement is:

Total Cash Available > Federal Tax Amount + State Tax Amount + 2% of total assets being converted

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 329

Chapter 5 Partial IRA Conversions

l Transfers of securities positions from a Traditional or SEP IRA to a Roth IRA will only be accepted between
accounts with matching names and taxpayer identification numbers.
l Refer to IRS Publication 590, Individual Retirement Arrangements and consult your tax advisor regarding your
individual tax situation when deciding to convert.
Note: If you are opening a new account for the purpose of doing an IRA conversion or recharacterization,
you should select the funding option IRA Conversion or Recharacterization in the Funding section
of the account application.

Who can access the IRA Conversion to a Roth Account page?

You can access this page if you are an IRA User with a Traditional, Rollover or SEP IRA account.

To perform an IRA conversion to a Roth IRA account

1. Log into Account Management for the Traditional or SEP IRA account you want to convert.
2. Click Manage Account > Settings > IRA > IRA Conversion to Roth Account.
3. In the Transfer Method list, select IRA Conversion - Transfer Assets to Roth Account.
4. Enter the username, password and account ID of the Roth IRA account to which you want to convert your Tra-
ditional, Rollover or SEP IRA account, then click Continue.
5. A confirmation number is sent to your email address of record. Enter the number on the next screen, then click
Confirm.

If you did not receive a confirmation number, click Request Confirmation Number to receive a new confirmation
number.
6. Be sure to read and understand the important rules governing IRA conversions before you make your Federal and
State Income Tax withholding elections.
Enter your Federal Income Tax withholding rate or elect not to have Federal Income Tax withheld. The tax rate is a per-
centage of your total account equity. Click the appropriate radio button to indicate your choice.

7. On the same screen, enter your State Income Tax withholding rate or elect not to have Federal Income Tax with-
held. The tax rate is a percentage of your total account equity. Click the appropriate radio button to indicate your
choice.
8. Click Continue. The status of your request appears on the screen.

Partial IRA Conversions

While we only allows full IRA Conversions, you can follow these steps to perform a partial IRA conversion:

1. Log into Account Management for your Traditional, Rollover or SEP IRA account.
2. Click Manage Account > Add Accounts > Add an Account.
3. Use the Add an Account page to create a new Traditional, Rollover or SEP IRA account that is linked to your
IRA account.
4. Once the new Traditional, Rollover or SEP IRA Account is open, log into Account Management for your original
IRA account, then click Funding > Position Transfers to transfer assets into the new IRA account.
5. Once the assets have been transferred into the new IRA account, use the IRA Conversion to a Roth Account page
to convert the newly-opened IRA account to a Roth account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 330

Chapter 5 IRA Recharacterization

IRA Recharacterization
Use this page to perform a recharacterization from your Roth account to a Traditional, Rollover or SEP IRA account. An
IRA recharacterization is a transfer of converted Roth IRA assets back to a new or existing Traditional IRA account.
Roth IRA converted amounts from a SEP IRA may also be recharacterized back to a SEP IRA account.

The following rules apply to IRA recharacterizations:

l We only allows full recharacterizations. For instructions on how to perform a partial recharacterization, see Partial
IRA Recharacterizations.
l If you request a recharacterization, your existing Roth IRA account will be closed upon completion of the trans-
fer.
l Transfers of securities positions from a Roth IRA to a Traditional, Rollover or SEP IRA will only be accepted
between accounts with matching names and taxpayer identification numbers.
l You must elect to recharacterize by your federal tax return due date of the year following the year of the con-
version, including the additional maximum six-month extension allowed by the IRS.
Note: If you are opening a new account for the purpose of doing an IRA conversion or recharacterization,
you should select the funding option IRA Conversion or Recharacterization in the Funding section
of the account application.

Who can access the IRA Recharacterization page?

You can access this page if you are an IRA User with a Roth IRA account.

To perform an IRA recharacterization

1. Log into Account Management for the Roth IRA account you want to convert.
2. Click Manage Account > Settings > IRA > IRA Recharacterization.
3. In the Transfer Method list, select IRA Recharacterization - Transfer Assets to Traditional/SEP Account.
4. Enter the username, password and account ID of the Traditional, Rollover or SEP IRA account to which you want
to transfer your Roth IRA assets, then click Continue.
5. A confirmation number is sent to your email address of record. Enter the number on the next screen, then click
Confirm.

If you did not receive a confirmation number, click Request Confirmation Number to receive a new confirmation
number.
6. Click Continue. The status of your request appears on the screen.

Partial IRA Recharacterizations

While we only allows full IRA recharacterizations, you can following these steps to do perform a partial IRA rechar-
acterization:

1. Log into Account Management for your Traditional, Rollover or SEP IRA account.
2. Click Manage Account > Add Accounts > Add an Account.
3. Use the Add Account page to create a new Roth IRA account that is linked to your IRA account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 331

Chapter 5 IRA Reference

4. Once the new Roth IRA Account is open, log into Account Management for your original IRA account, then
click Funding > Position Transfers to transfer assets into the new IRA account.
5. Once the assets have been transferred into the new IRA account, use the IRA Recharacterization function to
recharacterize the newly-opened Roth IRA account.

IRA Reference
This section includes general information on our Individual Retirement Accounts (IRAs) accounts. The following topics
are included:

l IRA Account Types

l IRA Transfer Methods
l Conversions and Recharacterizations

IRA Account Types

This topic describes the different types of IRA accounts that are available.

IRA Margin Accounts

l US resident customers may open cash or margin Individual Retirement Accounts (IRAs). The following rules
apply to IRA margin accounts:
l IRA margin accounts are afforded all the benefits of a margin account, such as the ability to day trade and the abil-
ity to trade multiple currencies and multiple currency products, but are subject to the following limitations:
l IRA accounts cannot borrow cash (i.e. have a debit balance or short stocks).
l IRA accounts may be opened in any base currency, but when trading in a non-base currency product a currency
trade must be executed first as you cannot borrow currencies.
l IRA accounts can only cross-margin single stock futures, not stocks and options.
l IRA accounts cannot borrow currencies.

Note: Customers are advised to consult a tax specialist for further details on IRA rules and regulations.

IRA Account Types

When you open an IRA account with us, you must select a type of IRA account. The following IRA types are available:

l Traditional
l Traditional Rollover
l Traditional Inherited
l Roth
l Roth Inherited
l Simplified Employee Pension (SEP)

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 332

Chapter 5 IRA Transfer Methods

IRA Transfer Methods

Transfer methods describe the way an IRA account is funded. All of the following transfer methods are cash transactions,
and Trustee-to-Trustee transfers can also use an ACATS position transfer in Account Management.

l Contribution - The dollar amount of assets you are contributing to an IRA account, subject to certain limits based
upon your age and the year of the contribution. Contributions are reported to the Internal Revenue Service (IRS).
l Rollover - A transfer of funds from an IRA account with another trustee/custodian, within 60 days following a
distribution, to an IRA account. Rollovers are required to be reported to the IRS. IRA account types must be the
same in order to rollover assets, for example if the originating account is a Roth IRA, your account must also be a
Roth IRA.
l Direct Rollover - A transfer of funds from a qualified plan (pension, 401(k) or other qualified retirement plan)
with an employer to an IRA account. In a Direct Rollover, the trustee/custodian of your employer qualified plan
(401(k) or pension) transfers your retirement assets directly to us. In general, no withholding tax or penalties apply
to a Direct Rollover, however Direct Rollovers are reported to the IRS.
l Trustee-to-Trustee - A transfer of funds from an IRA account held with another trustee/custodian to an IRA
account, where the assets are transferred directly trustee/custodian to trustee/custodian, with no distribution of
assets to you. ACATs position transfers are available, however the IRA account type and Tax ID must match in
order to execute the transfer. Trustee-to-trustee transfers are not required to be reported to the IRS.

Refer to the Tax Reporting page on our website for information on IRS forms you will receive when transferring retire-
ment plan assets.

The following table lists all available IRA types and applicable transfer methods.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 333

Chapter 5 IRA Transfer Methods

Applicable Transfer
IRA Type Description
Method
Traditional A retirement savings plan that allows an individual l Contribution
taxpayer to contribute earnings until they are with-
l Rollover
drawn.
l Direct
Contributions are subject to annual limits depending
on the age of the account owner and may or may not l Rollover
be deductible depending on the individual’s cir- l Trustee-to-Trustee
cumstances.
l IRA Conversion
Earnings accumulate tax deferred until distributed to
you at which time the earnings are subject to tax
upon withdrawal. A spouse may contribute to a sep-
arate account subject to the same limits.

Withdrawals made prior to age 59½ are subject to a

10% penalty unless certain special circumstances
apply. Distributions must begin by the account
owner’s required beginning date (RBD), which is
April 1 following the year you turn age 70½. Once
you reach age 70½, you must withdraw at least a
minimum amount – an annual Required Minimum
Distribution (RMD) - by December 31 of each year.
If an account owner fails to withdraw the full amount
of the RMD annually, or fails to withdraw the RMD,
there is a 50% tax penalty on the amount not with-
drawn.

Traditional Rollover A traditional IRA account that receives assets dir- l Contribution
ectly from an employer-sponsored plan such as a
401(k) or pension plan within 60 days of distribution l Rollover
from the plan. As long as no other assets are con-
tributed to the Traditional Rollover IRA, the monies l Trustee-to-Trustee
may be rolled over into a new employer's plan. A tra-
ditional rollover IRA is commonly used if you are l IRA Conversion
changing jobs or retiring.

Traditional Inherited An IRA account you may set up as the beneficiary l Trustee-to-Trustee
of a Traditional IRA you inherited from a spouse or
other IRA account owner who has died, to receive a
transfer of beneficiary IRA assets.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 334

Chapter 5 Conversions and Recharacterizations

Applicable Transfer
IRA Type Description
Method
Roth A retirement savings plan that allows an individual l Contribution
taxpayer to contribute earnings, subject to certain
income limits. Earnings accumulate tax-free and l Rollover
contributions are nondeductible. Unlike Traditional
IRAs, a Roth IRA account owner may continue to l Trustee-to-Trustee
contribute after age 70½ if they have earned
income. Withdrawals prior to age 59½ are subject to l IRA Rechar-
a 10% penalty unless special circumstances apply. acterization
There are no age requirements when an account
owner must begin taking distributions. Contributions
are subject to annual limits depending on the age of
the account owner.

Roth Inherited An IRA account you may set up as the beneficiary l Trustee-to-Trustee
of a Roth IRA you inherited from a spouse or other
IRA account owner who has died, to receive a trans-
fer of beneficiary IRA assets.

Simplified Employee Pen- A tax-deferred retirement plan for small businesses l Contribution
sion (SEP) and self-employed individuals where an employee
can set aside a percentage of pre-tax income into l Rollover
the plan. Annual contributions an employer makes
to an employee's SEP-IRA cannot exceed the l Trustee-to-Trustee
lesser of 25% of compensation, or $52,000 for 2013
and $53,000 for 2014. The same limits apply to con- l IRA Conversion
tributions made to a self-employed individual's SEP-
IRA. There is 100% vesting of all plan contributions.
Distributions generally follow the same rules that
apply to IRAs.

Simplified Employee Pen- An IRA account you may set up as the beneficiary l Trustee-to-Trustee
sion (SEP) Inherited of a SEP IRA you inherited from a spouse or other
IRA account owner who has died, to receive a trans-
fer of beneficiary IRA assets.

Conversions and Recharacterizations

IRA Conversion
An IRA conversion is a transfer of Traditional, Traditional Rollover or SEP IRA assets to a Roth IRA with the same cus-
todian or as a trustee-to-trustee transfer or rollover. A conversion is subject to Form 1099-R reporting for the distribution
from the non-Roth and Form 5498 for the contribution to the Roth IRA.

Eligibility Requirements
You are eligible to convert to a Roth IRA if your modified adjusted gross income (MAGI) does not exceed $100,000
(not including the IRA conversion amount) in the year you convert. This rule applies to both single and joint tax filers.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 335

Chapter 5 2010 Changes

Married individuals filing separate tax returns are not eligible to convert to a Roth IRA unless they have lived apart from
their spouse for the entire tax year.

2010 Changes
If you convert in 2010, neither the MAGI limit nor the requirement that married filing separately spouses live apart for
the year will apply. Generally, when you convert to a Roth IRA, you are required to pay taxes on any taxable converted
amount including deductible contributions and any investment earnings. If you convert in 2010, the income taxes may
be spread over 2011 and 2012, with 50% of the taxes due being paid in each of those years. Furthermore, if you convert
your Traditional IRA to a Roth IRA, the taxable portion of your Traditional IRA will not be subject to a 10% penalty
tax regardless of your age at the time of the conversion unless the full amount of the distribution is not converted (for
example, if you elect to withhold taxes and the amount withheld is not replaced.)

The deadline to convert to a Roth IRA is December 31 of the year you choose to convert.

IRA Recharacterization
An IRA recharacterization is a transfer of converted Roth IRA assets back to a new or existing Traditional IRA account.
Roth IRA converted amounts from a SEP IRA may also be recharacterized back to a SEP IRA account. IRS reporting is
required for the distribution from the Roth IRA and the contribution to the non-Roth IRA.

Timing
Election to recharacterize must be made by the tax return due date, plus the maximum six-month extension period
(whether or not the return is actually extended). The deadline to recharacterize a 2010 Roth conversion is October 15,
2010. An IRA recharacterization is a transfer back to a new or existing Traditional IRA of converted Roth assets. Roth
IRA converted amounts from a SEP IRA may also be recharacterized back to a SEP. IRS reporting is required for the dis-
tribution from the Roth and the contribution to the non-Roth IRA. Timing Election to recharacterize must be made by
the tax return due date, plus the maximum six-month extension period (whether or not the return is actually extended).

The deadline to recharacterize a 2010 Roth conversion is October 15, 2010.

Reconversion
Reconversion is defined as a second conversion (following a Recharacterization) from a non-Roth IRA to a Roth IRA.
Taxpayer has already made a first conversion from a non-Roth to a Roth IRA and then recharacterized the conversion
amount (including net earnings) back to a non-Roth IRA. You may not convert, recharacterize and then reconvert in the
same tax year. IRS reporting is required.

A taxpayer cannot reconvert back to a Roth IRA until the later of:

January 1 of the tax year following the year of the first conversion, or

30 days after the recharacterization to a non-Roth IRA

If the taxpayer makes a reconversion within the same tax year or before the 30 day waiting period, the reconversion is dis-
regarded and the taxpayer must use the value of the non-Roth IRA at the time of the first conversion to calculate the tax-
able income for the year.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 336

Chapter 5 Additional Information

Additional Information
l If you are age 70½ or older and you have not taken a Required Minimum Distribution (RMD) from your IRA,
you must do so prior to converting to a Roth IRA.
l For IRA Conversions from a traditional IRA (or IRA rollover) account, you first must open a Roth IRA if you do
not already have one.
l Your existing traditional IRA account will be closed upon completion of a full conversion transfer.
l Please note that transfers of securities positions from a Traditional IRA to a Roth IRA will only be accepted
between accounts with matching names and taxpayer identification numbers.
l You cannot revoke or modify your election to Recharacterize after the election has been made.
l An election to Recharacterize must be made by the federal tax return due date, plus the maximum six-month exten-
sion period, for example, October 15, 2011.

Consult your tax advisor before you decide to convert to a Roth IRA.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 337

Chapter 5 Trade Configuration

Trade Configuration
The Trade Configuration menu includes the following tabbed pages:

l Permissions- Configure your trading permissions.

l Research - Subscribe to news and information services.
l Market Data - Subscribe to market data.
l Subscriber Status - Set your market data subscriber status.
l Alerts - Select the default method of receiving email alerts.
l Trading Limits - Proprietary Trading Group Master users control the size and amounts that their authorized traders
(sub accounts) can trade.
l Restrictions - Master account users restrict their own accounts and their client/sub accounts from trading specific
symbols.
l FYI - Set notifications and automatic actions in your trading account based on portfolio and order history to help
you stay on top of relevant dates and events.
l Futures Arbitration Agreement - Sign and submit the Arbitration Agreement.
l Asia Gateway Access - Customers based in China select their delivery source for market data and regional ser-
vices

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 338

Chapter 5 Permissions

Permissions
Trading permissions specify the products you can trade where you can trade them. You use the Permissions page to view
or modify existing trade permissions or subscribe to new permissions. When specifying permissions, you will be asked to
sign any risk disclosures required by local regulatory authority.

Clients can trade United Kingdom CFDs and/or Metals if they meet the eligibility requirements. See Trading UK CFDs
and Metals for more information.

Clients can trade Cash Forex if they meet the eligibility requirements. See Trading Cash Forex for more information.

Who can access the Permissions page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual/Organization (can only view)
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Broker Master User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User (can only view)
l Fund
The Permissions page is available in PDF format for advisor clients.

To set trading permissions

1. Click Manage Account > Trade Configuration > Permissions. The Trading Permissions page appears by default.
2. If you have a master account, use the Account Selector to search for client or sub accounts by Account ID,
Account Title or Account Alias, then click the desired account to view the pending items or requests for that
account.
3. In the Trading Programs section of the page, sign up for a trading program
l The Stock Yield Enhancement Program offers participating accounts the opportunity to earn additional income
from fully paid shares by allowing us to borrow those shares from you in exchange for cash collateral, and then
lend the shares to traders who want to sell them short and are willing pay interest borrow them. For more inform-
ation, see our Securities Financing page. Note that if you unenroll from this program, you must wait 90 days
before you can re-enroll in the program.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 339

Chapter 5 Permissions

l Portfolio Margin customers can also sign up for our Pre-Borrow Program, which lets you pre-borrow stocks for
short sales in Trader Workstation instead of waiting three days until the settlement date. Note that we will charge
you the indicative borrow rate for each day up to the settlement date beginning with the trade date, and you can
find this rate on your daily Activity Statement.

4. The Trading Permissions section of the page lists all of the products you can trade and the countries in which you
can trade them. Currently approved products are shown in green and products with pending approval are shown
in pink.

Clients who are eligible to trade CFDs and Forex CFDs (all clients except residents of the USA, Canada, Hong
Kong and Australia), will also see those products displayed.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 340

Chapter 5 Permissions

To modify your trading permissions, click the check box for the product you wish to trade in the country or countries in
which you wish to trade them.

l Click the Global check box to request permission for all products in all countries.
l Click the Check All check box next to a country name to request permission to trade all products in that country.
l Click the Check All check box below a specific product name to request permission to trade a specific product in
all countries.
5. Click Continue.
The Financial Information page opens.

6. Review your investment objectives, investment experience and financial information, then click Continue.
Some products require specific investment experience, which you can also modify on this page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 341

Chapter 5 Trading UK CFDs and Metals

7. Depending on the products that you have requested permission to trade, you are prompted to sign a risk dis-
closure, as required by law. Complete the online Disclosure Form(s) by typing your name in the Signature field,
then click Continue.
8. Click the link(s) to read the complete agreements and/or disclosures, then click the Accept radio button to
acknowledge your acceptance of the terms of the agreements and disclosures and click Continue.
A Final Acknowledgments/Confirmation page opens, listing your current and requested trading permissions and the cur-
rent status of each. If approved, your trading permissions will be listed with a status of Approved.

Trading permission upgrade requests received by 11:00 AM ET on a business day will be reviewed by the next business
day under normal circumstances.

Trading UK CFDs and Metals

If you meet the eligibility requirements, you can request permission to trade United Kingdom CFDs, and/or Metals. Cur-
rently, we offer Over-the-Counter Gold (OTC Gold) trading in the Metals product category. When you elect to trade one
or both of these products, we create a special UKL account for you. You must fund this account separately to trade these
products.

This topic includes the following procedures:

l Trading UK CFDs and/or Metals if You are an Advisor Master User

l Trading UK CFDs and/or Metals if You are an Advisor Client User, Broker Client User or Single User
l Trading UK CFDs and/or Metals if You are an Broker Master User

UK CFDs Eligibility Requirements

The following customers are eligible to trade UK CFDs:

Eligible to trade
Customer
UK CFDs
All US customers No

All Canadian customers No

Customers from countries other than the US Yes

and Canada

Japanese and Indian customers who trade Yes

through UK

Japanese and Indian customers who do not No

trade through UK

Fully-disclosed Broker Clients of non-US Yes

and non-Canadian Brokers. The clients must
meet the country eligibility requirements

Non-disclosed and Omnibus Broker clients Yes

whose Master Account satisfies all other eli-
gibility rules

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 342

Chapter 5 Trading UK CFDs and Metals

Eligible to trade
Customer
UK CFDs
Fully-disclosed Broker Clients of US and No
Canadian Brokers

Metals Eligibility Requirements

The following customers are eligible to trade Metals:

Customer Eligible to trade Metals

US-based Eligible Contract Participants Yes
(ECPs)

All US customers who are NOT Eligible Con- No

tract Participants

All Canadian customers No

Customers from countries other than the US Yes

and Canada

Japanese and Indian customers who trade Yes

through UK

Japanese and India customers who do not No

trade through UK

Fully-disclosed Broker Clients of non-US Yes

and non-Canadian Brokers

Non-disclosed and Omnibus Broker Clients, Yes

but only if their Master Account satisfies all
other eligibility rules

Fully-disclosed Broker Clients of US and No

Canadian Brokers

To trade UK CFDs and/or Metals if You are an Advisor Master User

1. Log in to Account Management.
2. Do one the following:
l Click Yes then Continue if you want to trade UK CFDs and/or Metals. Your Advisor Clients must log in sep-
arately to elect to trade these products.
l Click No then Continue if you do not want to trade UK CFDs and/or Metals. If you answer No, your Advisor Cli-
ents will not be able to trade these products either.
l Click Ask me later if you do not want to trade UK CFDs and/or Metals now, but might in the future. This screen
will reappear until you answer Yes or No.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 343

Chapter 5 Trading UK CFDs and Metals

A special UKL account is created for your Advisor Master User account. The account ID is identical to your Advisor
Master User account ID, with the addition of the letter F appended to the end.

3. Once the UKL account is approved, you must fund it separately to trade UK CFDs and metals:
l Log into Account Management.
l Click Funding > Fund Transfers.
l To deposit funds directly into the UKL account, select the account ending in “F” from the Account list, then
select Deposit Cash from the Transaction list and select the deposit method of your choice. Complete the deposit
notification to fund the account.
l To transfer funds from your existing account to the UKL account, select Transfer Funds Internally from the Trans-
action list, then select Funds Transfer from the Method list and complete and submit the funds transfer form to
transfer funds into the UKL account.

To trade UK CFDs and/or Metals if You are an Advisor Client User, Broker Client User or Individual User
1. Log in to Account Management.
2. In the Trading Permissions section of the page:
l Click the Metals check box for the country in which you want to trade metals.
l Click the CFD check box for the country in which you want to trade UK CFDs.
4. Click Continue. The following page appears:
5. Click the links to read the trading disclosures, then click every check box on the page to signify agreement with
all the conditions required to open your UKL account.
6. Click Back, and read and provide your electronic signature on the trading agreements and disclosures that appear.
On the last screen, which summarizes all of your trading permissions, look for the section entitled “Trading Permissions
for your UKL account.”

A special UKL account is created for your account. The account ID is identical to your regular account ID, with the addi-
tion of the letter F appended to the end.

7. Once the UKL account is approved, you must fund it separately to trade UK CFDs and metals:
l Log into Account Management.
l Click Funding > Fund Transfers.
l To deposit funds directly into the UKL account, select the account ending in “F” from the Account list, then
select Deposit Cash from the Transaction list and select the deposit method of your choice. Complete the deposit
notification to fund the account.
l To transfer funds from your existing account to the UKL account, select Transfer Funds Internally from the Trans-
action list, then select Funds Transfer from the Method list and complete and submit the funds transfer form to
transfer funds into the UKL account.

To trade UK CFDs and/or Metals if You are an Broker Master User

1. Log in to Account Management. If you meet the eligibility requirements to trade these products, the following
page appears:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 344

 Chapter 5 Trading Cash Forex

2. Read the information on the page, then click the check box at the bottom of the page to indicate acknow-
ledgment and click Continue.
A special UKL account is created for your account. The account ID is identical to your regular account ID, with the addi-
tion of the letter F appended to the end.

3. Once the UKL account is approved, you must fund it separately to trade UK CFDs and metals:
l Log into Account Management.
l Click Funding > Fund Transfers.
l To deposit funds directly into the UKL account, select the account ending in “F” from the Account list, then
select Deposit Cash from the Transaction list and select the deposit method of your choice. Complete the deposit
notification to fund the account.
l To transfer funds from your existing account to the UKL account, select Transfer Funds Internally from the Trans-
action list, then select Funds Transfer from the Method list and complete and submit the funds transfer form to
transfer funds into the UKL account.

Trading Cash Forex

Cash Forex lets you borrow to establish a Forex position (i.e., trade Forex on a leveraged basis). If you meet the eli-
gibility requirements listed below, you can request permission to trade Cash Forex.

Cash Forex Eligibility Requirements

In order to be eligible to trade Cash Forex, you must be an Eligible Contract Participant (ECP).

Clients with IBLLC accounts or IB UK accounts carried by IBLLC, and Fully Disclosed Broker Clients must be
Eligible Contract Participants to be eligible to trade Cash Forex. An Eligible Contract Participant is generally an
individual or organization with assets of over $10 MM (or $5 MM if trades are hedging). The complete definition
is located in Section 1a(18) of the Commodity Exchange Act. For more information about the Commodity
Exchange Act, see the U.S. Commodity Futures Trading Commission website, or read the complete definition here.

Cash Forex Eligibility Requirements

ECP Required to Trade

Customer
Cash Forex
IB LLC customers Yes

IB-UK customers introduced by IB LLC on a Yes

fully disclosed basis

Customer accounts handled solely by IB UK No

(with no involvement by IB LLC)

All IB Canada customers No

All IB Hong Kong customers No

All IB Japan customers No

All IB India customers No

Fully-disclosed Broker clients Yes

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 345

Chapter 5 Market Data

ECP Required to Trade

Customer
Cash Forex
All Non-disclosed and Omnibus Broker cli- No
ents
To request permission to trade Cash Forex

1. Click Manage Account > Trade Configuration > Permissions. The Trading Permissions page appears by default.
2. Request permission to trade Cash Forex by selecting the appropriate check box(es).
3. Click Continue.
4. Review and your investment objectives, investment experience and financial information, modifying information
where required, and then click Continue.
5. If you are not already an Eligible Contract Participant (ECP), you are prompted to complete a brief questionnaire
to become an ECP.
6. We will review your request. Once approved as an ECP, you will be able to trade Cash Forex.

Market Data
We provide real-time streaming market data for free or at the price we are charged by the exchange. The Market Data Sub-
scriptions page lets you sign up for additional market data subscriptions such as NASDAQ TotalView and NYSE Open
Book or unsubscribe from market data. You can also search for any market data subscription using the Market Data
Assistant.

Market data subscriptions are terminated if you have not logged into Trader Workstation for 60 days. Click here for
detailed market data termination rules.

Who can access the Market Data page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual (advisor master account only)
l Advisor Master User Organization (advisor master account only)
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Broker Omnibus Client User

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 346

Chapter 5 Research

l Investment Manager Master User

l Fund

To use the market data page

1. Click Manage Account > Trade Configuration >Market Data.
Your current market data subscriber status (Professional or Non-Professional) is displayed in the page title. Market
data subscriptions are organized by region (North America, Europe, Asia-Pacific).
The Market Data page appears.

2. To sign up for additional market data subscriptions, click the tab for the region you want, click the check box for
each subscription you wish to add, then click Back.
3. If you have additional linked, duplicate or consolidated accounts, the Billable Account section appears on the
page. Use this section to change the account that is billed for market data.

Select the account you want to be billed for market data, then click Change Billing Account. Beginning with the
next billing cycle, your market data subscriptions will be billed to the account you selected.

4. To unsubscribe from market data, click the check box for the subscription to clear the check mark, then click
Back.Read and complete any Subscriber Agreement that appears, then click Back.
The Market Data page opens again, with your new selections updated and any pending subscriptions identified as such.
Market Data subscription updates take effect immediately under normal circumstances.

Market Data and Research Subscription Termination Rules

If you do not log into Trader Workstation (IB TWS) for 60 days, your active market data subscriptions will be terminated
according to the following rules:

l If you do not log into Trader Workstation (IB TWS) for 60 days (counting from the last day on which you logged
into IB TWS), your active market data and research subscriptions will be added to the market data termination
list. You will be notified via email and on the Market Data Subscriptions and Research pages the next time you
log into Account Management.
l You can keep your market data and research subscriptions active by clicking the Continue Subscriptions button
on the Market Data Subscriptions and Research pages within 30 days of being notified of the pending termination
(or 90 days since your last IB TWS login).
l If you do not click Continue Subscriptions, the subscription will expire on the last day of the current month.
l If you log into IB TWS at any time before the subscription expires due to the termination rules listed above, the
subscription will be removed from the termination list and will remain active.

Research
The Research page lets you sign up for news and information services such as Reuters Worldwide Fundamentals.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 347

Chapter 5 Subscriber Status

Research subscriptions are terminated if you have not logged into Trader Workstation for 60 days. Click here for more
information.

Who can access the Research page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual (Master account only)
l Advisor Master User Organization (Master account only)
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Broker Omnibus Client User
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To subscribe to news and information services

1. Click Manage Account > Trade Configuration > Research.
The Research page displays all available news and information services and their monthly prices, including those
to which you are currently subscribed.
2. To sign up for additional news and information services, click the check box for each service you wish to add,
then click Continue.
3. To unsubscribe from news and information services, click the check box for the subscription to clear the check
mark, then click Continue.

Subscriber Status
Many exchanges classify customers as non-professional or professional. Exchange rules require that trusts and organ-
izations (e.g. corporations, partnerships, LLCs and unincorporated businesses) must be classified as professional. NYSE,
Amex, and TSE Professional Market Data require prior approval from the exchange.

The Market Data Subscriber Status page in Account Management lets you change your market data subscriber pro-
fessional status from Non-Professional to Professional or from Professional to Non-Professional. Your market data sub-
scriber status is displayed on the Market Data page.

Who can access the Subscriber Status page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 348

Chapter 5 Subscriber Status

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual (Friends and Family Group advisor master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Non-Disclosed Client User
l Broker Omnibus Client User

To change your market data subscriber professional status

1. Click Manage Account > Trade Configuration > Subscriber Status. The Market Data Subscriber Status page
appears by default.

l To change your status from Non-Professional to Professional, click the Professional radio button, then read the
Permitted Use and Change in Non-Professional Status statements and click the I agree radio button in each sec-
tion.
l To downgrade your status from Professional to Non-Professional, you must submit a ticket in the Client Services
Message Center to request the status change:

Click Support > Message Center to display the Client Services Message Center, then click Createin the Message
Center, and select Account Services and Account Configuration/Permissions as the categories. You must include
the reason for the change.
2. Click Continue.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 349

Chapter 5 Market Data Assistant

Market Data Assistant

Use the Market Data Assistant to search for market data subscriptions.

To search for market data subscriptions

1. On the Market Data Subscriptions page, click Market Data Assistant.
2. Enter the desired stock symbol and exchange (or use an ISIN or CUSIP).
The search results will show which market data subscription(s) provide the real-time market data for all combinations of
professional/non-professional, top-of-book, and deep-book data.

Trading Limits
The Trading Limits page lets Proprietary Trading Group Master users control the size and amounts that their authorized
traders (sub accounts) can trade.

Who can access the Trading Limits page?

You can access this page only if you are a Proprietary Trading Group Master User.

To view and set trading limits

1. Click Manage Account > Trade Configuration > Trading Limits.

2. From the Client Account ID drop-down, select the sub account for which you want to set trading limits. The page
updates to display three expandable trading limit sections:

3. To set order value limits, click to expand that section, enter values and click Continue.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 350

Chapter 5 Trading Limits

l Dollar Value Per Order - The total value of any one order, in millions of dollars. For example, a value of .5 = a
limit of 500,000 USD.
l Net Dollar Value Per Day - The net value of buys and sells for an entire trading day, in millions of dollars. For
example, if you bought 50 million and sold 15 million in a day, the net dollar value for that day would be 35 mil-
lion.
l Gross Dollar Value Per Day - The aggregate value of buys and sells for an entire trading day. For example, if you
bought 50 million and sold 15 million in a day, the gross dollar value for that day would be 65 million.

4. To set order quantity limits, click to expand that section, then enter order quantity limits for: cash, stock (STK),
futures (FUT), options (OPT), futures options (FOP), warrants (WAR), bonds, contracts for differences (CFD), or
Dutch warrants (IOPT). Click Continue when you are done entering values.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 351

Chapter 5 Restrictions

5. To set Exchange for Physical Limits, click to expand that section, then enter values for any of the following and
click Continue.
l Maximum Nominal Exchange for Physical Per Order - The total value of any one Exchange for Physical (EFP)
order, in millions of dollars.
l Maximum Net Exchange for Physical Per Trades - The net value of EFP buys and sells for an entire trading day,
in millions of dollars.
l Maximum Gross Exchange for Physical Trades - The aggregate value of EFP buys and sells for an entire trading
day. For example, if you bought 50 million and sold 15 million in a day, the gross dollar value for that day
would be 65 million.

6. Verify your changes on the Verify Trading Limits, then click Continue.
Click Back if you need to make further changes.
7. A confirmation number is sent to your email address of record. Enter this number on the Confirmation page that
appears, then click Continue.
New trading limits and changes to existing trading limits go into effect on the next business day.

Restrictions
Set all trading restrictions in the Pre-Trade Compliance tool. Click the Launch Pre-Trade Compliance button to open
the program.

For more information about the Pre-Trade Compliance tool, see the Pre-Trade Compliance Tool Users' Guide.

FYI
FYIs are notifications and automatic actions in your trading account based on your portfolio, order history and trading
activity that are designed to help you stay on top of relevant dates and events. FYIs are intended as a convenience; do
not rely on them as a comprehensive or primary source of information.

The FYI page includes the following notifications and automatic actions:

Notifications

l Borrow Availability - Notifies you when a borrow becomes available in shares that you were unable to short last
week.
l Option Expiration Notification - Notifies you three days before US options expire.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 352

Chapter 5 FYI

l Takeovers - Notifies you that a company in which you hold positions is the target of a takeover. This noti-
fication is turned on by default.
l Earnings - Notifies you of upcoming earnings announcements from any of your holdings.
l Mutual Fund Advisory - Notifies you if there is an ETF comparable to your mutual fund holding.
l Dividends - Notifies you if a US option position is projected to be economically beneficial for early exercise or
assignment.

Automatic Actions

l Dividends - Automatically exercise US dividend-related stock and ETF options. If you select this Automatic
Action, IB's system will determine whether is likely to be beneficial to you to exercise call options early, using
predefined mathematical criteria and based on well-established theories of option pricing and efficient markets.
The system will then send you a notification two days before the stock trades ex-dividend and, if the determ-
ination remains favorable, automatically exercise the option early with no action required from you.
All customers who can trade US dividend-related options are eligible for this automatic action EXCEPT:
o Japan accounts
o India accounts
o UK passport country residents
o UKL standalone accounts
o Hong Kong residents
o Australian residents
l Economic Event Order Suspension - Twenty seconds before a major economic event, pauses all of your active
orders for 40 seconds. Once you enable this automatic action in Account Management, you will receive bulletins
inside the trading platform which report the times and descriptions of the economic events. Economic events
include GDP, non-farm payrolls, PPI, CPI and so on.

Who can access the FYI page?

All accounts except Advisor Clients.

To set FYI options

1. Click Manage Accounts > Trade Configuration > FYI.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 353

Chapter 5 Alerts

2. Click the check box next to the notification and/or automatic action you want to enable. Deselect a check box to
disable a notification and/or automatic action.
3. Click Submit.

Alerts
The Alerts page lets you select your default method of receiving email alerts. You can select your default email address,
or set an SMS (Short Message Service) address to receive SMS text message alerts on your mobile telephone device.

Who can access the Alerts page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User (master account only)

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 354

Chapter 5 Alerts

l Advisor Client User Individual

l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To set your alert preferences

1. Click Manage Account > Trade Configuration > Alerts.

2. To change your alert preference, select the radio button next to your preferred alert destination (Email or SMS
Address).
3. If you have not yet created an SMS address for your account, perform these steps:
l Click the Create SMS Address button. The SMS Address page opens.
l Enter the SMS address in the format 1231234567@mail.net.
For non-US residents, the address must begin with your country code.
l Click Submit.
l A verification code is immediately sent to the specified address. Type the code in the field provided, then click
Confirm.

Click Request Confirmation Number to request a new verification code to be sent to your SMS address.

Click Cancel to cancel the creation of the SMS address with your account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 355

Chapter 5 Futures Arbitration Agreement

4. To modify an existing SMS address, click the Modify SMS Address button, then enter the new SMS address
where indicated on the page that appears.
5. Click Save to save your changes.

Futures Arbitration Agreement

The Arbitration Agreement page lets you sign and submit our Arbitration Agreement. You do not have to sign this agree-
ment to maintain an account with us. However, declining this agreement may result in reduced trading limits.

Who can access the Futures Arbitration Agreement page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Client User Individual (available in PDF format)
l Advisor Client User Organization (available in PDF format)
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Fund

To sign and submit the Arbitration Agreement

1. Click Manage Account > Trade Configuration > Futures Arb.
2. Read the agreement carefully, then accept the agreement by clicking the appropriate radio button.
3. Sign the agreement by typing your name in the field provided, then click Signature.

Asia Gateway Access

This page lets account holders based in China select their delivery source for market data and regional services.

Who can access the Asia Gateway Access page?

You can access this page if your address is located in China (including Hong Kong).

To select your delivery source for market data and regional services in China
1. Click Manage Account > Trade Configuration > Asia Gateway Access.
The Account Configuration/Asia Gateway Access page appears. It displays your current delivery source for mar-
ket data and regional services.
2. Select one of the following options:
l (a) Market data and other regional services are delivered from the site closest to the exchange.
Select this option if you have a fast Internet connection to our US, Europe and Asia sites.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 356

Chapter 5 Asia Gateway Access

l (b) Market data and other regional services are delivered via the Asia gateway.
Select this option if you have a slow Internet connection.
3. Click Continue.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 357

Chapter 5 Security

Security
The Security menu includes the following pages:

l IP Restrictions - Restrict user access to IB TWS by IP address.

l Change Password - Change your account password.
l Reset Paper Trading Account Password - Change your paper trading account password.
l Change Email Address - Change your email address or the email address of any user associated with your account.
l Change Security Questions - Change the security questions in the account application.
l Security Login System - Enroll in IB's Secure Login Program, and share your security device with a second, match-
ing user.
l Voting Subscription - Sign up to vote in our online voting forums.
l Client Security - Activate a security device for a client account.
l Audit Trail - View requests generated in Account Management for your own account.

IP Restrictions
This page lets you restrict user access to our desktop trading platform by IP address. Limiting user access from a specific
list of IP addresses adds a layer of security to your account. If no restrictions are specified for a trader, he or she may log
into our desktop trading platform from any IP address.

Who can access the IP Restrictions page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Broker Master User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To add IP restrictions
1. Click Manage Account > Security > Individual > IP Restrictions.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 358

Chapter 5 Change Password

This page displays a list of all your account users and their current IP restrictions, including full name, username, account
ID, the IP address(es) to which the user is restricted, and the IP address(es) in any pending request. For users with no IP
restrictions, the Restrictions column displays “No restrictions.”

2. On the Manage IP Address Restrictions page, click the Add IP Address Restriction link.
3. In the Trader drop-down, select a trader.
4. In the IP Address field, enter an IP address. This will be the IP address from which the selected trader will be able
to access IB TWS. Click Submit.
5. You will receive an email containing a confirmation number that must be entered to confirm your IP Restriction
request. Once you have entered the confirmation number, the trader will only be allowed to trade from the spe-
cified IP address.

To delete IP restrictions
You can delete an IP restriction by clicking the Delete link. You can cancel or confirm a pending IP restriction request
by clicking the Cancel or Confirm link.

1. Click Manage Account > Security > IP Restrictions.

Each IP address listed has a Delete link displayed next to it.
2. Click the Delete link for each IP address you wish to remove. Once you delete the IP address, the user will no
longer be restricted to that IP address.

To confirm or cancel pending IP restriction requests

1. Click Manage Account > Security > IP Restrictions.

For each pending IP address restriction request, the Pending Requests column displays the IP address and
Confirm and Cancel links.
l To confirm a pending request, click Confirm.
l To cancel a pending request, click Cancel.

Change Password
This page lets you change your account password.

Who can access the Change Password page?

All users.

To change your account password

1. Click Manage Account > Security > Change Password.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 359

Chapter 5 Reset Paper Trading Account Password

2. Type your current password in the field provided.

3. Type a new password in the field provided, then type it again in the Confirm Password field. The password must
be six to 40 characters long, must contain at least one number and no spaces, and is case-sensitive.
4. Click Submit.
5. You will immediately receive a confirmation number at your email address of record. Type the confirmation num-
ber you received in the field provided, then click Submit.
The password change is effective immediately.

Reset Paper Trading Account Password

Use this page to change your paper trading account password from your production account. For example, if you have for-
gotten your paper trading password, you can log into Account Management with your production account credentials
and change your paper trading account password using the procedure described below.

Who can access the Reset Paper Trading Account Password page?
You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 360

Chapter 5 Reset Paper Trading Account Password

l Advisor Master User Organization

l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Broker Non-Disclosed Client User
l Broker Omnibus Client User
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To reset your paper trading account password

1. Log into Account Management with your regular account username and password.
2. Click Manage Account > Security > Reset Paper Trading Account Password.

3. Type a new password, then re-type your new password in the fields provided. Choose a password that is from 6 to
40 characters long and contains at least one number and no spaces.
4. Click Submit.
5. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 361

Chapter 5 Change Email Address

Change Email Address

The Change Email Address page lets you change the email address associated with your account.

Who can access the Email Address page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Client User
l Broker Master User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To change your email address

1. Click Manage Account > Security > Change Email Address.

2. To change your email address, we must first send a secure confirmation number to your existing email address of
record.
l If you still have access to this email address, select Yes I do from the list, then click Submit.
l If you no longer have access to this email address, select No I do not from the list, then click Submit.
3. If you selected Yes I do in the previous step, we send the confirmation number to your existing email address,
then display a page with fields for you to enter a new email address.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 362

Chapter 5 Change Security Questions

If you answered No I do not in the previous step, you are prompted to enter your current password and your new email
address.

4. Type your password and your new email address in the fields provided, then re-type your new email address and
enter the confirmation number that we sent to you.
5. Click Submit.

Change Security Questions

In some cases, we ask our clients to identify themselves by answering the security questions that they provided in their
account application. If you have forgotten these questions and answers, you can use the Change Security Questions page
to change them.

Who can access the Change Security Questions page?

You can access this page if you:

l Have an Individual account (not Joint or IRA);

l Are not and Advisor or Broker client;
l Are using a Secure Login device (except a temporary device) or IB Key for two-factor authentication;
l The Net Liquidation Value of your account is less than 1 million USD.

To change the security questions

1. Click Manage Account > Security > Change Security Questions.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 363

Chapter 5 Secure Login System

2. Select three different security questions and enter three answers in the fields provided.
3. Click Submit.

There may be cases where your account is eligible to change the security questions online but you receive the mes-
sage "User is not allowed to use this functionality. Please call customer service". If this happens, it means that you
probably launched Account Management from TWS rather than logging in directly. Try logging into Account
Management directly (from our website, select LOG IN > Account Management), and then try changing the ques-
tions.

Secure Login System

We provide additional protection to your account against fraudulent transactions via our Secure Login System. As soon
as your account is funded, the Secure Login System sends you a security device free of charge, which is a passcode card
the size of a small credit card with a list of random codes to be used in conjunction with your username and password to
access secure areas. You can also use our new IB Key security app, which functions as a security device on your phone.

The Secure Login System menu includes the following items:

l Security Device - Perform all Secure Login System administrative tasks, including requesting or activate your
Secure Login device, or sharing a device.
l Security Device Sharing - Share your Secure Login device with another user.
l SLS Opt Out - Opt out of the Secure Login System.

For detailed instructions on using IB Key instead of a physical security device, refer to Knowledge Base Article 2260.

For more information

l About Security Devices

l Withdrawal Limits
l When Will I Receive My Device?

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 364

Chapter 5 Security Device

Security Device
If you are an existing customer and are not enrolled in the Secure Login System, or have opted out of the program in the
past and now want to enroll, you can use the Secure Login System page to apply for a security device.

Use the Activate/Request Security Device page in Account Management as follows:

l New customers can activate their security device the first time they log into Account Management. After 14 days,
the device is automatically activated.
l Existing customers who have never had the opportunity to participate or opt out of the Secure Login System can
request a Security Device.
l Share your security device with multiple accounts as long as the user identification of the accounts is identical.
l Existing customers who have opted out of the program but who now want to participate can request a Security
Device.

Who can access the Security Device page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To apply for a Security Device if you are an existing customer and are not enrolled in the Secure Login System
1. Click Manage Account > Security > Secure Login System > Security Device. The Request Security Device
page appears by default.
2. To obtain your Security Device, click the Yes radio button, then click Back. An online security code card appears
that you should use until you receive your Security Device from us. Click Print to print the card, and then click
Confirm.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 365

Chapter 5 Security Device

After you receive the security device, log into Account Management, click Manage Account > Security > Secure
Login System > Security Deviceand follow the instructions on the screen to activate your security device.

To activate your Security Device the first time you log into Account Management
1. Click Manage Account > Security > Secure Login System > Security Device. The Secure Login System page
appears by default.
2. Click the Activate my new/existing Secure Login Device radio button to activate your security device, and then
click Continue.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the activation process.
You have 14 days from the day we mail you your Security Device to activate the device in Account Management. After
14 days, you are required to use the device to log into Account Management and Trader Workstation. If you receive the
device before 14 days, you can access Account Management and our desktop trading platform without using the device
until you activate it or until 14 days have passed. Once you activate the device, you must use it to log into Account
Management and our desktop trading platform.

You will be asked to follow a series of steps which require that you supply information sent to you upon subscription to
confirm your identity and register your personal device. In addition, depending upon the type of device provided you
may be required to create a Personal Identification Number and perform a test login to verify possession of the device.

Once your device has been activated, each login attempt to either Account Management or Trader Workstation will
require the two authentication factors – your user name and password combination and the security code generated by
your device.

To share your Security Device

1. Click Manage Account > Security > Secure Login System > Security Device. The Secure Login System page
appears by default.
2. Click the Share a Secure Login Device radio button to share your security device, and then click Continue.
3. Enter the username and password of the user with whom you want to share the security device in the fields
provided.
l As noted on the page, the security device that you want to share must be of equal or greater security strength than
the requesting user’s current security device.
l Please note that for some customers, review and approval by our staff will be required prior to processing your
request.
3. Click Continue to submit your request.

To apply for a Security Device if you have already opted out

1. Click Manage Account > Security > Secure Login System > Security Device. The Secure Login System page
appears by default.
2. The screen informs you that you have opted out of the program. Click Cancel.
The Request Security Device page opens.

3. To obtain your Security Device, click the Yes radio button, then click Back. An online security code card appears
that you should use until you receive your Security Device from us. Click Print to print the card, and then click
Confirm.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 366

 Chapter 5 If You Choose Not to Participate in the Secure Login System

After you receive the security device, log into Account Management, click Manage Account > Security > Secure
Login System > Security Deviceand follow the instructions on the screen to activate your security device.
Your security device will be express shipped to you on the same day if your request has been completed prior to 13:00
ET on a US business day. Otherwise, the device will be shipped on the following business day. Depending on your loc-
ation and the capabilities of the shipper, a delivery tracking number will be made available after 18:00 ET on the ship-
ping date.

4. After you receive the security device, log into Account Management, click Manage Account > Security > Secure
Login System > Security Device and follow the instructions on the screen to activate your security device.
You will be asked to follow a series of steps which require that you supply information sent to you upon subscription to
confirm your identity and register your personal device. In addition, depending upon the type of device provided you
may be required to create a Personal Identification Number and perform a test login to verify possession of the device.

Once your device has been activated, each login attempt to either Account Management or Trader Workstation will
require the two authentication factors – your user name and password combination and the security code generated by
your device.

If You Choose Not to Participate in the Secure Login System

If you choose not to participate in the Secure Login System, be aware of the following:

l We will not compensate you or credit your account in the event it is compromised by hackers or identity thieves
l You can only withdraw a maximum of 50,000 USD in any one day.
l You must wait 10 days to wire funds from your account after any change to the banking instructions for your
account, and you must wait 10 days to withdraw funds by check after any change to your address information.
l Under the Customer Agreement, customers are responsible for all transactions initiated using their user name and
password.

When Will I Receive My Device

The delivery schedule depends on the type of security device you will be receiving.

l Security Code Cards are shipped several times per week via regular mail.
l Alpine Devices are shipped several times per week via Express mail.
l Digital Security Cards are shipped several times per week via regular mail.
l Gold/Platinum Devices are shipped every day via Express mail for requests that have been completed prior to
13:00 ET on a US business day.

Depending upon your location and the capabilities of the shipper, a delivery tracking number will be made available
after 18:00 ET on the shipping date. You can view this tracking number by clicking Manage Account > Security >
Secure Login System in Account Management after that time or by calling technical assistance at 1-877-442-2757,
Option 2, then 6.

Security Device Sharing

A common security device obtained through our Secure Login System can be used to access multiple accounts as long as
the user identification of the accounts is identical. Use the Security Device Sharing page to share a security device with a

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 367

Chapter 5 Security Device Sharing

linked account.

Note: This page is identical to selecting the Share a Secure Login Device option on the main Secure
Login Device page.

Who can access the Security Device Sharing page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To share a security device with multiple accounts

1. Click Manage Account > Security > Secure Login System > Security Device Sharing.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 368

Chapter 5 About Security Devices

2. Enter the username and password of the user with whom you want to share the security device in the fields
provided.
l As noted on the page, the security device that you want to share must be of equal or greater security strength than
the requesting user’s current security device.
l Please note that for some customers, review and approval by our staff will be required prior to processing your
request.
3. Click Continue to submit your request.

About Security Devices

Click one of the following links to learn more about our using your security device:

l Security Code Cards - Recommended for accounts with a balance less than 500,000 USD. This is a credit card-
like device with 224 alpha-numeric codes.
l Digital Security Card+ - Recommended for accounts with a balance greater than 500,000 USD. An enhanced ver-
sion of the Digital Security Card, this model adds an extra layer of security through the use of a challenge code
and a higher count of possible code permutations.

Security Code Cards

It's easy to securely log into any of our applications using your Security Code Card. Simply find and enter the correct val-
ues from your card into the PassCode Authentication Box on the website.

To login with your Security Code Card

1. Start by logging into your application as always, using your username and password.
The PassCode Card Authentication box pops up.

2. Locate the first Index number in the authentication box.

In our image below, the first Index number is "100."

3. Using your Security Code Card, locate that Index number, and look immediately to the right to find its cor-
responding card value.
In the image below, the Index number "100" has a corresponding card value of A3D.

4. Type that value in the entry field of the PassCode Card Authentication box on the website.
5. Follow steps 2 and 3 above for the next Index number, then type that value into the entry field of the PassCode
Card Authentication box on the website.
In the image below, the second Index number is "50" and its corresponding card value is Z3V.

6. Click the Submit button.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 369

Chapter 5 Digital Security Card+

Digital Security Card+

It's easy to securely log into any of our applications using your Digital Security Card. Simply enter your pin into the
device to generate a string of randomly-generated characters, and enter these characters into the Security Code field in the
login box.

To login with your Digital Security Card

Note: Only the large "press" button requires pressure. All others, including the numbers, the back arrow
and the "OK" button, require only a light tap.

1. Press the round "press" button until the Pn symbol appears in the digital display (about two seconds).
2. Using the numbers keyboard on the card, enter the four-digit PIN you specified, and then press OK.
3. When the Ch symbol appears in the digital display, enter the six-digit challenge code (with no spaces) shown on
the login or entry screen, and then press OK.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 370

Chapter 5 Withdrawal Limits

4. The first five digits of the eight-digit passcode appear in the digital display. Enter these digits in the Secure
Token Passcode field on the login or entry screen.
5. Press OK to see the remaining three digits, and enter these three digits in the Secure Token Passcode field to com-
plete the eight-digit passcode.
6. The sets of five and three digits will automatically toggle every ten seconds. To manually toggle between the first
five and last three digits, press the OK button. If the passcode expires, start over from Step 1 above.

Withdrawal Limits

Accounts that do not participate in the Secure Login System are limited in the amount of money that can be withdrawn
or transferred in one day and in any five day period. The table below lists the withdrawal limits for each available secur-
ity device and for customers with no security device.

Withdrawal Limits for Customers

Maximum
Withdrawal
Security Device Maximum Withdrawal Per Day in Five
Business
Days
None 50,000 USD 100,000
USD

Security Code Card 200,000 USD 600,000

USD

IB Key 200,000 USD 600,000

USD

Digital Security Card1 1,000,000 USD 1,500,000

USD

Alpine Device1 500,000 USD 1,500,000

USD

Digital Security Card+ Unlimited Unlimited

Gold1 Unlimited Unlimited

Platinum1 Unlimited Unlimited

1Represents a legacy device no longer being issued and in the process of being replaced with a version of the Digital
Security Card.

SLS Opt Out

The SLS Opt Out page lets you opt out of our Secure Login System.

Note: While our Secure Login System is, in most instances, voluntary, we strongly recommend that each
user on an account participate. In addition to the enhanced protection, participation offers benefits

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 371

 Chapter 5 Rules for Opting Out

such as increased daily and weekly withdrawal limits as well as immediate and straight-through pro-
cessing of your account information updates. Moreover, account owners who elect not to participate
are required to execute an opt out agreement through which full responsibility for losses associated
with theft or misuse of login information is assumed.

We offer a partial opt-out only. Once you partially opt out, a Secure Login device is required to log into Account Man-
agement only. You will be able to use your username and password without a security device to log into any of our trad-
ing platforms.

The SLS Opt Out page displays a complete list of users associated with your account on whose behalf you have the
authority to opt out of the Secure Login System, along with the type of user and the current state of their enrollment in
the Secure Login System. In the case of an individual account, only the account owner has the ability to opt out of the
Secure Login System. For organizational accounts that may include multiple employee users, the decision to opt out of
the Secure Login System rests with the owner user and any users who the owner has designated as a security officer and
granted the permission to control user access rights.

Rules for Opting Out

You will not be allowed to request a partial opt out if any of the following conditions is true:

l The account is not open.

l The user is not enrolled in the Secure Login System. Having an online security card is not sufficient.
l The user has an expired temporary security device.
l The user does not have required access rights to opt out.

A user will be allowed to opt into the Secure Login System only if he or she has previously opted out.

To request that an account user opt out of the Secure Login System
1. Click Manage Account > Security > Secure Login System > SLS Opt Out.
2. Read the important information and rules about opting out.
3. In the list of account users, do any of the following:
l Select the radio button in the Partial column for each user who wants to partially opt out.
l Select the radio button in the Opt Back In column for each user who wants to opt back in.
Radio buttons are grayed out (not available) if a user is ineligible for that option.

4. Click Continue.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 372

Chapter 5 Client Security

Client Security
The Client Security page lets you activate the security device for a client account. The security device is part of the
Secure Login System. You can also set a temporary security code to be used by the client account. You might choose to
do this, for example, if the client’s security device has not been received.

Who can access the Client Security page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Broker Master User (Non-disclosed clients only)

To activate a security device for a client account:

1. Click Manage Account > Security > Client Security.

2. In the Select Account list, select the client account.

3. To activate the security device for the selected account:

a. Select the Activate Security Code Card radio button.

b. Type the serial number of the security device in the field provided.
c. Type the serial number again in the second field provided, then click Submit.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 373

Chapter 5 Voting Subscriptions

If the client does not have a security device but requires access to Account Management or our trading platform,
you can set a temporary security code for the selected client account by selecting the Set Temporary Security
Code radio button, then clicking Submit. A confirmation appears on the page, including the account ID, user
name and temporary password. Clients can use this temporary password until they receive their security device.

Voting Subscriptions
Voting provides a Features Poll and Traders' Chat on our website. To participate, you enter a voting username and pass-
word on the Voting Subscription page. Note that these are different from your account username and password.

Who can access the Voting Subscriptions page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User

l Small Business Account User
l Friends and Family Group Master or Client User
l Advisor Master User Individual
l Advisor Master User Organization
l Advisor Client User Individual
l Advisor Client User Organization
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub User
l Broker Master User (master account only)
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User
l Broker Fully Disclosed Client User Organization
l Investment Manager Master User
l Fund

To subscribe to Voting
1. Click Manage Account > Security > Voting Subscription.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 374

Chapter 5 Audit Trail

2. Enter a voting username and password in the fields provided.

When you vote in any of our voting forums or polls, you will be prompted to enter your voting username and password.

3. Enter your account username and password in the fields provided.

4. Click Submit.
Your voting subscription automatically expires after one year, at which time you can re-subscribe by clicking the
Reactivate button, which only appears when your subscription has expired.

Audit Trail
The Audit Trail page lets Master account users view Account Management requests for their own accounts.

Who can access the Audit Trail page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User Individual

l Advisor Master User Organization (can view Audit Trail for advisor master account only)
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User (can view Audit Trail for master and sub accounts)
l Broker Master User (can view Audit Trail for master and non-disclosed client accounts)
l Investment Manager Master User

To view the audit trail

1. Click Manage Account > Security > Audit Trail.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 375

Chapter 5 Audit Trail

2. Select the number of days back you wish the audit trail to include by selecting All, Previous 90 Days or Previous
180 Days from the Show requests drop-down list, then click Submit.
The page refreshes with the updated information.

The audit trail displays type of request, the date and time of the request, the date and time the request was updated (if
applicable), and the state of the request (CONFIRMED, ACKNOWLEDGED, PROCESSED, CANCELED).

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 376

Chapter 5 Access Rights

Access Rights
The Access Rights tab includes the following pages:

l Configure - Security Officers can view account-level access rights to Account Management functions and set the
number of Primary and Secondary authorizers
l Users - Add users to your account, modify existing users' information or access rights to Account Management
and delete users from your account
l User Roles - Create and delete user roles.

For more information

l Access Rights Overview

l Security Officers
l Access Rights Reference

User Access Rights Guide

Access Rights Overview

We give our clients the ability to create users through User Access Rights. The assignment of users and their access
rights is controlled by an organization's Security Officer(s). Individual accounts can also add users and assign access
rights to them, but these accounts do not have access to the full range of user access rights functionality available to
Security Officers for institutional accounts.

Institutional accounts can add up to 250 users, including employees and non-employees. Access rights to the different
functions in Account Management can be limited for each of those users. In addition, we also offer an authorization fea-
ture to institutional accounts wherein multiple users must approve certain Account Management requests, such as fund-
ing transactions.

User Access Rights Availability

The complete User Access Rights system, including the ability to select Security Officers and use authorizations, is avail-
able to the following account structures:

l Professional Advisors
l Brokers
l Proprietary Trading Groups
l Fund Investment Managers
l Small Business Accounts (Corporation, Partnership, LLC or unincorporate legal structure)

ALL account structures have the ability to add users to an account and assign them access rights to Account Man-
agement functions EXCEPT:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 377

 Chapter 5 Access Rights and Access Groups

l Broker Non-Disclosed Clients

l Broker Omnibus Clients
l Proprietary Trading Group Sub Accounts

Access Rights and Access Groups

User access rights are organized into access groups that correspond to these Account Management menus:

l Trade
l Funding
l Reports
l Manage Account

Note: Individual account holders cannot grant Funding rights to new users that they add. Security Officers
for institutional accounts CAN however grant Funding rights.

Each access group contains several functions, which themselves correspond to the individual functions in Account Man-
agement. When assigning access rights to a user, you can assign access rights to an entire access group and all of its indi-
vidual functions, or you can assign access rights to the individual functions themselves.

All account users automatically get rights to Security-related functions in Account Management (Password, Secure Login
System, Secure Login System Device Sharing, and Voting Subscriptions), and the functions in the Manage Account > Set-
tings access group (User Information and Change Email Address).

Security Officers for account structures with multiple users and client accounts can grant limited access to a subset of
user functions or accounts. For example, a Security Officer might want to give User A the ability to only trade, while giv-
ing User B only the ability to look at account statements. User C might only be able to trade client accounts 1-5, while
User D can trade client accounts 6-10.

Assign user access rights to users when you add them to your account on the Manage Account > Access Rights > Users
page in Account Management.

Security Officers

The assignment of access rights to users is controlled by an organization's Security Officer. Security Officers are des-
ignated employees who can assign access rights and authorize functions. The Security Officer can also add, modify and
delete users.

Institutional account holders can add Security Officers to their account during the account application process, if they
require additional Security Officers for authorization purposes. To add Security Officers after your account is open, you
must send a paper form request to us.

Security Officer Approvals

As an added layer of security, you can require that any changes made by one Security Officer be approved by one or two
other Security Officers. To change the number of Security Officer approvals required, you must complete and submit a
request form.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 378

Chapter 5 Account-Level Access Rights

Account-Level Access Rights

Security Officers can view account-level access rights on the Access Rights > Configure page in Account Management
but cannot change them without a special request to us.

User Roles

A user role is a set of user access rights saved with a unique name. User roles allow Security Officers (and individual
account holders) to save a set of user access rights and quickly apply them to users. This is useful if you have multiple
users to add to an account. User roles work the same way as user access rights: functions are organized into access groups
based on the Account Management menu structure, and you expand each access group to view and assign rights to func-
tions located in second-level menus. You can select a user role only if you have created and saved at least one.

Create user roles on the Manage Account > Access Rights > User Roles page in Account Management.

Primary and Secondary Authorizers

If your organization requires additional security for Account Management functions, you can appoint authorizers to
approve requests.Authorizers are users who provide additional layers of security for different Account Management func-
tions such as funding requests.

There are two levels of authorizers: Primary and Secondary. These levels of authorization let you match your organ-
ization's approval process to our Account Management system. A Primary Authorizer is the highest level of approval
while a Secondary Authorizer is the next level of approval. For example, your CEO might be the Primary Authorizer and
the CIO might be the Secondary Authorizer in your organization.

You set up authorizations on the Manage Account > Access Rights > Configuration page in Account Management.

Primary and Secondary Authorizers authorize pending changes on the Home > Pending Items page.

User Access Rights Summary

Organizations can follow these steps to set up a user access rights implementation that includes Security Officers and
authorizations.

1. During your account application process, designate one or more persons to be Security Officers.
l As the account owner, you are automatically designated as a Security Officer.
l If you forgot to do this, or you want to add more Security Officers to your account, send a request to us.
l If you need an additional layer of security, you can require that changes submitted by one Security Officer must
be approved by other Security Officers. You set the number of these Security Officer approvals during the applic-
ation process.
2. After your account has been approved, your Security Officer logs into Account Management and creates and
saves user roles to be able to apply reusable sets of access rights to more than one account users.
3. Your Security Officer adds users to your account, granting them access rights to the different functions in Account
Management to correspond to the users and functions in your organization. At this time, the Security Officer will
also apply any saved user roles to the new users.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 379

 Chapter 5 About Security Officers

4. Your Security Officer sets the number of Primary and Secondary Authorizers for specific functions in Account
Management. On the same page in Account Management, the Security Officer can view the current account-level
access rights.

About Security Officers

The assignment of users and their access rights is controlled by an organization's Security Officer(s). Security Officers are
designated employees who can assign access rights and authorize functions. The Security Officer can also add, modify
and delete users.

Creating Security Officers During the Account Application Process

During the account application process, the owner of the account (the account applicant; who is automatically assigned
the role of Security Officer) can select additional Security Officers, then assign each Security Officer access rights to the
various functions in Account Management. Only Organization customer type accounts can create security officers.

If you need an additional layer of security, you can require that any changes made by one Security Officer be approved
by one or two other Security Officers. You can set the number these Security Officer approvals during the application pro-
cess. Any Security Officer can function as a Security Officer approver.

Adding and Deleting Security Officers

To add Security Officers after your account is open, you can add a new user to your account and designate that user as a
Security Officer, designate an existing user as a Security Officer (on the Manage Account > Access Rights > Users
page), or send a request to us. You can access the request form on the Support > Paper Forms page of Account Man-
agement.

You can delete Security Officers from your account on the Manage Account > Access Rights > Users page of Account
Management, but only if such removal does not change the number of required Security Officer approvals set in your
account application. For example, if your account currently has three security Officers but requires only two, you can
delete one of them from within Account Management. If your account currently has two Security Officers and requires
two, you cannot delete one.

Security Officers and Account Management

Once you have designated a Security Officer for your account, that person will have access rights to the Account Man-
agement functions that were assigned during the account application process. The Security Officer is the only person
who can view and access the following security-related functions in Account Management:

l Manage Account > Access Rights > Configuration - View account-level access rights for an account and set the
number of Primary and Secondary Authorizers for Account Management, including funding. This function is avail-
able only to institutional accounts.
l Manage Account > Access Rights > Users - Add, delete and modify users and assign access rights to Account
Management functions. Note that individual accounts (Individual, Joint, Trust, etc. customer types) also have
access to this page.
l The Security and Access rights menus in Manage Account, and the Change Email Address function (these rights
are preselected in the account application).

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 380

Chapter 5 Configure Access Rights

Configure Access Rights

When your account is first opened, it will have the ability to access all functions in Account Management. Security
Officers for your account use the Access Rights Configuration page to:

l View account-level access rights for your account. Account-level access rights identify which functions your
account can access.
l Set the number of Primary/Secondary authorizers required for Account Management functions.

Account access rights are organized into access rights groups that correspond to the Account Management menus.

Access to each function in an access rights group is displayed as either granted or denied. Denied functions will not
appear in the Account Management menus. Because the account applicant is automatically a Security Officer, he or she
has access to all functions in Account Management. When your account is first opened, account-level access rights to
ALL Account Management functions are granted by default.

Note: To change your account access rights, including granting or denying access to Account Man-
agement functions, you must send a request to us.

Who can access the Access Rights Configuration page?

You can access this page if you are a Security Officer for any institutional customer types.

To view account access rights and set the number of primary and secondary authorizers
1. Log into Account Management.
2. Click Manage Account > Access Rights. The Configuration page appears by default.

The page displays the number of Security Officer approvals required for your account. This number indicates the number
required to approve any changes made by a Security Officer.

3. To view account-level access rights, select any item in the Access Right drop-down. Access groups correspond to
Account Management menus. Note that you cannot select the top-level menu in the drop-down.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 381

Chapter 5 Configure Access Rights

4. The screen displays the total number of currently active authorizers for each function (remember, these correspond
to pages in the corresponding Account Management menu). Select the number of required Primary and Secondary
authorizers for each function as required.

5. If necessary, set the number or authorizers for Advisor/Broker functions in the Account Information access group.:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 382

Chapter 5 Users

l Select Account Information from the Select Access Group drop-down.

l Select the number of required Primary and Secondary authorizers for Advisor Qualifications, Financial Information
and Broker Declaration functions as required.
l Click Continue when you are done.
6. Sub and client account holders (who function as their own Security Officers) can assign account-level access
rights to their Master Users.
7. If you are a sub or client account holder, select an access group from the drop-down, then select the check box in
the Master User Access column for each function that you want your Master User to be able to access.
8. Click Continue to save your changes.
You can view your pending changes to access rights configuration on the Home > Pending Items page. Move your
mouse over those pending items to see a popup with Eligible Security Officers displayed:

Users
The Users page lets you:

l Add users to an account.

l Modify Account Management access rights for existing users.
l Add up to two usernames for a user.
l Delete users from an account.
l Add a Security Officer

Who can access the Users page?

All users and Security Officers can access this page except Broker Non-Disclosed Clients and Broker Omnibus Clients.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 383

Chapter 5 Individual Account User Rules

Individual Account User Rules

The following rules and limitations apply to Individual accounts:

l Up to two usernames may be created for the same person.

l Up to 5 persons may be added with a Power of Attorney, which will be provided when adding users to an indi-
vidual account.
l Individual Advisors may not add any persons other than themselves (they can have two usernames for them-
selves).
l Joint Accounts may add two usernames for each account holder.
l Trust accounts may add up to two usernames for each trustee.

User Information Displayed on User Access Rights Page

The User Access Rights page displays information about all users registered with your account. This is a summary of the
information entered when you added the user to your account, and includes the following:

Column Description
First Name The user’s first name.

MI The user’s middle initial.

Last Name The user’s last name.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 384

Chapter 5 Adding a User

Column Description
User Name The user’s user name.

Type Depending on the type of account you have,

this corresponds to the Type and Entity Rela-
tionship field on the Add New User and
Access Rights page. It could be Employee
or Non-employee or a specific role in your
company, such as CEO or Treasurer.

Accessible Rights Click View Rights to displays a popup sum-

mary of the user's access rights.

Status The status of the user. For example, “Open”

or “Pending Confirmation.”

Modify Displays a Modify link for users’ whose

status is “Open.” Click this link to modify the
users’ access rights.

Delete Displays a Delete link. Click this link to

delete the user from your account.

Adding a User
You can add users to your account and grant them access to a subset of Account Management functions, including grant-
ing access to functions for one or more sub accounts. You cannot grant access to Funding functions to a new user.

To add a user to the account

1. Click Manage Account > Access Rights > Users.
2. Click Add User.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 385

Chapter 5 Adding a User

3. On the Add User page, enter all required information, including name, six-character username prefix, password,
and email address.
4. On the same page, assign Account Management functions to the user by clicking the appropriate check boxes in
the Access Rights section. Access groups correspond to Account Management menus.
l To designate the user as a Security Officer, click the I'd like to have this person designated as a Security
Officer. check box.
l To designate the user as an Account Representative, select the I'd like to have this person designated as an
Account Representative check box.
l If you have created any User Roles, optionally select a User Role. The access rights saved with the User Role will
be applied to the new user.
l Click an access group to expand the section, then click check boxes to grant access to individual functions.
l To grant access to all functions within an access group, click the check box next to the access group name. If a
function is not checked, the user will not be able to access the function in Account Management:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 386

Chapter 5 Adding a User

5. If you are adding a user to a multiple account structure, when you click a check box for an Access group or for an
individual function inside an Access group, the Assign Accounts box opens.
Use the Assign Accounts box to select which accounts you want this user to be able to access for the selected function
or group of functions. You can select:

l All for all accounts, including the Master and all sub accounts;
l Master to grant access to only the Master account;
l Sub All to grant access to all sub accounts;
l Sub Specific, to grant access to individual sub accounts.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 387

Chapter 5 Adding a User

Click Continue to save your account assignments.

All account users automatically get rights to Security functions (Password, Secure Login System Secure Device Sharing,
and Voting Subscriptions), which are located in the Manage Account > Security access group, and the functions in the
Manage Account > Settings access group (User Information and Email Address).

The following figure shows an example of an access rights configuration. In this example, a user is being granted access
to all functions in the Trade and Reports > Activity menus of Account Management.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 388

 Chapter 5 Viewing Pending User Access Rights

6. On the same page, you can select the accounts to which the access rights are assigned.
l Highlight one or more individual sub/client accounts in the list (Ctrl+ click to select multiple non-adjacent
accounts in the list; Shift+click to select multiple adjacent accounts in the list). Click the All Sub/Client
Accounts check box to select ALL accounts.
7. Click Continue.
8. Verify that all the information is correct, then click Continue.
If you need to make further changes, click Back, then make corrections before submitting.
9. Enter the confirmation number sent to you via email, then click Continue.
If you have not received a confirmation number, click Request Confirmation Number to have a confirmation number
sent to your email address on record.

10. Click Cancel to cancel your changes.

Viewing Pending User Access Rights

Click Pending Authorization in the Status column for any Security Officer listed to view a popup that displays the
pending user access rights.

Viewing Eligible Security Officers on Pending Items

On the Users page, you can move your mouse over the Status of any Security Officer listed with a status of Pending
Authorization to see a popup with Eligible Security Officers displayed:

You can view your pending changes to user access rights on the Home > Pending Items page. Move your mouse over
those pending items to see a popup with Eligible Security Officers displayed:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 389

Chapter 5 Modifying User Access Rights

Modifying User Access Rights

You can modify Account Management access rights for an existing user on the User Access Rights page. For example, if
you add a user to your account, you may want to modify the user's access rights at a later date.

To modify access rights for an existing user

1. Click Manage Account > Access Rights > Users.
2. Click the Modify link next to the user whose access rights you want to modify.
3. On the next page, modify the access rights for the user by selecting or deselecting check boxes next to the avail-
able Account Management functions, including changing any authorization privileges you may have assigned or
need to assign.
l To designate the user as a Security Officer, click the I'd like to have this person designated as a Security
Officer. check box.
l To designate the user as an Account Representative (or remove the designation from the user) , select (or deselect)
the I'd like to have this person designated as an Account Representative check box.
l Click an access group to expand the section, then click check boxes to grant access to individual functions.
l To grant access to all functions within an access group, click the check box next to the access group name. If a
function is not checked, the user will not be able to access the function in Account Management:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 390

Chapter 5 Modifying User Access Rights

4. If you are modifying a user in a multiple account structure, click Modify Accounts for any individual function
inside an Access group. The Assign Accounts box opens.
Use the Assign Accounts box to change which accounts you want this user to be able to access for the selected function
or group of functions. You can select:

l All for all accounts, including the Master and all sub accounts;
l Master to grant access to only the Master account;
l Sub All to grant access to all sub accounts;
l Sub Specific, to grant access to individual sub accounts.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 391

Chapter 5 Adding Usernames to a User

Click Continue to save your account assignments.

5. Verify that all the information is correct, then click Continue.

If you need to make further changes, click Back, then make corrections before submitting.
6. Enter the confirmation number sent to you via email, then click Continue.
If you have not received a confirmation number, click Request Confirm to have a confirmation number sent to your
email address on record.

7. Click Cancel to cancel your changes.

Adding Usernames to a User

Account Management lets you assign up to two usernames for each individual user. For example, an individual user
might want to add a second user name in order to log in on two different machines for testing purposes.

To add a username for a user

1. Click Manage Account > Access Rights > Users.

2. Click the 2nd User link next to the user for whom you want to add a second user name.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 392

Chapter 5 Deleting a User

3. On the next page, enter information for the second username, then click Back.
4. Verify that all the information is correct, then click Continue.
If you need to make further changes, click Back, then make corrections before submitting.
5. Enter the confirmation number sent to you via email, then click Continue.
If you have not received a confirmation number, click Request Confirmation Number to have a confirmation
number sent to your email address on record.
6. Click Cancel to cancel your changes.

Deleting a User

To delete a user from the account

1. Click Manage Account > Access Rights > Users.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 393

Chapter 5 Add a Security Officer

2. Click the Delete link next to the user you want to delete.
Account Management access for that user is disabled instantly and Trading Access is disabled by the next cal-
endar day.

Add a Security Officer

You can add Security Officers after your account is open by:

l Adding a new user to your account and designating that user as a Security Officer.
l Designating an existing user as a Security Officer by modifying the user's access rights.
l Sending a request to us. You can access the request form on the Support > Paper Forms page of Account Man-
agement.

User Roles
A user role contains a set of access rights to Account Management functions. You can quickly assign access rights to
new users by selecting an existing user role when you add the new users to your account. For example, you could create
a user role that has access only to funding and reporting functions, then add a user to your account and assign the fund-
ing/reporting role to that new user.

The User Roles page lets you:

l Add a new user role

l Modify a user role
l Delete a user role
l View user role details

Who can access the User Roles page?

All users and Security Officers can access this page except Broker Non-Disclosed Clients and Broker Omnibus Clients.

Adding a User Role

To add a user role to the account

1. Click Manage Account > Access Rights > User Roles.

2. Click Add Role.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 394

Chapter 5 Modifying a User Role

3. Enter the name of the new user role in User Role Name field.
4. Assign Account Management functions to the user role by clicking the appropriate check boxes in the Access
Rights section. Access groups correspond to Account Management menus.
l Click an access group to expand the section, then click check boxes to grant access to individual functions.
o To grant access to all functions within an access group, click the check box next to the access group name. If a
function is not checked, any user that you add to your account with this user role will not have access to the
function in Account Management.
o Click Continue.
o Verify that the access rights assignments are correct, then click Continue.
o Confirm your request for the creation of the new user role by entering the confirmation number that we sent to
your email address of record into the field provided.
9. Click Continue.

Modifying a User Role

You can modify a user role if you want

To add a user role to the account

1. Click Manage Account > Access Rights > User Roles.
2. Click the Modify link next to the user role you want to modify.
3. On the next page, modify the access rights for the user role by selecting or deselecting check boxes next to the
available Account Management functions, including changing any authorization privileges you may have
assigned or need to assign. Click Continue.
4. Verify that all the information is correct, then click Continue.
If you need to make further changes, click Back, then make corrections before submitting.
5. Enter the confirmation number sent to you via email, then click Continue.
If you have not received a confirmation number, click Request Confirm to have a confirmation number sent to

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 395

Chapter 5 Deleting a User Role

your email address on record.

6. Click Cancel to cancel your changes.

Deleting a User Role

You can delete a user role when it is no longer needed.

To delete a user role

1. Click Manage Account > Access Rights > User Roles.
2. Click the Delete link next to the user role you want to delete.
The user role is deleted from the system.

View User Role Details

To view user role details

1. Click Manage Account > Access Rights > User Roles.

2. Click the View Role Info link in the Action column for a specific role.
The Role Details popup window opens, showing the details for the role.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 396

Chapter 5 View User Role Details

3. To close the popup window, click the X in the upper right corner.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 397

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 398
Contents

Contents i

Classic Account Management Users' Guide 21

Overview 21

About Account Management 22

Logging In 23

Failed Login Attempts 23

Home Page 24

Real-Time Summary 24

Balances 25

Margin Requirements 25

Available for Trading 26

Positions 26

Pending Items 27

Messages 28

Corporate Actions 29

Menus 30

Navigating the Account Management Menus 30

Getting Help 34

Dynamic Help 34

Account Management Users' Guide 34

Navigating Account Management Pages 35

Changing the Active Account 36

Account Selector 38

Using the Account Selector 38

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide i

Contents

Account Selector for Three-Level Accounts 41

Changing the Display Language 43

Printing 44

Logging Out 45

Trade 47

QuickTrade 48

IPO Subscriptions 49

Reports 53

Activity 54

About Activity Statements 54

Statement Cutoff Times 54

Activity by Account Type 54

Activity Statement Archive Policy 55

Viewing Activity Statements 56

Default Statements 56

Creating Customized Statements 59

Customized Statements Profit and Loss Selection 62

Third-Party Downloads 63

If You are Downloading a Zip File Using Internet Explorer 7 or 8 66

Activity Flex Queries 67

Batch Reports 72

Models 73

Quarterly Summaries 76

Trade Confirmations 78

Trade Confirmation Reports 79

Trade Allocations 81

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide ii

Contents

Trade Confirmation Flex Queries 82

PortfolioAnalyst 87

Snapshot PDF Reports 89

Detailed PDF Reports 94

Available Reports in Detailed PDF Reports 98

Running a Performance Attribution Report 105

Understanding the Performance Attribution Report Table 106

Weighting by Sector 106

Returns and Attribution Effects by Sector 106

Understanding the Performance Attribution Charts 106

Understanding the Performance Attribution Scatter Plot 107

Creating Custom Benchmarks 107

About Custom Benchmarks 107

Synopses 110

Creating and Saving a Synopsis 110

Assigning a Synopsis to a Report 111

Editing and Deleting Saved PortfolioAnalyst Reports 113

Viewing External Accounts 114

Account Summaries 115

External Accounts 118

Adding an External Account 118

Vewing and Editing External Accounts 122

Deleting External Accounts 123

Transaction Cost Analysis 125

Understanding the Transaction Cost Analysis 129

Risk 134

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide iii

Contents

Margin Reports 135

Stress Test Report 137

Using the Stress Test Summary Report 138

Value At Risk Report 140

Supplemental Reports 142

Compliance Reports 142

Advisor Fee Cap 143

Broker Exception Reports 144

Client Summary Report 144

P/L Markup Summary 145

Advisor Fee Invoices 146

Broker Client Revenue and Expense Summary 147

Tax 148

Tax Optimizer 149

Tax Forms 150

Position Transfer Basis 152

Forex Cost Basis 153

Settings 156

Delivery 156

Delivery Settings for Activity Statements and Trade Reports 157

SMS Alerts 160

Flex Queries 161

Portfolio Analyst Delivery Settings 162

Broker Client Activity Statements 165

Using the Flex Web Service 166

Flex Web Service Version 2 167

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide iv

Contents

Flex Web Service Version 3 170

Version 3 Error Codes 173

Third-Party Services 174

Trader ID 175

Trader ID Rules 176

Client OATS Settings 178

Funding 181

Viewing Transaction History 182

Request a stop payment of a check withdrawal 184

Cash Deposit Details 185

Cash Withdrawal Details 190

Position Transfers Details 193

Internal Transfer Details 197

Fund Transfers 199

Checking the Status of Your Funds 199

Funds Status 200

Depositing Funds 201

Withdrawing Funds 203

ACH Initiated By Us and Canadian EFT Transactions 207

Transferring Funds Internally 208

Saving Bank Information 209

About Recurring Transactions 211

Canceling a Recurring Transaction 212

Withdrawing Funds to a Third Party 212

Position Transfers 217

ACATS Transfers 218

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide v

Contents

Requesting a Full ACATS Transfer 218

Requesting a Partial ACATS Transfer without a Position Instruction 219

Requesting a Partial ACATS Transfer Using an Existing Position Instruction 221

Creating a Position Instruction for a Partial ACATS Transfer 223

ATON Transfers 224

Requesting a Full ATON Transfer 224

Partial ATON Transfers without Instructions 225

Partial ATON Transfers with Existing Instruction 227

Creating an ATON Position Instruction 229

Checking Position Eligibility for a Full ACATS or ATON Transfer 230

DRS Transfers 233

DWAC Transfers 235

Transferring Positions to an Advisor-Managed Account 236

Transfer International Assets 237

FOP Transfers 241

FOP Transfer without Instruction 241

FOP Transfer Using Existing Instruction 243

Creating Position Instruction for an FOP Transfer 245

US Futures Transfers 246

Transferring Positions Between Master and Sub Accounts 246

Transferring Positions Internally 247

Using CSV Files for Position Transfers 248

Uploading Positions in a CSV File for Partial Position Transfers 249

Rules for Uploading Positions in a CSV File 251

Instructions 253

Bank Information 253

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide vi

Contents

Bank Information Fields 254

Recurring Transactions 260

Position Instructions 262

Settlement Instructions 263

Soft Dollars Disbursement 265

Manage Account 269

Account Information 270

Details 270

Account Details 270

Profile 272

Ownership Percentage Update 278

Guidelines 278

Example 278

Financial Information 281

Regulatory Information 282

Dividend Reinvestment 283

Trading Sub Accounts 285

Broker Declaration 285

Advisor Qualifications 286

Transfer on Death 287

Removing or Modifying a TOD Beneficiary 291

Investor Category 292

Large Trader Identification 292

Tax Information 295

Tax Form Collection 295

Withholding Statement 297

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide vii

Contents

Adding an Owner to an Organization 298

Settings 300

Configure Account 300

Base Currency 300

Institutional Services 302

Account Type 303

Excess Funds Sweep 304

Fees 304

Pricing Structure 305

Request Soft Dollars 306

Request Soft Dollars 306

Soft Dollars Page 306

Soft Payments in Activity Statements 308

Compliance for Advisors 308

Who Can Subscribe to this Service? 308

Using the Service for the First Time 309

Section 13 Subscription Election 309

Section 13 Monitoring Groups 310

Rules for Monitoring Groups 310

Section 13 Handshake Requests 315

Section 13 On Demand Report Request 315

Rules for On Demand Report Generation 316

Section 13 Designate Aggregated Report Recipients 318

Rules for Designating Aggregated Report Recipients 318

Trading Platforms Read-Only Access 319

Paper Trading 320

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide viii

Contents

About Paper Trading Accounts 321

Paper Trading Account Limitations 322

Account Alias 322

How to Close Your Account 323

Close Account 325

Account Closure Status 327

Reopening a Closed Account 328

IRA 329

IRA Conversion to a Roth Account 329

Partial IRA Conversions 330

IRA Recharacterization 331

Partial IRA Recharacterizations 331

IRA Reference 332

IRA Account Types 332

IRA Margin Accounts 332

IRA Account Types 332

IRA Transfer Methods 333

Conversions and Recharacterizations 335

IRA Conversion 335

Eligibility Requirements 335

2010 Changes 336

IRA Recharacterization 336

Timing 336

Reconversion 336

Additional Information 337

Trade Configuration 338

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide ix

Contents

Permissions 339

Trading UK CFDs and Metals 342

Trading Cash Forex 345

Cash Forex Eligibility Requirements 345

Market Data 346

Research 347

Subscriber Status 348

Market Data Assistant 350

Trading Limits 350

Restrictions 352

FYI 352

Alerts 354

Futures Arbitration Agreement 356

Asia Gateway Access 356

Security 358

IP Restrictions 358

Change Password 359

Reset Paper Trading Account Password 360

Change Email Address 362

Change Security Questions 363

Secure Login System 364

Security Device 365

If You Choose Not to Participate in the Secure Login System 367

When Will I Receive My Device 367

Security Device Sharing 367

About Security Devices 369

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide x

Contents

Security Code Cards 369

Digital Security Card+ 370

Withdrawal Limits 371

SLS Opt Out 371

Rules for Opting Out 372

Client Security 373

Voting Subscriptions 374

Audit Trail 375

Access Rights 377

User Access Rights Guide 377

Access Rights Overview 377

Access Rights and Access Groups 378

Security Officers 378

Security Officer Approvals 378

Account-Level Access Rights 379

User Roles 379

Primary and Secondary Authorizers 379

User Access Rights Summary 379

About Security Officers 380

Creating Security Officers During the Account Application Process 380

Adding and Deleting Security Officers 380

Security Officers and Account Management 380

Configure Access Rights 381

Users 383

Individual Account User Rules 384

User Information Displayed on User Access Rights Page 384

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xi

Contents

Adding a User 385

Viewing Pending User Access Rights 389

Viewing Eligible Security Officers on Pending Items 389

Modifying User Access Rights 390

Adding Usernames to a User 392

Deleting a User 393

Add a Security Officer 394

User Roles 394

Adding a User Role 394

Modifying a User Role 395

Deleting a User Role 396

View User Role Details 396

Contents i

Add or Link Accounts xxi

Create Linked Account xxi

If You Do Not Finish the New Account Application xxii

Account Management for Linked Accounts xxii

Link Existing Account xxiii

Guidelines for Linking Existing Accounts xxiii

Account Management for Linked Accounts xxiv

Move, Link or Partition an Account xxv

Important Notes about Linking and DeLinking xxvi

About Partitions xxvi

Authorized Trader xxx

Rules for Linking to and Delinking from an Advisor or Multiple Hedge Fund xxxii

Research Services xxxiii

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xii

Contents

Research Website Login xxxiii

Money Manager xxxiv

Adding a Money Manager xxxiv

Money Manager Assignment xxxiv

Add a Money Manager xxxv

Create a Client Fees Template xxxvii

Modify Client Fees for a Money Manager xxxvii

Modify Trading Permissions xxxix

Change Money Manager Client Account Assignments xliii

Remove a Money Manager xlviii

Wealth Manager Assignment xlix

Trader Referral Program lii

Trader Referral Payout Rules lii

Manage Clients/Funds/Traders 55

Dashboard 57

View Information About All Clients 59

View Client Account Details 61

Changing Account Representatives 70

Additional Advisor Authorizations 72

Additional Broker Authorizations 74

Invest in a Hedge Fund for a Client 76

Duplicate Client Accounts 77

Duplicated Account Settings 79

Upload Documents for Pending Non-Disclosed Broker Clients 80

Create and Link Accounts (for Advisors and Brokers) 82

Create 82

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xiii

Contents

Add Client Account 82

Methods of Completing an Account Application 83

Steps in the Application Process 84

Inviting a Client to Start an Electronic Application 84

Starting a Semi-Electronic Application 86

Downloading Client Disclosures 88

Adding a Fully Disclosed Broker Client Account 88

Adding Advisors, STL and Multiple Hedge Fund Accounts to a Fully Disclosed Broker Account 89

Adding an Advisor Account 89

Adding an STL Account 90

Adding a Multiple Hedge Fund Account 90

Rules for Three-Level Fully Disclosed Broker Accounts 91

Adding a Non-Disclosed Broker Client Account 94

Client Account Templates 95

Advisor/Fund Investment Manager Client Templates 96

Broker Client Templates 99

Set Up a Client Template with a Custom ID 103

Households 103

Rules for Creating Households 104

Link Client Accounts 111

Close Account 112

Close a Non-Disclosed Broker Client Account 114

Account Closure Status 116

Opening Interactive Brokers Asset Management Accounts for Advisor Clients 116

Create (for Multiple Fund Investment Managers) 120

Add Client Account 120

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xiv

Contents

Methods of Completing an Account Application 121

Steps in the Application Process 122

Inviting a Client to Start an Electronic Application 122

Starting a Semi-Electronic Application 124

Downloading Client Disclosures 125

Adding a Fully Disclosed Broker Client Account 126

Adding Advisors, STL and Multiple Hedge Fund Accounts to a Fully Disclosed Broker Account 127

Adding an Advisor Account 127

Adding an STL Account 128

Adding a Multiple Hedge Fund Account 128

Rules for Three-Level Fully Disclosed Broker Accounts 129

Adding Advisor and STL Accounts to an Advisor or Multiple Hedge Fund Account 132

Adding an Advisor Account 133

Adding an STL Account 133

Rules for Three-Level Advisor or Multiple Hedge Fund Accounts 134

Adding a Non-Disclosed Broker Client Account 137

Add a Fund Account or an SMA Account 137

Duplicate Client Accounts 141

Duplicated Account Settings 143

Client Account Templates 144

Advisor/Fund Investment Manager Client Templates 145

Broker Client Templates 148

Set Up a Client Template with a Custom ID 152

Traders 153

Traders 153

Authorized Trader 153

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xv

Contents

Close Account 155

Close a Non-Disclosed Broker Client Account 156

Account Closure Status 158

Client Fees 160

Advisor Client Fees 160

Broker Client Fees 160

Advisor Client Fees 161

Fee Reimbursement 161

Charge Commissions and/or Client Fees to the Advisor Master Account 162

Client Fee Templates 162

Overview of Advisor Client Fees 162

Caps and Limitations 165

Examples 165

Percent of Net Liquidation Value 165

Flat Fee 165

Percent of Annual P&L 165

Percent of Market-to-Market P&L 166

Configure Advisor Client Fees 166

High Water Mark 172

High Water Mark Example 172

`Setting Up High Water Marking 173

Advisor Fee Cap Formulas 177

Client Authorization 177

Advisor Client Invoicing 178

Uploading Invoices 184

Configure Invoice Notifications 186

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xvi

Contents

Advisor Fee Reimbursements 188

Broker Client Fees 193

Rules for Broker Client Fees 193

Client Fee Templates 193

Choice of Pricing Structures for Client Accounts 193

Markup Summary 194

Types of Broker Client Markups 194

Minimum Amount 194

Maximum Amount 195

Ticket Charge 196

Absolute Markup 197

Tiered Absolute Amount 197

% Markup 198

Exchange and Regulatory Fees 199

Interest Markups and Markdowns 200

Markups on Borrow Fees 200

Take Up Fees for Prime Trades 201

Configure Broker Client Fees 202

Client Invoicing 206

Uploading Invoices 211

Markup Summary 212

Client Fee Templates 213

Overview of Client Fee Templates 213

Default Client Fee Templates 214

Fees for SMAs in Multiple Hedge Fund Accounts 218

HFCIP Fees 219

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xvii

Contents

Settings 223

Account Alias 223

Broker Client Approvals 224

Excess Funds Sweep 227

Debit Card For Advisor Clients 228

Trade Configuration 230

Base Currency 230

Account Type 231

Client Trading 232

Permissions 234

Restrictions 235

Trading Limits 235

Security 239

Audit Trail 239

Updating a Client's W8/W9 241

Users 243

Individual Account User Rules 243

User Information Displayed on User Access Rights Page 244

Adding a User 244

Viewing Pending User Access Rights 248

Viewing Eligible Security Officers on Pending Items 249

Modifying User Access Rights 249

Adding Usernames to a User 251

Deleting a User 252

CRM 254

CRM Home Page 255

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xviii

Contents

Individual CRM Contacts 256

Sharing CRM with Another User 257

View, Sort and Search Records 257

View Current Tasks and Events 258

Entering a New Contact, Prospect or Client 260

Edit an Existing Contact, Prospect or Client 264

Additional Functions for Individual Records 266

Set and Reset Your Notes/Tasks Password 276

Set Up and Use a CRM Mailbox 278

Requirements for a Rackspace Mailbox 278

Additional Information 278

Additional Services Available from Rackspace 278

Disclaimer 279

Events 279

CRM Advanced Search 283

CRM Groups 286

Import Contacts 293

Excel File Information 293

CRM Icon Reference 295

Support 297

Client Services Message Center 298

Message Center Window 299

Viewing Tickets and Unread Messages 300

Changing the Display Language 301

Viewing the Legend 301

Creating a New Ticket 302

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xix

Contents

Modifying a Ticket 303

Setting Ticket Notification Preferences 305

Closing a Ticket 306

Viewing Corporate Actions 307

Submitting a Tax Reporting Correction Form 307

Requesting a Trade Cancellation 308

Live Chat 310

Client Services Contact Information 311

Service Tips 312

Knowledge Base 313

Client Services Tools 314

System Status 315

Paper Forms 316

Using Account Management Forms 316

Index 317

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xx

Contents

Add or Link Accounts

The Add Accounts menu gives you access to the following pages:

l Create Linked Account - Create a new account that is linked to your account under the same username and pass-
word.
l Link Existing Account - Link multiple accounts under a single username and password.
l Authorized Trader - Proprietary Trading Group Master Users (Pool account) and Single Hedge Funds can add sub
accounts for authorized traders in their organization.
In addition, you can link your account to an Advisor- or Broker-managed account or divide your account into two par-
titions, one of which will be managed by an Advisor or a Broker on the Move, Link or Partition an Account page. You
access this page when you choose to link to an Advisor in the Advisor Marketplace or a Broker in the Broker Mar-
ketplace.

Create Linked Account

This page lets you create new accounts that are linked to your account. New linked accounts have the following char-
acteristics:

l You can access all of the linked accounts in Account Management using a single user name.
l You can create any number of new linked accounts.
l Once you create a linked account and log into Account Management, you can perform any action, such as modify
trading permissions or transfer funds, for a specific linked account.
l Linked accounts must be separately funded.
l Market data fees are charged once for linked accounts under a single username rather than charged separately for
each linked account (market data subscriptions are charged per terminal/computer). However, additional users will
be charged separate market data fees.
l You can access linked accounts using a single user name in Trader Workstation, WebTrader and IB TWS mobile
solutions.

Who can access the Create Linked Account page?

You can access this page if you are a(n) :

l Individual, Joint, Trust and IRA Account User with a single account or multiple accounts.

To create and link to an additional account

1. Click Manage Account > Add or Link Accounts > Create Linked Account.
2. Select the type of account that want to create from the Additional Account Type drop-down: Individual, IRA or
Joint. If you select Joint, you are prompted to select the type of Joint account (Joint Tenants with Rights of Sur-
vivorship, Community Property or Tenants in Common).
3. Click Create New Linked Account. An abbreviated account application opens at the Trading Qualifications
page.
4. Complete the account application for the new account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxi

Contents

If for any reason you must log out of the new account application, you can finish it later and complete the linking pro-
cess. You must either complete the new account application or delete it before you can create and link another account.

To de-link a linked account, you must close the linked account. Select Close an Account in the Manage Account >
Account Settings menu to close the linked account.

When the new account is activated and open, it will be linked to your original account. You will be able to log into
Account Management and any of our trading platforms with a single username. In Account Management, you can switch
between accounts using the Account ID display at the bottom left of the screen.

If You Do Not Finish the New Account Application

You can log out of the Account Application for the new linked account and finish it later by logging into Account Man-
agement and accessing the Create Linked Account page.

To complete an unfinished account application for a new linked account

1. Click Manage Account > Add Accounts. The New page appears by default.
2. Click Finish Application. The in-progress Account Application opens.
3. Complete the Account Application for the new account.
When the new account is activated and open, it will be linked to your original account.

Account Management for Linked Accounts

After you have created a linked account, you can perform any action in Account Management for that account as long as
that account has a status of Open, such as modify trading permissions or transfer funds, by first selecting the linked
account.

To perform an action for a linked account

1. Log into Account Management with the single user name and password.
2. Select a linked account from the Account ID displayed in the bottom left of the screen. For example, if your indi-
vidual account is linked to a joint account, you can switch between those accounts.

Account Management reloads with the selected linked account as the new active account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxii

Contents

3. Perform any action you wish for the selected account by selecting an item from the Account Management menus.
4. To de-link a linked account, you must close the linked account. Select Close an Account in the Manage Account
> Account Settings menu to close the linked account.

Link Existing Account

This page lets you link your multiple accounts under the single username and password associated with your account,
including accounts that are managed by an Advisor or a Broker. Once these accounts are linked, you will be able to
access Trader Workstation, WebTrader, IB TWS mobile solutions and Account Management for any of the linked
accounts using a single username and password. In addition, market data subscriptions are charged once for linked
accounts rather than charged separately for each linked account (market data subscriptions are charged per ter-
minal/computer).

Guidelines for Linking Existing Accounts

Observe these guidelines when linking accounts in this way:

l To request a link to an existing account, you must have a Secure Login System security device.
l The email addresses, account titles, tax IDs, legal IDs and physical addresses associated with the accounts you
want to link must be the same.
l You must link ALL accounts associated with you. You cannot link a subset of accounts.
l Once the accounts have been linked, the unique usernames and passwords for the accounts to be linked with this
account will no longer function. The username and password associated with your account will function for all
inked accounts.
l Once the accounts have been linked, the highest level security device among the linked accounts will auto-
matically become the active security device.
l If you begin a new account application for an existing matching account, you will be asked to link the accounts.
l We will link these accounts on Fridays.

Note: Advisors and fully disclosed brokers can link existing individual and joint client accounts on the
Manage Clients > Accounts > Link Existing Accounts page.

Three-level account linking is also supported as follows:

l An existing individual account holder can link to an existing second-level Advisor or a second level Multiple
Hedge Fund Investment Manager in a three-level Advisor or Fully Disclosed Broker account.
l An existing Advisor or Multiple Hedge Fund Investment Manager with clients can link to a top-level Advisor or
a second level Multiple Hedge Fund Investment Manager in a three-level Advisor or Fully Disclosed Broker
account. In this scenario, the entire Advisor/Hedge Fund account structure, including all of the existing client
accounts, get moved to the three level account structure and all clients whose accounts are moving must sign
agreements before the linking can be completed.
Who can access the Link Existing Account page?
You can access this page if you are a(n) :

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxiii

Contents

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User with multiple accounts

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User with a stand-alone account AND an Advisor- or Broker-managed
account.
l Friends and Family Group Client User
l Fully Disclosed Broker Client User
l Advisor Client User Individual (not Organization)

To link your account to an existing account

1. Log into Account Management with your username and password, then enter the codes from your Secure Login
Device as instructed on the login screen.
2. Click Manage Account > Add or Link Accounts > Link Existing Account.
The page lists all of your current accounts that are eligible to link, along with their usernames and current Secure Login
Device . When you link these accounts, the unique username and password associated with your other accounts will no
longer function; you will access all accounts with a single username and password.

3. Click the radio button next to the account whose username you want to use for all linked accounts. This will be
the username you use to log into Account Management and our trading platforms.
4. Click Link Accounts.
5. A series of pages appears to prompt you to enter the username and password for each account to be linked, fol-
lowed by additional authentication using your Secure Login device.
6. After you have entered the username, password and authentication values for each account to be linked, a screen
appears that compares the individual and financial information that you maintain for the accounts to be linked. If
any information between the two accounts to be linked is not the same, edit that information directly on the com-
pare screen so that the information in both accounts matches.
7. Click Continue.
A screen appears confirming your request. If you wish to cancel your link request, click the here link on the page.
Once your accounts have been linked under your single username and password, you can perform Account Management
tasks for any linked account by logging into Account Management under your username and password, then selecting
one of the linked accounts.

Account Management for Linked Accounts

After you have created a linked account, you can perform any action in Account Management for that account as long as
that account has a status of Open, such as modify trading permissions or transfer funds, by first selecting the linked
account.

To perform an action for a linked account

1. Log into Account Management with the single user name and password.
2. Select a linked account from the Account ID displayed in the bottom left of the screen. For example, if your indi-
vidual account is linked to a joint account, you can switch between those accounts.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxiv

Contents

Account Management reloads with the selected linked account as the new active account.

3. Perform any action you wish for the selected account by selecting an item from the Account Management menus.
4. To de-link a linked account, you must close the linked account. Select Close an Account in the Manage Account
> Account Settings menu to close the linked account.

Move, Link or Partition an Account

This page lets you:

l Move your existing account, including all cash and positions, to an Advisor- or Broker- managed account, or
l Create a new account that will be managed by an Advisor or Broker and keep your existing account. The new
Advisor- or Broker-managed account will be linked to your existing account.
l Divide your account into two partitions: one that will be managed by you and one that will be managed by an
Advisor or Broker.

This page also appears when you link directly to an Advisor or Broker using the Investors' Marketplace.

Who can access the Move, Link or Partition an Account page?

You can access this page if you are a(n) :

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User with a single account or multiple accounts
l Small Business Account User
l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Single Hedge Fund
l Advisor Master User (can link to Broker only on this page)
l Multiple Hedge Fund Investment Manager (can link to Broker only on this page)
l Proprietary Trading Group STL Master User (can link to Broker only on this page)
and you are not an Advisor Client User or Broker Client User.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxv

Contents

Important Notes about Linking and DeLinking

l You cannot link your account to an advisor who has lesser trading permissions than you.
l When you move your entire account to an Advisor, you will no longer be able to log into Trader Workstation
and your current market data subscriptions will be canceled.
l When you move your entire account to a Broker, you will keep the ability to log in to Trader Workstation, and
your current trading permissions will remain in effect.
l When you create a new linked Advisor- or Broker-managed account and keep your existing account, the trading
permissions for your existing account will also apply to the new Advisor- or Broker-managed account, but any
permission to which the Advisor or Broker is not entitled will be removed. Future permissions changes for the
new account must be done individually for each child account.
l Client trading in a linked account managed by an Advisor or a Multiple Hedge Fund Investment Manager cannot
be enabled.
l Market data subscriptions are charged once for linked accounts rather than separately for each linked account (mar-
ket data subscriptions are charged per terminal/computer).
l If you choose to create a new account partition under an Advisor/Broker, that partition will be created overnight.
l Complete account moves to an Advisor/Broker-managed account are completed every Friday at 2:00 PM.
l When you choose to link your existing account to an Advisor/Broker-managed account, the Advisor or Broker
must confirm the link request. The new linked account will be open and ready to be funded by 6:00 PM on the
same business day. If you submit your link request after 4:00 PM, the linked account will be open and ready to be
funded by 6:00 PM on the next business day.

About Partitions

When you choose to create a new account partition that will be managed by an Advisor or Broker, you are essentially
creating a parent-child account relationship. Your existing account becomes the "parent partition" and your new Advisor-
or Broker-managed partition becomes the "child partition." The following guidelines apply to these partitions:

l The trading permissions for your existing account partition will also apply to the new Advisor- or Broker-man-
aged partition, but any permission to which the Advisor or Broker is not entitled will be removed. Future per-
missions changes for child partitions should be done individually for each partition.
l Market data subscriptions are charged once for account partitions rather than charged separately for each partition
(market data subscriptions are charged per terminal/computer).
l The child partition will be open and ready to be funded by 6:00 PM on the same business day. If you submit your
request after 4:00 PM, the child partition will be open and ready to be funded by 6:00 PM on the next business
day.
l When you create a new Advisor- or Broker-managed child partition, the Advisor or Broker cannot reject the
request.
l You fund the child partition by transferring cash and or positions from the parent partition to the child partition
once the child partition is open. Use internal fund transfers or internal position transfers to do this.
l The Advisor or Broker will determine and configure fees for the new child partition just as they would for any of
their client accounts.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxvi

Contents

l Commissions are charged separately for each partition.

l Client trading in partitions managed by an Advisor or a Multiple Hedge Fund Investment Manager cannot be
enabled .
l The Advisor- or Broker-managed partition can be closed just like any other advisor or broker client account.
l The parent partition (your original existing account) cannot be closed until all child partitions are closed.
l You will be unable to delink the Advisor- or Broker-managed partition. To delink the partition from the Advisor
or Broker, you must first transfer all funds and assets to the parent partition (your original account), and then close
the Advisor- or Broker-managed partition.
l You can only link to one Advisor- or Broker-managed partition, but you can link multiple accounts to the same
Advisor or Broker.

To move, link or partition an account

1. Click Manage Account > Add or Link Accounts > Advisor/Broker Account Setup.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxvii

Contents

2. Select from the following options by clicking the appropriate radio button:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxviii

Contents

l Move my entire account to an account managed by the Advisor/Broker identified below.

l Create a new linked account that will be managed by the Advisor/Broker identified below.
l Divide my account into two partitions, one of which will be managed by the Advisor/Broker identified below.
3. Type the Account ID and Account Title of the Advisor- or Broker-managed account in the fields provided.
4. Click Continue.
5. Enter the account ID and title of the broker or advisor account to which you want to link in the fields provided.
For example, account ID I123456 and account title Applicant XYZ. If you already selected the Advisor or Broker
in the Investors' Marketplace, these fields will already be filled in.
6. Click Continue.
7. Sign each of the two required agreements and click Continue after signing each one.
You will be emailed a confirmation number. Enter that number on the Confirmation Number page, then click Continue.

8. An email will be sent to the Advisor or Broker to inform him or her of your request.

To access this page from Investors' Marketplace

You can use Investors' Marketplace to identify the Advisor or Broker, and then can access the Move, Link or Partition an
Account page from the Marketplace.

1. Use the Advisor Marketplace or Broker Marketplace to search for and select an Advisor or Broker.
2. Click the Link button in the individual Advisor or Broker listing. The Advisor/Broker Account Setup page opens.
3. Click the radio button that corresponds to your choice. Read the descriptions carefully to understand the dif-
ference between the options.
4. Enter the account ID and title of the broker or advisor account to which you want to link in the fields provided.
For example, account ID I123456 and account title Applicant XYZ. If you already selected the Advisor or Broker
in the Investors' Marketplace, these fields will already be filled in.
5. Click Continue.
6. Sign each of the two required agreements and click Continue after signing each one.
7. You will be emailed a confirmation number. Enter that number on the Confirmation Number page, then click
Continue.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxix

Contents

8. An email will be sent to the Advisor or Broker to inform him or her of your request. Advisors and Brokers do not
have to confirm requests for new partitions.
For more information

l Rules for Linking to and Delinking from an Advisor or Multiple Hedge Fund

Authorized Trader
If you are a Proprietary Trading Group Master User (Pool account), a Single Hedge Fund, an organization sub account of
a broker, or an individual or joint client under a Registered Advisor, use the Authorized Trader page to add sub accounts
for authorized traders. If you have any of these accounts and you add an Authorized Trader, your account becomes a Pro-
prietary Trading Group Separate Trading Limit (STL) account and you can take advantage of maintaining different sub
accounts for different trading strategies and consolidated margin for maintenance and liquidation purposes.

Who can access the Authorized Trader page?

You can access this page only if you are a Proprietary Trading Group Pool Account Master User, a Single Hedge Fund,
an Organization Sub Account of a Broker or an Individual or Joint account holder under a Registered Advisor.

To add an authorized trader

1. Click Manage Account > Add or Link Accounts > Authorized Trader.
The Authorized Trader Information page opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxx

Contents

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxxi

Contents

2. Enter all required information, then Back.

The Trader added page opens, which confirms your request and contains a link to the Trader Authorization Form.

3. Click Trader Authorization Form.

4. Read the form carefully, then sign the form by typing your name in the field provided.
5. Click Continue.

Rules for Linking to and Delinking from an Advisor or Multiple Hedge Fund
If your account is linked to an Advisor-managed or Multiple Hedge Fund Investment Manager-managed account, you
may decide to delink that account and/or link to a different Advisor or Investment Manager (relink). Before doing so,
familiarize yourself with the following restrictions on linking and relinking.

Restrictions

l Trading Sub accounts cannot be delinked or relinked.

l Proprietary Accounts for Broker-Dealers cannot be delinked or relinked.
l Client accounts with Money Manager-attached accounts cannot be delinked or relinked.
l Client accounts with a UKL segment cannot relink to a Financial Advisor without a UKL segment.
l Client accounts cannot relink from a Financial Advisor or Friends and Family Advisor to a Hedge Fund.
l Only Fund accounts can be relinked from a Multiple Fund Investment Manager to another Multiple Fund Invest-
ment Manager.
l When delinking accounts from or relinking accounts to a Financial Advisor, you can delink or relink all accounts
or one or more accounts.
l Partitioned accounts cannot be delinked or relinked.
l Hedge Fund clients of a Multiple Hedge Fund account cannot be delinked.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxxii

Contents

Research Services
The Research Services menu includes the following items:

l Research Website Login

Research Website Login

This page lets you get access to research provider websites in order to get more services. You use your account email
address but a unique password to access provider websites.

To use this page

1. Click Manage Account > Research Services > Research Website Login.
2. Select a research provider from the drop-down list.
3. Type a unique password in the field provided. You will use this password along with your account email address
to access the selected research provider's website.
l The password must be unique; it cannot be the same as your account password.
l The password should be between 6 and 20 characters.
4. Click Submit. It takes one business day to process your request.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxxiii

Contents

Money Manager
Our Money Manager program lets Professional Advisors acting as Wealth Managers shop for Money Managers at the
Money Manager Marketplace and assign them to trade client accounts, and lets Money Managers sell their trading expert-
ise to Wealth Managers.

The Money Manager menu includes the following tabbed pages:

l Money Manager Assignment - Once a Wealth Manager and a Money Manager agree to do business, the Wealth
Manager uses this page to assign client accounts, set trading permissions and client fees for the Money Manager.
l Wealth Manager Assignment - Money Managers use this page to accept trading assignments from Wealth Man-
agers.

Adding a Money Manager

There are two ways for Wealth Manager to add a Money Manager in Account Management:

l On the Manage Account > Money Manager > Administration page.

l From the Money Manager Marketplace (Investors' Marketplace > Search Services > Investing > Money Man-
ager).

Money Manager Assignment

All Professional Financial Advisors are considered to be Wealth Managers. As a Wealth Manager, you can optionally
add Money Managers to trade for your client accounts. Money Managers direct trading and investment activity in client
accounts. They cannot add client accounts, fund client accounts, set client fees or set client trading permissions.

Note: Advisors who are part of a three-level broker account structure cannot link to Money Managers.

Who Can Access the Money Manager Assignment Page?

You can access this page if you are an Advisor who is a Registered Investment Advisor (RIA), including second-tier
Advisors (under a Fully Disclosed Broker), unregistered Advisors and Friends and Family account Advisors.

A Money Manager must first complete a separate Money Manager account application. Once a Money Manager’s
account is activated, you can add him or her to your account, then assign client accounts to them for trading purposes,
set trading permissions and set client fees. Both Money Managers and Wealth Managers can trade for client accounts.
After the Money Manager’s account has been activated, you as a Wealth Manager perform the following steps:

1. Access the Money Manager Marketplace and shop for available Money Managers. Either contact a Money Man-
ager directly or request that a Money Manager contact you.
2. Once you and the Money Manager have agreed to do business together, add the Money Manager to your account
by using the Add button in the Money Manager Marketplace, or use the Money Manager Assignment page.
3. Add a Money Manager
l Money Managers must log into Account Management with their username and password to accept assignments
from Wealth Manager. See Wealth Manager Assignment for more information.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxxiv

Contents

l The first time a Wealth Manager adds a Money Manager, the Wealth Manager must enter a code up to four letters
long called a Mnemonic that will be used as part of a Virtual Account Number in place of the Wealth Manager
Account ID on all reports, and when setting up client fees and client trading permissions. This is a security feature
to protect the WM account ID.

The Money Manager must also enter a code up to four letters long when he or she accepts the Wealth Manager
Assignment. This Mnemonic will be used in place of the Money Manager Account ID in the Virtual Account
Number on all reports.
4. Set Up a Client Fee Schedule - This fee schedule represents the fees that will be paid to you, the Wealth Manager,
when you trade for client accounts. Typically, you will have already done this for your client accounts and this is
the same procedure described in the Client Fees topic.

You set up a separate fee schedule for a Money Manager when you set up the client accounts for the Money
Manager.
5. Set Up Client Accounts - This step includes assigning client accounts to a Money Manager, setting trading per-
missions and Money Manager client fees (fees that will be paid when the Money Manager trades for client
accounts).
Money Managers can start trading the next business day (client assignments and trading permissions require one business
day to take effect). But Money Manager client fees will be collected from client accounts and transferred to the Money
Manager only after the client signs the Money Manager client agreement.

6. Create a Client Fees Template - Optionally, create a common client fee schedule to for Money Managers without
having to set client fees separately for each Money Manager. Client fees will be enabled for a client account only
after the client has submitted a signed fee agreement, if applicable.
7. Fund Client Accounts - See Fund Transfers or Position Transfers for detailed instructions.
When you assign a client account to a Money Manager, we create a second version of the client account that is linked to
the Money Manager. When you fund or transfer positions into a client account for a Money Manager, you are actually
funding or moving positions into the linked client account.

In addition, Wealth Managers can perform the following optional steps:

l Modify Client Fees for a Money Manager

l Modify Trading Permissions
l Change Money Manager Client Account Assignments
l Remove a Money Manager

Add a Money Manager

To add a Money Manager

1. Log into Account Management using your Master account username and password.
2. Click Manage Account > Money Manager > Administration.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxxv

Contents

3. The Money Manager Assignment page contains two tabs: Money Manager Assignments and Assign Client
Accounts. The Money Manager Assignments tab appears by default and lists all currently assigned Money Man-
agers.

Click Add Money Manager.

4. On the Money Manager Assignment - Add Money Manager page, enter the Account ID of the Money Manager in
the field provided, then click Submit.
5. The first time you add a Money Manager, you must enter a four-letter code that will be used in place of your
Wealth Manger Account ID on all reports, and when setting up client fees and client trading permissions. This
code will be part of a Virtual Account Number, which is a security feature to protect your Wealth Manager
Account ID. Enter a code up to four letters long in the Wealth Manager Mnemonic field.
Money Managers also enter a mnemonic to protect their own account ID's when they accept assignments on the Wealth
Manager Assignment page. The Money Manager mnemonic is also part of the Virtual Account Number.

Virtual Account Numbers appear on client reports and consist of the client Account ID, the Wealth Manager Mnemonic
and the Money Manager Mnemonic. On their reports, clients will see one of the following in place of their Account ID:

l If no Account Alias is used: Client Account ID-WM Mnemonic-MM Mnemonic

l If an Account Alias is used: Client Account Alias-WM Mnemonic-MM Mnemonic
Before you can assign client accounts or set up trading permissions and fees for client accounts assigned to a Money
Manager, the Money Manager must log into Account Management and accept the assignment.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxxvi

Contents

Create a Client Fees Template

A Client Fees Template lets you create and save a common client fee schedule, then apply it to multiple client accounts
assigned to a Money Manager without having to set the client fees separately for each client account. You create a Cli-
ent Fees Template from the Money Manager Assignment page.

To create a Client Fees Template

1. Log into Account Management using your Master account username and password.
2. Click Manage Account > Money Manager > Administration.
3. In the list of Active Money Managers, click the Add/Edit Client Fees Template link in the action column for a
Money Manager.
4. Set client fees the way you normally would, selecting one of the options on the screen, then entering values as
required.
5. Click Continue.
The Client Fees Template will now be available to assign to multiple client accounts when you set Money Manager fees
as described in Set Up Client Accounts.

6. Repeat this procedure to edit an existing Client Fees Template.

Modify Client Fees for a Money Manager

You can edit the client fees for one or more client accounts assigned to a Money Manager. Note that any changes to
Money Manager fees require approval from the client.

To modify Client Fees for a Money Manager

1. Log into Account Management using your Master account username and password.
2. Click Manage Account > Money Manager > Administration.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxxvii

Contents

3. In the list of Active Money Managers, click the Edit link in the Client Fees column for a Money Manager.

4. Select one or more client accounts assigned to the Money Manager whose client fees you want to modify, then
click the right arrow button to move those client accounts into the Selected Clients box.
5. Click Edit Client Fees for Selected Clients.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxxviii

Contents

6. Select one of the following radio buttons:

l Use existing Money Manager Client fee template schedule - Select this option to apply an existing Money Man-
ager Client Fee Template to this Money Manager. If you do not have any existing Client Fee Templates, this
option is unavailable. See Create a Client Fees Template for more information about Money Manager Client Fee
Templates.
l Add new fee schedule - Select this option to create a new fee schedule, which specifies the fees to be charged
when this Money Manager trades for the selected client accounts.
If you selected Add new fee schedule, select a fee methodology (No Fee, Automatic Billing, or Direct Billing) by
selecting the appropriate radio button. Client fee setup for Money Manager fees is identical as the client fee setup
for Financial Advisors.

7. Click Save and Continue. A confirmation page appears.

Modify Trading Permissions

You can edit the Money Manager trading permissions for one or more client accounts assigned to a Money Manager.

To modify trading permissions for a Money Manager

1. Log into Account Management using your Master account username and password.
2. Click Manage Account > Money Manager > Administration.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xxxix

Contents

3. In the list of Active Money Managers, click the Edit link in the Trading Permissions column for a Money Man-
ager.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xl

Contents

Select one or more client accounts assigned to the Money Manager whose trading permissions you want to
modify, then click the right arrow button to move those client accounts into the Selected Clients box.

4. Click Edit Trading Permissions for Selected Clients.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xli

Contents

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xlii

Contents

5. The client accounts for whom you are adding trading permissions are displayed in the Selected Client Accounts
box. These are the client accounts that you assigned to the Money Manager on the previous page.
Modify products and countries for those client accounts as required, then click Save and Continue.

To change the client account assignments, click the Edit Selection link, then click OKin the message box. You will be
returned to the Assign Client Accounts page and you will lose any client assignments you already made.

Client account assigned to a Money Manager can only receive trading permissions for products and countries that they
already have permission to trade as Advisor clients. For example, if a client account can trade stocks as an Advisor client,
and you assign trading permissions for a Money Manager that gives the same client account trading permissions for
stocks and options, then the Money Manager will only be able to trade stocks for that client account.

Change Money Manager Client Account Assignments

You change Money Manager client account assignments at any time by adding or removing client accounts from the
Money Manager.

To change Money Manager client assignments

1. Log into Account Management using your Master account username and password.
2. Click Manage Account > Money Manager > Administration.

3. Click the Assign Client Accounts tab.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xliii

Contents

4. Select a Money Manager from the drop-down list.

5. The Set Up Client Accounts page appears for the selected Money Manager.

l To remove client accounts from the Money Manager, click the plus sign next to View and Remove Assigned Cli-
ents. Select the client accounts you want to remove, then click Remove. You can use the Ctrl+click or
Shift+click keyboard combinations to select more than one account at a time.

When you assign a client account to a Money Manager, we create a second version of the client account that is
linked to the Money Manager. When you fund or transfer positions into a client account for a Money Manager,
you are actually funding or moving positions into the linked client account. Therefore, before you can remove a
client account from a Money Manager, you must first move all cash and positions from the linked client account
back to the client account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xliv

Contents

l To add client accounts to the Money Manager, click the plus sign next to Assign New Clients. Move client
accounts from the Available Clients list to the Selected Clients list by selecting the client account(s) on the left
then clicking the right arrow button. You can use the Ctrl+click or Shift+click keyboard combinations to select
more than one account at a time.

Click Select All to select all Available Clients.

6. Click Save and Continue.
If you added client accounts to the Money Manager, the Client Trading Permissions page appears.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xlv

Contents

7. The client accounts for whom you are adding trading permissions are displayed in the Selected Client Accounts
box. These are the client accounts that you assigned to the Money Manager on the previous page.
Add products and countries to those client accounts as required, then click Save and Continue.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xlvi

Contents

Client account assigned to a Money Manager can only receive trading permissions for products and countries that they
already have permission to trade as Advisor clients. For example, if a client account can trade stocks as an Advisor client,
and you assign trading permissions for a Money Manager that gives the same client account trading permissions for
stocks and options, then the Money Manager will only be able to trade stocks for that client account.

The Money Manager Fees page appears. This page lets you set client fees for the client accounts assigned to this Money
Manager, which are displayed in the box at the top of the page.

8. Select one of the following radio buttons:

l Use existing Money Manager Client fee template schedule - Select this option to apply an existing Money Man-
ager Client Fee Template to this Money Manager. If you do not have any existing Client Fee Templates, this
option is unavailable. See Create a Client Fees Template for more information about Money Manager Client Fee
Templates.
l Set new client fees - Select this option to create a new fee schedule, which specifies the fees to be charged when
this Money Manager trades for the selected client accounts.
9. Click Continue.
10. If you selected Add new fee schedule, select a fee methodology by selecting the appropriate radio button. Client
fee setup for Money Manager fees is identical as the client fee setup for Financial Advisors.
l Automatic billing is calculated and automatically billed to the client’s account by us. We offer a variety of meth-
ods that can be used, including Percentage of an account's value, Percentage of P&L, or a Flat Fee. Click the
check box next to each billing option that applies and enter the appropriate fee amount in the fields provided. If
you select Fee per trade, set maximum fees per trade on the next page that appears after you click the Continue
button.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xlvii

Contents

o If you choose to use Direct Billing, we are not involved and you are responsible for billing your client(s) dir-
ectly.
11. Click Save and Continue. The main Money Manager Assignment page appears.

Remove a Money Manager

You can easily remove a Money Manager if that person no longer trades for client accounts. When you remove a Money
Manager, all client accounts assigned to that Money Manager will be closed. Remember to move all cash and positions
from the Money Manager-linked client account linked back to the client account before you remove a Money Manager.

To remove a Money Manager

1. Log into Account Management using your Master account username and password.
2. Click Manage Account > Money Manager > Administration.

3. Click the Assign Client Accounts tab.

4. Click the Remove link in the Action column for the Money Manager you want to remove.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xlviii

Contents

Wealth Manager Assignment

Money Managers direct trading and investment activity in client accounts. Financial Advisors acting as Wealth Man-
agers add Money Managers to trade for client accounts. As a Money Manager, you cannot add client accounts, fund cli-
ent accounts, set client fees or set client trading permissions. Both Money Managers and Wealth Managers can trade for
client accounts. Money Managers can market their trading services to Wealth Managers by registering at the Money Man-
ager Marketplace.

To be able to trade for client accounts as a Money Manager:

1. Complete a separate Money Manager account application.

2. Once your Money Manager account is activated, the Wealth Manager shops for Money Managers in the Money
Manager Marketplace and either prepares to contact you, requests that you contact him, or adds you to his or her
account.
3. Log into Account Management and use the Money Manager Marketplace page in the Investors' Marketplace
menu to review requests by Wealth Managers (move your mouse cursor over a Wealth Manager to see his or her
contact information).
4. Once you and the Wealth Manager have agreed to do business together, the Wealth Manager adds you to his
account.
5. Log into Account Management and use the Wealth Manager Assignment page to subscribe to the Wealth Man-
ager who has added you.

After you subscribe to the Wealth Manager, the Wealth Manager then assigns client accounts to you for trading
purposes, sets trading permissions and sets client fees. After the Wealth Manager completes these tasks, you can
trade for client accounts assigned to you.
You can also deactivate Wealth Manager assignments.

Who Can Access the Wealth Manager Assignment Page?

You can access this page if you have completed the Money Manager account application and your account has been
opened and activated.

To subscribe to a Wealth Manager

1. Log in to Account Management.
2. If you have pending Wealth Manager assignments, the Wealth Manager Assignment page appears.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide xlix

Contents

3. All pending Wealth Manager assignments are listed in the Pending Wealth Managers section of the page. Click
Activate Subscription in the Action column.
4. The first time you activate a Wealth Manager assignment, you must enter a code up to four letters long that will
be used in place of your Money Manager Account ID on all reports. This code will be part of a Virtual Account
Number, which is a security feature to protect your Money Manager Account ID. Enter the four letter code in the
Money Manager Mnemonic field.

Wealth Managers also enter a mnemonic to protect their own account ID's when they add Money Managers on the
Money Manager Assignment page. The Wealth Manager mnemonic is also part of the Virtual Account Number.

Virtual Account Numbers appear on client reports and consist of the client Account ID, the Wealth Manager Mnemonic
and the Money Manager Mnemonic. On their reports, clients will see one of the following Virtual Account Numbers in
place of their Account ID:

l If no Account Alias is used: Client Account ID-WM Mnemonic-MM Mnemonic

l If an Account Alias is used: Client Account Alias-WM Mnemonic-MM Mnemonic

To deactivate a Wealth Manager assignment

1. In Account Management, click Manage Account > Wealth Manager > Administration.
2. All current Wealth Manager assignments are listed in the Subscribed Wealth Managers section of the page. Click
Deactivate Subscription.

Deactivating a Wealth Manager subscription deletes all of your trading capabilities from all clients currently
enabled for trading by this Wealth Manager.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide l

Contents

3. Click OK in the warning message.

To view current client accounts assigned to you

1. Click Manage Account > Money Manager > Administration.
2. Clicks the Client Assignments tab.

All current Wealth Manager assignments are listed with their assigned client accounts. These are the client
accounts for which you can trade.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide li

Contents

Trader Referral Program

The Trader Referral Program lets you send an invitation to somebody you know to open an account with us, and in
return you receive a bonus of up to $200. There is no limit to the number of referral bonuses you can receive.

Who can access the Trader Referral Program page?

l Individual, Joint, Trust or IRA Account User (but not an Advisor or Broker Client)

If you are a Financial Advisor who also has an individual account, you cannot participate in the Trader Referral
Program.

Trader Referral Payout Rules

Payouts to referring customers in the United States are subject to the following rule:

l Each referred client must open an IB account using the invite link and maintain a balance of at least $10,000
USD for one year.
Payouts to referring customers in non-US countries are subject to the following rules:

l The first payment of $100.00 will be sent when the referred account reaches $333.34 in commissions.
l The second payment of $100.00 will be sent when the referred account reaches $666.67 in commissions.
l You are eligible to receive the referral bonus up to one year from the opening of the referred account only if the
commission minimums listed above are met.

You cannot refer members of your own household.

We cannot pay referral fees for referred customers who live in Spain.

To participate in the Trader Referral Program

1. Click Manage Account > Trader Referral.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide lii

Contents

2. Enter the first name, last name and email address of the person to whom you want to send an invitation to open
an account with us.
3. Click Submit.
4. Repeat these steps for each person you want to refer.
You will receive a bonus based on the payout rules listed above.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide liii

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide liv
 7
Manage Clients/Funds/Traders
The functions in the Manage Clients menu allows Advisors, Brokers and Proprietary Trading Group STL Account Master
Users to manage and configure client/fund/trader accounts.

Advisors and Brokers access this as the Manage Clients menu.

Multiple Fund Investment Managers access this as the Manage Funds menu.

Proprietary Trading Group STL Account Master Users access this as the Manage Traders menu.

Who can access the Manage Clients menu?

You can access this menu if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User

l Fully Disclosed and Non-Disclosed Broker Master User
l SIPP Administrator

Who can access the Manage Funds menu?

You can access this menu if you are a(n):

l Investment Manager Master User (Multiple Funds only)

Who can access the Manage Traders menu?

You can access this menu if you are a(n):

l Proprietary Trading Group STL Account Master User

Your account structure determines which second-level (blue menu) and third-level menu items you will see.

Some menu items are also available in the Manage Account menu if you can apply those functions to your master
account only. The functions in the Manage Clients/Manage Funds/Manage Traders menus are ONLY for Master Users to
manage and configure client, fund and authorized trader sub accounts.

This chapter includes the following topics:

l Dashboard - Advisors, Brokers and Multiple Fund Investment Managers can access information for all their client
or fund accounts from a single point of access, as well as manage many aspects of each client account.
l Create and Link Accounts (Advisors and Brokers) - Add client accounts, request up to five duplicate accounts for
an existing client account and can create templates to save and re-use application information for new client/fund
accounts, link multiple individual and/or joint accounts for a client under a single username and password, and
Non-Disclosed Brokers fill out or update an IRS Form W-8 or W-9 for their clients or close client accounts.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 55

Chapter 7 Manage Clients/Funds/Traders

l Create (Multiple Fund Investment Managers) - Add client accounts, request up to five duplicate accounts for an
existing client account and can create templates to save and re-use application information for new client/fund
accounts.
l Traders (Proprietary Trading Group STL Account Masters) - View, add and close Authorized Trader accounts.
l Fees - Set advisor and broker client fees.
l Settings - Create aliases for client accounts and configure the transfer of excess margin funds between your secur-
ities and commodities account segments.
l Trading - Enable or disable client trading, set trading permissions for client accounts and restrict your master
account and your client/sub accounts from trading specific symbols.
l Security- Master users can view Account Management requests from client accounts.
l Users - Add users to your account, modify existing users' information or access rights to Account Management
and delete users from your account.
l CRM - Advisors can easily store and view information about their clients, prospects and contacts

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 56

Chapter 7 Dashboard

Dashboard
The Dashboard lets Advisors, Brokers and Multiple Hedge Fund Investment Managers quickly and easily access inform-
ation about their clients from a single point of access, as well as manage many aspects of each client account.

The following image shows the Dashboard for an Advisor.

The following image shows the Dashboard for a Fully Disclosed Broker.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 57

Chapter 7 Dashboard

Short Video
Advisors, Fully Disclosed and Non-Disclosed Brokers, and Multiple Fund Investment Managers can view information
about all of their clients:

l View a list of all client accounts.

l View recent activity for the past five days for all client accounts.
l Search for and sort client accounts by account title, account type, account number, username or account alias.
l Filter all client accounts by account status.
l If you have multiple pages of accounts, you can quickly jump to any page.
l Advisors can view pending items for all client accounts on a separate tabbed page.
l Fully Disclosed Brokers can also view application and options trading approvals for all accounts in the Approvals
column if they have enabled Client Approvals.
l All brokers can view the user responsible for deleted applications in the Approvals column.
l Download a list of outstanding registration tasks for all pending client accounts to Microsoft Excel.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 58

Chapter 7 View Information About All Clients

l Download information about all client accounts to Microsoft Excel.

l Non-Disclosed Brokers can upload documents for pending client applications.

and can view and manage individual client account details:

l Drill down to account details, balances, positions and transaction history for any client.
l View pending items.
l View Client Services messages and corporate actions.
l Perform account management tasks, including:
o Edit account alias, advisor or broker fees, and other settings;
o Running activity statements and PortfolioAnalyst reports
o Print account details;
o Generate a PDF version of the account application;
o View all registration tasks.
o Fully Disclosed Brokers can also approve or reject pending client applications and pending client options trad-
ing permissions if they have enabled Client Approvals.
l Brokers can edit Registered Representatives.
l Advisors can get special authorizations from clients to modify additional account settings for that client.
Who can access the Dashboard?
You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User

l Fully Disclosed and Non-Disclosed Broker Master User
l Multiple Hedge Fund Investment Manager

View Information About All Clients

Advisors, Brokers and Multiple Hedge Fund Investment Managers use the Dashboard to view information about all of
their clients from a single point of access:

l View and search for client accounts.

l Filter all client accounts by account status.
l View recent activity for the past five days for all client accounts.
l Download a list of outstanding registration tasks for all pending client accounts to Microsoft Excel.
l Download information about all client accounts to Microsoft Excel.

In addition, Advisors can view pending items for all accounts on the Pending Items tab.

To view and search for client accounts

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 59

Chapter 7 View Information About All Clients

When you first open the Dashboard, it displays a lists of all client or fund accounts. The number of accounts on each tab
appears next to the tab name.

1. Click Manage Clients > Dashboard. Multiple Hedge Fund investment Managers click Manage Funds
> Dashboard.
All client or fund accounts are listed by Account Title, and each account shows the account type, account number, user-
name, account alias, account status (Open, Pending, Closed and Rejected), and approval status.

2. On any page in the Dashboard, you can search for accounts by any column heading. Just type the first letters of
the search criteria into the Smart Search field and then click Go. To change your search criteria, click the X in the
Smart Search field.
3. Sort lists on any page by clicking a column heading.
4. If you have multiple pages of accounts, you can quickly jump to any Dashboard page using the pagination fea-
ture located in the upper right. This feature displays the total number of pages of client accounts and a field where
you can enter the page number you want to display.
5. Fully Disclosed Brokers can view application and options trading approvals in the Approvals column. Approvals
are marked with a small green check mark and show the username of approver and the date of the approval. Rejec-
ted applications and option trading requests are marked with a small red X along with the username of the rejecter
and the date of rejection.

To filter all client accounts by account status

By default, the Dashboard displays all of your client accounts. You can filter the list by account status using the Status
drop-down.

1. Click Manage Clients > Dashboard. Multiple Hedge Fund investment Managers click Manage Funds
> Dashboard.
2. Select an option from the Status drop-down (All, Open Accounts, Pending Applications, Closed Accounts, Rejec-
ted Applications, Deleted Applications or Open Not Funded). The number of accounts with each status appears in
the drop-down. All is the default selection.

To view recent activity for the past five days for all client accounts
You can view all recent funding and account application activity that occurred in the past five days for all of your client
or fund accounts. If no activity occurred during the last five days, a message to that effect appears instead of a list of
activity. Like the other tabs on the Dashboard, the Recent Activity tab shows the number of items currently displayed on
that page.

1. Click Manage Clients > Dashboard. Multiple Hedge Fund investment Managers click Manage Funds
> Dashboard.
2. Click the Recent Activity tab.
The Recent Activity page shows the date, account title, account number, username and for each activity. Activities can
include funding, account opening or closing-related activities, and other types of client account activities.

3. Just as on other Dashboard pages, on the Recent Activity page you can use the Smart Search field to quickly
search for client accounts by any column heading, and you can sort the list by any column heading.

To download a list of outstanding registration tasks for all pending client accounts to Microsoft Excel

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 60

Chapter 7 View Client Account Details

You can download an Excel spreadsheet (.xls file) that includes all registration tasks for your pending client or fund
accounts (i.e., all tasks related to the opening of all of your pending client or fund accounts). The Excel file shows the
Account ID, tasks and current status of each tasks for all pending client or fund accounts.

1. From any page on the Dashboard, click the Registration Tasks button located at the top right of the screen.
2. You will be prompted to open or save a Microsoft Excel worksheet. Save the file to your computer.

To download information about all client accounts to Microsoft Excel

You can download an Excel spreadsheet (.xls file) that includes all of the information about all of your client or fund
accounts.

1. From any page on the Dashboard, click the Client Accounts button located at the top right of the screen.
2. You will be prompted to open or save a Microsoft Excel worksheet. Save the file to your computer.

View Client Account Details

In addition to viewing lists of all open, pending, closed and rejected client or fund accounts on the main Dashboard
page, Advisors, Brokers and Multiple Hedge Fund Investment Managers can drill down to view the details of any client
or fund account on the Client Account Details page, and perform certain functions for that account. Advisors, Fully Dis-
closed and Non-Disclosed Brokers can also view information about second account holders of joint client accounts on
the Client Account Details page.

On the Client Account Details page, you can:

l Drill down to account details for any client or fund account, including client balances, positions or transaction his-
tory.
l Advisors and Brokers can enable or disable dividend reinvestment for a client account.
l View pending items for a client or fund account.
l Edit account alias, advisor or broker fees, and other settings for a client or fund account.
l Run activity statements and PortfolioAnalyst reports for a client or fund account.
l Print client or fund account details.
l Delete an application for a pending client account.
l Generate a PDF version of the client or fund account application.
l View all registration tasks for a client or fund account.
l Jump to a client's CRM record.

In addition:

l Brokers can edit Registered Representatives.

l Fully Disclosed Brokers can approve or reject pending client applications and pending client options trading per-
missions if they have enabled Client Approvals.
l Fully Disclosed Brokers can opt into the Full Service Program to modify additional account settings for that cli-
ent.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 61

Chapter 7 View Client Account Details

l Advisors can get special authorizations from clients to modify additional account settings for that client.
l View a client's Social Security Number, Passport Number and Driver's License IF you use two-factor authen-
tication (Secure Login Device or the IB Key app on an iPhone) to log into your account. If you do not use two-
factor authentication to log into your account, you will not be able to see this information.
l Advisors can invest in a hedge fund on behalf of an eligible client via the Dashboard.

l Advisors and Brokers can change a client's access to our trading platform.

l Advisors, Brokers and Fund Managers can duplicate client accounts.

To view account details for any client or fund account

1. Click Manage Clients > Dashboard. Multiple Hedge Fund investment Managers click Manage Funds
> Dashboard.
The Dashboard Open Accounts tab opens. All open client or fund accounts are listed by Account Title, and each account
shows the account type, account number, username and account alias, if one exists.

2. Use the Smart Search field to search for any client or fund account by any column heading, and then click the
account row whose details you want to view.
The Client Account Details page opens for that account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 62

Chapter 7 View Client Account Details

3. Many items on the Client Account Details page have a View link that lets you view more details.
For example, you can click View next to Regulatory Information to view a client or fund account's regulatory information
in a popup window.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 63

Chapter 7 View Client Account Details

4. Click the Balances tab to view account balances, current margin requirements and current available for trading for
the client or fund account you are viewing.
5. Click the Positions tab to view all of the positions currently held by the client or fund account you are viewing.
6. Click the Transaction History tab to view the transaction history for the client or fund account you are viewing.
The Transaction History tab functions in the same way as the Funding > Transaction History page.
7. Click the Messages tab to view all Client Services messages for the account you are viewing.
8. Click the Corporate Actions tab to view all corporate actions for the account you are viewing.
9. To navigate back to the main Dashboard page, click the master Account ID link in the breadcrumb display in the
middle of the top of the page.

To view pending items for any client or fund account

1. Click Manage Clients > Dashboard. Multiple Hedge Fund investment Managers click Manage Funds
> Dashboard.
2. Search or sort the account list to find the account of interest, and then click the account row to display the Client
Account Details page.
3. Click the Pending Items tab to view all pending items for the account.

To edit account alias and other settings for any client or fund account
1. Click Manage Clients > Dashboard. Multiple Hedge Fund investment Managers click Manage Funds
> Dashboard.
2. Search or sort the account list to find the account of interest, and then click the account row to display the Client
Account Details page.
3. Some individual items include an Edit link, such as Account Alias.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 64

Chapter 7 View Client Account Details

Click the Edit link to go directly to the Account Alias page, where you can enter or modify the account alias for the cli-
ent account. Click Submit to enter your changes, and then click the Back to Details button to return to the Client
Account Details page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 65

Chapter 7 View Client Account Details

4. Some sections on the Client Account Details page, such as Broker Fees or Advisor Fees, have an Edit link in the
section heading. Click that link to go directly to the Configure Fees page, where you can enter or modify client
fees.

To run activity statements and PortfolioAnalyst reports for any client or fund account
1. Click Manage Clients > Dashboard. Multiple Hedge Fund investment Managers click Manage Funds
> Dashboard.
2. Search or sort the account list to find the account of interest, and then click the account row to display the Client
Account Details page.
3. In the Activity Statements section of the Client Account Details page, you can view a Monthly statement, Month
to Date or Daily statement for the currently displayed client or fund account. Click the View link to generate the
desired HTML-formatted activity statement.
4. In the PortfolioAnalyst section of the Client Account Details page, you can view a variety of Snapshot or
Detailed PDF reports for the currently displayed client or fund account by clicking the View link next to the
desired report.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 66

Chapter 7 View Client Account Details

To print client or fund account details

From the Client Account Details page for any client or fund account, click the Print button located at the bottom of the
page.

To delete an application for a pending client account

You can delete any pending client or fund account application from the Client Account Details page for the pending
account.

1. Click Manage Clients > Dashboard. Multiple Hedge Fund investment Managers click Manage Funds
> Dashboard.
2. Click the Pending Accounts tab.
3. Search or sort the account list to find the account of interest, and then click the account row to display the Client
Account Details page.
4. Click the Delete Application button at the bottom of the page to open the application.
If you are sure you want to delete the account, click Continue.

If you change your mind and do not want to delete the application, click Back.

Generate a PDF version of the client or fund account application

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 67

Chapter 7 View Client Account Details

From the Client Account Details page, you can also generate a PDF of the client or fund account application and view a
list of all registration tasks by clicking the Generate Client PDF button at the bottom of the page. Once the
PDF application opens, you can print it.

View all registration tasks for the account.

1. Click Manage Clients > Dashboard. Multiple Hedge Fund investment Managers click Manage Funds
> Dashboard.
2. Search or sort the account list to find the account of interest, and then click the account row to display the Client
Account Details page.
3. At the bottom of the Client Account Details page, click the Registration Tasks button.
A popup showing all registration tasks for the client or fund account opens. Click the red X in the upper right corner to
close the popup.

When viewing registration tasks, Fully Disclosed Brokers can also view supporting documents sent by a client and
received by us.

To jump to a client's CRM record

You can jump directly to the Accounts tab in a client's CRM record (if one exists) by clicking the CRM button at the
top right corner of the Client Account Details page.

For more information, see CRM.

To change a Broker or Advisor client's access to our trading platform

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 68

Chapter 7 View Client Account Details

By default, your clients do not have access to our trading platform. However, you can allow each client to access our
trading platform either with the ability to trade or without the ability to trade.

1. Click Manage Clients > Dashboard.

2. Search or sort the account list to find the account of interest, and then click the account row to display the Client
Account Details page.
3. In the Account Configuration section of the page, find Client Account Access Privileges.

4. Click Edit. A popup window opens.

5. Click the radio button next to the type of trading access you want to give to the client, and then click Submit.\
l Read-Only Access - Your client can access the trading platform but cannot trade.
l Trading Access - Your client can access trading platform and can trade.
l Access Disabled - Your client cannot access the trading platform.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 69

Chapter 7 Changing Account Representatives

The change will be effect on the next business day.

Changing Account Representatives

Fully Disclosed Broker Master Users can view and change the Account Representatives for their clients from the client
account details page. An Account Representative is a person who manages the relationship between a broker and his or
her client(s). Fully Disclosed Brokers can assign one or more Account Representatives to a single client.

To change the Account Representative for an open or pending client account

1. Click Manage Clients > Accounts > View > Summary, then click an individual client account on any tabbed
page.
or
Click Manage Clients > Accounts > View > Open or Manage Clients > Accounts > View > Pending, then use
the Account Selector to select an individual account.
The client account details page opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 70

Chapter 7 Changing Account Representatives

2. To view the Account Representative(s) assigned to the client, click the View link in the Account Representatives
section.
2. To change the Account Representative(s) assigned to the client section, click the plus sign icon.
The Edit Account Representative window opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 71

Chapter 7 Additional Advisor Authorizations

3. If you have users who are designated as Account Representatives, they will be listed in the Account Rep-
resentatives box.
4. Click Add to assign the Account Representative to the new client.
5. Enter an allocation percentage, which must total 100%. If you assign one Account Representative, then the alloc-
ation will be 100. If you assign more than one Account Representative to the new client, the total allocation must
add up to 100%.If you change your mind, click the X to remove the Account Representative from the new client.
6. If you want the Account Representative(s) to appear on the client's statements, click the check box.
l If a specific Account Representative is not listed in the drop-down, click the X to close the window, then add one
by designating an account user as an Account Representative using the Manage Account > Access Rights > Users
page.
5. Click Submit.
For more information

Additional Advisor Authorizations

Advisors can get specific authorization from a client to modify additional settings in the client account. These author-
izations are listed on the Client Account Details page for open and pending client accounts.

Authorization Categories and Specific Tasks

Here is a list of all of the tasks that an advisor can be authorized to perform in a client's account. The list is organized
by category just as on the actual authorization form.

Authorization to Update or Change Account Information, Account Settings, Trading Permissions and Tax Forms:

l Change Account Info (Name & Address, Email, Phone Number, Legal Residence, Mailing address, Personal Info,
Employment Info, Financial Information, Regulatory Information, Trading objectives,
l Change trading permissions and products
l Change account settings (Base Currency, Account Type)
l View and change account forms and tax forms.
l W8/W9 functions
l Change Investor Category (QIB, Accredited Investor, etc)
l Statement/Confirm Delivery Settings
l Trading Configuration
l Market Data
l Market Data Subscriber Status
l Alert Notification
l Paper Trading Account

Authorization to Provide or Change Banking and Transfer Instructions

l ACH deposit information

l ACH and wire withdrawal bank information

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 72

Chapter 7 Additional Advisor Authorizations

l Position instructions for ACATS and FOP inbound transfers

l Settlement instructions

Authorization to Send Third Party Payments and Wires

l Transmit payments or assets from the client account to third parties including wire transfers, ACH transfers and
other transfers of funds or assets.
l Place limits on this authority by specifying a maximum amount and time period in months. For example, no
more than $5,000 per 3 month period.

Authorization to Vote Shares and Make Elections Regarding Positions (does not affect Account Management)

l Corporate Actions should be sent to the advisor not the client.

l Proxy delivery and voting will be done by the advisor not the client.

Authorization for Special Programs and Alternative Investments

l Hedge Fund Capital Introduction Program Agreement

l Enroll or un-enroll in the Stock Yield Enhancement Program

Request to Send Electronic Notices, Confirmations and Account Statements only to Advisor

l Used by our Compliance department in the event that an advisor wants to control the email address used for the
client account.

To grant and view additional advisor authorizations

1. The advisor requests a Supplemental Power of Attorney and Authorization from his or sales representative or Cli-
ent Services.
2. The advisor client prints, completes and mails the Supplemental Power of Attorney and Authorization form to us
to grant his or her advisor authorization to perform additional specific account configuration tasks for the client's
account. Without this authorization, the advisor normally is not authorized to modify these account settings.
3. Once the authorizations are granted, the advisor can perform the additional tasks and can click Manage Clients >
Accounts > View to drill down to the Client Account Details page for the authorizing client.
There will be a section on the page that lists all of the client account tasks that have been authorized by the client.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 73

Chapter 7 Additional Broker Authorizations

Additional Broker Authorizations

Fully Disclosed Brokers can opt into this program to modify additional settings in the client account. These author-
izations are listed on the Client Account Details page for open and pending client accounts.

Authorization Categories and Specific Tasks

Here is a list of all of the tasks that a broker can be authorized to perform in a client's account. The list is organized by
category just as on the actual authorization form.

Authorization to Update or Change Account Information, Account Settings, Trading Permissions and Tax Forms:

l Change Account Info (Name & Address, Email, Phone Number, Legal Residence, Mailing address, Personal Info,
Employment Info, Financial Information, Regulatory Information, Trading objectives,
l Change trading permissions and products
l Change account settings (Base Currency, Account Type)
l View and change account forms and tax forms.
l W8/W9 functions
l Change Investor Category (QIB, Accredited Investor, etc)
l Statement/Confirm Delivery Settings
l Trading Configuration
l Market Data
l Market Data Subscriber Status
l Alert Notification
l Paper Trading Account

Authorization to Provide Banking and Transfer Instructions

l Create Deposit Notification

l Submit Position Transfers

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 74

Chapter 7 Additional Broker Authorizations

l Make Internal Transfers

l Provide Settlement Instructions
Authorization to Send Third Party Payments and Wires

l Transmit payments or assets from the client account to third parties including wire transfers, ACH transfers and
other transfers of funds or assets.
l Place limits on this authority by specifying a maximum amount and time period in months. For example, no
more than $5,000 per 3 month period.

Authorization to Vote Shares and Make Elections Regarding Positions (does not affect Account Management)

l Corporate Actions should be sent to the broker not the client.

l Proxy delivery and voting will be done by the brokerr not the client.

Authorization for Special Programs and Alternative Investments

l Hedge Fund Capital Introduction Program Agreement

l Enroll or un-enroll in the Stock Yield Enhancement Program

To grant and view additional broker authorizations

1. The broker goes to Manage Clients > Settings > Full Service.
The Full Service Broker Program Election pages appears.

2. The broker clicks Enable in the following table:

3. The broker clicks Continue to save their choice to opt in for full service.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 75

Chapter 7 Invest in a Hedge Fund for a Client

Invest in a Hedge Fund for a Client

Registered Investment Advisors can invest in a hedge fund at the Hedge Fund Marketplace on behalf of an eligible cli-
ent, and charge fees on the current value of the amount that their clients have invested at the same time. The Advisor can
begin this process from the Dashboard.

To be eligible to invest in a Hedge fund at the Hedge Fund Investor Site, a client must be an Accredited Investor or Qual-
ified Purchase under SEC rules. Click here to see additional eligibility requirements and rules for hedge fund investing.

To invest in a Hedge Fund on behalf of an eligible client

1. Click Manage Clients > Dashboard.
2. Use the search, sort or Account Status filter to locate the client for whom you want to invest in a hedge fund, and
then click the client row.
3. On the Client Account Details page, look for the Special Programs section, and then click the Hedge Fund Mar-
ketplace link in that section.
4. The Hedge Fund Marketplace opens, with the client's Account ID included in the page title.
All available Funds are displayed in a table. The name of the Fund is displayed and selectable; also displayed are annual
rates of return for five years, amount of assets under management, the minimum investment required and a summary of the
investment strategy. Each column is sortable and you can hover your mouse cursor over a column header for more inform-
ation.

Some Funds have public articles that they have uploaded; these Funds are marked with a document icon. Click the doc-
ument icon to read the article.

5. Click the name of the Fund in which you are interested.

6. The next page displays a group of expanding and collapsing sections that represent the actions you can perform.
7. Click a bar to expand a section. When you are ready to invest in the fund on behalf of the client and enter fees
based on the current amount of the client's investment in the fund, click Invest in this Fund by transferring
money from my IB account.
The section expands.

8. Select the currency from the Currency drop-down, and then enter the amount of the investment in the Amount
field. (minimum of $25,000, although some Funds require larger investments).
9. Optionally, enter fees to charge on the amount of the client's investment in the fund:
If you have already set the fees (for example, you can set these fees on the HFCIP Fees page), the fee fields are already
filled in.

l In the Annualized Percentage of Net Liquidation Value field, enter a fee based on the Annualized Percentage of
Net Liquidation Value (NLV) of the current value of the client's investment in the Fund. The percentage of equity
fee must be between 0 and 1.
l In the Percentage of P&L field, enter a fee based on the percentage of profit and loss of the client's investment in
the Fund.
l Select Monthly or Quarterly from the Frequency drop-down.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 76

Chapter 7 Duplicate Client Accounts

10. Click Continue.

11. When your request has been successfully submitted, a confirmation box opens. Click OK to close the box, or
click Generate PDF to print a PDF of your investment/fee changes for your client's signature .
12. Clients must approve hedge fund investments that you make for them if they have never invested in this fund
before. If you included fee changes with the investment, the client can approve both the investment and the fee
changes at the same time on the Pending Items page, available from the Account Management Home page. Once
the client confirms the investment on the Pending Items page, he or she will be asked to enter a signature on a
confirmation page.

As the advisor, you can view any pending hedge fund investments for a client by clicking the Pending Items tab
from the Dashboard. You can also cancel any requests with a status of Pending Client Approval or Pending
Hedge Fund Approval, as long as you are the user that created the request.You can also click the pending trans-
action to view the transaction details. You can print a PDF of your investment/fee changes for your client's sig-
nature from the transaction details popup box.

Duplicate Client Accounts

The Duplicate Client Accounts page lets Advisor Masters, Broker Masters and Fund Investment Managers request up to
five duplicate accounts for an existing client account. The request is processed overnight, but must first be acknowledged
by the client. One application of maintaining duplicate client accounts is to create different trading strategies in the two
accounts.

Who can access the Duplicate Client Accounts page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Registered or unregistered Advisor

l Broker Master User (Fully Disclosed only)
l Investment Manager Master User

To request a duplicate client account:

1. Click Manage Clients > Dashboard > Account Details> Duplicate Client Accounts. Fund Investment Managers
click Manage Funds > Dashboard > Account Details> Duplicate Client Accounts.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 77

Chapter 7 Duplicate Client Accounts

2. Click Add.
The Duplicate Client Accounts screen appears.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 78

 Chapter 7 Duplicated Account Settings

2. Click "Click here to see which account settings are duplicated".

3. Review the information, then Click Duplicate.

4. Click OK to confirm your request.
An email is sent to the client associated with the selected client account stating that the master account user has reques-
ted a duplicate account. The client must first acknowledge the request, then the request is processed overnight.

Duplicated Account Settings

When your request has been processed, the following account settings are duplicated:

For Advisor clients:

l SMA configuration
l Exchange caps
l Commission
l Client fees
l Flex Queries

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 79

Chapter 7 Upload Documents for Pending Non-Disclosed Broker Clients

l Delivery information
l DVP instructions

For Broker clients:

l Exchange caps
l Commission
l Flex queries
l Delivery information
l DVP instructions

For Single Trading Limit sub accounts:

l Exchange caps
l Commission
l Flex queries
l Delivery information

Upload Documents for Pending Non-Disclosed Broker Clients

Non-Disclosed Brokers can view and upload documents for pending client accounts from the Dashboard.

To view and upload documents for pending Non-Disclosed Broker clients

1. Click Manage Clients > Dashboard.
The Dashboard Open Accounts tab opens. All open client accounts are listed by Account Title, and each account shows
the account type, account number, username and account alias, if one exists.

2. Click the Pending Items tab.

3. For any item, click View in the Action column.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 80

Chapter 7 Upload Documents for Pending Non-Disclosed Broker Clients

4. All documents required for the pending client account are listed along with their status. Click the Upload link for
any required document to upload the document.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 81

Chapter 7 Create and Link Accounts (for Advisors and Brokers)

Create and Link Accounts (for Advisors and Brokers)

The Create and Link Accounts menu includes the following menu items:

l Create - Advisor Master Users and Broker Master Users can add client and fund accounts, request up to five
duplicate accounts for an existing client account and can create templates to save and re-use application inform-
ation for new client/fund accounts.
l Household - Advisors and Fully Disclosed Brokers with multiple accounts for a single family or an individual can
group those accounts into a household to more efficiently manage those accounts.
l Link Client Accounts - Advisors and Fully Disclosed Brokers can link multiple individual and/or joint accounts
for a client under a single username and password.
l Close - Non-Disclosed Brokers can submit a request to close a non-disclosed client account .

Create
The Create menu includes the following pages:

l New (Add Client Account) - Advisor Master Users, Broker Master Users and Investment Manager Master Users
can add client, sub and fund accounts.
l Duplicate - Advisor Master Users, Broker Master Users and Investment Manager Master Users can request up to
five duplicate accounts for an existing client account.
l Client Account Templates - Advisor Master Users, Broker Master Users and Investment Manager Master Users can
create templates to save and re-use application information for new client/fund accounts.
l Open IB Asset Management accounts for Advisor clients - Advisors can connect their clients to Covestor Money
Managers for the purpose of investing in Covestor Smart Beta Portfolios.

Add Client Account

The Add Client Account page lets you add a client or sub account. Depending on the type of account you have, from
this page you can:

l Methods of completing an account application

l Steps in the application process
l Send an invitation to a client to start an electronic application
l Start a semi-electronic application
l Download a copy of the client disclosures
l Add a Fully Disclosed Broker client account
l Add Advisor, STL and Multiple Hedge Fund accounts to a Fully Disclosed Broker account
l Add an Advisor or STL account to an Advisor account
l Add a Non-disclosed Broker client account
l Add a Fund account or a Separately Managed Account (SMA) to a Multiple Hedge Fund account
l Add an Advisor or STL account to a Multiple Hedge Fund account

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 82

Chapter 7 Methods of Completing an Account Application

Advisors and Fully Disclosed Brokers whose clients begin their application at the Advisor's or Broker's own website can
add a unique client ID to the Client Invitation sent to the client. For more information, see Using a Custom ID for
Advisor and Fully Disclosed Broker Client Applications.

Who can access the Add an Account page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User Individual

l Advisor Master User Organization
l Broker Master User (non-disclosed only)
l Investment Manager Master User

Methods of Completing an Account Application

When you add an account, you start and complete the account application process. There are two methods of completing
an account application:

l Fully electronic
l Semi-electronic

The following table lists the methods of completing an application for all account structures.

Available Methods of Com-

Account Structure
pleting an Account Application
Singles Fully electronic

Advisor Master Fully electronic

Users
Semi-electronic

Advisor Client Users Fully electronic

Semi-electronic

Broker Master Users Fully electronic

Semi-electronic

Broker Fully Dis- Fully electronic

closed Client Users

Broker Non-Dis- Abbreviated electronic application

closed Client Users

Broker Omnibus Cli- None (client accounts are not

ent Users required)

Investment Manager Fully electronic

Master User
Semi-electronic

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 83

 Chapter 7 Steps in the Application Process

Available Methods of Com-

Account Structure
pleting an Account Application
Fund Fully electronic

Semi-electronic

Separately Managed Semi-electronic

Account (SMA)

Proprietary Trading Fully electronic

Group Master User
Semi-electronic

Proprietary Trading Abbreviated electronic application

Group Sub User

Steps in the Application Process

When you complete a fully electronic account application, the steps include:

1. Specify the customer type and base currency

2. Enter financial information, including date of birth, investment objectives and experience, net worth and annual
net income.
3. Select the account type and trading permissions, including products you want to trade and countries in which you
want to trade.
4. Confirm the account configuration you selected in the previous steps.
5. Accept our ID Procedures.
6. Enter name, address and telephone information.
7. Enter mailing address information.
8. Enter personal information.
9. Specify individual regulatory information.
10. Complete a W-8BEN form
11. Specify advisor fees.
12. Review the application for errors.

Inviting a Client to Start an Electronic Application

If you are an Advisor Master User, you can send an email invitation to your client, who then completes an account
application electronically. Fully Disclosed Brokers can also send email invitations to clients. See Adding a Fully Dis-
closed Broker Client Account .

To send an invitation to a client to start an electronic application

1. Advisors and Brokers click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > New.
Fund Investment Managers click Manage Funds > Create > New.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 84

Chapter 7 Inviting a Client to Start an Electronic Application

The Add Client Account page opens.

2. Click Client Invitation for a Fully Electronic Application.

The Advisor Client Invitation page opens.

3. Select the type of application for your client:

l ProTrack - This is a full account application for Individual, Joint, IRA, Trust and Small Business clients who
want to trade stocks, options, futures, forex, bonds, mutual funds, and CFDs.
l Client Account Templates - Select this option if you want to use a Client Account Template that you have cre-
ated, and then select the desired template from the drop-down menu.
If you select ProTrack, you will be asked to set client fees.
l FastTrack US NonPro template - This is a short application for Individual, Joint and IRA clients who want to
trade only stocks in their country of legal residence.
4. Click Submit.
The Client Fee Setup page opens.

5. Select the type of fees for the client:

l No Fee - An advisor chooses not to charge his or clients a fee for services rendered.
l Automatic billing - A calculated fee is automatically billed to the client's account with blanket client author-
ization. Be aware that Automatic Billing is subject to certain caps and limitations.
Advisors can choose one of several client fee methods:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 85

Chapter 7 Starting a Semi-Electronic Application

l Annualized Percentage of Net Liquidation Value

l Annualized Flat fee
l Percent of Profit and Loss (P&L)
l Fee per trade unit
l Monthly/Quarterly Invoicing - Advisors can submit electronic invoices for client fees. Invoices can be submitted
for up to ten clients at a time, but only one invoice can be submitted per client account per day. Advisors can
also upload a .csv file that contains multiple client invoices.
Regardless of the method chosen, advisors determine the fees at the time of the client’s registration, and can modify them
at any time. Advisor clients are required to acknowledge any fee increase with a signature.

In addition to the advisor client fees specified, clients will be charged a fee per trade commission for execution and clear-
ing services provided by us.

6. Click Continue.

7. Enter the client's name and email address, then click Submit.
An email is sent to the client, inviting him or her to complete an account application electronically.

Starting a Semi-Electronic Application

If you are an Advisor Master User or a Fund Investment Manager, you can add an account using a semi-electronic applic-
ation. Fund Investment Managers can add fund accounts or separately-managed accounts (SMAs). For this type of applic-
ation, you complete the application electronically, print out a paper copy for the client to sign, then send the signed
application to us for processing. Fully Disclosed Brokers can also add clients using a semi-electronic application. See
Adding a Fully Disclosed Broker Client Account for details.

To start a semi-electronic application

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > New.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 86

Chapter 7 Starting a Semi-Electronic Application

Fund Investment Managers click Manage Funds > Create > New.

2. Advisors click Electronic Client Application for a Semi Electronic Application.

Fund Investment Managers click Start Application for either a new Hedge Fund account or a separately managed
Individual account.
3. Select the type of client account you wish to open, then click Continue
The first page of the electronic registration system appears.

4. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the electronic application. Your progress during the process is
displayed in the left pane, showing you the steps you have completed and the steps you have yet to complete.
5. When you have completed the electronic application process, print the completed application and send it to your
client for his or her signature.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 87

Chapter 7 Downloading Client Disclosures

Downloading Client Disclosures

You can download client disclosure forms from the Add Accounts page in Account Management.

To download client disclosures

1. Advisors and Brokers click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > New.
Fund Investment Managers click Manage Funds > Create > New.

2. In the Paper Application section of the Add Accounts page, click Client Disclosures. The Client Disclosures page
opens.
3. Download zipped or unzipped client disclosure forms by clicking the appropriate button.
If you choose Zipped, you are prompted to save a zip file to your computer. The zip file is a large group of files com-
pressed into a smaller file that must by unzipped before you read any files. If you choose unzipped forms, the forms
appear in a PDF document that you can save to your computer and print.

Adding a Fully Disclosed Broker Client Account

Fully Disclosed Brokers can add client accounts from their Broker master account.

To add a fully disclosed broker client account

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > New.
The Broker Client Invitation page opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 88

Chapter 7 Adding Advisors, STL and Multiple Hedge Fund Accounts to a
Fully Disclosed Broker Account

2. Click Client Invitation to send an invitation to initiate a fully electronic application process for a client. The
broker client will be able to select the type of account at the very beginning of his or her application.
You can also select Electronic Client Application to initiate a semi-electronic application. For this type of application,
you complete the application electronically, print out a paper copy for the client to sign, then send the signed applic-
ation to us for processing.

3. Enter the name and email address of the applicant, then click Continue.
4. If you have created and saved a client account template, select it from the Client Account Templates list. Client
account templates include a selected fee methodology, so you don’t have to specify fees if you use a client
account template. This field does not appear if you do not have any saved client account templates.
5. Broker Master Users can assign one or more Account Representatives to a new client. An Account Representative
is a person who manages the relationship between a broker and his or her client(s). Broker Master Users must first
designate an account user as an Account Representative on the Manage Account > Access Rights > Users page.
l If you have users who are designated as Account Representatives, they will be listed in the Account Rep-
resentatives box. Click Add to assign the Account Representative to the new client.
l Enter an allocation percentage, which must total 100%. If you assign one Account Representative, then the alloc-
ation will be 100. If you assign more than one Account Representative to the new client, the total allocation must
add up to 100%.
l If you change your mind, click the X to remove the Account Representative from the new client.
l If you want the Account Representative(s) to appear on the client's statements, click the check box.
5. Click Continue. The Pending Items page opens.

Adding Advisors, STL and Multiple Hedge Fund Accounts to a Fully Disclosed Broker Account

If you are a Fully Disclosed Broker, you can add the following types of institution accounts to your account structure
from your master account:

l Advisor (including Friends and Family Advisor)

l Proprietary Trading Group Separate Trading Limit (STL)
l Multiple Hedge Fund

These institution accounts can have their own client, sub or fund accounts, making your account structure a three-level
account.

For detailed rules governing three-level Fully Disclosed Broker accounts, see Rules for Three-Level Fully Disclosed
Broker Accounts.

Adding an Advisor Account

To add an Advisor to your Fully Disclosed Broker account
1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > New.
2. Click Client Invitation to send an invitation to initiate a fully electronic application process. Currently, only
fully electronic applications are available for adding an advisor to a Fully Disclosed Broker account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 89

Chapter 7 Adding an STL Account

3. The client begins his or her application by selecting Financial Advisor as the account type, and then completes
an Advisor Account application. Financial and trading criteria are applied separately at the advisor and advisor cli-
ent levels.
4. After the advisor application has been approved, the advisor can log into Account Management with his own user-
name and password, and then add one or more client accounts on the Manage Clients > Create and Link
Accounts > Create > New page. Fully Disclosed Brokers cannot add client accounts to the Advisor account;
these must be added by the advisor.
Note: As a Fully Disclosed Broker, your trading qualifications (products you are qualified to trade) determ-
ine the trading qualifications that are available to the new advisor and the advisor's clients.

Adding an STL Account

To add an STL account to your Fully Disclosed Broker account
1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > New.
2. Do one of the following:
l Click Client Invitation to send an invitation to initiate a fully electronic application process.
l Click Electronic Client Application to start the semi-electronic application process.
l Click Start Application to print a paper application.
3. If you selected the fully electronic application, the Broker Client Invitation page opens. Complete this page,
including entering the name and email of the applicant, and then click Continue. The invitation will be sent to
the email address you enter and the client completes the application.
If you selected the semi electronic application, you will be prompted to selected the account type for the new client.
Select Institution as the account type, and then click Continue. The account application opens. This client will be the
Proprietary Trading Group STL Master user.

If you selected the paper application, you will be prompted to selected the account type for the new client. Select Insti-
tution as the account type, and then click Continue. Complete the steps as described on the screen to print the paper
application.

4. After the application has been completed and approved, the new client can log into Account Management with
his own username and password, and then add sub accounts from the Manage Traders > Traders > Create >
Authorized Trader page. Fully Disclosed Brokers cannot add sub accounts to the STL account.
The STL and its sub accounts belong to the same beneficiary.

Adding a Multiple Hedge Fund Account

To add a Multiple Hedge Fund account to your Fully Disclosed Broker account
1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > New.
2. Do one of the following:
l Click Client Invitation to send an invitation to initiate a fully electronic application process.
l Click Electronic Client Application to start the semi-electronic application process.
l Click Start Application to print a paper application.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 90

 Chapter 7 Rules for Three-Level Fully Disclosed Broker Accounts

3. If you selected the fully electronic application, the Broker Client Invitation page opens. Complete this page,
including entering the name and email of the applicant, and then click Continue. The invitation will be sent to
the email address you enter and the client completes the application.
If you selected the semi electronic application, you will be prompted to selected the account type for the new client.
Select Multiple Funds as the account type, and then click Continue. The account application opens. This client will be
the Multiple Hedge Fund Investment Manager user.

If you selected the paper application, you will be prompted to selected the account type for the new client. Select Mul-
tiple Funds as the account type, and then click Continue. Complete the steps as described on the screen to print the
paper application.

l Financial and trading criteria are applied separately at the Fund Investment Manager and fund levels.
4. After the multiple hedge fund application has been approved, the Fund Investment Manager can log into Account
Management with his own username and password, and then add one or more fund or SMA accounts on the Man-
age Funds > Funds > Create > New page. Fully Disclosed Brokers cannot add fund or SMA accounts to the Mul-
tiple Funds account; these must be added by the Fund Investment Manager.
For more information

l Linking to an Advisor- or Broker-Managed Account

Rules for Three-Level Fully Disclosed Broker Accounts

Fully Disclosed Broker accounts with Advisor, Proprietary Trading Group Separate Trading Limit (STL) and Multiple
Hedge Fund accounts (three-level accounts) are subject to the following rules.

Proprietary Trading Multiple Hedge Fund

Function Advisor Account
Group STL Account Account

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 91

Chapter 7 Rules for Three-Level Fully Disclosed Broker Accounts

Trading The Fully Disclosed The Fully Disclosed The Fully Disclosed
Broker can trade for Broker can trade for the Broker can trade for
advisor client accounts. STL Master account but Fund accounts.
not for any of the
The Fully Disclosed STL sub accounts. The Fully Disclosed
Broker cannot allocate Broker cannot allocate
trades for advisor client The Fully Disclosed trades to Fund
accounts. Broker can apply trading accounts.
restrictions to the STL
The advisor can trade Master account but not The Fund Investment
for and allocate trades to the STL sub Manager can trade for
to Advisor client accounts. multiple Funds in an
accounts. Allocation Account and
The products that the assign trades before the
The Fully Disclosed Fully Disclosed Broker end of the day to spe-
Broker can apply trading is approved to trade cific cleared Fund
restrictions to the determine the products Accounts.
Advisor Master account that the STL Master can
but not to the Advisor cli- trade. In other words, The Fund Investment
ents accounts. the STL Master cannot Manager can pre-trade
trade products that the allocate for fund
The products that the broker has not been accounts.
Fully Disclosed Broker approved to trade.
is approved to trade The Fully Disclosed
determine the products Broker can apply trading
that the advisor can restrictions to the Fund
trade. In other words, Investment Manager
the advisor cannot trade account but not to Fund
products that the broker or SMA accounts.
has not been approved
to trade. The products that the
Fully Disclosed Broker
The advisor cannot link is approved to trade
to money managers in a determine the products
three-level broker that the Investment Man-
account structure. ager can trade. In other
words, the Investment
Manager cannot trade
products that the broker
has not been approved
to trade.

Margin Each advisor client The Broker Master Each Fund account is
account is individually account and client individually margined.
margined. accounts are margined
separately.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 92

Chapter 7 Rules for Three-Level Fully Disclosed Broker Accounts

Markups and Fees The broker can enter a The broker will enter a The broker can enter a
markup schedule for the markup schedule for the markup schedule for the
advisor just as they can STL Master account Fund Investment Man-
for their fully disclosed just as they can for ager just as they can for
broker clients. organization client their fully disclosed
accounts. Markups for broker clients.
The advisor can enter STL sub accounts are
fee and markup sched- never placed in the
ules for their clients. STL Master account.

The advisor client will Broker fees will be

be charged both markup placed in the Broker
schedules. If there are Master account and
two markups for Non- swept to the broker's
US Advisor clients, the trading account at the
markups will be com- end of each day.
bined into one markup.
If there is a markup and
an advisor client fee con-
figured as a Percent of
Net Liquidation Value,
the fees will appear sep-
arately.

Broker markups will be

placed in the Broker
Master account and
swept to the broker's
trading account at the
end of the day.

Advisor client fees will

be placed in the Advisor
Master account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 93

Chapter 7 Adding a Non-Disclosed Broker Client Account

Funding Brokers can perform Brokers cannot perform Brokers can perform
funding functions on any funding functions on funding functions on
behalf of an advisor but behalf of an STL behalf of a Multiple
not the advisor's clients. account. Hedge Fund Investment
Manager (the Master
All existing standalone account) but not the indi-
Advisor clients may STL funding functions vidual Fund accounts.
complete a deposit noti- will be available to the
fication in Account Man- STL under the broker. The Fund Investment
agement if they have a Manager can deposit
username and pass- Deposits and with- funds for individual fund
word. If they don't, the drawals must be made accounts, and individual
advisor can also com- from the STL Master funds can deposit funds
plete a deposit noti- account and transferred into their own accounts.
fication for his clients. to/from the sub
accounts.

Reporting An advisor in a Fully Dis- The STL account under The Fund Investment
closed Broker account a broker has access to Manager has access to
has access to all of the the same reports avail- all of the reports that are
reports that are avail- able as a standalone available to any Multiple
able to any Advisor STL account. Fund Investment Man-
Master. ager.
The broker can see STL
The broker can view a accounts on an indi-
consolidated statement vidual and/or con-
for each Advisor group. solidated basis.

All tax reporting for the All tax reporting for the
Advisor and his clients STL account will be per-
will be performed by us. formed by us.

White Branding White branding is sup- White branding is sup- White branding is sup-
ported for an advisor ported for an STL ported for a Multiple
under a Fully Disclosed account under a Fully Hedge Fund account
Broker account. Disclosed Broker under a Fully Disclosed
account. Broker account.

Manage Clients > Fully Disclosed Brokers Fully Disclosed Brokers Fully Disclosed Brokers
Accounts > View can view Summary and can view Summary and can view Summary and
Menu client account details for client account details for client account details for
the Advisor Master the STL Master account the Fund Investment
account and its client and its sub accounts. Manager account and
accounts. its fund accounts.

Adding a Non-Disclosed Broker Client Account

Non-disclosed Brokers can add non-disclosed client accounts from their Broker master account.

To add a non-disclosed broker client account

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > New.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 94

Chapter 7 Client Account Templates

The Add Non-disclosed Account page opens.

2. Complete the form, then click Submit. A confirmation page opens to inform you that your request to add the non-
disclosed account was successful.

Client Account Templates

Advisors, Fully Disclosed Brokers and Fund Investment Managers can create client account templates in Account Man-
agement to save and re-use application information for new client accounts. Client account templates let you enter inform-
ation such as customer type, base currency and trading permissions (including participation in our Stock Yield
Enhancement Program), then quickly add that information to a client account application without having to re-enter the
same information for multiple applications.

The Client Account Templates page lets Advisors, Fully Disclosed Brokers and Fund Investment Managers create,
modify and delete client account templates. When you add client accounts from within Account Management, you will
have the option of selecting a saved client account template, which will prepopulate a portion of the client account
application.

Advisors and Fully Disclosed Brokers whose clients begin their application at the Advisor's or Broker's own website can
add a unique client ID to the Client Invitation sent to the client. For more information, see Using a Custom ID for
Advisor and Fully Disclosed Broker Client Applications.

Who can access the Client Account Templates page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User Individual

l Advisor Master User Organization

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 95

Chapter 7 Advisor/Fund Investment Manager Client Templates

l Broker Master User (Fully Disclosed only)

Click for more information:

l Advisor Client Templates

l Broker Client Templates

Advisor/Fund Investment Manager Client Templates

If you are an Advisor Master or Fund Investment Manager, you can create, modify and delete re-usable client account
templates.

To create a client account template for advisor clients

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > Client Account Templates.
Fund Investment Managers click Manage Funds > Create > Client Account Templates.
2. In the Pick template list, click Create.

3. In the new Template name field, type the name of the template.
4. In the Customer Type list, select a customer type (Individual, Joint, IRA, Trust or Organization).
5. In the Base Currency list, select the base currency for the client account.
6. In the Funding Type list, select the type of deposit that will be used to fund client accounts using this template.
7. In the Margin list, select the type of margin account (Reg T for a Margin account, Cash for a Cash account, Port-
folio for a Portfolio Margin account or Guaranteed Dollars and/or Cash Collateral).
The following screen displays the available Trading Permissions for the selected Margin account type.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 96

Chapter 7 Advisor/Fund Investment Manager Client Templates

8. Select the trading permissions by clicking the appropriate check boxes, then click Continue.
Note that you use this screen the same way you use the Trading Permissions page in the Manage Account > Trade Con-
figuration > Permissions menu.

9. Complete the Investment Objectives and Intended Purpose of Trading, Investment Experience and Financial
Information sections on the next page. You can skip any individual section on this page by clicking the Skip but-
ton, or you can omit all of this information from the client account template by clicking Skip All at the bottom of
the page. Click Continue to go to the next page, Back to go back to the previous page or Delete to delete the cur-
rent template.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 97

Chapter 7 Advisor/Fund Investment Manager Client Templates

10. Select the advisor fee methodology by clicking the appropriate radio button, then click Continue.
Note that this page is identical to the Client Fees page for advisors in the Manage Clients > Fees > Configure menu.

11. Verify that all the information in the client template is correct, then click Save.
If any information is incorrect, click Back, then modify the information as required and click Continue until you return
to the verification page.

When you begin the process of adding a new client account, you will be able to select your saved client account tem-
plate.

To modify an existing client account template

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > Client Account Templates.
2. In the Pick template list, click the existing template you want to modify.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 98

Chapter 7 Broker Client Templates

3. Make changes as required, clicking Continue to advance through the pages.

4. Verify that all the information in the client template is correct, then click Save.

To delete an existing client account template

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > Client Account Templates.
2. In the Pick template list, click the existing template you want to delete.
3. Click Delete, then click OK.
The template is deleted.

Broker Client Templates

If you are a Broker Master, you can create, modify and delete re-usable client account templates

To create a client account template for broker clients

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > Client Account Templates.
2. In the Pick template list, click Create.

3. In the new Template name field, type the name of the template.
4. In the Customer Type list, select a customer type (Individual, Joint, IRA, Trust or Organization).
5. In the Base Currency list, select the base currency for the client account.
6. In the Funding Type list, select the type of deposit that will be used to fund client accounts using this template.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 99

Chapter 7 Broker Client Templates

7. In the Margin list, select the type of margin account (Reg T for a Margin account, Cash for a Cash account, Port-
folio for a Portfolio Margin account or Guaranteed Dollars and/or Cash Collateral).
The following screen displays an example of available Trading Permissions for a new broker client template.

8. Select the trading permissions by clicking the appropriate check boxes, then click Continue.
Note that you use this screen the same way you use the Trading Permissions page in the Manage Account > Trade Con-
figuration > Permissions menu.

9. Complete the Investment Objectives and Intended Purpose of Trading, Investment Experience and Financial
Information sections on the next page. You can skip any individual section on this page by clicking the Skip but-
ton, or you can omit all of this information from the client account template by clicking Skip All at the bottom of
the page. Click Continue to go to the next page, Back to go back to the previous page or Delete to delete the cur-
rent template.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 100

Chapter 7 Broker Client Templates

10. If you chose any Customer Type other than Organization, the next page that opens lets you select the market data
subscriber status (Non-Professional or Professional). Click I agree in two places if you selected Non-Professional,
then click Continue.
11. Select news and market data subscriptions for the client templates by clicking the appropriate check boxes, then
click Continue.
Note that you use this screen the same way you use the Market Data Subscriptions page in the Manage Clients >
Fees > Configure menu.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 101

Chapter 7 Broker Client Templates

12. Enter the client fees on a fee-per-trade basis and interest markups and markdowns that will be associated with this
client account template, then click Continue.
13. Verify that all the information in the client template is correct, then click Save.
If any information is incorrect, click Back, then modify the information as required and click Continue until you return
to the verification page.

When you begin the process of adding a new client account, you will be able to select your saved client account tem-
plate.

To modify an existing client account template

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > Client Account Templates..
2. In the Pick template list, click the existing template you want to modify.
3. Make changes as required, clicking Continue to advance through the pages.
4. Verify that all the information in the client template is correct, then click Save.

To delete an existing client account template

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > Client Account Templates.
2. In the Pick template list, click the existing template you want to delete.
3. Click Delete, then click OK.

The template is deleted.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 102

Chapter 7 Set Up a Client Template with a Custom ID

Set Up a Client Template with a Custom ID

Many Advisors and Fully Disclosed Brokers collect information from prospective clients on their own websites, and then
send a client invitation to complete an electronic application from Account Management. You can create a Client
Account Template and add the template application link to your own website and include a custom ID that allows you
to match the information in the client's application to the information that you've already collected on your website.

To set up a client template using a custom ID for client applications started on your own website
1. Create a Client Account Template on the Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > Client
Account Templates page.
2. Send yourself a fully electronic client application invitation:
l Click Manage Clients > Createa and Link Accounts > Create > New, then click the Client Invitation button.
l Select the Client Account Templates radio button and then select the client account template you created in Step
1. Click Continue.
l Enter your name and email address, then click Submit. An email containing the link to the client application is
sent to you . You can add this link to your website as is for the client to complete the application using the selec-
ted Client Account Template.
3. To use a custom ID, add the custom ID to the link to the client application by adding &externalID=XXXXXXX
(where XXXXXXX is the custom ID) to the end of the link as shown below:
https://www.clientam.com/Universal/servlet/formWelcome?partnerID=abctest12&invitation_id=7380044-
4&token=66104&invitedBy=cHN2ZmE0ODA%3D&externalId=1234567

We will store the custom ID that you provide.

4. We will return the custom ID field along with all the other client data collected in the client application to you
as an XML schema via FTP delivery. The data is encrypted and you will have to provide a PGP key to access it.

Households
Advisors and Fully Disclosed Brokers with multiple accounts for a single family or an individual can group those
accounts into a household to more efficiently manage those accounts. Individuals and Advisor and Broker clients can
request that their accounts be grouped into a household to reduce the amount of paper mail they receive and to view con-
solidated reporting and account details in Account Management. The primary user of the household, called the Head of
Household, is allowed to view reporting and account information of the other accounts in the household.

The Household page in Account Management lets Advisors and Fully Disclosed Brokers:

l Create a household
l Add an account to a household
l Edit the name of a household
l Delete a household
l Change the Head of Household
l Remove an account from a household

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 103

Chapter 7 Rules for Creating Households

Who can access the Household page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User

l Fully Disclosed Broker Master User
l Additional account users who have been given access rights to the Household page.

Rules for Creating Households

Household groups are subject to the following rules:

l Once the Advisor or Broker creates a household, a paper form will be generated that can be submitted to the
Advisor or Broker client if they choose to be included in the household. If the paper form is not submitted, the
household will exist for the benefit of the Advisor or Broker only.
l Individuals who want to group their multiple accounts into a household can access Create Household PDF form
by clicking a button at the bottom of the Household page. Use this form to submit a request to create a house-
hold. Advisor and Broker clients who want their accounts grouped into a household must ask their Advisor or
Broker to initiate the household process.
l Accounts linked within a household remain separate, segregated customer accounts. Customers retain control over
and are responsible for their individual accounts whether or not they are grouped in a household.
l Any account in a household is free to decide that he or she no longer wants to be linked to the other accounts in
this household. If you remove an account from a household, the Head of the Household will no longer have any
access to information about the account(s) removed.
l Accounts with the same last name with the same home address can be grouped in a household.
l The Advisor or Broker can designate a primary user as the Head of Household. This user will have the ability to
access certain information about the other accounts in the household.
l Account holders in the same family but with different last name who are living at the same home address and
who are in a dependent relationship can be grouped in a household.
l Organization accounts can be grouped in a household if the underlying organization is solely owned by or estab-
lished for the benefit of the family members.
l Trust accounts can be grouped in a household if the current trust beneficiary’s is the family.

To create a household
1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Household.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 104

Chapter 7 Rules for Creating Households

2. If necessary, use the Search field to find the account number, account alias or account titles that you want to
group together into a household. Type in the Search field; as you type, the list is reduced to display only those
accounts that match your entry.
Once you have created households, you can search for households on Account Management pages that includes the
Smart Search field.

3. Click the check box next to each account that you want to include in the new household.
4. Click Create Household.
5. In the Create Household dialog, type the name of the new household group. The accounts that you have selected
to be included in the new household are displayed in the dialog. Click Create.

6. Click the Click here link in the Success popup to open a PDF form.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 105

Chapter 7 Rules for Creating Households

You can also access any of the required forms by clicking the appropriate button at the bottom of the page.

7. Complete the form, email it to your clients for their digital signatures and then submit the completed form to us.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 106

Chapter 7 Rules for Creating Households

8. Click OK in the Success popup to close the popup.

The new household is added to the list of households.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 107

Chapter 7 Rules for Creating Households

To add accounts to a household

1. Click Manage Clients > Accounts > Household.
2. If necessary, use the Search field to find the account number, account alias or account titles that you want to add
to a household. Type in the Search field; as you type, the list is reduced to display only those accounts that match
your entry.
3. Click the check box next to each account that you want to add to a household.
4. Click Add Accounts to Household.
5. In the Add Accounts to Household dialog, select the household to which you want to add the selected accounts,
and then click Add.

6. Click the Click here link in the popup to open a PDF form.
You can also access any of the required forms by clicking the appropriate button at the bottom of the page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 108

Chapter 7 Rules for Creating Households

7. Complete the form, email it to your clients for their digital signatures and then submit the completed form to us.
8. Click OK in the Success popup to close the popup.

To edit the name of a household

1. Click Manage Clients > Accounts > Household.

2. In the in the list of households, click the blue pencil icon for the household whose name you want to edit.
3. In the Edit Household dialog, type the new name of the household, then click Edit.

The household name is changed immediately.

To delete a household
1. Click Manage Clients > Accounts > Household.
2. In the list of households, click the X icon for the household you want to delete.

3. In the Edit Household dialog, type the new name of the household, then click Edit.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 109

Chapter 7 Rules for Creating Households

4. In the Delete Household dialog, confirm that you want to delete the household by clicking Delete. Click Cancel
if you change your mind.
The household no longer appears in the Household Name section of the page.

To change the Head of Household

1. Click Manage Clients > Accounts > Household.
2. Click the Change Head of Household button to display the correct PDF form.

3. Complete the form, email it to your clients for their digital signatures and then submit the completed form to us.

To remove an account from a household

The advisor, broker or head of household has the authority to remove non-head of household accounts from the House-
hold page in Account Management.

1. Click Manage Clients > Accounts > Household.

2. In the list of households, click a household to expand it and display a list of accounts in that household .

3. Click the X icon for the account you want to remove from the household.
4. Click Delete in the Remove Account from Household popup.
If you have a stand-alone account:

If you have a stand-alone account such as an Individual account and you want to remove an account from your house-
hold, you must use the form accessible via the Remove Account from Household button at the bottom of the page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 110

Chapter 7 Link Client Accounts

Link Client Accounts

Advisors and Fully Disclosed Brokers can link multiple individual and/or joint accounts for a client under a single user-
name and password. Once these client accounts are linked, they will be able to access our trading platforms and Account
Management for any of the linked accounts using a single username and password. For example, you might have a client
who maintains more than one account.

Linking multiple client accounts under a single username and password offers these benefits:

l Single sign-on for all accounts;

l Single Secure Login device;
l Activity fee minimums based on consolidated commission;
l Consolidated reporting of accounts.

Who can access the Link Existing Client Accounts page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User

l Fully Disclosed Broker Master User

To link existing client accounts

1. Log into Account Management with your username and password, then enter the codes from your Secure Login
Device as instructed on the login screen.
2. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Link Client Accounts.

3. From the drop-down, select the client whose multiple accounts you want to link. Note that only eligible client
accounts will appear in the drop-down.
A list of all accounts for this client appears.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 111

Chapter 7 Close Account

4. Click the radio button next to the account whose username you want to use for all linked accounts. This will be
the username you use to log into Account Management and our trading platforms.
5. Click Link Accounts.
A page opens that displays the individual and financial information for the client accounts to be linked .

6. Review each of the line items below and, where differences exist, select the radio button next to the entry which
is correct. Note that this information must be identical across all accounts in or the account will not be linked.
If none of the entries provided are correct, your client can correct the information on the Manage Account > Account
Information > Details > Profile page and the Manage Account > Account Information > Details > Financial Inform-
ation page.

7. If there is saved bank information for both accounts being linked, you are prompted to select which bank inform-
ation to save.
8. After you have entered the username, password and authentication values for each account to be linked, a screen
appears that displays the individual and financial information that you maintain for the accounts to be linked.
Click Continue.
A screen appears confirming your request. If you wish to cancel your link request, click the here link on the page.

Close Account
Broker Master Users and Proprietary Trading Group STL Master Users use this Close Account page to submit a request to
close a non-disclosed client account or sub account. If you have one or more open client/sub accounts, your request to
close your account will not be processed until all client/sub accounts are closed.

For USD-based accounts, we will initiate an ACH transfer based on an ACH bank instruction you have on file. If you
have more than one ACH bank instruction on file, you will have the opportunity to select one. If you do not have any
ACH bank instructions, we will issue a check to your U.S. mailing address on file. For all non-USD based accounts, we
will issue a wire based on the banking instruction on file.

Note: These instructions describe how to use the Close Account page in Account Management. The
instructions on the Close Account page summarize the steps that you must take to close your

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 112

Chapter 7 Close Account

account. For a more detailed description of the account closure process, see How to Close Your
Account.

Who can access the Close Account page in the Manage Clients menu?
You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Broker Master User (fully disclosed and non-disclosed client accounts)

l Proprietary Trading Group STL Master User

To close an account from Account Management

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Close. Proprietary Trading Group STL Master Users click
Manage Traders > Close.

2. If you have a master account, use the Account Selector to search for client or sub accounts by Account ID,
Account Title or Account Alias, then click the client or sub account you want to close.
You must close all client accounts that you manage before you can close your own account.

3. Read the instructions on the page carefully. If your account is USD-based, we will initiate an ACH transfer based
on an ACH bank instruction you have on file. If you have more than one ACH bank instruction on file, select the
one you want to use from the drop-down list.
If you do not have an ACH bank instruction on file, we will issue a check. Verify your US mailing address dis-
played on the screen.
4. Specify the reason you are closing your account by clicking the appropriate check boxes.
5. Click Submit.
6. Click Cancel on the next page if you change your mind and do not want to close the account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 113

Chapter 7 Close a Non-Disclosed Broker Client Account

The Close Account page will display the status of your request.

Close a Non-Disclosed Broker Client Account

Complete the following steps to close a non-disclosed broker client account. Note that for USD-based accounts, we will
initiate an ACH transfer based on an ACH bank instruction you have on file. If you have more than one ACH bank
instruction on file, you will have the opportunity to select one. If you do not have any ACH bank instructions, we will
issue a check to your U.S. mailing address on file. For all non-USD based accounts, we will issue a wire based on the
banking instruction on file.

1. Liquidate or Transfer Positions

Accounts with positions cannot be closed. You must either liquidate, or trans-
fer all positions to another brokerage firm. Please contact your broker for trans-
fer instructions.

To check your positions, log in to Account Management and select Reports

> Activity. View your latest statement to verify that all positions have been
liquidated or transferred.
2. Convert Foreign Currencies
Closing withdrawals may only be made in your base currency. You must con-
vert any foreign currency you may hold back to your account's base currency.
The conversion can be processed using the FXTrader in our desktop trading
platform. If you need assistance with the conversion process please contact
our Trade Desk.
3. Verify Bank Wire Instructions
For all non-USD based accounts, we will issue a wire based on the saved
bank information (instruction) on file. If you do not have any saved bank
information (instruction) for a Wire Withdrawal, create one.
4. Cancel Market Data Subscriptions
You need to cancel your market data subscriptions when you close your
account.

To cancel subscriptions, log in to Account Management, then select Manage

Account > Trade Configuration > Market Data. Deselect checkboxes to can-
cel your subscriptions, then click Continue.
5. Return Secure Login Device
If you participate in the Secure Login System, you must return your secure
login device. Cash balances will be reduced by the cost of the device
(between USD 20 and USD 150 depending on device) until the secure login
device is returned.
6. IRA Accounts Withdrawals
IRA account holders will need to complete an IRA Withdrawal on the Fund-
ing > Fund Transfers page in Account Management and specify the type of
withdrawal for government tax reporting purposes.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 114

Chapter 7 Close a Non-Disclosed Broker Client Account

7. Ensure Recent Deposits Have Cleared

All recent deposits, such as ACH, check and wire transfers, must have time to
clear according to the Customer Deposit Credit and Hold Periods policy
before your request to close your account can be honored.
8. Check Statements and Tax Forms
To access activity statements and tax forms, log in to Account Management
and open the Reports menu.

Note: This information will only be available for a limited

time after your account is closed. You will need to save
your username and password for future access to state-
ments.
9. Close Account

1. After you have completed all of the previous steps, log in to Account
Management and select Manage Clients > Close Account.
o For USD-based accounts only, we will initiate an ACH transfer if
you have an existing ACH bank instruction. If you have more than
one ACH bank instruction, select the ACH bank instruction you
wish to use from the drop-down list on the Close Account page.
o For USD-based accounts only, if you do not have an existing ACH
bank instruction, you can either create one in Account Man-
agement on the Fund Transfers page, or we will issue a check to
your U.S. mailing address on file. In the latter case, confirm that we
have your correct U.S. mailing address by checking the address dis-
played on the Close Account page.

To make changes, open the Profile page in Account Management

by selecting Manage Account > Account Information > Details.
2. Specify the reason you are closing your account by clicking the appro-
priate check boxes.
3. Click the Submit button to submit your request.
Your account will be held open for three months after you receive
your closing withdrawal to collect any possible future fees, dividends,
interest, or corporate actions. After that time, your account will be
closed permanently.
4. Check back to see if any balance has been created on future state-
ments.
5. You can view the status of your request to close your account by log-
ging in to Account Management and selecting Manage Clients >
Account Closure Status.

Note: If the above criteria are not met, our system will be unable to process your account closure request.
Inactivity fees will continue to be deducted from an account until the above steps are completed,
including the return of any Secure Login System device. Also note that funds held to secure the

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 115

Chapter 7 Account Closure Status

return of the security device may not be withdrawn until the device has been returned, and will be
applied to meet any inactivity or market data fees.

Account Closure Status

The Closure Status page lets Non-Disclosed Brokers who have submitted requests to close a client's account view the
status of their request.

To check the status of account closure request

1. Login into Account Management. Note that Account Management for closed accounts displays an abbreviated
menu.
2. Click Manage Clients > Accounts > Close Account.
The Closure Status page displays.
Any pending or outstanding items required to close your account are displayed on the screen.

Opening Interactive Brokers Asset Management Accounts for Advisor Cli-

ents
Advisors acting as Wealth Managers can select IB Asset Management Money Managers and assign clients to them for
the purpose of investing in IB Asset Management portfolios.

To add a IB Asset Management Money Manager and assign clients to the IB Asset Management Money Manager:

1. Access the Money Manager Marketplace in Account Management by clicking Investors' Marketplace > Search
Services > Investing > Money Manager

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 116

Chapter 7 Opening Interactive Brokers Asset Management Accounts for
Advisor Clients

2. Search for a IB Asset Management Money Manager, and then click the More Information button on the selected
Money Manager's ad.
3. Click the Contact This Money Manager to Open a New Account button to request a link to IB Asset Man-
agement.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 117

Chapter 7 Opening Interactive Brokers Asset Management Accounts for
Advisor Clients

4. IB Asset Management logs in to Account Management and is presented with the Wealth Manager Assignment
page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 118

Chapter 7 Opening Interactive Brokers Asset Management Accounts for
Advisor Clients

5. IB Asset Management accepts the link from the Wealth Manager by clicking Activate Subscription next to the
requesting Wealth Manager.
6. Assign additional clients to the IB Asset Management Money Manager as required, repeating the steps above for
each client to be assigned.

You cannot continue with this process until IB Asset Management accepts the link.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 119

Chapter 7 Create (for Multiple Fund Investment Managers)

Create (for Multiple Fund Investment Managers)

The Create menu includes the following pages:

l New (Add Client Account) - Advisor Master Users, Broker Master Users and Investment Manager Master Users
can add client, sub and fund accounts.
l Duplicate - Advisor Master Users, Broker Master Users and Investment Manager Master Users can request up to
five duplicate accounts for an existing client account.
l Client Account Templates - Advisor Master Users, Broker Master Users and Investment Manager Master Users can
create templates to save and re-use application information for new client/fund accounts.

Add Client Account

The Add Client Account page lets you add a client or sub account. Depending on the type of account you have, from
this page you can:

l Methods of completing an account application

l Steps in the application process
l Send an invitation to a client to start an electronic application
l Start a semi-electronic application
l Download a copy of the client disclosures
l Add a Fully Disclosed Broker client account
l Add Advisor, STL and Multiple Hedge Fund accounts to a Fully Disclosed Broker account
l Add an Advisor or STL account to an Advisor account
l Add a Non-disclosed Broker client account
l Add a Fund account or a Separately Managed Account (SMA) to a Multiple Hedge Fund account
l Add an Advisor or STL account to a Multiple Hedge Fund account
Advisors and Fully Disclosed Brokers whose clients begin their application at the Advisor's or Broker's own website can
add a unique client ID to the Client Invitation sent to the client. For more information, see Using a Custom ID for
Advisor and Fully Disclosed Broker Client Applications.

Who can access the Add an Account page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User Individual

l Advisor Master User Organization
l Broker Master User (non-disclosed only)
l Investment Manager Master User

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 120

Chapter 7 Methods of Completing an Account Application

Methods of Completing an Account Application

When you add an account, you start and complete the account application process. There are two methods of completing
an account application:

l Fully electronic
l Semi-electronic

The following table lists the methods of completing an application for all account structures.

Available Methods of Com-

Account Structure
pleting an Account Application
Singles Fully electronic

Advisor Master Fully electronic

Users
Semi-electronic

Advisor Client Users Fully electronic

Semi-electronic

Broker Master Users Fully electronic

Semi-electronic

Broker Fully Dis- Fully electronic

closed Client Users

Broker Non-Dis- Abbreviated electronic application

closed Client Users

Broker Omnibus Cli- None (client accounts are not

ent Users required)

Investment Manager Fully electronic

Master User
Semi-electronic

Fund Fully electronic

Semi-electronic

Separately Managed Semi-electronic

Account (SMA)

Proprietary Trading Fully electronic

Group Master User
Semi-electronic

Proprietary Trading Abbreviated electronic application

Group Sub User

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 121

Chapter 7 Steps in the Application Process

Steps in the Application Process

When you complete a fully electronic account application, the steps include:

1. Specify the customer type and base currency

2. Enter financial information, including date of birth, investment objectives and experience, net worth and annual
net income.
3. Select the account type and trading permissions, including products you want to trade and countries in which you
want to trade.
4. Confirm the account configuration you selected in the previous steps.
5. Accept our ID Procedures.
6. Enter name, address and telephone information.
7. Enter mailing address information.
8. Enter personal information.
9. Specify individual regulatory information.
10. Complete a W-8BEN form
11. Specify advisor fees.
12. Review the application for errors.

Inviting a Client to Start an Electronic Application

If you are an Advisor Master User, you can send an email invitation to your client, who then completes an account
application electronically. Fully Disclosed Brokers can also send email invitations to clients. See Adding a Fully Dis-
closed Broker Client Account .

To send an invitation to a client to start an electronic application

1. Advisors and Brokers click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > New.
Fund Investment Managers click Manage Funds > Create > New.
The Add Client Account page opens.

2. Click Client Invitation for a Fully Electronic Application.

The Advisor Client Invitation page opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 122

Chapter 7 Inviting a Client to Start an Electronic Application

3. Select the type of application for your client:

l ProTrack - This is a full account application for Individual, Joint, IRA, Trust and Small Business clients who
want to trade stocks, options, futures, forex, bonds, mutual funds, and CFDs.
l Client Account Templates - Select this option if you want to use a Client Account Template that you have cre-
ated, and then select the desired template from the drop-down menu.
If you select ProTrack, you will be asked to set client fees.
l FastTrack US NonPro template - This is a short application for Individual, Joint and IRA clients who want to
trade only stocks in their country of legal residence.
4. Click Submit.
The Client Fee Setup page opens.

5. Select the type of fees for the client:

l No Fee - An advisor chooses not to charge his or clients a fee for services rendered.
l Automatic billing - A calculated fee is automatically billed to the client's account with blanket client author-
ization. Be aware that Automatic Billing is subject to certain caps and limitations.
Advisors can choose one of several client fee methods:

l Annualized Percentage of Net Liquidation Value

l Annualized Flat fee
l Percent of Profit and Loss (P&L)
l Fee per trade unit
l Monthly/Quarterly Invoicing - Advisors can submit electronic invoices for client fees. Invoices can be submitted
for up to ten clients at a time, but only one invoice can be submitted per client account per day. Advisors can
also upload a .csv file that contains multiple client invoices.
Regardless of the method chosen, advisors determine the fees at the time of the client’s registration, and can modify them
at any time. Advisor clients are required to acknowledge any fee increase with a signature.

In addition to the advisor client fees specified, clients will be charged a fee per trade commission for execution and clear-
ing services provided by us.

6. Click Continue.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 123

Chapter 7 Starting a Semi-Electronic Application

7. Enter the client's name and email address, then click Submit.
An email is sent to the client, inviting him or her to complete an account application electronically.

Starting a Semi-Electronic Application

If you are an Advisor Master User or a Fund Investment Manager, you can add an account using a semi-electronic applic-
ation. Fund Investment Managers can add fund accounts or separately-managed accounts (SMAs). For this type of applic-
ation, you complete the application electronically, print out a paper copy for the client to sign, then send the signed
application to us for processing. Fully Disclosed Brokers can also add clients using a semi-electronic application. See
Adding a Fully Disclosed Broker Client Account for details.

To start a semi-electronic application

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > New.

Fund Investment Managers click Manage Funds > Create > New.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 124

Chapter 7 Downloading Client Disclosures

2. Advisors click Electronic Client Application for a Semi Electronic Application.

Fund Investment Managers click Start Application for either a new Hedge Fund account or a separately managed
Individual account.
3. Select the type of client account you wish to open, then click Continue
The first page of the electronic registration system appears.

4. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the electronic application. Your progress during the process is
displayed in the left pane, showing you the steps you have completed and the steps you have yet to complete.
5. When you have completed the electronic application process, print the completed application and send it to your
client for his or her signature.

Downloading Client Disclosures

You can download client disclosure forms from the Add Accounts page in Account Management.

To download client disclosures

1. Advisors and Brokers click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > New.
Fund Investment Managers click Manage Funds > Create > New.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 125

Chapter 7 Adding a Fully Disclosed Broker Client Account

2. In the Paper Application section of the Add Accounts page, click Client Disclosures. The Client Disclosures page
opens.
3. Download zipped or unzipped client disclosure forms by clicking the appropriate button.
If you choose Zipped, you are prompted to save a zip file to your computer. The zip file is a large group of files com-
pressed into a smaller file that must by unzipped before you read any files. If you choose unzipped forms, the forms
appear in a PDF document that you can save to your computer and print.

Adding a Fully Disclosed Broker Client Account

Fully Disclosed Brokers can add client accounts from their Broker master account.

To add a fully disclosed broker client account

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > New.
The Broker Client Invitation page opens.

2. Click Client Invitation to send an invitation to initiate a fully electronic application process for a client. The
broker client will be able to select the type of account at the very beginning of his or her application.
You can also select Electronic Client Application to initiate a semi-electronic application. For this type of application,
you complete the application electronically, print out a paper copy for the client to sign, then send the signed applic-
ation to us for processing.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 126

 Chapter 7 Adding Advisors, STL and Multiple Hedge Fund Accounts to a
Fully Disclosed Broker Account

3. Enter the name and email address of the applicant, then click Continue.
4. If you have created and saved a client account template, select it from the Client Account Templates list. Client
account templates include a selected fee methodology, so you don’t have to specify fees if you use a client
account template. This field does not appear if you do not have any saved client account templates.
5. Broker Master Users can assign one or more Account Representatives to a new client. An Account Representative
is a person who manages the relationship between a broker and his or her client(s). Broker Master Users must first
designate an account user as an Account Representative on the Manage Account > Access Rights > Users page.
l If you have users who are designated as Account Representatives, they will be listed in the Account Rep-
resentatives box. Click Add to assign the Account Representative to the new client.
l Enter an allocation percentage, which must total 100%. If you assign one Account Representative, then the alloc-
ation will be 100. If you assign more than one Account Representative to the new client, the total allocation must
add up to 100%.
l If you change your mind, click the X to remove the Account Representative from the new client.
l If you want the Account Representative(s) to appear on the client's statements, click the check box.
5. Click Continue. The Pending Items page opens.

Adding Advisors, STL and Multiple Hedge Fund Accounts to a Fully Disclosed Broker
Account
If you are a Fully Disclosed Broker, you can add the following types of institution accounts to your account structure
from your master account:

l Advisor (including Friends and Family Advisor)

l Proprietary Trading Group Separate Trading Limit (STL)
l Multiple Hedge Fund

These institution accounts can have their own client, sub or fund accounts, making your account structure a three-level
account.

For detailed rules governing three-level Fully Disclosed Broker accounts, see Rules for Three-Level Fully Disclosed
Broker Accounts.

Adding an Advisor Account

To add an Advisor to your Fully Disclosed Broker account

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > New.
2. Click Client Invitation to send an invitation to initiate a fully electronic application process. Currently, only
fully electronic applications are available for adding an advisor to a Fully Disclosed Broker account.
3. The client begins his or her application by selecting Financial Advisor as the account type, and then completes
an Advisor Account application. Financial and trading criteria are applied separately at the advisor and advisor cli-
ent levels.
4. After the advisor application has been approved, the advisor can log into Account Management with his own user-
name and password, and then add one or more client accounts on the Manage Clients > Create and Link

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 127

 Chapter 7 Adding an STL Account

Accounts > Create > New page. Fully Disclosed Brokers cannot add client accounts to the Advisor account;
these must be added by the advisor.
Note: As a Fully Disclosed Broker, your trading qualifications (products you are qualified to trade) determ-
ine the trading qualifications that are available to the new advisor and the advisor's clients.

Adding an STL Account

To add an STL account to your Fully Disclosed Broker account

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > New.
2. Do one of the following:
l Click Client Invitation to send an invitation to initiate a fully electronic application process.
l Click Electronic Client Application to start the semi-electronic application process.
l Click Start Application to print a paper application.
3. If you selected the fully electronic application, the Broker Client Invitation page opens. Complete this page,
including entering the name and email of the applicant, and then click Continue. The invitation will be sent to
the email address you enter and the client completes the application.
If you selected the semi electronic application, you will be prompted to selected the account type for the new client.
Select Institution as the account type, and then click Continue. The account application opens. This client will be the
Proprietary Trading Group STL Master user.

If you selected the paper application, you will be prompted to selected the account type for the new client. Select Insti-
tution as the account type, and then click Continue. Complete the steps as described on the screen to print the paper
application.

4. After the application has been completed and approved, the new client can log into Account Management with
his own username and password, and then add sub accounts from the Manage Traders > Traders > Create >
Authorized Trader page. Fully Disclosed Brokers cannot add sub accounts to the STL account.
The STL and its sub accounts belong to the same beneficiary.

Adding a Multiple Hedge Fund Account

To add a Multiple Hedge Fund account to your Fully Disclosed Broker account
1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > New.
2. Do one of the following:
l Click Client Invitation to send an invitation to initiate a fully electronic application process.
l Click Electronic Client Application to start the semi-electronic application process.
l Click Start Application to print a paper application.
3. If you selected the fully electronic application, the Broker Client Invitation page opens. Complete this page,
including entering the name and email of the applicant, and then click Continue. The invitation will be sent to
the email address you enter and the client completes the application.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 128

Chapter 7 Rules for Three-Level Fully Disclosed Broker Accounts

If you selected the semi electronic application, you will be prompted to selected the account type for the new client.
Select Multiple Funds as the account type, and then click Continue. The account application opens. This client will be
the Multiple Hedge Fund Investment Manager user.

If you selected the paper application, you will be prompted to selected the account type for the new client. Select Mul-
tiple Funds as the account type, and then click Continue. Complete the steps as described on the screen to print the
paper application.

l Financial and trading criteria are applied separately at the Fund Investment Manager and fund levels.
4. After the multiple hedge fund application has been approved, the Fund Investment Manager can log into Account
Management with his own username and password, and then add one or more fund or SMA accounts on the Man-
age Funds > Funds > Create > New page. Fully Disclosed Brokers cannot add fund or SMA accounts to the Mul-
tiple Funds account; these must be added by the Fund Investment Manager.
For more information

l Linking to an Advisor- or Broker-Managed Account

Rules for Three-Level Fully Disclosed Broker Accounts

Fully Disclosed Broker accounts with Advisor, Proprietary Trading Group Separate Trading Limit (STL) and Multiple
Hedge Fund accounts (three-level accounts) are subject to the following rules.

Proprietary Trading Multiple Hedge Fund

Function Advisor Account
Group STL Account Account

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 129

Chapter 7 Rules for Three-Level Fully Disclosed Broker Accounts

Trading The Fully Disclosed The Fully Disclosed The Fully Disclosed
Broker can trade for Broker can trade for the Broker can trade for
advisor client accounts. STL Master account but Fund accounts.
not for any of the
The Fully Disclosed STL sub accounts. The Fully Disclosed
Broker cannot allocate Broker cannot allocate
trades for advisor client The Fully Disclosed trades to Fund
accounts. Broker can apply trading accounts.
restrictions to the STL
The advisor can trade Master account but not The Fund Investment
for and allocate trades to the STL sub Manager can trade for
to Advisor client accounts. multiple Funds in an
accounts. Allocation Account and
The products that the assign trades before the
The Fully Disclosed Fully Disclosed Broker end of the day to spe-
Broker can apply trading is approved to trade cific cleared Fund
restrictions to the determine the products Accounts.
Advisor Master account that the STL Master can
but not to the Advisor cli- trade. In other words, The Fund Investment
ents accounts. the STL Master cannot Manager can pre-trade
trade products that the allocate for fund
The products that the broker has not been accounts.
Fully Disclosed Broker approved to trade.
is approved to trade The Fully Disclosed
determine the products Broker can apply trading
that the advisor can restrictions to the Fund
trade. In other words, Investment Manager
the advisor cannot trade account but not to Fund
products that the broker or SMA accounts.
has not been approved
to trade. The products that the
Fully Disclosed Broker
The advisor cannot link is approved to trade
to money managers in a determine the products
three-level broker that the Investment Man-
account structure. ager can trade. In other
words, the Investment
Manager cannot trade
products that the broker
has not been approved
to trade.

Margin Each advisor client The Broker Master Each Fund account is
account is individually account and client individually margined.
margined. accounts are margined
separately.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 130

Chapter 7 Rules for Three-Level Fully Disclosed Broker Accounts

Markups and Fees The broker can enter a The broker will enter a The broker can enter a
markup schedule for the markup schedule for the markup schedule for the
advisor just as they can STL Master account Fund Investment Man-
for their fully disclosed just as they can for ager just as they can for
broker clients. organization client their fully disclosed
accounts. Markups for broker clients.
The advisor can enter STL sub accounts are
fee and markup sched- never placed in the
ules for their clients. STL Master account.

The advisor client will Broker fees will be

be charged both markup placed in the Broker
schedules. If there are Master account and
two markups for Non- swept to the broker's
US Advisor clients, the trading account at the
markups will be com- end of each day.
bined into one markup.
If there is a markup and
an advisor client fee con-
figured as a Percent of
Net Liquidation Value,
the fees will appear sep-
arately.

Broker markups will be

placed in the Broker
Master account and
swept to the broker's
trading account at the
end of the day.

Advisor client fees will

be placed in the Advisor
Master account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 131

Chapter 7 Adding Advisor and STL Accounts to an Advisor or
Multiple Hedge Fund Account

Funding Brokers can perform Brokers cannot perform Brokers can perform
funding functions on any funding functions on funding functions on
behalf of an advisor but behalf of an STL behalf of a Multiple
not the advisor's clients. account. Hedge Fund Investment
Manager (the Master
All existing standalone account) but not the indi-
Advisor clients may STL funding functions vidual Fund accounts.
complete a deposit noti- will be available to the
fication in Account Man- STL under the broker. The Fund Investment
agement if they have a Manager can deposit
username and pass- Deposits and with- funds for individual fund
word. If they don't, the drawals must be made accounts, and individual
advisor can also com- from the STL Master funds can deposit funds
plete a deposit noti- account and transferred into their own accounts.
fication for his clients. to/from the sub
accounts.

Reporting An advisor in a Fully Dis- The STL account under The Fund Investment
closed Broker account a broker has access to Manager has access to
has access to all of the the same reports avail- all of the reports that are
reports that are avail- able as a standalone available to any Multiple
able to any Advisor STL account. Fund Investment Man-
Master. ager.
The broker can see STL
The broker can view a accounts on an indi-
consolidated statement vidual and/or con-
for each Advisor group. solidated basis.

All tax reporting for the All tax reporting for the
Advisor and his clients STL account will be per-
will be performed by us. formed by us.

White Branding White branding is sup- White branding is sup- White branding is sup-
ported for an advisor ported for an STL ported for a Multiple
under a Fully Disclosed account under a Fully Hedge Fund account
Broker account. Disclosed Broker under a Fully Disclosed
account. Broker account.

Manage Clients > Fully Disclosed Brokers Fully Disclosed Brokers Fully Disclosed Brokers
Accounts > View can view Summary and can view Summary and can view Summary and
Menu client account details for client account details for client account details for
the Advisor Master the STL Master account the Fund Investment
account and its client and its sub accounts. Manager account and
accounts. its fund accounts.

Adding Advisor and STL Accounts to an Advisor or Multiple Hedge Fund Account
If you are a Registered Investment Advisor or a Multiple Hedge Fund Investment Manager, you can add the following
types of institution accounts to your account structure from your master account.

l Advisor - For Registered Investment Advisors that gather and manage other Advisors. For example, the second-
level Advisor is a member of the same firm as the top-level Advisor, and has complete access to the client

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 132

 Chapter 7 Adding an Advisor Account

accounts that he or she manages. Another example is the second-level Advisor who is independent but works
with the top-level Advisor.
l Proprietary Trading Group Separate Trading Limit (STL) - For Advisors that want to run multiple trading
strategies for the same customer.

l Multiple Hedge Fund

These institution accounts can have their own client, sub or fund accounts, making your account structure a three-level
account.

Friends and Family Advisors who are unregistered cannot add Advisor, STL or Multiple Hedge Fund accounts to
their own Friends and Family account structure.

For detailed rules governing three-level Advisor/Hedge Fund accounts, see Rules for Three-Level Advisor Accounts.

Adding an Advisor Account

To add an Advisor to your Advisor account

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > New.
2. Click Client Invitation to send an invitation to initiate a fully electronic application process. Currently, only
fully electronic applications are available for adding an Advisor to an Advisor or Multiple Hedge Fund account.
3. The client begins his or her application by selecting Financial Advisor as the account type, and then completes
an Advisor Account application. Financial and trading criteria are applied separately at the Advisor and Advisor
client levels.
4. After the Advisor application has been approved, the second-level Advisor can log into Account Management
with his own username and password, and then add one or more client accounts on the Manage Clients > Create
and Link Accounts > Create > New page. Top-level Advisors cannot add client accounts to the second-level
Advisor account.
Adding an STL Account

To add an STL account to your Advisor account

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > New.
2. Do one of the following:
l Click Client Invitation to send an invitation to initiate a fully electronic application process.
l Click Electronic Client Application to start the semi-electronic application process.
3. If you selected the fully electronic application, the Client Invitation page opens. Complete this page, including
entering the name and email of the applicant, and then click Continue. The invitation will be sent to the email
address you enter and the client completes the application.
If you selected the semi electronic application, you will be prompted to selected the account type for the new client.
Select Institution as the account type, and then click Continue. The account application opens. This client will be the
Proprietary Trading Group STL Master user.

4. After the application has been completed and approved, the new client can log into Account Management with
his own username and password, and then add authorized trader sub accounts to the STL account.
The STL and its sub accounts belong to the same beneficiary.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 133

Chapter 7 Rules for Three-Level Advisor or Multiple Hedge Fund
Accounts

For more information

Rules for Three-Level Advisor or Multiple Hedge Fund Accounts

Advisor or Multiple Hedge Fund accounts with Advisors as client accounts (three-level Advisor accounts) are subject to
the following rules.

Advisor/ Multiple Proprietary Trading

Function
Hedge Fund Account Group STL Account

Trading The top-level account The account can trade

cannot allocate trades for the STL Master
to the second-level account and for any of
Advisor's client the STL sub accounts.
accounts. However,
the second-level The top-level account
Advisor CAN allocate or the STL Master
trades to his or her cli- account can apply trad-
ent accounts. ing restrictions to the
STL sub accounts.
The top-level account
or second-level Advisor Trading criteria are
can impose restrictions applied in the same
on clients. manner as they are
applied for single organ-
Trading criteria are ization accounts.
applied separately to
the second-level
Advisor and to the cli-
ent accounts.

The products that the

top-level account is
approved to trade
determine the products
that the second-level
Advisor can trade.

Margin The second-level The Advisor Master

Advisor and his or her account and client
clients are margined in accounts are margined
the same manner as a separately. The
non-three-level Advisor STL and its sub
account. As with exist- accounts are margined
ing Advisor accounts, in the same manner as
the top-leveaccount a standalone
and the second-level STL account.
Advisor are margined
separately.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 134

Chapter 7 Rules for Three-Level Advisor or Multiple Hedge Fund
Accounts

Markups and Fees The top-level account The Advisor or Hedge

can enter a fee sched- Fund Investment Man-
ule for the second-level ager will enter a fee
Advisor just as they schedule for the STL
can for their other client Master account just as
accounts. they can for organ-
ization client accounts.
The second-level
Advisor can enter fee Advisor fees will be
and markup schedules placed in the Advisor
for his or her clients. Master account and
swept to the Advisor's
Clients must trading account at the
agree/sign off on end of each day.
Advisor fees as they
currently do. The client
will be charged both fee
schedules and the fees
should be labeled by
type, not as Advisor 1
and/or Advisor 2 fee.
That is, if there is a %
of assets fee and a %
of PNL fee, each fee is
displayed separately on
statements. Fees will
be collected in the
Master, and then swept
back to the second-
level Advisor account,
where they originated
according to the fee
schedule.

Funding Top-level account can- Advisors can fund the

not perform funding STL Master account
functions on behalf of a just as they can fund an
second-level Advisor or organization client
the second-level account.
Advisor's clients.
Deposits and with-
All existing top-level drawals must be made
account funding func- from the STL Master
tions are available to account and transferred
the second-level to/from the sub
Advisor, include Addi- accounts.
tional Advisor Author-
izations.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 135

Chapter 7 Rules for Three-Level Advisor or Multiple Hedge Fund
Accounts

Reporting A second-level Advisor The STL account under

has access to all of the an Advisor or Hedge
reports that are avail- Fund Investment Man-
able to any Advisor ager has access to the
Master. same reports available
as a standalone STL
The top-level account account.
will be able to see
Advisor accounts on an The top-level account
individual client and/or can see STL accounts
consolidated basis. on an individual and/or
Consolidated reporting consolidated basis.
is assumed to be for a
particular second-level All tax reporting for the
Advisor account struc- STL account will be per-
ture only, meaning the formed by us.
top-level account can
view a consolidated
report for each second-
level Advisor group.

All tax reporting for the

first- and second-level
Advisors and their cli-
ents will be performed
by us.

White Branding White branding is sup- White branding is sup-

ported for a second- ported for an STL
level Advisor as long as account under an
the Advisor is Advisor account, as
registered. long as the Advisor is
registered.

Manage Clients > Second-level Advisors The STL Master

Dashboard have the access to the account has the same
same Dashboard func- access to client
tions as the top-level accounts in Account
account. Management as a
stand-alone
STL account.

The top-level account

has the same access
to the STL Master and
sub accounts as for
any other Advisor client
accounts.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 136

Chapter 7 Adding a Non-Disclosed Broker Client Account

Adding a Non-Disclosed Broker Client Account

Non-disclosed Brokers can add non-disclosed client accounts from their Broker master account.

To add a non-disclosed broker client account

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > New.
The Add Non-disclosed Account page opens.

2. Complete the form, then click Submit. A confirmation page opens to inform you that your request to add the non-
disclosed account was successful.

Add a Fund Account or an SMA Account

Fund Investment Managers with Multiple Hedge Fund accounts can add Fund accounts and can add Separately Managed
Accounts (SMAs) to their account.

To add a Fund Account

1. Click Manage Funds > Funds > Create > New.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 137

Chapter 7 Add a Fund Account or an SMA Account

2. In the Add Hedge Fund Account section, click the button that corresponds to the type of application you wish to
begin:
l Fully Electronic Application - Click Client Invitation to initiate the electronic application process for a fund
account.
l Semi-Electronic Application - Click Start Application to begin the semi-electronic application process.
3. Complete the application process as required.

To add a Separately Managed Account

Before you can add a client SMA account, you must qualify to trade Securities Products, Commodities Products, and/or
Forex Contracts. You must qualify for at least one set of products.

1. Click Manage Funds > Funds > Create > New.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 138

Chapter 7 Add a Fund Account or an SMA Account

2. In the Add SMA Client Account section, click the button that corresponds to the type of application you wish to
begin:
l Fully Electronic Application - Click Client Invitation to initiate the electronic application process for an SMA cli-
ent account.
l Semi-Electronic Application - Click Electronic Client Application to initiate the electronic application process.
3. The Advisor Qualifications page opens. Before you can add a client SMA account, you must qualify to trade
Securities Products, Commodities Products, and/or Forex Contracts. You must qualify for at least one set of
products.

Select at least one set of products to trade and complete that section of the page, then click Continue.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 139

Chapter 7 Add a Fund Account or an SMA Account

Once your request has been processed, you can add Separately Managed Accounts.

4. Once you are qualified to trade Securities Products, Commodities Products, and/or Forex Contracts, log back into
Account Management and click Manage Funds > Funds > Create > New, then click the appropriate button to
begin a fully electronic, semi-electronic or paper SMA client account application.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 140

Chapter 7 Duplicate Client Accounts

Duplicate Client Accounts

The Duplicate Client Accounts page lets Advisor Masters, Broker Masters and Fund Investment Managers request up to
five duplicate accounts for an existing client account. The request is processed overnight, but must first be acknowledged
by the client. One application of maintaining duplicate client accounts is to create different trading strategies in the two
accounts.

Who can access the Duplicate Client Accounts page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Registered or unregistered Advisor

l Broker Master User (Fully Disclosed only)
l Investment Manager Master User

To request a duplicate client account:

1. Click Manage Clients > Dashboard > Account Details> Duplicate Client Accounts. Fund Investment Managers
click Manage Funds > Dashboard > Account Details> Duplicate Client Accounts.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 141

Chapter 7 Duplicate Client Accounts

2. Click Add.
The Duplicate Client Accounts screen appears.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 142

Chapter 7 Duplicated Account Settings

2. Click "Click here to see which account settings are duplicated".

3. Review the information, then Click Duplicate.

4. Click OK to confirm your request.
An email is sent to the client associated with the selected client account stating that the master account user has reques-
ted a duplicate account. The client must first acknowledge the request, then the request is processed overnight.

Duplicated Account Settings

When your request has been processed, the following account settings are duplicated:

For Advisor clients:

l SMA configuration
l Exchange caps
l Commission
l Client fees
l Flex Queries

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 143

Chapter 7 Client Account Templates

l Delivery information
l DVP instructions

For Broker clients:

l Exchange caps
l Commission
l Flex queries
l Delivery information
l DVP instructions

For Single Trading Limit sub accounts:

l Exchange caps
l Commission
l Flex queries
l Delivery information

Client Account Templates

Advisors, Fully Disclosed Brokers and Fund Investment Managers can create client account templates in Account Man-
agement to save and re-use application information for new client accounts. Client account templates let you enter inform-
ation such as customer type, base currency and trading permissions (including participation in our Stock Yield
Enhancement Program), then quickly add that information to a client account application without having to re-enter the
same information for multiple applications.

The Client Account Templates page lets Advisors, Fully Disclosed Brokers and Fund Investment Managers create,
modify and delete client account templates. When you add client accounts from within Account Management, you will
have the option of selecting a saved client account template, which will prepopulate a portion of the client account
application.

Advisors and Fully Disclosed Brokers whose clients begin their application at the Advisor's or Broker's own website can
add a unique client ID to the Client Invitation sent to the client. For more information, see Using a Custom ID for
Advisor and Fully Disclosed Broker Client Applications.

Who can access the Client Account Templates page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User Individual

l Advisor Master User Organization
l Broker Master User (Fully Disclosed only)

Click for more information:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 144

Chapter 7 Advisor/Fund Investment Manager Client Templates

l Advisor Client Templates

l Broker Client Templates

Advisor/Fund Investment Manager Client Templates

If you are an Advisor Master or Fund Investment Manager, you can create, modify and delete re-usable client account
templates.

To create a client account template for advisor clients

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > Client Account Templates.
Fund Investment Managers click Manage Funds > Create > Client Account Templates.
2. In the Pick template list, click Create.

3. In the new Template name field, type the name of the template.
4. In the Customer Type list, select a customer type (Individual, Joint, IRA, Trust or Organization).
5. In the Base Currency list, select the base currency for the client account.
6. In the Funding Type list, select the type of deposit that will be used to fund client accounts using this template.
7. In the Margin list, select the type of margin account (Reg T for a Margin account, Cash for a Cash account, Port-
folio for a Portfolio Margin account or Guaranteed Dollars and/or Cash Collateral).
The following screen displays the available Trading Permissions for the selected Margin account type.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 145

Chapter 7 Advisor/Fund Investment Manager Client Templates

8. Select the trading permissions by clicking the appropriate check boxes, then click Continue.
Note that you use this screen the same way you use the Trading Permissions page in the Manage Account > Trade Con-
figuration > Permissions menu.

9. Complete the Investment Objectives and Intended Purpose of Trading, Investment Experience and Financial
Information sections on the next page. You can skip any individual section on this page by clicking the Skip but-
ton, or you can omit all of this information from the client account template by clicking Skip All at the bottom of
the page. Click Continue to go to the next page, Back to go back to the previous page or Delete to delete the cur-
rent template.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 146

Chapter 7 Advisor/Fund Investment Manager Client Templates

10. Select the advisor fee methodology by clicking the appropriate radio button, then click Continue.
Note that this page is identical to the Client Fees page for advisors in the Manage Clients > Fees > Configure menu.

11. Verify that all the information in the client template is correct, then click Save.
If any information is incorrect, click Back, then modify the information as required and click Continue until you return
to the verification page.

When you begin the process of adding a new client account, you will be able to select your saved client account tem-
plate.

To modify an existing client account template

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > Client Account Templates.
2. In the Pick template list, click the existing template you want to modify.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 147

Chapter 7 Broker Client Templates

3. Make changes as required, clicking Continue to advance through the pages.

4. Verify that all the information in the client template is correct, then click Save.

To delete an existing client account template

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > Client Account Templates.
2. In the Pick template list, click the existing template you want to delete.
3. Click Delete, then click OK.
The template is deleted.

Broker Client Templates

If you are a Broker Master, you can create, modify and delete re-usable client account templates

To create a client account template for broker clients

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > Client Account Templates.
2. In the Pick template list, click Create.

3. In the new Template name field, type the name of the template.
4. In the Customer Type list, select a customer type (Individual, Joint, IRA, Trust or Organization).
5. In the Base Currency list, select the base currency for the client account.
6. In the Funding Type list, select the type of deposit that will be used to fund client accounts using this template.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 148

Chapter 7 Broker Client Templates

7. In the Margin list, select the type of margin account (Reg T for a Margin account, Cash for a Cash account, Port-
folio for a Portfolio Margin account or Guaranteed Dollars and/or Cash Collateral).
The following screen displays an example of available Trading Permissions for a new broker client template.

8. Select the trading permissions by clicking the appropriate check boxes, then click Continue.
Note that you use this screen the same way you use the Trading Permissions page in the Manage Account > Trade Con-
figuration > Permissions menu.

9. Complete the Investment Objectives and Intended Purpose of Trading, Investment Experience and Financial
Information sections on the next page. You can skip any individual section on this page by clicking the Skip but-
ton, or you can omit all of this information from the client account template by clicking Skip All at the bottom of
the page. Click Continue to go to the next page, Back to go back to the previous page or Delete to delete the cur-
rent template.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 149

Chapter 7 Broker Client Templates

10. If you chose any Customer Type other than Organization, the next page that opens lets you select the market data
subscriber status (Non-Professional or Professional). Click I agree in two places if you selected Non-Professional,
then click Continue.
11. Select news and market data subscriptions for the client templates by clicking the appropriate check boxes, then
click Continue.
Note that you use this screen the same way you use the Market Data Subscriptions page in the Manage Clients >
Fees > Configure menu.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 150

Chapter 7 Broker Client Templates

12. Enter the client fees on a fee-per-trade basis and interest markups and markdowns that will be associated with this
client account template, then click Continue.
13. Verify that all the information in the client template is correct, then click Save.
If any information is incorrect, click Back, then modify the information as required and click Continue until you return
to the verification page.

When you begin the process of adding a new client account, you will be able to select your saved client account tem-
plate.

To modify an existing client account template

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > Client Account Templates..
2. In the Pick template list, click the existing template you want to modify.
3. Make changes as required, clicking Continue to advance through the pages.
4. Verify that all the information in the client template is correct, then click Save.

To delete an existing client account template

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > Client Account Templates.
2. In the Pick template list, click the existing template you want to delete.
3. Click Delete, then click OK.

The template is deleted.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 151

Chapter 7 Set Up a Client Template with a Custom ID

Set Up a Client Template with a Custom ID

Many Advisors and Fully Disclosed Brokers collect information from prospective clients on their own websites, and then
send a client invitation to complete an electronic application from Account Management. You can create a Client
Account Template and add the template application link to your own website and include a custom ID that allows you
to match the information in the client's application to the information that you've already collected on your website.

To set up a client template using a custom ID for client applications started on your own website
1. Create a Client Account Template on the Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Create > Client
Account Templates page.
2. Send yourself a fully electronic client application invitation:
l Click Manage Clients > Createa and Link Accounts > Create > New, then click the Client Invitation button.
l Select the Client Account Templates radio button and then select the client account template you created in Step
1. Click Continue.
l Enter your name and email address, then click Submit. An email containing the link to the client application is
sent to you . You can add this link to your website as is for the client to complete the application using the selec-
ted Client Account Template.
3. To use a custom ID, add the custom ID to the link to the client application by adding &externalID=XXXXXXX
(where XXXXXXX is the custom ID) to the end of the link as shown below:
https://www.clientam.com/Universal/servlet/formWelcome?partnerID=abctest12&invitation_id=7380044-
4&token=66104&invitedBy=cHN2ZmE0ODA%3D&externalId=1234567

We will store the custom ID that you provide.

4. We will return the custom ID field along with all the other client data collected in the client application to you
as an XML schema via FTP delivery. The data is encrypted and you will have to provide a PGP key to access it.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 152

Chapter 7 Traders

Traders
The Manage Traders > Traders menu is accessible to Proprietary Trading Group (PTG) STL Master Users and includes the
following pages:

l View -View a summary of all of your trading sub accounts.

l Create - Add authorized traders.
l Close - Close sub accounts.

Traders
The Trading Sub Accounts page lets Proprietary Trading Group STL Account Master Users view all current Authorized
Trading sub accounts and add Authorized Trading sub accounts, as well as enable and disable dividend reinvestment.

Who can access the Trading Sub Accounts page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Proprietary Trading Group STL Account Master User

To view Authorized Trading sub accounts

1. Click Manage Traders > Traders > View.
The Trading Sub Accounts page opens, displaying all sub accounts for authorized traders, including the account name,
dividend reinvestment option, account number, username and current status of the account.

2. If the current status of a sub account is “Application in progress,” a link may appear in the Status column that lets
you complete the next step in the application process.
3. To create a new sub account, click the Add Trading Sub Account button, then follow the instructions on the
screen to fill out the Authorized Trader Information form.

Authorized Trader
The Authorized Trader page lets you create sub accounts for authorized traders to access Trader Workstation and manage
market data subscriptions in Account Management.

Who can access the Authorized Trader page?

You can access this page only if you are a Proprietary Trading Group STL Account Master User.

To add an authorized trader

1. Click Manage Traders > Traders > Create > Authorized Trader.
The Authorized Trader Information page opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 153

Chapter 7 Authorized Trader

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 154

Chapter 7 Close Account

2. Enter all required information, then Continue.

The Trader added page opens, which confirms your request and contains a link to the Trader Authorization Form.

3. Click Trader Authorization Form.

4. Read the form carefully, then sign the form by typing your name in the field provided.
5. Click Continue.

Close Account
Broker Master Users and Proprietary Trading Group STL Master Users use this Close Account page to submit a request to
close a non-disclosed client account or sub account. If you have one or more open client/sub accounts, your request to
close your account will not be processed until all client/sub accounts are closed.

For USD-based accounts, we will initiate an ACH transfer based on an ACH bank instruction you have on file. If you
have more than one ACH bank instruction on file, you will have the opportunity to select one. If you do not have any
ACH bank instructions, we will issue a check to your U.S. mailing address on file. For all non-USD based accounts, we
will issue a wire based on the banking instruction on file.

Note: These instructions describe how to use the Close Account page in Account Management. The
instructions on the Close Account page summarize the steps that you must take to close your
account. For a more detailed description of the account closure process, see How to Close Your
Account.

Who can access the Close Account page in the Manage Clients menu?
You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Broker Master User (fully disclosed and non-disclosed client accounts)

l Proprietary Trading Group STL Master User

To close an account from Account Management

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Close. Proprietary Trading Group STL Master Users click
Manage Traders > Close.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 155

Chapter 7 Close a Non-Disclosed Broker Client Account

2. If you have a master account, use the Account Selector to search for client or sub accounts by Account ID,
Account Title or Account Alias, then click the client or sub account you want to close.
You must close all client accounts that you manage before you can close your own account.

3. Read the instructions on the page carefully. If your account is USD-based, we will initiate an ACH transfer based
on an ACH bank instruction you have on file. If you have more than one ACH bank instruction on file, select the
one you want to use from the drop-down list.
If you do not have an ACH bank instruction on file, we will issue a check. Verify your US mailing address dis-
played on the screen.
4. Specify the reason you are closing your account by clicking the appropriate check boxes.
5. Click Submit.
6. Click Cancel on the next page if you change your mind and do not want to close the account.
The Close Account page will display the status of your request.

Close a Non-Disclosed Broker Client Account

Complete the following steps to close a non-disclosed broker client account. Note that for USD-based accounts, we will
initiate an ACH transfer based on an ACH bank instruction you have on file. If you have more than one ACH bank
instruction on file, you will have the opportunity to select one. If you do not have any ACH bank instructions, we will
issue a check to your U.S. mailing address on file. For all non-USD based accounts, we will issue a wire based on the
banking instruction on file.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 156

Chapter 7 Close a Non-Disclosed Broker Client Account

1. Liquidate or Transfer Positions

Accounts with positions cannot be closed. You must either liquidate, or trans-
fer all positions to another brokerage firm. Please contact your broker for trans-
fer instructions.

To check your positions, log in to Account Management and select Reports

> Activity. View your latest statement to verify that all positions have been
liquidated or transferred.
2. Convert Foreign Currencies
Closing withdrawals may only be made in your base currency. You must con-
vert any foreign currency you may hold back to your account's base currency.
The conversion can be processed using the FXTrader in our desktop trading
platform. If you need assistance with the conversion process please contact
our Trade Desk.
3. Verify Bank Wire Instructions
For all non-USD based accounts, we will issue a wire based on the saved
bank information (instruction) on file. If you do not have any saved bank
information (instruction) for a Wire Withdrawal, create one.
4. Cancel Market Data Subscriptions
You need to cancel your market data subscriptions when you close your
account.

To cancel subscriptions, log in to Account Management, then select Manage

Account > Trade Configuration > Market Data. Deselect checkboxes to can-
cel your subscriptions, then click Continue.
5. Return Secure Login Device
If you participate in the Secure Login System, you must return your secure
login device. Cash balances will be reduced by the cost of the device
(between USD 20 and USD 150 depending on device) until the secure login
device is returned.
6. IRA Accounts Withdrawals
IRA account holders will need to complete an IRA Withdrawal on the Fund-
ing > Fund Transfers page in Account Management and specify the type of
withdrawal for government tax reporting purposes.
7. Ensure Recent Deposits Have Cleared
All recent deposits, such as ACH, check and wire transfers, must have time to
clear according to the Customer Deposit Credit and Hold Periods policy
before your request to close your account can be honored.
8. Check Statements and Tax Forms
To access activity statements and tax forms, log in to Account Management
and open the Reports menu.

Note: This information will only be available for a limited

time after your account is closed. You will need to save
your username and password for future access to state-
ments.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 157

Chapter 7 Account Closure Status

9. Close Account

1. After you have completed all of the previous steps, log in to Account
Management and select Manage Clients > Close Account.
o For USD-based accounts only, we will initiate an ACH transfer if
you have an existing ACH bank instruction. If you have more than
one ACH bank instruction, select the ACH bank instruction you
wish to use from the drop-down list on the Close Account page.
o For USD-based accounts only, if you do not have an existing ACH
bank instruction, you can either create one in Account Man-
agement on the Fund Transfers page, or we will issue a check to
your U.S. mailing address on file. In the latter case, confirm that we
have your correct U.S. mailing address by checking the address dis-
played on the Close Account page.

To make changes, open the Profile page in Account Management

by selecting Manage Account > Account Information > Details.
2. Specify the reason you are closing your account by clicking the appro-
priate check boxes.
3. Click the Submit button to submit your request.
Your account will be held open for three months after you receive
your closing withdrawal to collect any possible future fees, dividends,
interest, or corporate actions. After that time, your account will be
closed permanently.
4. Check back to see if any balance has been created on future state-
ments.
5. You can view the status of your request to close your account by log-
ging in to Account Management and selecting Manage Clients >
Account Closure Status.

Note: If the above criteria are not met, our system will be unable to process your account closure request.
Inactivity fees will continue to be deducted from an account until the above steps are completed,
including the return of any Secure Login System device. Also note that funds held to secure the
return of the security device may not be withdrawn until the device has been returned, and will be
applied to meet any inactivity or market data fees.

Account Closure Status

The Closure Status page lets Non-Disclosed Brokers who have submitted requests to close a client's account view the
status of their request.

To check the status of account closure request

1. Login into Account Management. Note that Account Management for closed accounts displays an abbreviated
menu.
2. Click Manage Clients > Accounts > Close Account.
The Closure Status page displays.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 158

Chapter 7 Account Closure Status

Any pending or outstanding items required to close your account are displayed on the screen.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 159

Chapter 7 Client Fees

Client Fees
The Client Fees menu gives advisors and brokers access to client fee schedules. The following pages are included in the
Client Fees menu:

l Configure Fees - Advisors and Brokers use this page to set up client fees.
l Invoicing - Advisors and Brokers use this page to submit daily fee invoices for multiple client accounts, view and
update pending invoices and review invoices. Advisors can also reimburse fees to clients.
l Templates - Advisors and Brokers use this page to create and edit client fee templates.
l Markup Summary - Displays a commission markup summary for broker client accounts.
l HFCIP Fees - Advisors can charge client fees based on clients' investments in Hedge Funds available through our
Hedge Fund Marketplace.

Advisor Client Fees

Advisors can charge the following types of fees to their clients:

l No fee - The advisor does not charge a client fee.

l Client fees - A calculated advisor fee is automatically billed to the client's account with blanket client author-
ization using one method or a combination of several methods:
l Annualized Percentage of Net Liquidation Value, with posting frequencies of daily, monthly or quarterly
l Annualized Flat fee, with posting frequencies of daily, monthly or quarterly
l Percent of Profit and Loss (P&L). The maximum percent of P&L that you can you charge for either period is 35%.
l Fee per trade - For non-US advisors and commodity-registered advisors in the US and US protectorates (futures
only). Note that you cannot select fee per trade for Money Managers.
Advisors can also submit electronic invoices in Account Management for client fees.

Broker Client Fees

Brokers can set individual fee schedules that apply to specific client accounts or create fee schedule templates and apply
them to one or more client accounts.

Brokers can charge the following types of fees to their clients:

l Minimum and maximum fee per trade

l Ticket charge per trade
l Client markups
l Absolute fees for specific products and exchanges
l Regulatory and exchange fees (pass-through fees)
l Interest markups and markdowns

Brokers can also submit electronic invoices in Account Management for client fees.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 160

Chapter 7 Advisor Client Fees

Advisor Client Fees

Professional Advisors can charge fees to their clients for services rendered using one of the methods described below.

Note: The information in this topic also applies to Multiple Fund Investment Managers with Separately
Managed Accounts (SMAs). These Fund Investment Managers can charge the same types of fees to
SMAs in their account structure as Advisors can charge to their advisor clients.

All advisor client fees are set up on the Manage Clients > Fees > Configure page in Account Management.

l No Fee - An advisor chooses not to charge his or clients a fee for services rendered.
l Client Fees - A calculated fee is automatically billed to the client's account with blanket client authorization. Be
aware that client fees are subject to certain caps and limitations.

Advisors can choose one of several methods of calculating client fees:

l Annualized Percentage of Net Liquidation Value, with posting frequencies of daily, monthly or quarterly
l Annualized Flat fee, with posting frequencies of daily, monthly or quarterly
l Percent of Profit and Loss (P&L). The maximum percent of P&L that you can you charge for either period is 35%.
l Fee per trade unit - Not available for US or US protectorate legal residents due to regulatory restrictions, with the
exception of US commodity-registered advisors, who are allowed a fee-per-trade schedule for futures.
For Forex fee per trade unit, the mark-up is calculated on the second currency of an FX pair, so for example, if a
client trades in EUR.USD, the markup is based on the USD and not the EUR.
o Invoicing - Advisors can submit electronic invoices for client fees on a monthly or quarterly basis by entering
a maximum amount, a maximum percentage of the amount of a client account's net asset value to be invoiced,
or both. Invoices can be submitted for up to ten clients at a time, but only one invoice can be submitted per cli-
ent account per day. Advisors can also upload a .csv file that contains multiple client invoices.
Click here for client fee examples.
Regardless of the method chosen, advisors determine the fees at the time of the client’s registration, and can modify them
at any time. Advisor clients are required to acknowledge any fee increase with a signature.

In addition to the advisor client fees specified, We will charge our normal commissions to the client.

Fee Reimbursement

Advisors can reimburse fees to client accounts. Twelve months of fees are eligible for reimbursement, up to a maximum
(net of any prior rebate) of 50% of the trailing 12 months. The following additional rules apply to client fee reim-
bursements:

l A rebate of fees increases the fee caps and are reflect as such in reports.
l Fee reimbursements are processed as a simultaneous debit to the Advisor Master account and a credit to the client
account.
l If the Master account does not have the sufficient funds to satisfy the fee reimbursement, the fee reimbursement
request will fail.

Advisors can submit and review fee reimbursements on the Client Invoicing page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 161

Chapter 7 Charge Commissions and/or Client Fees to the Advisor Master
Account

Charge Commissions and/or Client Fees to the Advisor Master Account

Advisors can elect to charge commissions as well as minimum monthly fees, market data and research fees to their own
Master account instead of to their client accounts. Advisors can make these elections for individual client accounts on
the Configure Fees page.

Client Fee Templates

Client fee schedules are stored as templates. As an advisor, you can configure fees for one or more client accounts, or set
up client fee schedules in templates, then assign the templates to client accounts. The use of templates allows you to eas-
ily maintain different fee schedules for multiple client accounts.

For more information, see Client Fee Templates.

Overview of Advisor Client Fees

With advisor client fees, a calculated fee is automatically billed to the client's account with blanket client authorization
using any of the following in any combination:

Note: Fund Investment Managers with Separately Managed Accounts (SMAs) can also configure fees
based for their SMA accounts.

Note: See examples of advisor client fees below.

Percent of Net Liquidation Value

Enter this as an annualized percentage, applied on a daily, monthly or quarterly basis.

Alternatively, check Blended to charge a blended or unblended rate based on up to five ranges of your client's Net
Asset Value (NAV).

Flat Fee

Enter this as an annualized amount, applied on a daily, monthly or quarterly basis (apportioned by 252 days).

Percent of P&L

A fixed percent is applied to the mark-to-market P&L (positive or negative) at the end of each period. Any changes made
to the specified percent during a period will only be applied on a forward looking basis and will not be applied ret-
roactively.

If you do make changes during a period, we break the period into two pieces and apply fees accordingly. If at the end of
the billing period the accumulated fee calculation is negative, no fee will be charged. Two periods may be specified for
this calculation:

l Quarterly as of 3/31, 6/30, 9/30, and 12/31. Fees will be posted 10 days after the close of a quarter.
l Annually as of 12/31. Fees will be posted 10 days after the close of the year.
Note: For the purpose of calculating performance fees, P&L on FX trades is included solely on the dates
at which the position is either open or closed and excludes the effect of any exchange rate

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 162

Chapter 7 Overview of Advisor Client Fees

fluctuations between those dates. On the open and close dates, P&L is calculated based upon the
difference between the trade price and the end of day conversion rate.

Fee per trade unit (shares, contracts, %) - Specified by currency/asset class

Advisors can set a fee per trade unit as one of the following:

l An absolute markup over and above our standard commissions.

l A percentage of our standard commission.
l An absolute amount, from which our standard commissions will be subtracted.
Note: Fee per trade unit is not available for US or US protectorate legal residents due to regulatory restric-
tions, with the exception of US commodity-registered advisors, who are allowed a per-trade sched-
ule for futures.

The following rules apply to advisor client fees per trade:

l Fees per trade unit may not exceed 15 times our commissions.
l No fee per trade will be applied if the client calls us to close a trade.
l When entering a fee per trade, an advisor must also enter a minimum fee per trade that cannot exceed the fol-
lowing limits:

Minimum Fee Per Trade

Currency
Limit
USD 25

EUR 20

CHF 30

CZK 475

GBP 15

CAD 30

JPY 2500

HKD 20

SEK 175

SGD 30

MXN 250

KRW 20000

AUD 30

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 163

Chapter 7 Overview of Advisor Client Fees

l Futures and Futures Options Fee per Trade Unit may only be entered by currency and not product.
l A global fee schedule is not applied to all client accounts by default, but may be copied from memory to make
input of new client schedules easier.
Automatic Invoicing - Setting Maximum Invoicing Amounts or Percentage Caps

When you configure client fees, you can include a maximum invoicing amount, a percentage cap or both on a monthly
or quarterly basis. You can charge up to a maximum percentage annually. We calculate the daily equivalent of that limit
by multiplying the maximum annual rate by the value of your account at the end of each business day of the previous
month or quarter and dividing that by the average number of business days per year. The sum of those daily values over
the course of the month or quarter is the maximum amount you can charge for that month or quarter.

You can set an amount or a percentage cap or both. If you set both the amount and the percentage cap, we will use the
lower of the two amounts as the amount to be charged.

For percentage cap, we look back on the prior period to calculate the fee limit, while amount looks at the current period.

(Fee Cap % x Ending Client NAV) / 252

where 252 is the average number of business days in a year.

For example:

l If a client account is configured for a maximum invoicing amount of 500 USD on a monthly basis and you log
into Account Management to submit an invoice for the client in July, the total amount processed in July cannot
exceed 500 USD. You can submit multiple invoices but the total cannot exceed 500 USD for the month.
l If a client account is configured for maximum invoicing amount of 1000 USD on a quarterly basis and you log
into Account Management to submit an invoice for the client in July, the total amount processed between July
and September cannot exceed 1000 USD. You can submit multiple invoices but the total cannot exceed 1000
USD for the quarter.
l If a client account is configured for percentage cap on a monthly basis and you log into Account Management to
submit an invoice for the client in April, the available fee amount is based on the client's daily NAV for March.
You can submit multiple invoices but the total cannot exceed the limit for the period.
l If a client account is configured for percentage cap on a quarterly basis and you log into Account Management to
submit an invoice for the client in November, the available fee amount is based on the client's daily NAV from
July to September. You can submit multiple invoices but the total cannot exceed the limit for the period.
l If a client account is configured for both a maximum invoicing amount and a percentage cap, we calculate both
and use the lower of the two amounts.
To view the amount of fees that you can deduct from the client, select Manage Clients > Fees > Invoicing and look at
the Available Fees column.

Monthly/Quarterly Invoicing

Before you can submit electronic fee invoices for client accounts, you must first configure Invoicing for the account(s) on
the Client Fees page in Account Management. You must specify an amount or percentage cap on a monthly or quarterly
basis, then calculate the markup and submit an electronic invoice for each client account at any time, up to the specified
limit. The invoice amount will be automatically transferred from the client account to the advisor account. Invoices sub-
mitted prior to 5:30 (17:30) PM EST will be processed by us the same day (U.S. night) and appear on that day's

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 164

 Chapter 7 Caps and Limitations

statements. Invoices submitted after 5:30 (17:30) PM EST will be processed by us on the next business day. You can sub-
mit invoices for up to ten clients at a time, but only one invoice per client account per day.

For more information on electronic invoices, see Advisor Invoicing.

High Water Marking

Advisors who select Percent of P&L as the basis of their client fees can apply High Water Marking to the billing period
client fees to offset periods of losses in a volatile market. For more information, see High Water Mark Setup.

Caps and Limitations

Client fee schedules and electronic invoices are subject to the following limitations and caps. See the Advisor Fees page
on our website for more details on caps.

l Markups for advisors are limited to three times the IB commission if the client has an account balance of less than
25,000 USD.
l Advisors fees are not deducted from client accounts with balances below 3,000 USD.

Examples

Percent of Net Liquidation Value

Description:

Percentage of Net Liquidation Value entered as an annualized percentage, applied on a daily basis (252 business days are
applied in this calculation method).

Assumption:

You specify 5% of Net Liquidation Value as an annualized percentage, and your client’s previous day ending-equity is
$100,000.

Calculation:

Your advisor client fees for the given day will be: 5%*$100,000/252=$19.84.

Flat Fee

Description:

Flat fee entered as an annualized amount, applied on a daily basis (apportioned by 252 days).

Assumption:

You specify $1,000 as an annual flat fee for your client.

Calculation:

Your advisor client fees daily payment will be: $1,000/252=$3.97.

Percent of Annual P&L

Description:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 165

 Chapter 7 Percent of Market-to-Market P&L

Percentage of Annual Positive P+L entered as an annualized percentage, applied on an annually basis as of 12/31.

Assumption:

You specify 20% of annual positive P+L as your advisor client fees, and you made $50,000 in P+L for your client for
that year.

Calculation:

Your advisor client fees would be: $50,000*20%=$10,000.

Percent of Market-to-Market P&L

Description:

Percentage of Positive Market-to-Market P&L entered as a percentage, applied on a quarterly basis as of 3/31, 6/30, 9/30,
and 12/31.

Assumption:

As an example, if you specify 2% of Market-to-Market P+L, you made $50,000 in P+L for the last quarter.

Calculation:

Your client will be charged $50,000*2%=$1,000 for the quarter.

Configure Advisor Client Fees

Advisors configure client fee schedules on the Configure Fees page. Use the Configure Fees page to:

l View and sort all client accounts.

l Select one or more client accounts, then view (and if necessary, modify) the current fee schedule for those
accounts.
l Select one or more client accounts, then configure and apply a fee schedule to those accounts.
l Select one or more client accounts, then apply a previously saved client fee template to those accounts.

Note: Fund Investment Managers with Separately Managed Accounts (SMAs) can also configure fees for
their SMA accounts.

To configure client fees

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Configure. Fund Investment Managers with SMA accounts click Manage Funds
> Fees > Configure.
The Configure Fees page opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 166

Chapter 7 Configure Advisor Client Fees

l If necessary, use the Smart Search field to find client accounts by Account ID, Account Alias or Account Title.
Type in the Search field; as you type, the list is reduced to display only those accounts that match your entry..
l If you have a large number of client accounts, you can sort the list by any column heading, including Account
Number, Account Alias, Account Name, Date Opened and Template. Simply click the arrows next to a column
heading to sort the list by that heading.
2. Select one or more client accounts by clicking the check box next to each one, then click View/Configure Fees.
The page displays the fee schedule currently assigned to the selected client accounts, or displays a blank fee schedule if
you have not yet assigned one to the selected accounts.

3. Enter client fees in the fields provided:

l To charge no fee at all, click the No Fee check box. You can also select this option if you intend to bill your cli-
ents directly without using Account Management to configure the client's fees.
l Enter client fee amounts and select invoicing caps in any combination as desired. For details on client fees, see
Overview of Advisor Client Fees.
l For Annualized Percentage of Net Liquidation or Annualized Flat Fee, enter a percentage or amount and then
select the frequency with which the percentage or flat fee is to be applied (Daily, Monthly or Quarterly).
l Advisors can also charge a blended rate for up to five NAV ranges with a corresponding fee percentage.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 167

Chapter 7 Configure Advisor Client Fees

l For Percentage of P&L, click the check box and then click the blue pencil icon to choose between percentage of
annual or percentage of quarterly P&L.
l For Fee per trade unit, click the check box and then click the blue pencil icon to charge clients for services
rendered based on a fee-per-trade unit for each asset class (e.g. stocks, options, etc.), exchange and currency. These
sections are displayed in expanding and collapsing sections. Click the gray bar to expand or collapse each section
as needed to set fees per trade.

Fee per trade unit is not available for US or US protectorate legal residents due to regulatory restrictions, with the
exception of US commodity-registered advisors, who are allowed a per-trade schedule for futures.

l To enter automatic invoicing, type the maximum invoice amount in the Amount field, enter a percentage cap
(maximum percentage) on the amount of a client account's Net Asset Value to be invoiced in the Cap field, and
select Monthly or Quarterly (how often the invoice amount will be charged). You can set both amount and per-
centage cap or just the cap; we apply the lower of the two. To view the amount of fees that you can deduct from
the client, select Manage Clients > Fees > Invoicing and look at the Available Fees column. For details on auto-
matic invoicing, see Overview of Advisor Client Fees.
l To charge all commissions for a client account to your Advisor account, click the Commissions check box. If the
Advisor Master account balance is below $1000 when the commissions need to be posted, then the commission
will be charged to the client account.
l Minimum monthly fees, IRA account fees and market data and research fees are charged to client accounts by
default. To charge these fees to your Advisor account for a client account, click the Other Fees check box.
4. If you checked the pencil icon for Blended in the Annualized Percentage of Net Liquidation field, a window
opens that lets you select and enter annualized fee percentages on up to five ranges of your client's Net Asset
Value (NAV). The total blended rate is the sum of the fee amount for each range up to the client's current NAV.

5. If you selected Percentage of P&L, a window opens that lets you select and enter values for either Percentage of
Annual P&L or Percentage of Quarterly P&L. As soon as you enter a value in either of these fields, the High

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 168

Chapter 7 Configure Advisor Client Fees

Water Marking option appears. Click Continue when you are done. For more information, see High Water Mark
Setup.
The maximum percent of P&L that you can you charge for either period is 35%.

6. If you selected Fee per trade unit, a window opens lets you configure client fees on a fee-per-trade unit for each
asset class (e.g. stocks, options, etc.), exchange and currency. These sections are displayed in expanding and col-
lapsing sections. Click the gray bar to expand or collapse each section.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 169

Chapter 7 Configure Advisor Client Fees

For Forex fee per trade unit, the mark-up is calculated on the second currency of an FX pair, so for example, if a client
trades in EUR.USD, the markup is based on the USD and not the EUR.

Expand and collapse each section as needed to set fees per trade as described below:

l To set a ticket charge, enter the amount in the Ticket Charge field for each desired product/currency. Remember
that you cannot enter both a minimum fee per trade AND a ticket charge for a single product/currency.
l To set a minimum fee per trade, enter the amount in the Min field for each desired product/currency. Remember
that you can set the minimum fee per trade for all products and currencies.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 170

Chapter 7 Configure Advisor Client Fees

l To set a maximum fee per trade, enter the amount in the Max field for each desired product/currency. Remember
that you can set the maximum fee per trade for all products and currencies. Check the box under the Max column
to configure maximum per order fee as percent of trade value.
l To set an absolute markup amount for a product, enter the amount in the Absolute Markup field for the desired
product/currency. If you set this amount for a product/currency, you cannot set the Percent Markup or Absolute
Amounts for the same product/currency. For example, to set a client fee of $1.00, enter 1.00 in the Absolute
Markup field for the desired product/currency. Note that this client fee is in addition to our commission.
l To set a markup percentage, enter the percentage amount without the decimal amount. (enter it as a whole num-
ber) in the % Markup field for the desired product/currency. For example, entering 100 indicates a 100% markup.
If you set this amount for a product/currency, you cannot set the Absolute Markup or Absolute Amounts for the
same product/currency. For example, to set a client fee of 25% of our commission, enter 25 in the % Markup field
for the desired product/currency. Note that this client fee is in addition to our commission.
l To set absolute fees in a tiered schedule by volume level (also called Absolute Tiered Commissions), for each
desired product/currency, enter the fee amount for each of the three tiers (Fee#1, Fee#2 and Fee#3 fields), then
enter the volume level at which the fee changes in each of the three tiers (Vol#1, Vol#2 and Vol#3 fields). Note
that Absolute Tiered Commissions include our commission.

Check the Unit column for the specific product/currency. You must enter absolute fees in the same units specified
in the Unit column for that product/currency. For example, if the Unit column displays a percent sign (%), be sure
to enter the percentage and not the absolute dollar amount.

For example, suppose you want you wanted to charge 0.4% for up to 500 shares, 0.3% for up to 1,000 shares, and
0.2% above 1,000 shares of GBP stocks. You would enter 0.4 in the Fee#1 field, 500 in the Vol#1 field, 0.3 in
the Fee#2 field, 1000 in the Vol#2 field, and 0.2 in the Fee#3 field. In this example, you would leave the Vol#3
field blank.
Very small numbers may be displayed in E notation.

l Broker Master Users can set absolute amounts for products and specific exchanges. To do this, scroll down the list
of products and enter the amount in the field next to the desired product or exchange in the applicable currency.
You can also enter absolute fees in a tiered schedule as described in the previous bullet.
l To specify that all regulatory and exchange fees be added to an Absolute Tiered Commission schedule, click the
check box for the desired product/currency.
6. To specify interest markups or markdowns for a specific currency:
l Click the Pay Client No Credit Interest check box to pay all credit and short proceeds credit interest to the broker.
l In the Credit Markdown field, enter a percentage amount to be subtracted from the credit interest paid and given
to the broker.
l In the Debit Markup field, enter a percentage amount to be added to the debit interest. The maximum markup is
1%.
l In the Short Credit Markdown field, enter a percentage amount to be subtracted from the short proceeds credit
interest paid and given to the broker.
l Specify credit markdowns and debit markups for interest associated with long and short CFDs and long and short
index CFDs in the fields provided.
7. Click Continue.
A confirmation page appears.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 171

Chapter 7 High Water Mark

8. Click the PDF icon to print the fees schedule for your records or for your client signature, then click Continue.

To apply a previously saved client fee template to selected accounts

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Configure.
The Configure Fees page opens.

2. Select one or more client accounts by clicking the check box next to each one, then click View/Configure Fees.
3. Select a template from the Template drop-down, then click the Apply Template button.

4. Click Continue at the bottom of the page.

High Water Mark

Advisors and Fund Investment Managers with SMA accounts who select Percent of P&L as the basis of their client fees
can apply High Water Marking to the billing period client fees to offset periods of losses in a volatile market. Advisors
cannot charge a profit-based fee as long as a cumulative loss exists. You set up High Water Marking on the Client Fees
page when you select Percentage of P&L as client fee method.

High Water Marking lets you:

l Specify a look-back period (in quarters or years, based on the period selection in the Percent of P&L fee schedule).

High Water Marking keeps track of cumulative losses per billing period within the specified look-back period. A
loss in any period will be added to the look-back period's cumulative losses. A gain in any period will decrease
the cumulative loss recorded to date. By default, the look-back period is zero, which means High Water Marking
will not be in effect.
l Prorate for withdrawals. If an advisor chooses to prorate, withdrawals in the current period reduce any cumulative
losses that are carried over from previous periods. The losses are reduced in proportion to the percentage of equity
that was withdrawn.
l Note that current period losses are never adjusted by current period withdrawals, gains are not prorated and depos-
its are not used to prorate losses.
l Optionally initialize High Water Marking with previous periods' losses by entering the amount of the losses.
These losses may have been incurred for the client in another account or with another broker.
l Gains are applied to the oldest losses first.
High Water Marking is effective on the day we process the approved client agreement.

High Water Mark Example

The following example shows how losses are offset after two periods.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 172

Chapter 7 `Setting Up High Water Marking

Ending Actual Period P1 P2

Period Deposits Gains
Equity P&L Loss Loss Loss
0 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0

1 900 0 -100 0 -100 0 0

2 920 0 20 0 0 -80 0

3 910 0 -10 0 -10 0 -80

4 920 0 10 0 0 0 0

5 930 0 10 10 0 0 0

6 980 0 50 50 0 0 0

7 940 0 -40 0 -40 0 0

8 990 0 50 10 0 0 0

9 1000 0 10 10 0 0 0

10 1000 150 -150 0 -150 0 0

11 1010 0 10 0 0 -140 0

12 1020 0 10 0 0 0 -130

13 1030 0 10 10 0 0 0

The following list describes the example period by period.

1. Period 1: Loss of 100 is added to the cumulative losses.

2. Period 2: The gain of 20 is applied to the 100 loss from period 1. This leaves a loss of 80 that needs to be
recovered before advisor client fees are applied.
3. Period 3: Loss of 10 is added to the list of cumulative losses.
4. Period 4: The remaining loss of 80 from period 1 is dropped. The loss of 10 from period 3 is carried over. The
gain of 10 is applied to the loss from period 3.
5. Period 5: There are no losses carried forward. The gain of 10 is subject to incentive fees.
6. Period 10: The loss of 150 is added to the list of cumulative losses
7. Period 11: The gain of 10 is applied to the period 10 loss, leaving a 140 loss that needs to be recovered
8. Period 12: The gain of 10 is applied to the period 10 loss, leaving 130 of the original 150 loss.
9. Period 13: The loss from period 10 is dropped. The gain of 10 is subject to incentive fees.

`Setting Up High Water Marking

Advisors who select Percent of P&L as the basis of their client fees can apply High Water Marking to the billing period
client fees to offset periods of losses in a volatile market. Advisors cannot charge a profit-based fee as long as a cumu-

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 173

Chapter 7 `Setting Up High Water Marking

lative loss exists. You set up High Water Marking on the Client Fees > Configure page when you select Percentage of
P&L as the client fee method.

Note: Fund Investment Managers with Separately Managed Accounts (SMAs) can also apply High Water
Marking to fees for their SMA accounts.

To set up High Water Marking

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Configure. Fund Investment Managers with SMA accounts click Manage Funds
> Fees > Configure.
The Configure Fees page opens.

If you have a large number of client accounts, you can sort the list by any column heading, including Account Number,
Account Alias, Account Name, Date Opened and Template. Simply click the arrows next to a column heading to sort the
list by that heading.

2. Select one or more client accounts by clicking the check box next to each one, then click View/Configure Fees.
The page displays the fee schedule currently assigned to the selected client accounts, or displays a blank fee schedule if
you have not yet assigned one to the selected accounts.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 174

Chapter 7 `Setting Up High Water Marking

3. Select the Percentage of P&L check box. The Percentage of P&L options window opens.

4. Select the check box for either Annual P&L or Quarterly P&L, then enter a percentage in the field provided.
You can set up High Water Marking for both annual and quarterly P&L if you are using both as the basis of your billing
of client fees.

The High Water Mark Setup check box appears.

5. Select the High Water Setup check box. The High Water Mark setup fields appear.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 175

Chapter 7 `Setting Up High Water Marking

You set up High Water Marking separately for annual- and quarterly-based P&L fees.

The following image shows the High Water Mark setup fields for both annual and quarterly-based P&L fees.

6. Enter the following information:

l Quarters/Years - Specify the number of look-back periods (in quarters or years, based on the period selection in
the Percent of P&L fee schedule).

If you are setting up High Water Marking for annual P&L, you can leave the Years field blank for perpetual look-
back. Enter 0 in this field for no look-back.

l High Water Marking keeps track of cumulative losses per billing period within the specified look-back period. A
loss in any period will be added to the look-back period's cumulative losses. A gain in any period will decrease
the cumulative loss recorded to date. By default, the look-back period is zero.
l Prorate - Select Yes to prorate or No if you do not want to prorate. If you choose choose to prorate, withdrawals
in the current period reduce any cumulative losses that are carried over from previous periods. The losses are
reduced in proportion to the percentage of equity that was withdrawn.
Current period losses are never adjusted by current period withdrawals, gains are not prorated and deposits are not used
to prorate losses.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 176

Chapter 7 Advisor Fee Cap Formulas

l Previous Losses - Initialize High Water Marking with previous periods' losses by entering the amount of the
losses for one period. Click the Add link to add losses from additional previous periods.
7. Click Generate PDF for Current Fees to create a PDF file containing your current advisor client fee schedule.
Your High Water Marking setup will be effective on the day we process the approved client agreement.

8. Click Continue.
Your modified client account fee schedule is displayed. Note that very small numbers may be displayed in E notation.

Advisor Fee Cap Formulas

Available Fee Cap Limit (Period X) = (R* Average Equity (Period X)) - Amount Paid (Period X)

l If Available Fee Cap Limit for any period is negative, no advisor fee will be charged.
Period X = 12 30-day cumulative periods over the last 360 days. If an account has been opened less than 360 days, all
the even 30-day periods up to the time the account has been opened will be included. Or the Period X will be the exact
number of days the account has been opened.

R (Period X) = ((0.252/360)*Number of Days)1/2

Available Equity = Average Equity over Period X

Amount Paid = Advisor Fees paid over Period X

For example, you have the client account open for one month* and the average equity for this account over a month is
$10,000. You charged $50 as advisor fees for that month. Your available fee cap would be:

((0.252/360)*30)1/2*$10,000-$50=$671.69

*30 days is used for this calculation.

Client Authorization
Whenever an advisor or a Multiple Fund Investment Manager with an SMA account submits a new client fee schedule or
modifies an existing client fee schedule, the client must provide authorization as described below.

To obtain authorization from an existing advisor client or SMA

1. Submit a new or modified fee schedule for the existing client on the Client Fees page in Account Management.
2. Obtain the client's authorization in any of the following ways:
l Print the fee schedule, have it signed by your client, and return it along with a current Government issued ID
(passport, driver's license, etc.) to us for activation.
l Click the Generate PDF for Current Fees button at the bottom of the Client Fees page to print it, then send to
your client for signature. Your client can then send the signed PDF directly to us for activation at the address/Fax
number indicated on the form.
3. If the client does not want to submit the PDF, he or she can log into Account Management and provide author-
ization online in the Pending Items section on the Account Management Home page.

To obtain authorization from a new advisor client or SMA

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 177

Chapter 7 Advisor Client Invoicing

An advisor or Fund Investment Manager obtains authorization from a new client/SMA account as part of the client
account invitation process, which begins on the Manage Clients/Funds > Accounts > Create > New page:

l Fully Electronic: The advisor or Fund Investment Manager specifies the monthly or quarterly limit and sends the
invitation to their client(s). The client reviews and accepts the invitation electronically.
l Semi-electronic: The advisor or Fund Investment Manager completes the fees section of the account application
PDF by selecting the appropriate fee methodology (Monthly or Quarterly Invoicing) and specifying the limit. The
advisor or Fund Investment Manager then prints the completed account application PDF and obtains client author-
ization (client signature) on the PDF and submits it to us at the address printed on the PDF.
l Paper: Either the advisor/ Fund Investment Manager or the client/SMA fills out the paper account application
(PDF) and submits it us at the address printed on the PDF with a client signature.

Advisor Client Invoicing

The Invoicing page lets you submit advisor-calculated daily fee invoices for multiple client accounts, view and update
pending invoices and review invoices processed in the past seven days. Invoices submitted prior to 5:30 (17:30) PM EST
will be processed by us the same day (U.S. night) and appear on today's statements. Invoices submitted after 5:30 (17:30)
PM EST will be processed by us on the next business day. You can upload a .csv file that contains invoices for multiple
clients or submit invoices for ten clients at a time using the form on the page, but only one invoice per client account per
day. You can also reimburse fees to your clients.

Who Can Access the Invoicing Page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User Individual

l Advisor Master User Organization
l Multiple Fund Investment Manager with at least one Separately Managed Account (SMA)

The Invoicing page lets an Advisor or Fund Investment Manager:

l Submit a fee invoice for client accounts.

l View, upload or cancel pending invoice requests.
l View invoices that have been processed.
l Upload invoices for multiple clients in a single .csv file.
l Configure invoice notifications.for all client accounts
Note: Before you can submit fee invoices for client accounts, you must first configure fees and invoice
caps for the account(s) on the Client Fees page.

Advisors can also reimburse fees to clients on the Advisor Invoicing page. See Advisor Fee Reimbursements for detailed
information.

To submit a fee invoice for client accounts

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Invoicing. Fund Investment Managers click Manage Funds > Fees > Invoicing.
The Invoicing page opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 178

Chapter 7 Advisor Client Invoicing

2. Click Submit New Invoices.

The page displays information about entering invoices.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 179

Chapter 7 Advisor Client Invoicing

If you are using Money Managers to trade for client accounts, the page looks like this:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 180

Chapter 7 Advisor Client Invoicing

3. Enter invoices for each client account as follows:

a. Select a client account from the Client Account list. The Limit and Currency fields are automatically filled with
the information you entered on the Client Fees page.
b. If you are an Advisor using Money Managers, select an Advisor account from the Advisor drop-down list (Fin-
ancial Advisor accounts begin with the letter F; Money Manager accounts begin with the letter A), then select a
client account from the Client Account drop-down list.
c. In the New Fees field, enter the amount of the invoice fee.
d. Enter an optional note in the Memo field.
e. Click the Add link in the Action column.
The fee request (alone or combined with previously requested fees) cannot exceed the fee limit per period which you
defined on the Client Fees page. The Requested Fees field shows the fees requested for the period to date.

The invoice is added to the list and a new invoice row is added to the table.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 181

Chapter 7 Advisor Client Invoicing

4. Continue adding fee invoices as required.

5. Click Remove in the Action column to remove any invoices from the list before you submit the request.
6. When all fee requests have been added, click Continue to submit your advisor invoicing request.
Click Cancel to cancel the operation.
7. A summary of your invoice requests opens. Click Confirm to confirm your request.
Click Cancel to cancel the operation.
8. On the next page, click Print to print a copy of the invoices.

To view, update or cancel pending invoice requests

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Invoicing. Fund Investment Managers click Manage Funds > Fees > Invoicing.
The Invoicing page opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 182

Chapter 7 Advisor Client Invoicing

2. Click Review Pending Invoices.

3. Select the account for which you want to view pending fee invoices from the Account list. The Limit and Cur-
rency fields are automatically filled for you.
If you are an Advisor using Money Managers, select an Advisor account from the Advisor drop-down list (Financial
Advisor accounts begin with the letter F; Money Manager accounts begin with the letter A), then select a client account
from the Client Account drop-down list.

4. Select the month and year of the pending fee invoice from the Month-Year list.
5. You can update fee invoices that have been submitted but not yet processed. To update the fee invoice, enter the
new fee in the New Fee Request field, then click Confirm.
6. To cancel a pending fee invoice request, enter 0 in the New Fee Request field, then click Confirm.

To view invoices that have been processed

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Invoicing. Fund Investment Managers click Manage Funds > Fees > Invoicing.
The Invoicing page opens.

2. Click View Status.

3. Select the account for which you want to view the status of fee invoices for the past seven days from the Account
list. The Limit and Currency fields are automatically filled for you.
If you are and Advisor using Money Managers, select an Advisor account from the Advisor drop-down list (Financial
Advisor accounts begin with the letter F; Money Manager accounts begin with the letter A), then select a client account
from the Client Account drop-down list.

The page displays the following information for each invoice:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 183

Chapter 7 Uploading Invoices

l Requested Amount
l Currency
l Memo, if there is one
l Post Date
l Posted Amount
l Error Reason, if there is an error

Uploading Invoices

If you have multiple client invoices, you can create a bulk invoice file and upload it on this page. You will be able to
verify the invoice details before they are submitted for processing.

The file must be a CSV (comma-separated values) file that contains the following fields:

l Client Account Number (Required)

l Amount (Required)
l Memo (Optional field; this field can be left empty)
l Money Manager Account Number (Optional field; use this field if the invoice is to be paid to a Money Manager
or else leave empty)
l Model (Optional field; this field can be left empty)
Additional Rules for Uploading Invoices

l If you leave the Currency field empty, the currency will default to your base currency.
l If you leave the Model field empty, the model will default to "Core."

To upload a .csv file with multiple client invoices

1. Prepare your .csv invoice file based on the rules listed above.
2. Log into Account Management, then click Manage Clients > Fees > Invoicing. Fund Investment Managers click
Manage Funds > Fees > Invoicing.
The Invoicing page opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 184

Chapter 7 Uploading Invoices

3. Click Submit New Invoices.

The page displays information about entering invoices.
4. Click Upload New Invoices.

5. On the Upload Client Invoices page, click Browse, then locate and select your .csv invoice file.
6. Click Upload.
7. Do one of the following:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 185

Chapter 7 Configure Invoice Notifications

l Click Continue to confirm your upload.

l If your uploaded file is marked invalid, or if you want to add more account invoices to your .csv file, click
Reload, then update your invoice file. Upload the updated file by clicking Browse, locate and select the updated
file, then click Upload.
l Click Cancel to cancel the upload completely.
Sample .csv File

The following figure shows a sample .csv file in Microsoft Excel with multiple invoices.

Configure Invoice Notifications

To help Advisors who bill advisory fees using one of our Automatic Calculation options meet their compliance oblig-
ations, we can send your clients invoices detailing the advisory fees automatically calculated and deducted from their
accounts at their request when those fees are actually charged. These notices describe the method used to calculate the
fee, the amount of the fee and the period covered by the fee.

You can choose how we send these notices to all of your clients: by email, in the Client Services Message Center, or no
notification at all. By default, your clients will NOT receive these notices. All advisory fees processed through us are
reflected on the client's Activity Statements.

To configure invoice notifications

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Invoicing.
The Invoicing page opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 186

Chapter 7 Configure Invoice Notifications

2. Click Configure Invoice Notifications

The Configure Invoice Notfications page opens.

3. Choose how we should send invoice notifications to all of your clients by clicking the appropriate radio button:
l Do not send my clients notices summarizing advisory fees charged. (This is the default selection and is in force if
you make no selections.)
l Send my clients notices summarizing advisory fees charged to the email on record for the client's account.
l Send my clients notices summarizing advisory fees charged through the Client Services Message Center.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 187

Chapter 7 Advisor Fee Reimbursements

4. Click Submit to save your changes. Click Cancel to cancel the operation.

Advisor Fee Reimbursements

Advisors can reimburse fees to client accounts on the Invoicing page.

Rules for Fee Reimbursements

l You can reimburse any client fees for a 12-month period.

l 50% of the trailing 12 months of advisor fees (net of any prior rebate) is the maximum amount that you can reim-
burse.
l Multiple reimbursements cannot exceed the original 50% maximum for the trailing 12-month period. For example,
if invoices in a 12-month period were $12,000, you can reimburse a maximum of $6,000 in invoices. So if you
reimburse $5,000 in invoices one week, you can only reimburse a maximum of $1,000 in invoices the following
week because $5,000 + $1,000 = the maximum reimbursement of $6,000.
l Fee reimbursements should be accounted for in the fee cap calculations, meaning a rebate of fees will increase the
fee caps.
l We process fee reimbursements by simultaneously debiting the master and crediting the client account.
l If the master does not have the funds available to satisfy the requested fee reimbursement, the request will not be
processed.

On the Client Invoicing page, an advisor can:

l Submit fee reimbursements.

l View, modify or cancel pending fee reimbursements.
l View fee reimbursements that have been processed.

To submit fee reimbursements

Advisors can reimburse fees to client accounts on the Advisor Invoicing page.

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Invoicing.

The Invoicing page opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 188

Chapter 7 Advisor Fee Reimbursements

2. Click Submit Fee Reimbursements.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 189

Chapter 7 Advisor Fee Reimbursements

3. Enter fee reimbursements for each client account as follows:

a. Select an Advisor from the Advisor list. This will be either your own Master account or a Money Manager
account.
b. Select a client account from the Client Account list. The Currency field is automatically filled.
c. In the New Reimbursement Amount field, enter the amount of the fee reimbursement.
d. Enter an optional note in the Memo field.
e. Click the Add link in the Action column.
The fee reimbursement is added to the list and a new row is added to the table.

4. Continue adding fee reimbursements as required.

5. Click Remove in the Action column to remove any invoices from the list before you submit the request.
6. When all reimbursements have been added, click Continue to submit your request.
Click Cancel to cancel the operation.
7. A summary of your fee reimbursement requests opens. Click Confirm to confirm your request.
Click Cancel to cancel the operation.
Be aware of the following processing rules:

l Reimbursements submitted prior to 5:30 (17:30) PM EST will be processed by us the same day (U.S. night) and
appear on that day's statements.
l Reimbursements submitted after 5:30 (17:30) PM EST will be processed by us on the next business day.
l You can submit reimbursements for up to ten clients at a time, but only one reimbursement per client account per
day.

To review fee reimbursements

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Invoicing.
The Invoicing page opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 190

Chapter 7 Advisor Fee Reimbursements

2. Click Review Pending Fee Reimbursements.

3. Select the account for which you want to view pending fee invoices from the Account list. The Limit and Cur-
rency fields are automatically filled for you.
4. Modify or cancel the fee reimbursement request:
o To modify the fee reimbursement request, enter a new fee reimbursement in the New Fee Reimbursement field.
o To cancel a fee reimbursement, enter '0' in the New Fee Reimbursement field.
3. Click Confirm.

To view fee reimbursements that have been processed

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Invoicing.
The Invoicing page opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 191

Chapter 7 Advisor Fee Reimbursements

2. Click View Status in the Fee Reimbursements section.

3. Select the account for which you want to view the status of fee invoices for the past seven days from the Account
list. The Limit and Currency fields are automatically filled for you.

The page displays the following information for each fee reimbursement:
o Requested Amount
o Currency
o Memo, if there is one
o Post Date

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 192

Chapter 7 Broker Client Fees

o Posted Amount
o Error Reason, if there is an error

Broker Client Fees

Brokers can charge their clients for services rendered based on a fee-per-trade unit for each asset class (e.g. stocks,
options, etc.), exchange and currency. The trade unit is determined by the unit we use for our commissions charges and
can be on a per-share, per-contract, or percent of trade value basis.

Brokers set up client fee schedules on the Manage Clients > Fees > Configure page.

For descriptions of all types of broker client fees, see Types of Broker Client Fees.

Rules for Broker Client Fees

The following general rules apply to broker client fee schedules:

l If a broker has not created a fee schedule for an individual account, then the default client fee template will auto-
matically apply to that account.
l If a broker has not created any fee schedule at all, either a client fee template or fee schedules for individual
accounts, then our standard commissions will be charged with no markup for the broker.
l Broker client markups are limited to 45 times our standard commissions. If the Broker submits a markup that is
above 15 times, we will receive 1/15 of the amount above 15 times.
l No fee per trade will be applied if the client calls us to close a trade.
l Brokers can also specify fees per trade for specific products and exchanges but only in the global fees schedule.

Note: For Forex fee per trade unit, the mark-up is calculated on the second currency of an FX pair, so for
example, if a client trades in EUR.USD, the markup is based on the USD and not the EUR.

Client Fee Templates

Client fee schedules can be applied to accounts individually or can be stored in templates. As a broker, you can con-
figure fees for one or more client accounts, or set up client fee schedules in templates, then assign the templates to client
accounts. The use of templates allows you to easily maintain different fee schedules for multiple client accounts. If you
are a new broker (i.e., you just opened your account), then there will be a blank default client fee template, which you
can then configure with your own fee schedule. If you are an existing broker, your old global fee schedule is now the
default client fee template.

For more information, see Client Fee Templates.

Choice of Pricing Structures for Client Accounts

When configuring fees for a single client, multiple clients or a client fee template, brokers can choose from three pricing
structures:

l Tiered Pricing Structure with No Markups - Clients will be charged tiered commissions but no additional
markups. This is the default selection.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 193

Chapter 7 Markup Summary

l Tiered Pricing Structure with Markups - Clients will be charged tiered commissions with additional markups as
specified by the broker.
l Fixed Pricing Structure with Markups - Clients will be charged a fix commission with additional markups as spe-
cified by the broker.
The selected pricing structure will be applied to all securities and commodities in a client's account.

For more information about tiered and fixed commissions, see the Commissions page on our website.

Markup Summary

Brokers can view all commission markup schedules for their client accounts on the Markup Summary page, which sorts
information by fee schedule and displays client accounts that use the global markup schedule together.

The Markup Summary is available in the Manage Clients > Fees menu.

Types of Broker Client Markups

For each asset class/currency, a broker can select one of the fee-per-trade client markup types listed below, one markup
type per asset class/currency.

Broker client markups are limited to 45 times our standard commissions. If the Broker submits a markup that is
above 15 times, we will receive 1/15 of the amount above 15 times.

Minimum Amount

Brokers can specify a minimum amount to charge per trade. The minimum amount cannot exceed the following limits:

Currency Minimum Fee Per Trade Limit

USD 25

EUR 20

CHF 30

GBP 15

CAD 30

JPY 2500

HKD 20

SEK 175

MXN 250

KRW 20000

AUD 30
Note that you cannot enter both a minimum amount per trade and a ticket charge. You can enter one or the other.

Example

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 194

Chapter 7 Maximum Amount

For example, a broker enters 1 in the Min column for Stocks/CAD for an individual client account. The minimum broker
client fee for a stock trade in CAD for that client will be 1.00. A broker would typically set the Minimum Amount in
conjunction with other types of client markups for a specific asset class/currency.

Maximum Amount

Brokers can specify a maximum amount to charge per trade. They can also configure the Maximum Amount as a percent
of trade value for stocks in USD and CAD by clicking the check box below the Max entry field on the Client Fees page
in Account Management.

Example

For example, a broker enters 5 in the Max column for Stocks/CAD for an individual client account. The maximum broker
client fee for a stock trade in CAD for that client will be 5.00. A broker would typically set the Maximum Amount in
conjunction with other types of client markups for a specific asset class/currency.

In another example, a broker enters 1 in the Max column for Stocks/CAD for an individual client account, and selects the
check box below the Max field, indicating that this Maximum Amount will be calculated as a percentage of trade value
of Stocks/CAD. The maximum broker client fee for a stock trade in CAD for the client will be 1% of the stock trade
value.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 195

 Chapter 7 Ticket Charge

Ticket Charge

Brokers can specify a ticket charge per trade. A ticket charge is simply an additional flat fee. You cannot specify both a
minimum amount AND a ticket charge for a single asset class/currency.

Example

For example, a broker enters 25 in the % Markup column for Stocks/CHF and then enters 1 in the Ticket Charge column
for an individual client. The broker markup for a stock trade in Swiss Francs for this client will be 25% of our com-
mission + 1CFH.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 196

 Chapter 7 Absolute Markup

Absolute Markup

Brokers can charge an Absolute Markup per trade. Absolute Markup is a specific amount added to our commission.
Brokers enter an Absolute Markup in the currency or exchange of the asset class. On the Client Fees page in Account
Management, the units listed in the Currency/Exchange/Product Unit column indicate if the absolute markup gets
applied to shares, contracts, or % of notional value. Absolute Markup amounts can include up to three decimal places.

Example

For example, a broker enters 1 as the Absolute Markup for USD Stock and Index Options. Later, one Smart option con-
tract is executed. The client will be charged $2 ($1 commission + $1 Absolute Markup).

Tiered Absolute Amount

Brokers can charge an Absolute Amount from which our commission is subtracted. You can set up to three tiers for Abso-
lute Amount based on volume breaks.

Brokers should monitor their customers commissions as it is possible for us to charge more than the client fee. To set an
Absolute Amount, enter one to three fees (Fee#1, Fee#2, Fee#3), and enter volume breaks (Vol#1, Vol#2) on a per trade

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 197

Chapter 7 % Markup

basis on the Client Fees page in Account Management. The units listed in the Currency/Exchange/Product Unit column
indicate if the absolute markup gets applied to shares, contracts, or %. Absolute Amounts can include up to three decimal
places.

Our standard UK fees of .1%, and stamp tax of .5% would be subtracted from the absolute fee specified above.

Customer Absolute Tiered Commissions are mutually exclusive from our Tiered Commissions. They can be combined
with our Tiered Commissions, or one customer absolute rate can be used with our Tiered Commissions.

Example

For example, a broker wants to charge 0.05 USD for up to 500 shares of stock, 0.03 USD for up to 1,000 shares, and
0.002 USD above 1,000 shares, along with a ticket charge of 1 USD. The broker is only using three tiers but can use up
to five tiers. The entries on the Client Fees page would look like this:

% Markup

Brokers can specify a percentage of our standard commission to charge per trade. Enter % Markup as a percentage
without the decimal point.

Example

For example, a broker enter 100 in the % Markup column for Stocks/EUR for an individual client, indicating that stock
trades for this client will carry a broker markup of 100% of our commission. If we charge 10 EUR for a stock trade, the %

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 198

 Chapter 7 Exchange and Regulatory Fees

Markup will be 10 EUR (100% * 20 EUR). The client will be charged a total of 20 EUR for a stock trade (10 EUR Com-
mission + 10 EUR % Markup).

Exchange and Regulatory Fees

In addition to (or on top of) an absolute fee, a broker can pass any exchange or regulatory fees through to the customer
by selecting the Exchange & Regulatory Fees option. These fees can only be entered when Absolute Amounts are set.
Brokers can also specify a tiered commission schedule and Exchange & Regulatory Fees for specific products and spe-
cific exchanges.

Example

For example, 1,000 shares @ $.05 per share + Exchange Fee of $.003 per share = (1,000 * .03) + (1,000 * $.003) = Total
Fee charged of $33.00.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 199

 Chapter 7 Interest Markups and Markdowns

Interest Markups and Markdowns

Brokers can mark down credit and short proceeds credit interest, and markup debit interest. Markups and Markdowns are
specified percentages along with the following options:

l Pay Client No Credit Interest - All credit and short proceeds credit interest will be paid to the broker and the cli-
ent will not receive any revenue.
l Credit Markdown - A percentage amount will be subtracted from the credit interest paid and given to the broker.
Clients will not be charged negative interest so if the markdown is greater than the currently available credit
interest rate then no interest will be paid.
l Debit Markup - A percentage amount will be added to the debit interest. The maximum markup is 5%, and we
will charge 25% of the debit interest markup over 1%.
l Short Credit Markdown - A percentage amount will be subtracted from the short proceeds credit interest paid and
given to the broker.
Note: Interest markups and markdowns are rounded to two decimals.

Markups on Borrow Fees

Brokers can charge markups to their clients based on our stock borrow rates, entered as a variable or fixed percentage of
our borrow rate. You can enter both types of markups and our system will apply the markup rate that results in the larger
total amount.

l Variable borrow fee markup - This is a variable percentage of our borrow rate. The total cost to your client is cal-
culated as follows:
Borrow Rate (1 + Variable Markup Percentage)

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 200

 Chapter 7 Take Up Fees for Prime Trades

The range of acceptable values that you can enter is 0 - 25%.

l Fixed borrow fee markup - This is a fixed percentage of our borrow rate.The total cost to your client is calculated
as follows:
Borrow Rate + Fixed Markup Percentage)
The range of acceptable values that you can enter is 0 - 1%.

Borrow Markup Fee Example 1

Symbol ABC Borrow Rate = 35%

Variable Borrow Markup = 20%
Fixed Borrow Markup = 1%

Calculating the total cost to your client, we have:

l Variable markup
35% (1 + 20%) = 42% total cost to your client.
or
0.35 (1.2) = 0.42
l Fixed markup
35% + 1% = 36%
or
0.35 + 0.01 = 0.36
Our system applies the larger total amount, so in this example, we would apply the Variable Borrow Markup and the
total cost to your client is 42%, which includes our borrow rate plus your borrow markup.

Borrow Markup Fee Example 2

Symbol XYZ Borrow Rate = 0.25%

Variable Borrow Markup = 20%
Fixed Borrow Markup = 0.75%

Calculating the total cost to your client, we have:

l Variable markup
0.25% (1 + 20%) = 0.30% total cost to your client.
or
0.0025 (1.2) = 0.003
l Fixed markup
0.25% + 0.75% = 1%
or
0.0025 + 0.0075 = 1.00
Our system applies the larger amount, so in this example, we would apply the Fixed Borrow Markup and the total cost to
your client is 1%, which includes our borrow rate plus your borrow markup.

Take Up Fees for Prime Trades

Brokers can charge markups on prime trades of certain currency/product units in the Take Up Fees section on the Con-
figure Fees page. This section only appears for brokers who have at least one client who subscribes to our IB Prime

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 201

Chapter 7 Configure Broker Client Fees

institutional service.

You specify the take up fee in the Ticket Charge field for the specific currency/product unit; for example, US Stock. A
take up fee is simply a flat fee.

Configure Broker Client Fees

Brokers configure client fee schedules on the Configure Fees page. Use the Configure Fees page to:

l View and sort all client accounts.

l Select one or more client accounts, then view (and if necessary, modify) the current fee schedule for those
accounts.
l Select one or more client accounts, then configure and apply a fee schedule to those accounts.
l Select one or more client accounts, then apply a previously saved client fee template to those accounts.

Client fees set by Broker Master Users are always based on fees per trade.

To configure client fees

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Configure.
The Configure Fees page opens.

If you have a large number of client accounts, you can sort the list by any column heading, including Account Number,
Account Alias, Account Name, Date Opened and Template. Simply click the arrows next to a column heading to sort the
list by that heading.

You can also search for client accounts by entering all or part of the client's account number, account alias or name. The
list of matching client accounts updates automatically.

2. Select one or more client accounts by clicking the check box next to each one, then click View/Configure Fees.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 202

Chapter 7 Configure Broker Client Fees

The page displays the fee schedule currently assigned to the selected client accounts, or displays a blank fee schedule if
you have not yet assigned one to the selected accounts.

3. Select one of three pricing structures for the selected client account(s):
l Tiered Pricing Structure with No Markups (this is the default selection)
l Tiered Pricing Structure with Markups
l Fixed Pricing Structure with Markups

4. If you selected Tiered Pricing Structure with No Markups, click Continue.

5. If you selected a pricing structure with markups, you will be able charge your clients for services rendered based
on a fee-per-trade unit for each asset class (e.g. stocks, options, etc.), exchange and currency. These sections are dis-
played in expanding and collapsing sections. Click the gray bar to expand or collapse each section.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 203

Chapter 7 Configure Broker Client Fees

Expand and collapse each section as needed to set fees per trade as described below:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 204

Chapter 7 Configure Broker Client Fees

l To set a ticket charge, enter the amount in the Ticket Charge field for each desired product/currency. Remember
that you cannot enter both a minimum fee per trade AND a ticket charge for a single product/currency.
l To set a minimum fee per trade, enter the amount in the Min field for each desired product/currency. Remember
that you can set the minimum fee per trade for all products and currencies.
l To set a maximum fee per trade, enter the amount in the Max field for each desired product/currency. Remember
that you can set the maximum fee per trade for all products and currencies. Check the box under the Max column
to configure maximum per order fee as percent of trade value.
l To set an absolute markup amount for a product, enter the amount in the Absolute Markup field for the desired
product/currency. If you set this amount for a product/currency, you cannot set the Percent Markup or Absolute
Amounts for the same product/currency. For example, to set a client fee of $1.00, enter 1.00 in the Absolute
Markup field for the desired product/currency. Note that this client fee is in addition to our commission.
For Forex fee per trade unit, the mark-up is calculated on the second currency of an FX pair, so for example, if a client
trades in EUR.USD, the markup is based on the USD and not the EUR.

l To set a markup percentage, enter the percentage amount without the decimal amount. (enter it as a whole num-
ber) in the % Markup field for the desired product/currency. For example, entering 100 indicates a 100% markup.
If you set this amount for a product/currency, you cannot set the Absolute Markup or Absolute Amounts for the
same product/currency. For example, to set a client fee of 25% of our commission, enter 25 in the % Markup field
for the desired product/currency. Note that this client fee is in addition to our commission.
l To set absolute fees in a tiered schedule by volume level (also called Absolute Tiered Commissions), for each
desired product/currency, enter the fee amount for each of the three tiers (Fee#1, Fee#2 and Fee#3 fields), then
enter the volume level at which the fee changes in each of the three tiers (Vol#1, Vol#2 and Vol#3 fields). Note
that Absolute Tiered Commissions include our commission.

Check the Unit column for the specific product/currency. You must enter absolute fees in the same units specified
in the Unit column for that product/currency. For example, if the Unit column displays a percent sign (%), be sure
to enter the percentage and not the absolute dollar amount.

For example, suppose you want you wanted to charge 0.4% for up to 500 shares, 0.3% for up to 1,000 shares, and
0.2% above 1,000 shares of GBP stocks. You would enter 0.4 in the Fee#1 field, 500 in the Vol#1 field, 0.3 in
the Fee#2 field, 1000 in the Vol#2 field, and 0.2 in the Fee#3 field. In this example, you would leave the Vol#3
field blank.
Very small numbers may be displayed in E notation.

l Broker Master Users can set absolute amounts for products and specific exchanges. To do this, scroll down the list
of products and enter the amount in the field next to the desired product or exchange in the applicable currency.
You can also enter absolute fees in a tiered schedule as described in the previous bullet.
l To specify that all regulatory and exchange fees be added to an Absolute Tiered Commission schedule, click the
check box for the desired product/currency.
l To specify interest markups or markdowns for a specific currency:
l Click the Pay Client No Credit Interest check box to pay all credit and short proceeds credit interest to the broker.
l In the Credit Markdown field, enter a percentage amount to be subtracted from the credit interest paid and given
to the broker.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 205

Chapter 7 Client Invoicing

l In the Debit Markup field, enter a percentage amount to be added to the debit interest. The maximum markup is
5%, and we will charge 25% of the debit interest markup over 1%. The 25% Charge Over 1% column shows the
interest markup that we will earn. For example, if you enter 1 (for 1%) in the Debit Markup field, then 0 will
appear in the 25% Charge Over 1% field. If you enter 5 (for 5%) in the Debit Markup field, 1 will appear in the
25% Charge Over 1% field (25% of 4%, the amount of Debit Markup over 1%, is 1%).
l In the Short Credit Markdown field, enter a percentage amount to be subtracted from the short proceeds credit
interest paid and given to the broker.
l Specify credit markdowns and debit markups for interest associated with long and short CFDs and long and short
index CFDs in the fields provided.
l Specify borrow fee markup percentages in the Variable Borrow Markup and Fixed Borrow Markup fields. Accept-
able values for the Variable Borrow Markup must be between 0 and 25% (you do not enter the percent sign).
Acceptable values for the Fixed Borrow Markup must be between 0 and 1% (you do not enter the percent sign).
For more information about borrow markups, see Types of Broker Client Fees.

l To set a take up fee on trades for clients who subscribe to our IB Prime institution service, expand the Take Up
Fees section, and then enter the amount in the Ticket Charge field for each desired product/currency.
l If you selected multiple clients and all of the clients are IB Prime customers, then the Take Up Fees section
appears. If you selected multiple clients and one of the clients is not an IB Prime customer, then the Take Up Fees
section does NOT appear.
6. Click Continue.
A confirmation page appears.

7. Print this page for your records, then click Continue.

To apply a previously saved client fee template to selected accounts

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Configure.
The Configure Fees page opens.

2. Select one or more client accounts by clicking the check box next to each one, then click View/Configure Fees.
3. Select a template from the Template drop-down, then click the Apply Template button.
4. Click Continue at the bottom of the page.

Client Invoicing
The Client Invoicing page lets you submit broker-calculated daily fee invoices for multiple client accounts, view and
update pending invoices and review invoices processed in the past seven days. Invoices submitted prior to 5:30 (17:30)
PM EST will be processed by us the same day (U.S. night) and appear on today's statements. Invoices submitted after
5:30 (17:30) PM EST will be processed by us on the next business day. You can submit invoices for up to ten clients per
day, but only one invoice per client account per day.

Who can access the Client Invoicing page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Fully Disclosed Broker Master

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 206

Chapter 7 Client Invoicing

The Broker Invoicing page lets a Fully Disclosed Broker:

l Configure Invoices
l Submit a fee invoice for client accounts.
l View, upload or cancel pending invoice requests.
l Upload invoices for multiple clients in a single .csv file.

Note: Before you can submit fee invoices for client accounts, you must first configure client fees and
invoice caps for the account(s).

To configure invoices for client accounts

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Invoicing.
The Client Invoicing page appears.

2. Click Configure Invoicing.

The Configure Invoicing page appears.

If you have a large number of client accounts, you can sort the list by any column heading, including Account Number,
Account Alias, Account Name and Date Opened. Simply click the arrows next to a column heading to sort the list by
that heading.

You can also search for client accounts by entering all or part of the client's account number, account alias or name. The
list of matching client accounts updates automatically.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 207

Chapter 7 Client Invoicing

3. Select one or more client accounts by clicking the check box next to each one, then click View/Configure
Invoicing.

4. Enter the maximum monthly or quarterly fee amount in the fields provided. This fee is calculated by you and
removed from the client account on a monthly or quarterly basis, depending on your entry.
5. Click Continue.
The fee request (alone or combined with previously requested fees) cannot exceed the fee limit per period which you
defined on the Client Fees page. The Requested Fees field shows the fees requested for the period to date.

6. On the Confirmation of Fees page, click Generate PDF to print a PDF document with the new invoicing. To
activate this monthly/quarterly invoicing the client can sign the printed PDF form or the client can confirm the
request in Account Management under Pending Requests.

To submit a new invoice request

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Invoicing
The Broker Invoicing page appears.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 208

Chapter 7 Client Invoicing

2. Click Submit New Pending Invoices.

3. Enter invoices for each client account as follows:
a. Select a client account from the Client Account list. The Limit and Currency fields are automatically filled with
the information you entered on the Client Fees page.

If you are an Advisor using Money Managers, select an Advisor account from the Advisor drop-down list (Fin-
ancial Advisor accounts begin with the letter F; Money Manager accounts begin with the letter A), then select a
client account from the Client Account drop-down list.
b. In the New Fees field, enter the amount of the invoice fee.
c. Enter an optional note in the Memo field.
d. Click the Add link in the Action column.
The fee request (alone or combined with previously requested fees) cannot exceed the fee limit per period which you
defined on the Client Fees page. The Requested Fees field shows the fees requested for the period to date.

The invoice is added to the list and a new invoice row is added to the table.

4. Continue adding fee invoices as required.

5. Click Remove in the Action column to remove any invoices from the list before you submit the request.
6. When all fee requests have been added, click Continue to submit your advisor invoicing request.
Click Cancel to cancel the operation.
7. A summary of your invoice requests appears. Click Confirm to confirm your request.
Click Cancel to cancel the operation.
8. On the next page, click Print to print a copy of the invoices.

To view, update or cancel pending invoice requests

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 209

Chapter 7 Client Invoicing

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Invoicing

The Broker Invoicing page appears.

2. Click Review Pending Invoices.

3. Select the account for which you want to view pending fee invoices from the Account list. The Limit and Cur-
rency fields are automatically filled for you.

If you are using Money Managers, select an Advisor account from the Advisor drop-down list (Financial Advisor
accounts begin with the letter F; Money Manager accounts begin with the letter A), then select a client account
from the Client Account drop-down list.
4. Select the month and year of the pending fee invoice from the Month-Year list.
5. You can update fee invoices that have been submitted but not yet processed. To update the fee invoice, enter the
new fee in the New Fee Request field, then click Confirm.
6. To cancel a pending fee invoice request, enter 0 in the New Fee Request field, then click Confirm.

To view invoice status

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Invoicing
The Broker Invoicing page appears.

2. Click View Status.

3. Select the account for which you want to view the status of fee invoices for the past seven days from the Account
list. The Limit and Currency fields are automatically filled for you.

If you are using Money Managers, select an Advisor account from the Advisor drop-down list (Financial Advisor
accounts begin with the letter F; Money Manager accounts begin with the letter A), then select a client account
from the Client Account drop-down list.
Invoice status displays the following information for each invoice:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 210

Chapter 7 Uploading Invoices

l Requested Amount
l Currency
l Memo, if there is one
l Post Date
l Posted Amount
l Error Reason, if there is an error

Uploading Invoices

If you have multiple client invoices, you can create a bulk invoice file and upload it on this page. You will be able to
verify the invoice details before they are submitted for processing.

The file must be a CSV (comma-separated values) file that contains the following fields:

l Client Account Number

l Amount (in client account's base currency)
l Money Manager Account Number (only if the invoice is to be paid to a Money Manager)

The following optional field may also be included:

l Memo.

To upload a .csv file with multiple client invoices

1. Prepare your .csv invoice file based on the rules listed above.
2. Log into Account Management, then click Manage Clients > Fees > Invoicing
The Broker Invoicing page appears.

3. Click Submit New Invoices.

The page displays information about entering invoices.
4. Click Upload New Invoices.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 211

Chapter 7 Markup Summary

5. On the Upload Client Invoices page, click Browse, then locate and select your .csv invoice file.
6. Click Upload.
7. Do one of the following:
l Click Continue to confirm your upload.
l If your uploaded file is marked invalid, or if you want to add more account invoices to your .csv file, click
Reload, then update your invoice file. Upload the updated file by clicking Browse, locate and select the updated
file, then click Upload.
l Click Cancel to cancel the upload completely.

Markup Summary
The Markup summary displays commission markup schedules for a broker's client accounts. The report sorts information
by fee schedule, and displays an extra line for those client accounts that use the global markup schedule.

Who can access the Markup Summary page?

You can access this page if you are a Broker Master User.

To view the Markup Summary

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Markup Summary.
The Markup Summary page appears.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 212

Chapter 7 Client Fee Templates

Client Fee Templates

The Templates page lets Brokers, Advisors and Multiple Fund Investment Managers with Separately Managed Accounts
(SMAs) view existing client fee templates, create new templates, and edit or delete existing templates.

Overview of Client Fee Templates

Client fee schedules can be applied to accounts individually or can be stored in templates. You can configure fees for
one or more client accounts, or set up client fee schedules in templates, then assign the templates to client accounts. The
use of templates allows you to easily maintain different fee schedules for multiple client accounts.

You create, modify and delete templates on the Templates page. If you are a new broker or advisor (i.e., you just opened
your account), then there will be a blank default client fee template, which you can then configure with your own fee
schedule. If you are an existing broker, your old global fee schedule is now the default client fee template. You can
modify the default template but you cannot delete it.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 213

 Chapter 7 Default Client Fee Templates

You are not required to create templates for client fee schedules. You can simply select one or more client accounts on
the Configure Fees page, then create a fee schedule for those accounts without assigning a template to those accounts. If
you do configure fees for client accounts without assigning a template, the Template column on the Configure Fees page
will show Default as the template (even though you have not assigned a template to those accounts).

Brokers can select one of three pricing structures for a client fee template:

l Tiered Pricing Structure with No Markups (this is the default selection)

l Tiered Pricing Structure with Markups
l Fixed Pricing Structure with Markups

If you have more than one saved template, you can mark one of them as the default template. New accounts will auto-
matically be assigned to the template that is marked as the default at the time the client account is opened. If you do
mark one of your own templates as the default template, the template named Default remains in the system and the client
accounts previously assigned to the named Default template will still be assigned to it.

Default Client Fee Templates

Advisors get a default client fee template, which they can modify as required. When a client chooses to link to an
advisor from the Investors' Marketplace, that client will automatically be assigned the default fees that the advisor has set
in the default template. The client has to sign off on the fees before he can move/partition/create a new account under the
advisor.

To create a client fee template

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Templates. Fund Investment Managers click Manage Funds > Fees >
Templates.
The Templates page opens.

The Templates page lists all of your saved client fee templates, if you have any, as well as a default client fee template.

2. Click Create New Template.

3. Enter the template name.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 214

Chapter 7 Default Client Fee Templates

4. Brokers can charge clients for services rendered based on a fee-per-trade unit for each asset class (e.g. stocks,
options, etc.), exchange and currency. These sections are displayed in expanding and collapsing sections. Click
the gray bar to expand or collapse each section as needed to set fees per trade.
Brokers select a pricing structure:

l If you selected Tiered Pricing Structure with No Markups, click Continue.

l If you selected a pricing structure with markups, you will be able charge your clients for services rendered based
on a fee-per-trade unit for each asset class (e.g. stocks, options, etc.), exchange and currency. These sections are dis-
played in expanding and collapsing sections. Click the gray bar to expand or collapse each section as needed to
set fees per trade.

5. Advisors set fees and invoicing limits in the fields provided.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 215

Chapter 7 Default Client Fee Templates

l For Percentage of P&L, click the check box and then click the blue pencil icon to choose between percentage of
annual or percentage of quarterly P&L.
l For Fee per trade unit, click the check box and then click the blue pencil icon to charge clients for services
rendered based on a fee-per-trade unit for each asset class (e.g. stocks, options, etc.), exchange and currency. These
sections are displayed in expanding and collapsing sections. Click the gray bar to expand or collapse each section
as needed to set fees per trade:
Advisors will see the following screen for Fee per trade unit:

Here is the same screen with the Stocks section expanded:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 216

Chapter 7 Default Client Fee Templates

Brokers will see the following screen for Fee per trade unit:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 217

Chapter 7 Fees for SMAs in Multiple Hedge Fund Accounts

6. When you have entered all client fee information, enter the name of the template in the Template Name field.
7. Click the Yes check box if you want your new template to become the default template client fees template. New
accounts will automatically be assigned to the template that is marked as the default at the time the client account
is opened.
8. Click Save Template.

To edit or delete a client fee template

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > Templates. Fund Investment Managers click Manage Funds > Fees >
Templates.
The Templates page opens.

2. Click the blue pen icon next to the template you want to edit.
3. To delete a template, click the X next to the template.
4. To mark a template as the default template, click the radio button in the Make Default column.

5. Modify the fee schedule as required, then click Save Template.

Fees for SMAs in Multiple Hedge Fund Accounts

Fund Investment Managers with Multiple Hedge Fund accounts can set client fees for any Separately Managed Accounts
(SMAs) associated with their Hedge Fund account.

Client fee setup for an SMA in a Multiple Hedge Fund account is IDENTICAL to the client fee setup for Advisors. Fund
Investment Managers can :

l Set up client fees and configure monthly/quarterly invoices for SMAs, including Percent of Net Liquidation
Value, Flat Fee, Percent of P&L, and Fee per trade unit, just like Advisors.
l Set up High Water Marking for fees based on Percent of P&L, just like Advisors.
l Create client fee templates on the Manage Clients > Fees > Templates page.
l Submit Fund Investment Manager-calculated daily fee invoices for SMAs, just like Advisors.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 218

Chapter 7 HFCIP Fees

SMA accounts in a Multiple Hedge Fund account must also provide authorization whenever a Fund Investment Manager
submits a new fee schedule or modifies an existing fee schedule

Note that the automatic billing fee caps and limitations that apply to Advisor client accounts also apply to SMAs in a
Multiple Hedge Fund account.

For detailed instructions on configuring fees for SMAs in a Multiple Hedge Fund account, see the Advisor Client Fees
section of this guide (click the links above for more information). The step-by-step procedures are identical for SMAs
EXCEPT that the Fund Investment Manager accesses the Fees pages from the Manage Funds menu.

HFCIP Fees
Advisors use this page to modify the fees they charge on the current value of the amount that their clients have invested
in hedge funds who participate in our Hedge Fund Capital Introduction Program (HFCIP), which is part of our Investors’
Marketplace. When you invest funds for your client at the Hedge Fund Investor Site (available at the Marketplace), you
will be able to enter the fees that you charge for that investment on the form that your client must approve and sign.

For each client who invests in a participating hedge fund, you can charge fees based on the Annualized Percentage of
Net Liquidation Value of the current value of the client's investment in the Fund and/or the percentage of profit and loss
of the client's investment in the Fund, as well as configure the fee posting frequency (monthly or quarterly). After you
complete your entries on the page, you will be presented with a PDF form that your client must sign.

Fees entered for the first time in the middle of a period will be calculated and applied as of the date the fee agreement is
approved and entered into the system. Fees changed during a period will take effect as of the beginning of the next
monthly or quarterly period. If you change the frequency from monthly to quarterly, the change will take effect as of the
next calendar quarter. If you change the frequency from quarterly to monthly, the change will take effect after the end of
the current calendar quarter.

Note: Hedge funds may offer advisor clients who invest in their funds a discount on the hedge fund’s
standard management fee. Check the Hedge Fund's listing at the Hedge Fund Investor Site or con-
tact the Fund directly to see if they offer such a discount.

Who can access the HFCIP Fees page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master

To configure HFCIP fees for a client account

1. Click Manage Clients > Fees > HFCIP Fees.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 219

Chapter 7 HFCIP Fees

2. Optionally use the Smart Search to locate a specific client account (by Account ID, Account Alias, Account
Name or Household). Click any column heading to sort the list of client accounts by that column.
3. Click anywhere on a client account row.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 220

Chapter 7 HFCIP Fees

4. For each Fund in which the client has invested or plans to invest, click the Enroll check box, and then enter fees
as follows:
l In the Annualized Percentage of Net Liquidation Value field, enter a fee based on the Annualized Percentage of
Net Liquidation Value (NLV) of the current value of the client's investment in the Fund. The percentage of equity
fee must be between 0 and 1.
l In the Percentage of P&L field, enter a fee based on the percentage of profit and loss of the client's investment in
the Fund.
l In the Frequency column, select Monthly or Quarterly.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 221

Chapter 7 HFCIP Fees

5. When have completed entries for all applicable Funds, click Continue.
6. A summary of your fee entries appears. Click Generate PDF to print a PDF document that describes the new fee
schedule, and then either keep it for your records or have your client sign the form. You can choose not to have
your client form because once you confirm the fees, the client receives a request to approve the fees under Pend-
ing Items. Depending on which method you choose, the client can either return the signed form to us or confirm
the request in Account Management under Pending Requests. Instructions will be provided on the bottom of the
PDF telling you where and how to send the form.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 222

Chapter 7 Settings

Settings
The Settings menu includes the following pages:

l Account Alias - Create aliases for client accounts.

l Client Approvals - Fully Disclosed Broker Masters can enable or disable the approval of all client applications
and options trading permissions for all clients.
l Excess Funds Sweep - Configure the transfer of excess margin funds between your securities and commodities
account segments.

Account Alias
The Manage Clients > Account Alias page lets a master user define aliases for client/sub/fund accounts. To define an
Account Alias for your own master account, use the Account Alias page in the Manage Account menu. If you create an
account alias, it will appear on your account statements and if your an Advisor Master, the account aliases will also be
reflected in IB TWS.

Who can access the Account Alias page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User

l Broker Master User
l Investment Manager Master User

To define an account alias

1. Click Manage Clients > Settings > Account Alias.
2. Use the Account Selector to search for client or sub accounts by Account ID, Account Title or Account Alias,
then click the check boxes next to each account for which you want to create an account alias. Click Select
Accounts to load the Account Alias page with your selected accounts.

To select different accounts on these pages, click the Account Selector tab, click Reload Accounts in the Account
Selector to clear your selections, and then select different accounts.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 223

Chapter 7 Broker Client Approvals

3. Type the account alias in the Account Alias field for each selected account, then click Continue.

The page refreshes and displays a confirmation message.

Broker Client Approvals

Fully Disclosed Broker Masters use this page to enable or disable the approval of all client applications and options trad-
ing permissions for all clients. If you enable approval, all client applications and all client requests for options trading
permissions must be approved by you before they are submitted to us.

You must enable or disable both types of approvals at the same time; you cannot enable client application approval and
disable client option trading permissions separately. Once you enable client approvals on this page, you can view com-
pleted and pending approvals for all accounts on the Manage Clients > Dashboard page, or view pending client applic-
ations that need to be approved on the Approvals tab of the Manage Clients > Dashboard page.

Who can access the Client Approvals page?

Broker Master Users with Fully Disclosed Clients

To enable or disable client approvals

1. Click Manage Clients > Settings > Client Approvals.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 224

Chapter 7 Broker Client Approvals

2. To enable both client application approvals and client options trading permissions, click the Enable radio button.
As the Broker Master, you will now be responsible for approving all client account applications and all client
requests for options trading permissions.

To disable both client application approvals and client options trading permissions, click the Disable radio but-
ton. Client applications and client requests for options trading permissions will go directly to us for approval.
3. Click Submit.
The page refreshes with a message informing you that your setting has been saved.

4. Click Manage Clients > Dashboard to view application and client options trading approvals on the Open
Accounts tab.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 225

Chapter 7 Broker Client Approvals

l Click any client account row with a status of Approve to view the details of that account.
l The detailed view of the client account opens. At the bottom of the screen, click Accept and submit for approval
to approve the client request, or click Reject application to reject the client request. Click Registration Tasks to
view a list of all completed and incomplete registration tasks.
5. Click Manage Clients > Dashboard, then click the Approvals tab to view all pending client application
approvals.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 226

Chapter 7 Excess Funds Sweep

l Click any client account row with a status of Approve to view the details of that account.
o The detailed view of the client account opens. At the bottom of the screen, click Accept or Reject Applic-
ation to approve or reject the client application, or click Accept or Reject Options to accept or reject the
options trading for the client. Click Registration Tasks to view a list of all completed and incomplete regis-
tration tasks.

Excess Funds Sweep

Your Universal Account is authorized to trade both securities products and commodities/futures products and therefore
consists of two underlying accounts or account segments: a securities account governed by rules of the U.S. Securities
and Exchange Commission (SEC) and a futures account governed by rules of the U.S. Commodity Futures Trading Com-
mission (CFTC). As part of our Universal Account service, you have authorized us to automatically transfer funds as
necessary between your securities account and your futures account in order to satisfy margin requirements in either
account.

Use the Manage Clients > Excess Funds Sweep page to configure how you want us to handle the transfer of excess funds
between the two segments of your client's account. You can choose to sweep the funds to either the securities account or
the commodities account, or choose not to sweep funds at all.

Note the following:

l All customer deposits are initially received into your securities account and will remain in that account unless
you choose to sweep excess funds to your commodities account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 227

Chapter 7 Debit Card For Advisor Clients

l If you are identified as a securities pattern day trader, then we strongly recommend that you choose to sweep
excess funds into your securities account.
l Regardless of your choice, we will generally keep a small buffer of excess margin funds in each account in order
to prevent excessive transfers back and forth as your margined securities and futures positions fluctuate in value.
l This feature is not available in India and UKL accounts.

Who can access the Excess Funds Sweep page in the Manage Clients menu?
You can access this page if you are a Broker Master Users with Disclosed and Non-Disclosed Clients.

To set your excess funds sweep method

1. Click Manage Clients > Settings > Excess Funds Sweep.
2. Use the Account Selector to search for client or sub accounts by Account ID, Account Title or Account Alias,
then click the check boxes next to each account for which you want to set Excess Funds Sweep options. Click
Select Accounts to load the Excess Funds Sweep page with your selected accounts.

To select different accounts on these pages, click the Account Selector tab, click the Reload Accounts button in the
Account Selector to clear your selections, and then select different accounts.

3. Read the important information on the page, then select a sweep method for each selected account by clicking
one of the radio buttons.
l Do not sweep excess funds
l Sweep excess funds into my securities account
l Sweep excess funds into my commodities account
4. Click Continue. You setting is saved immediately.

Debit Card For Advisor Clients

Advisors can enable debit card applications in Account Management for their clients.

Who can access the Debit Card for Clients page in the Manage Clients menu?

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 228

Chapter 7 Debit Card For Advisor Clients

You can access this page if you are a Financial Advisor with Advisor Clients.

To enable Debit Card for Clients

1. Click Manage Clients > Settings > Debit Card for Clients.
2. Click the radio button to Yes.
3. Click Continue.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 229

Chapter 7 Trade Configuration

Trade Configuration
The Trade Configuration menu includes the following pages:

l Base Currency - Change the base currency for client accounts.

l Account Type - Upgrade client accounts from a cash account to a Margin account, or from a Margin account to a
Portfolio Margin account.
l Configuration (Client Trading) - Master users can enable or disable trading for client accounts.
l Permissions- Configure client account trading permissions.
l Restrictions - Master account users restrict their own accounts and their client/sub accounts from trading specific
symbols
l Trading Limits - Proprietary Trading Group Master users control the size and amounts that their authorized traders
(sub accounts) can trade.

Base Currency
The Base Currency page lets you modify the base currency for your account. Your base currency determines the currency
of translation for your statements, the currency used for determination of margin requirement, and for a Cash Account, the
currency of products you are allowed to trade. In addition, charges related to market data and research, inactivity fees,
and commissions on Forex trades are also charged in your base currency.

Who can access the Base Currency page in the Manage Clients menu?
You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Broker Master User (can modify the base currency for non-disclosed client accounts)
l Proprietary Trading Group STL Master User

To modify the base currency for an account

1. Click Manage Clients > Trading > Base Currency. Proprietary Trading Group Master Users click Manage
Traders > Trading > Base Currency.
2. Use the Account Selector to search for a client or sub account by Account ID, Account Title or Account Alias,
then click the desired account.

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

3. Select the radio button next to your desired base currency, then click Continue.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 230

Chapter 7 Account Type

4. Verify your selection, then click Continue to submit your currency change request.
If you need to make further changes, click Back, then make corrections before submitting.
Note that base currency changes do not take effect until the next trading day.

Account Type
Use the Account Type page to upgrade client accounts from a Cash account to a Margin account, or from a Margin
account to a Portfolio Margin account. Before you can upgrade to a margin account, you must meet the eligibility require-
ments of those accounts. For more information on margin accounts, see the Margin pages, available from the Reference
menu.

Who can access the Account Type page in the Manage Clients menu?
You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User (can only view the Account Type of client accounts and cannot change it for the master
account)
l Broker Master User (can also change the Account Type of Non-Disclosed client accounts)
l Investment Manager Master User (can only view the Account Type of client accounts and cannot change it for
the master account)

To upgrade to a margin account

1. Click Manage Clients > Trading > Account Type.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 231

Chapter 7 Client Trading

If you are an Advisor, Broker or Investment Manager, use the Account Selector at the top of the page to select an
account whose Account Type you want to view.

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

2. View the Account Type setting for the selected account.

Client Trading
The Client Trading page lets you enable or disable trading for a specific client account. Changes made on this page do
not take effect until the next business day.

Who can access the Client Trading page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User Individual

l Advisor Master User Organization
l Multiple Funds Hedge Fund Investment Manager

To enable or disable client trading

1. Click Manage Clients > Trading > Configuration.
2. Use the Account Selector to search for a client account by Account ID, Account Title or Account Alias, then
click the desired account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 232

Chapter 7 Client Trading

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

The Client Trading page opens.

The current trading status (Enabled or Disabled) of the selected client account appears.

3. To enable trading for the client account, click the Enable link.
To disable trading for the client account, click the Disable link.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 233

Chapter 7 Permissions

Permissions
Trading permissions specify which products you can trade and in which locations. You use the Permissions page to view
or modify existing trade permissions or subscribe to new permissions. When specifying permissions, you will be asked to
sign any risk disclosures required by local regulatory authority.

Who can access the Permissions page in the Manage Clients/Funds menu?
You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User Individual/Organization (can only view)

l Broker Master User (Non-disclosed Broker Masters can modify the trading permissions of client accounts)
l Investment Manager Master User (can only view)

The Permissions page is available in PDF format for advisor clients.

To set trading permissions

1. Click Manage Clients/Funds > Trading > Permissions. The Trading Permissions page appears by default.
2. Use the Account Selector to search for client or sub accounts by Account ID, Account Title or Account Alias,
then click the desired account to view the pending items or requests for that account.

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

3. In the Trading Programs section of the page, view the trading programs in which the selected account is par-
ticipating.
l The Stock Yield Enhancement Program allows us to borrow shares from you in exchange for cash collateral, and
then lend the shares to traders who want to sell them short and are willing to pay a fee to borrow them.
l Portfolio Margin customers can also sign up for our Pre-Borrow Program, which lets you pre-borrow stocks for
short sales in Trader Workstation instead of waiting three days until the settlement date. Note that we will charge
you the indicative borrow rate for each day up to the settlement date beginning with the trade date, and you can
find this rate on your daily Activity Statement.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 234

Chapter 7 Restrictions

4. The Trading Permissions section of the page lists all of the products that the selected account can trade and the
countries in which it can trade them.

Restrictions
Set all trading restrictions in the Pre-Trade Compliance tool. Click the Launch Pre-Trade Compliance button to open
the program.

For more information about the Pre-Trade Compliance tool, see the Pre-Trade Compliance Tool Users' Guide.

Trading Limits
The Trading Limits page lets Proprietary Trading Group Master users control the size and amounts that their authorized
traders (sub accounts) can trade.

Who can access the Trading Limits page?

You can access this page only if you are a Proprietary Trading Group Master User.

To view and set trading limits

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 235

Chapter 7 Trading Limits

1. Click Manage Traders > Trading > Limits.

2. Use the Account Selector to search for a client account by Account ID, Account Title or Account Alias, then
click the desired account.

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

The page updates to display three expandable trading limit sections.

3. To set order value limits, click to expand that section, enter values and click Continue.
l Dollar Value Per Order - The total value of any one order, in millions of dollars. For example, a value of .5 = a
limit of 500,000 USD.
l Net Dollar Value Per Day - The net value of buys and sells for an entire trading day, in millions of dollars. For
example, if you bought 50 million and sold 15 million in a day, the net dollar value for that day would be 35 mil-
lion.
l Gross Dollar Value Per Day - The aggregate value of buys and sells for an entire trading day. For example, if you
bought 50 million and sold 15 million in a day, the gross dollar value for that day would be 65 million.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 236

Chapter 7 Trading Limits

4. To set order quantity limits, click to expand that section, then enter order quantity limits for: cash, stock (STK),
futures (FUT), options (OPT), futures options (FOP), warrants (WAR), bonds, contracts for differences (CFD), or
Dutch warrants (IOPT). Click Continue when you are done entering values.

5. To set Exchange for Physical Limits, click to expand that section, then enter values for any of the following and
click Continue.
l Maximum Nominal Exchange for Physical Per Order - The total value of any one Exchange for Physical (EFP)
order, in millions of dollars.
l Maximum Net Exchange for Physical Per Trades - The net value of EFP buys and sells for an entire trading day,
in millions of dollars.
l Maximum Gross Exchange for Physical Trades - The aggregate value of EFP buys and sells for an entire trading
day. For example, if you bought 50 million and sold 15 million in a day, the gross dollar value for that day
would be 65 million.

6. Verify your changes on the Verify Trading Limits, then click Continue.
Click Back if you need to make further changes.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 237

Chapter 7 Trading Limits

7. A confirmation number is sent to your email address of record. Enter this number on the Confirmation page that
appears, then click Continue.
New trading limits and changes to existing trading limits go into effect on the next business day.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 238

Chapter 7 Security

Security
The Security menu includes the following pages:

l Audit Trail - Master users can view Account Management requests from client accounts.

Audit Trail
The Audit Trail page lets Master account users view Account Management requests from client accounts.

Who can access the Audit Trail page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User

l Broker Master User

To view the audit trail

1. Click Manage Clients > Security > Audit Trail.
2. Use the Account Selector to search for a client account by Account ID, Account Title or Account Alias, then
click the desired account.

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

3. Select the number of days back you wish the audit trail to include by selecting All, Previous 90 Days or Previous
180 Days from the Show requests drop-down list, then click Submit.
The page refreshes with the updated information.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 239

Chapter 7 Audit Trail

The audit trail displays type of request, the date and time of the request, the date and time the request was updated (if
applicable), and the state of the request, including:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 240

Chapter 7 Updating a Client's W8/W9

Updating a Client's W8/W9

The Client W8/W9 page lets Non-disclosed Broker Masters fill out or update an IRS Form W-9 for clients who are legal
residents and citizens of the US (the US is your country of organization formation and organization registration). If the
client is not a US legal resident and not a US citizen, the form that appears is IRS Form W-8.

Who can access the Client W8/W9 page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Broker Master User (Non-disclosed clients only)

To update your W-9

1. Click Manage Clients > Create and Link Accounts > Client W8/W9
2. Complete the W9 form, then click Continue.
3. To access the IRS instructions for the form, click the Form Instructions link in the upper right corner of the page.
The following figure shows part of the W-9 form.

4. To update a client's W8 form, select the client account ID from the Account ID list, then select the tax treaty coun-
try for that account from the Country drop-down. Click Continue, then complete the form.
The following figure shows the W-8 page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 241

Chapter 7 Updating a Client's W8/W9

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 242

Chapter 7 Users

Users
The Users page lets you:

l Add users to an account.

l Modify Account Management access rights for existing users.
l Add up to two usernames for a user.
l Delete users from an account.

Who can access the Users page in the Manage Clients menu?
You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User

Individual Account User Rules

The following rules and limitations apply to Individual accounts:

l Up to two usernames may be created for the same person.

l Up to 5 persons may be added with a Power of Attorney, which will be provided when adding users to an indi-
vidual account.
l Individual Advisors may not add any persons other than themselves (they can have two usernames for them-
selves).

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 243

Chapter 7 User Information Displayed on User Access Rights Page

l Joint Accounts may add two usernames for each account holder.
l Trust accounts may add up to two usernames for each trustee.

User Information Displayed on User Access Rights Page

The User Access Rights page displays information about all users registered with your account. This is a summary of the
information entered when you added the user to your account, and includes the following:

Column Description
First Name The user’s first name.

MI The user’s middle initial.

Last Name The user’s last name.

User Name The user’s user name.

Type Depending on the type of

account you have, this cor-
responds to the Type and Entity
Relationship field on the Add
New User and Access Rights
page. It could be Employee or
Non-employee or a specific role
in your company, such as CEO
or Treasurer.

Accessible Rights Click View Rights to displays a

popup summary of the user's
access rights.

Status The status of the user. For

example, “Open” or “Pending
Confirmation.”

Modify Displays a Modify link for users’

whose status is “Open.” Click
this link to modify the users’
access rights.

Delete Displays a Delete link. Click this

link to delete the user from your
account.

Adding a User
You can add users to your account and grant them access to a subset of Account Management functions, including grant-
ing access to functions for one or more sub accounts. You cannot grant access to Funding functions to a new user.

To add a user to the account

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 244

Chapter 7 Adding a User

1. Click Manage Clients > Users.

2. Use the Account Selector to search for a client account by Account ID, Account Title or Account Alias, then
click the desired account.

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

The Users page opens.

3. Click Add User.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 245

Chapter 7 Adding a User

4. On the Add User page, enter all required information, including name, six-character username prefix, password,
and email address.
5. On the same page, assign Account Management functions to the user by clicking the appropriate check boxes in
the Access Rights section. Access groups correspond to Account Management menus.
l If you have created any User Roles, optionally select a User Role. The access rights saved with the User Role will
be applied to the new user.
l Click an access group to expand the section, then click check boxes to grant access to individual functions.
l To grant access to all functions within an access group, click the check box next to the access group name. If a
function is not checked, the user will not be able to access the function in Account Management:
6. If you are adding a user to a multiple account structure, when you click a check box for an Access group or for an
individual function inside an Access group, the Assign Accounts box opens.
Use the Assign Accounts box to select which accounts you want this user to be able to access for the selected function
or group of functions. You can select:

l All for all accounts, including the Master and all sub accounts;
l Master to grant access to only the Master account;
l Sub All to grant access to all sub accounts;
l Sub Specific, to grant access to individual sub accounts. .

If you select this option, two lists of client accounts - Available and Selected - appears. To select individual client
accounts, highlight them in the Available Accounts box and click the right arrow button to move them into the
Selected Clients box. Remove client accounts from the Selected Accounts box by highlighting them then clicking
the left arrow button.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 246

Chapter 7 Adding a User

Click Continue to save your account assignments.

All account users automatically get rights to Security functions (Password, Secure Login System Secure Device Sharing,
and Voting Subscriptions), which are located in the Manage Account > Security access group, and the functions in the
Manage Account > Settings access group (User Information and Email Address).

The following figure shows an example of an access rights configuration. In this example, a user is being granted access
to all functions in the Reports > Activity menu of Account Management.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 247

Chapter 7 Viewing Pending User Access Rights

7. On the same page, you can select the accounts to which the access rights are assigned.
l Highlight one or more individual sub/client accounts in the list (Ctrl+ click to select multiple non-adjacent
accounts in the list; Shift+click to select multiple adjacent accounts in the list). Click the All Sub/Client
Accounts check box to select ALL accounts.
8. Click Continue.
9. Verify that all the information is correct, then click Continue.
If you need to make further changes, click Back, then make corrections before submitting.
10. Enter the confirmation number sent to you via email, then click Continue.
If you have not received a confirmation number, click Request Confirmation Number to have a confirmation number
sent to your email address on record.

11. Click Cancel to cancel your changes.

Viewing Pending User Access Rights

Click Pending Authorization in the Status column for any Security Officer listed to view a popup that displays the
pending user access rights.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 248

Chapter 7 Viewing Eligible Security Officers on Pending Items

Viewing Eligible Security Officers on Pending Items

On the Users page, you can move your mouse over the Status of any Security Officer listed with a status of Pending
Authorization to see a popup with Eligible Security Officers displayed:

You can view your pending changes to user access rights on the Home > Pending Items page. Move your mouse over
those pending items to see a popup with Eligible Security Officers displayed:

Modifying User Access Rights

You can modify Account Management access rights for an existing user on the User Access Rights page. For example, if
you add a user to your account, you may want to modify the user's access rights at a later date.

To modify access rights for an existing user

1. Click Manage Clients > Users .
2. Use the Account Selector to search for a client account by Account ID, Account Title or Account Alias, then
click the desired account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 249

Chapter 7 Modifying User Access Rights

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

3. Click the Modify link next to the user whose access rights you want to modify.
4. On the next page, modify the access rights for the user by selecting or deselecting check boxes next to the avail-
able Account Management functions, including changing any authorization privileges you may have assigned or
need to assign.
l Click an access group to expand the section, then click check boxes to grant access to individual functions.
l To grant access to all functions within an access group, click the check box next to the access group name. If a
function is not checked, the user will not be able to access the function in Account Management:
5. If you are modifying a user in a multiple account structure, click Modify Accounts for any individual function
inside an Access group. The Assign Accounts box opens.

Use the Assign Accounts box to change which accounts you want this user to be able to access for the selected function
or group of functions. You can select:

l All for all accounts, including the Master and all sub accounts;
l Master to grant access to only the Master account;
l Sub All to grant access to all sub accounts;
l Sub Specific to grant access to individual sub accounts.

If you select this option, two lists of client accounts - Available and Selected - appears. To select individual client
accounts, highlight them in the Available Accounts box and click the right arrow button to move them into the

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 250

Chapter 7 Adding Usernames to a User

Selected Clients box. Remove client accounts from the Selected Accounts box by highlighting them then clicking
the left arrow button.

Click Continue to save your account assignments.

6. Verify that all the information is correct, then click Continue.

If you need to make further changes, click Back, then make corrections before submitting.
7. Enter the confirmation number sent to you via email, then click Continue.
If you have not received a confirmation number, click Request Confirm to have a confirmation number sent to your
email address on record.

8. Click Cancel to cancel your changes.

Adding Usernames to a User

Account Management lets you assign up to two usernames for each individual user. For example, an individual user
might want to add a second user name in order to log in on two different machines for testing purposes.

To add a username for a user

1. Click Manage Clients > Users.
2. Use the Account Selector to search for a client account by Account ID, Account Title or Account Alias, then
click the desired account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 251

Chapter 7 Deleting a User

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

3. Click the 2nd User link next to the user for whom you want to add a second user name.

4. On the next page, enter information for the second username, then click Continue.
5. Verify that all the information is correct, then click Continue.
If you need to make further changes, click Back, then make corrections before submitting.
6. Enter the confirmation number sent to you via email, then click Continue.
If you have not received a confirmation number, click Request Confirmation Number to have a confirmation
number sent to your email address on record.
7. Click Cancel to cancel your changes.

Deleting a User
To delete a user from the account
1. Click Manage Clients > Users.
2. Use the Account Selector to search for a client account by Account ID, Account Title or Account Alias, then
click the desired account.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 252

Chapter 7 Deleting a User

The Account Selector is closed once you select an account. To change the selected account, click the tab to open the
Account Selector, and then click a different account.

3. Click the Delete link next to the user you want to delete.

Account Management access for that user is disabled instantly and Trading Access is disabled by the next calendar day.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 253

Chapter 7 CRM

CRM
Customer Relationship Management (CRM) allows Advisors and Brokers to easily store and view information about all
of their contacts, including clients, prospects, former clients and other personal and professional relationships. The data-
base-driven CRM is a convenient way for Advisors and Brokers to view all current clients, prospective clients and other
contacts from a single screen in Account Management, and to turn a prospect into a client by inviting the person to com-
plete a client account application that has been prefilled with data from CRM. You can easily navigate within Account
Management to manage existing client accounts. Every record in CRM is considered a "contact" and you can designate
contacts as being of a certain type (prospects, clients, etc.).

CRM allows you to create and store emails, notes, tasks and calendar events for each contact; send bulk emails to mul-
tiple contacts and organize contacts into groups. We do not store or have access to your emails, notes and tasks; they are
stored at Rackspace, a third-party cloud management solution provider.

Who can access the CRM page?

CRM access is configured through user access rights. For more information, see our users' guide.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 254

Chapter 7 CRM Home Page

CRM Home Page

From the CRM home page, Advisors and Brokers can:

l View, sort and perform a simple search of contacts and set the number to view on a single page.
l Enter a new contact.
l View and open an individual contact.
l Set and reset a password for notes and tasks.
l View current tasks and scheduled events.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 255

Chapter 7 Individual CRM Contacts

l Create and access a Rackspace mailbox for all of your CRM emails.
l Access the Advanced Search page to enter a variety of search criteria, add contacts to an existing group, remove
contacts from an existing group and send bulk email to multiple contacts.
l Access and configure reports from a selection of fields and filters.
l Organize your contacts into groups.
l Send bulk email to multiple contacts or groups;
l Import contacts from an Excel file.

Icons on CRM pages give you access to the most important functions in CRM. For more information, see CRM Icon
Reference.

Individual CRM Contacts

Use the sorting and searching methods on the CRM home page to find a specific contact, and then click the contact in
the list to display that individual record.

Individual CRM contact records can include:

o Personal information;
o Prospect information;
o Financial information;
o Employment information;
o Trading experience;
o Client account invitations sent;
o Notes;
o Access to CRM emails hosted on Rackspace;
o Tasks;
o Events;
o Documents;

From an individual contact record, you can perform many additional functions, including:

l Edit the information stored in the contact record;

l View, add, sort and delete notes;
l Add prospect information to a contact, which changes the contact to a prospect;
l Enter a new contact;
l View all emails that have been sent to the contact;
l Send an email;

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 256

Chapter 7 Sharing CRM with Another User

l Send a prospect electronic invitation to open a client account, with information from CRM already entered into
the new application for you.
l Add, update and delete tasks.
l Delete and print;
l Export to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet;
l Generate a VCard (Microsoft Outlook-compatible);
l Schedule events;
l Upload documents associated with a specific contact, prospect or client;
l Go to the Dashboard to view account details for an existing client's open account.
l View all accounts for a specific client.

Sharing CRM with Another User

Advisors and Brokers who have additional users associated with their master account can allow these users to access all
of CRM. To enable CRM access for these users, send an email to crm@interactivebrokers.com and include your account
number the name of the primary master account user. Once enabled, these additional users will have access all CRM fea-
tures.

Note that only one user can edit a CRM contact at one time. A second user will not be able to edit a contact that is cur-
rently being edited by another user. If this happens, a message appears to inform the second user that the record is locked
for editing.

Short Videos

Adding and Importing Records

Adding Notes, Tasks and Events to Records

Sending Emails and Creating Groups

If you have any questions about CRM, send us an email at crm@interactivebrokers.com.

View, Sort and Search Records

Your saved CRM contacts (or a subset of your contacts depending on how many contacts you have saved) are listed on
the CRM home page sorted by Title by default. Each item in the list also displays the type of record (Contact, Prospect
or Client) and Account IDs for clients.

You can view, sort and search for records in the following ways:

l Sort the list of records by clicking any column heading (Title, Type or Accounts).
l Use the letters at the top to view records that begin with a specific letter. Click a letter to view only those records
whose Title begins with that letter.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 257

Chapter 7 View Current Tasks and Events

l Search for records by name. Type the search word in the Search field at the top of the page and then click Search.

l Filter the list to display only Prospects, only Contacts, only Clients or All records using the Filter drop-down.
You can use the Filter drop-down in conjunction with the search field to narrow your search. Select the record
type and then click Search to filter the list of records.

l If you have a lot of records, they are displayed on multiple pages. You can set the number of records to display
on a single page using the control at the bottom of the page (display 20, 30, 40 or 50 records at a time). This con-
trol lets you see how many pages of contacts you have at a glance and which page you are looking at (for
example, 1/31 lets you know that you are looking at page 1 of 31), and lets you quickly jump to the previous
page and first page or to the next page and last page.

View Current Tasks and Events

You can view all current tasks and a calendar showing all events for the current month on the CRM home page. You can
also:

l Sort tasks by status

l Display a specific event by clicking a date on the calendar
l Navigate to different months and years on the calendar

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 258

Chapter 7 View Current Tasks and Events

To sort tasks by status

1. In My Tasks, select one of the statuses from the View Tasks by drop-down:
l All
l Pending
l In Progress
l Completed
l Suspended

2. The list of tasks displayed in My Tasks updates accordingly.

3. You can also click any task displayed in My Tasks to jump to the Tasks tab for individual record for whom the
task was created.

To display a specific event

My Events displays a calendar view of all events for the current month. Dates on which an event is scheduled appear in
light blue.

1. Select a specific date on the My Events calendar to display a description and date and time of the event(s) sched-
uled for that day.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 259

Chapter 7 Entering a New Contact, Prospect or Client

2. The selected date appears in a darker blue on the calendar.

3. You can also click the event description below the calendar to jump to the individual record for whom the event
was created.

To navigate to different months and years on the calendar

Do any of the following to display a different month and year on the My Events calendar:

l Use the month drop-down to select a different month.

l Use the year drop-down to select a different year.
l Use the small blue arrows on the left and right of the top bar of the calendar to quickly display the previous and
next month, respectively.

Entering a New Contact, Prospect or Client

CRM is built on a database that contains a record for each contact, prospect and client.

Short Video - Adding and Importing Records

To enter a new contact, prospect or client

1. Click Manage Clients > CRM.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 260

Chapter 7 Entering a New Contact, Prospect or Client

2. Click the New Record icon.

The New Record page opens.

3. Select the type of relationship you want to add from the drop-down at the top of the page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 261

Chapter 7 Entering a New Contact, Prospect or Client

4. Fill out the form completely.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 262

Chapter 7 Entering a New Contact, Prospect or Client

5. Click Save.
6. Optionally, do one of the following:
l Click Exit or the Home icon (located in the upper right corner of the page), to return to the CRM main screen.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 263

Chapter 7 Edit an Existing Contact, Prospect or Client

Note: You can also enter a new record by clicking the New Record icon from any existing individual
record.

Edit an Existing Contact, Prospect or Client

To edit an existing contact, prospect or client
1. Click Manage Clients > CRM.
2. Use the search function to find the contact, prospect or client you want to edit, then click the name of the person
you want to edit.
The complete record opens.

3. By default, the record opens with all sections expanded. Collapse all sections by clicking Collapse All at the top
of the record. Expand all sections by clicking Expand All.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 264

Chapter 7 Edit an Existing Contact, Prospect or Client

Expand an individual section by clicking the section heading.

To edit the next record, click the Next Record button. To edit the previous record, click the Previous Record button.

4. Edit information in any section by clicking the blue pencil icon located in the section heading.
The complete record opens, with each field editable.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 265

Chapter 7 Additional Functions for Individual Records

5. Edit information in the record as required.

6. Change the type of record from contact to prospect using the drop-down field at the top of the page.
7. Click Save to save your changes, Exit to return to the record without saving your changes, or the Home icon to
return to the CRM main screen.

Additional Functions for Individual Records

In addition to viewing lists of clients, prospects and contacts and entering and editing records, Advisors can perform the
following tasks from individual records:

l Go to the previous or next record.

l View, add, sort and delete notes.
l Add Prospect Information to a contact record. This changes the contact to a prospect.
l Enter a new record.
l Send an email to a contact, prospect or client.
l View all emails sent to a person.
l Send a prospect or a contact an invitation to open a client account. The information already entered in CRM for
the prospect or contact is automatically entered into the new client application.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 266

Chapter 7 Additional Functions for Individual Records

l Add, update and delete tasks.

l Delete and print individual records.
l Export an individual record to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet by downloading them as a .CSV (comma-separated
values) file.
l Generate a VCard for an individual record (Microsoft Outlook-compatible .VCF file)
l View all accounts for a specific client.
l Schedule events with a specific contact, prospect or client.
l Upload documents associated with a specific contact, prospect or client.
l Go to the Dashboard, where you can drill down to view account details for any client account.

Short Video - Adding Notes, Tasks and Events

To go to the previous or next record

1. On the CRM home page, click the title of the record you want to view.
2. Click the Previous Record or Next Record button to view the previous or next CRM record .

To view, add, sort and delete notes

We do not store or have access to your notes; they are stored on Rackspace. Before you can add notes to a CRM record,
you must set a Notes password from the CRM home page. See Set and Reset Your Notes Password for details.

1. On the CRM home page, use the search function to find the client, prospect or contact to whose record you want
to add a note.
2. Click the title of the record to which you want to add a note.
The record opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 267

Chapter 7 Additional Functions for Individual Records

3. Click the Notes tab.

The Notes tab lists all of your existing notes.

4. Click the Create Note button in the Client Communications section. The Note box opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 268

Chapter 7 Additional Functions for Individual Records

5. Start typing a note in the space provided in the Note box.

6. Click the Save icon in the Note box to save your note. Click the X icon to close the Note box.
7. To sort the list of notes, select Newest or Oldest from the Sort drop-down.
8. Delete a note by clicking the X icon below the note.

To add Prospect Information to a contact record

1. On the CRM home page, use the search function to find contact to whose record you want to add prospect inform-
ation.
2. Click the title of the record.
The record opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 269

Chapter 7 Additional Functions for Individual Records

3. Click the icon located in the Add Prospect Information heading. Note that this is only available in Contact
records with no Prospect Information.

4. The complete record opens, allowing you to add information in ALL sections.
5. Click Save when you are done editing.
On the CRM home screen, the record type is now listed as a Prospect.

To enter a new record

1. Click the New Record icon from any individual record.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 270

Chapter 7 Additional Functions for Individual Records

2. Create the new record by completing the form, and then clicking Save.
You can also enter a new record by clicking New Record on the main CRM screen.

To send an email to a contact, prospect or client

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 271

Chapter 7 Additional Functions for Individual Records

We do not store or have access to your CRM emails; they are stored on Rackspace. Before you can send an email to a
CRM contact, prospect or client, you must request a Rackspace Mailbox from the CRM home page. See Set Up and Use
a CRM Mailbox for details.

Short Video - Sending Emails and Creating Groups

1. On the CRM home page, use the search function to find the client, prospect or contact whose record you want to
view.
2. Click the title of the record.
The record opens.
3. Click the Emails tab.
All of the emails you have sent to this contact, prospect or client appears on this page.

To send a prospect or a contact an invitation to open a client account

1. On the CRM home page, use the search function to find the contact or prospect to whom you want to send an
account invitation.
2. Click the title of the record.
The record opens.
3. Do one of the following:
l Click the Application Invite link to send a fully electronic client application invitation. The Advisor Client Invit-
ation page opens.

l Select the type of application for the new client, then click Submit.
l On the Client Fee Setup page, select the type of fees for the new client, then click Continue. For more inform-
ation, see Inviting a Client to Start an Electronic Application.
l Follow the instructions on the screens that appear to complete the client account invitation process. Note that the
application already contains information from the CRM record.
l An email is sent to the new client, inviting him or her to complete an account application electronically.
l Click the Semi-electronic Invite link to send a semi-electronic client application invitation.
l Click Electronic Client Application for a Semi Electronic Application. For more information, see Starting a Semi-
Electronic Application.
l Select the type of client account, and then click Continue.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 272

Chapter 7 Additional Functions for Individual Records

l Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the electronic portion of the application, which already contains
information from the CRM record.
l When you have completed the electronic application process, print the completed application and send it to your
new client for his or her signature.

To add, update and delete tasks

You can add important reminders to CRM records in the form of tasks, which can easily be added, updated or deleted.
Like Notes, Tasks are stored on Rackspace. You must set a notes/tasks password before you can add notes and tasks to a
record. You can view a summary of current tasks in My Tasks on the CRM home page.

1. On the CRM home page, use the search function to find the client, prospect or contact whose record you want to
update with a task.
2. Click the title of the record.
The record opens.
3. Click the Tasks tab.

4. To add a task:
l Click Add Task. The Add Task section appears at the bottom of the page.

l In the first drop-down from the left, select the status of the task (Pending, In Progress, Completed, or Suspended).
Pending is the default status.
l In the second drop-down from the left, select the priority of the task (Low, Medium or High). Medium is the
default priority.
l Type a name for the task.
l The date field displays today's date by default. Click in the date field to display a calendar, which lets you select
a different date.
l Click Save. The new task appears in the task list.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 273

Chapter 7 Additional Functions for Individual Records

5. To update a task:
l Click the radio button for the task. The Update Task section appears at the bottom of the page.
l Update the task status, priority, name or date, and then click Save. The task is updated in the task list.
6. To delete a task, click the X icon for the task, and then click OK in the confirmation popup.

To delete an individual record

1. On the CRM home page, use the search function to find the client, prospect or contact whose record you want to
delete.
2. Click the title of the record.
The record opens.
3. Click the Delete link.

To print an individual record

1. On the CRM home page, use the search function to find the client, prospect or contact whose record you want to
print.
2. Click the title of the record.
The record opens.
3. Click the Print link.

To export an individual record to Excel in a .CSV file

You can download any CRM record to a .CSV (comma-separated values) file, which can then be opened in Microsoft
Excel or a similar program.

1. On the CRM home page, use the search function to find the client, prospect or contact whose record you want to
export to a .CSV file.
2. Click the title of the record.
The record opens.
3. Click the Export link located.
4. You are prompted to save the file to a location on your computer.

To generate a VCard for an individual record (Microsoft Outlook-compatible .VCF file)

You can download any CRM record to a .VCF file, which is a VCard that can be opened in Microsoft Outlook.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 274

Chapter 7 Additional Functions for Individual Records

1. On the CRM home page, use the search function to find the prospect, contact or client whose record you want to
export to a .VCard.
2. Click the title of the record.
The record opens.
3. Click the VCard link located.
4. You are prompted to save the file to a location on your computer.
5. See Microsoft Outlook's instructions to learn how to import the VCard and add the contact to your Outlook con-
tacts.

To view all accounts for a specific client

1. On the CRM home page, use the search function to find the client, prospect or contact whose record you want to
view.
2. Click the title of the record.
The record opens.
3. Click the Accounts tab to view all accounts for the client, including Account Title, Account ID, Account Type,
Date Applied, Date Open, Date Funded, Date Closed (if applicable) and Status for each account.

To upload documents associated with a specific contact, prospect or client

You can upload one or more documents associated with a contact, prospect or client from an individual CRM record.
Each document must be between 0 and 2 MB and cannot be an executable (.exe) file.

1. On the CRM home page, use the search function to find a client, prospect or contact.
2. Click the title of the record.
The record opens.
3. Click the Documents tab. This tab lists all previously uploaded documents that are currently stored with the con-
tact, prospect or client record.
4. Click the Choose File button, and then search for and select the document you want to upload. The document
must be no larger than 2 MB.
5. Click Submit.
The document appears in the list of documents.
6. To delete a previously uploaded document, click the X icon on the document row.

To jump to the Dashboard

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 275

Chapter 7 Set and Reset Your Notes/Tasks Password

1. On the CRM home page, use the search function to find the client, prospect or contact whose record you want to
view.
2. Click the title of the record.
The record opens.
3. Click the Accounts tab.
4. Click the Dashboard button located on the upper right corner of the screen. The Dashboard main page opens.

Set and Reset Your Notes/Tasks Password

You can add notes and tasks to any individual CRM record. We do not store or have access to your CRM notes; they are
stored on Rackspace.

Before you can add notes and tasks to CRM records, you must set a password from the CRM home page.

To set and reset your CRM notes/tasks password

1. Click Manage Clients > CRM.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 276

Chapter 7 Set and Reset Your Notes/Tasks Password

2. Click the Set/Reset Notes/Tasks Password icon near the top of the page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 277

Chapter 7 Set Up and Use a CRM Mailbox

3. Enter a password and then click Save. (Note that you can return to the main CRM page by clicking the Home
icon located on the right side of the screen.
You will now be able to access the Notes and Tasks features in any individual CRM record.

4. To reset your notes/tasks password, click the Set/Reset Notes/Tasks Password button on the CRM home page,
and then enter a new password and click Save.

Set Up and Use a CRM Mailbox

All Interactive Brokers CRM notes and emails are hosted on Rackspace, a leading managed cloud solution provider.

Requirements for a Rackspace Mailbox

Rackspace Mailboxes use your own email address. Therefore, you must have a pre-existing email address at your own
domain before your Rackspace Mailbox can be created. There is one way to do this:

l You already have your own email address at your own domain. For example, jsmith@acmeadvisors.com.
Note: To maintain the security of your CRM emails stored on Rackspace, email addresses at public
domains, such as Yahoo, Gmail, Hotmail or Outlook, are not allowed.

Additional Information

l A Rackspace mailbox costs $1.00 per mailbox per month, subject to any change implemented by Rackspace.
l Your Rackspace mailbox provides 25 GB of storage.
l Once your Rackspace mailbox has been created, you will be notified in Pending Items in Account Management.
You can then access your mailbox from the CRM page or from any individual CRM record.
l You can update your Rackspace mailbox password at any time by accessing Settings from within your Rackspace
mailbox.

l Once you submit your Rackspace mailbox request, you will be charged for that period. Rackspace does not offer
refunds for canceled mailboxes.

Additional Services Available from Rackspace

l Archive your emails for $3 per month.

To sign up for this service, send an email to crm@interactivebrokers.com.

To create a mailbox on Rackspace for CRM and to access your Rackspace mailbox once it has been created
1. Click Manage Clients > CRM.
2. Click the Show Email icon on the CRM home page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 278

Chapter 7 Disclaimer

3. A page opens with instructions on how to request a Rackspace mailbox. Read the instructions completely, and
then click the Request Mailbox button.
You will be presented with further instructions and information.

4. When your Rackspace mailbox has been created, we will notify you via Pending Items on the Account Man-
agement Home page.

The Rackspace email client looks like this:

Disclaimer

Interactive Brokers will never access your CRM notes and emails. To the extent that the Customer uses Rackspace to
transport data or communications, Interactive Brokers disclaims any liability for interception of any such data or com-
munications. IB is not responsible, and makes no warranties regarding, the access, speed, availability or security of Rack-
space, Internet or network services.

Events
The Events tab, available from any individual CRM record, lets Advisors and Brokers schedule events using an inter-
active calendar with daily, weekly and monthly views. Events can be anything from scheduled meetings to phone calls
to personal tasks. You can also view currently scheduled events on the My Events calendar on the CRM home page.

To schedule an event
1. On the CRM home page, use the search function to find the client, prospect or contact to whose record you want
to add a note.
2. Click the title of the record to which you want to add a note.
The record opens.
3. Click the Events tab. The weekly event calendar opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 279

Chapter 7 Events

4. Use the buttons on the upper right to change the calendar view: Day for daily, Week for weekly or Month for
monthly. Click the Today button to display today's date on the calendar. Use the right and left buttons on the
upper left to navigate between days, weeks or months.
5. You can enter a new event in any calendar view: Daily, Weekly or Monthly. Click the day and time at which
you want to schedule the new event.
The Enter Event box opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 280

Chapter 7 Events

6. Enter the title of the event, and then select a start and end time. Click in the Start field to open the interactive cal-
endar.

Click the desired start time on the right side of the interactive calendar, using the scroll bar to scroll to earlier or later
times. You can also schedule the event to occur on any day using the interactive calendar. Once you click a time, the
interactive calendar closes.

Repeat for the event end time.

7. To schedule an all-day event, simply click the All Day check box.
8. Click Ok to save the event and add it to the calendar.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 281

Chapter 7 Events

9. To edit an event that is already scheduled (for example, to change the scheduled start and end times), click the
event on the calendar, and edit the information in the Edit Event box. Click Save to save the event and close the
box.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 282

Chapter 7 CRM Advanced Search

10. To delete an event that is already scheduled, click the event on the calendar, and then click Delete in the Edit
Event box.

CRM Advanced Search

While the CRM home page lets you perform simple searches name or type of record, the Advanced Search page lets you:

l Conduct a detailed search by entering a variety of search criteria;

l Add or remove one of more contacts to or from an existing group;
l Send a bulk email to one or more contacts.
l Open an individual record.

You can also collapse the Search Criteria by clicking anywhere in the Search Criteria header bar.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 283

Chapter 7 CRM Advanced Search

To conduct an advanced search

1. From the CRM home page, click the Advanced Search button or the Advanced Search icon.

2. Enter search criteria into one or more of the Search Criteria fields, and then click Search.

3. To begin a new search, click Reset.

To add or remove one of more contacts to or from an existing group

1. Conduct an advanced search. In the list of records that appears, Note the Groups column. You can click the
Groups column heading to sort the list by group, making it easier to view your groups.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 284

Chapter 7 CRM Advanced Search

2. Click the check box for each contact in the list that you want to add or remove from an existing group. As soon
as you select one check box, the Add To Group and Remove From Group buttons become active.
3. To add the selected contacts to an existing group, click Add to Group, and then choose the desired group from
the drop-down in the Add To Group box. Click Save to close the box and save your changes.

4. To remove the selected contacts from an existing group, click Remove From Group, and then choose the desired
group from the drop-down in the Remove From Group box. Click Remove to remove the selected contact(s) from
the selected group and close the box.

To send a bulk email

Bulk emails let you send a single email to multiple contacts at the same time. Bulk email is available only to customers
with a Rackspace mailbox in CRM.

1. Conduct an advanced search.

2. Click the check box for each contact in the list to whom you want to send a bulk email. The Bulk Email button
becomes active.
3. Click Bulk Email.
A blank email with the To field already filled in with the selected contact emails opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 285

Chapter 7 CRM Groups

4. Enter a subject, optionally enter email addresses in the Cc: field, enter the text of your email, and optionally
attach files, using the Browse button to search and select files on your computer.
5. Click Submit to send your email to all of recipients.
Attachments are NOT saved in your Rackspace Sent folder. CC yourself to keep a copy of the email with the attach-
ments.

To open an individual record

1. Conduct an advanced search.
2. In the list of records, click the Title of the record you want to open.

CRM Groups
You can organize your contact records into groups. On the CRM home page and Advanced Search page, the list of
records can be sorted by Group. On the Advanced Search page, you can add and remove one or more contacts to and
from existing groups or send bulk email to members of a group.

Use the Manage Groups page to:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 286

Chapter 7 CRM Groups

l View the current members of any group.

l Add a new group and add members to the new group;
l Delete an existing group;
l Rename a group;
l Send a bulk email to all members of a group.

To view the current members in any group

1. From the CRM home page, click the View Groups icon.

The Manage Groups page opens. The Manage Groups page lists all of your current groups, along with the number of con-
tact records in each group in parentheses next to the group name.

2. Click the name of the group whose members you want to view. The Manage Groups Membership page opens, dis-
playing the expanded Advanced Search Criteria panel at the top of the page and the members of the selected
group below.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 287

Chapter 7 CRM Groups

To add a new group and add members to the group

Short Video - Sending Emails and Creating Groups

1. From the CRM home page, click the View Groups icon.

The Manage Groups page opens.

2. Click the Plus Sign icon on the upper right of the group list.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 288

Chapter 7 CRM Groups

3. In the Create Group box, type the name of the new group, and then click Save.

The new group appears in the group list.

4. Click the name of the new group to open the Manage Groups Membership page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 289

Chapter 7 CRM Groups

5. Use the Search Criteria panel to search for the contact records that you want to add to the new group. Enter cri-
teria into the desired search fields, and then click Search. The list of contact records updates to match your search.
6. Click the check box next to each contact that you want to add to the new group. As soon as you select one
record in the list, the Add to Group button becomes active.
7. Click Add to Group.
8. In the Add to Group box, select the new group from the drop-down and then click Save.
The contacts you selected are now part of the new group you created.

To delete an existing group

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 290

Chapter 7 CRM Groups

1. From the CRM home page, click the View Groups icon.

The Manage Groups page opens.

2. Click the Edit Group icon on the row for the group you want to delete.

The Edit Group bar opens.

3. Click the red X icon to delete the group. Click the blue arrow to close the Edit Group bar.
4. Click OK in the confirmation message.
The group is deleted.

To rename a group
1. From the CRM home page, click the View Groups icon.

The Manage Groups page opens.

2. Click the Edit Group icon on the row for the group you want to delete.

3. The Edit Group bar opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 291

Chapter 7 CRM Groups

4. Type a new name for the group in the text field, and then click the green check mark icon to rename the group.
Click the blue arrow to close the Edit Group bar.

To send a bulk email to all members of a group

1. From the CRM home page, click the View Groups icon.

The Manage Groups page opens.

2. Click the Bulk Email icon on the row for the group you want to delete.

The Manage Groups Membership page opens with the list of contacts who are members of the selected group.

3. Click the check box next to each contact to whom you want to send a bulk email. As soon as you select one
record in the list, the Bulk Email button becomes active.
4. Click Bulk Email.
A blank email with the To field already filled in with the selected contact emails opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 292

Chapter 7 Import Contacts

5. Enter a subject, optionally enter email addresses in the Cc: field, enter the text of your email, and optionally
attach files, using the Browse button to search and select files on your computer.
6. Click Submit to send your email to all of recipients.
Attachments are NOT saved in your Rackspace Sent folder. CC yourself to keep a copy of the email with the attach-
ments.

Import Contacts
You can import lists of contacts from a Microsoft Excel file into CRM to save time entering information into individual
records. You can also import a VCard (*.VCF) file into an individual record.

Excel File Information

Each Excel file can contain a maximum of 100 contacts. If you want to import more than 100 contacts, you must create
and upload more Excel files, one for each 100 contacts.

On the contact file import screen, there is a link to download a sample Excel file. This sample file contains all of the
information you need to create your own contact file in Microsoft Excel.

The file should contain the following information for each person:

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 293

Chapter 7 Excel File Information

l Salutation (Mr., Mrs. or Ms.)

l First, middle and last name
l Gender (Female or Male)
l Date of birth (MM/DD/YYYY format)
l Marital Status (Unknown, Single, Married, Divorced, Widow)
l Number of Dependents
l Legal Residence, including Street (two lines, one including unit or apartment number), City, Country, Country of
Citizenship, State/Province, Zip/Postal Code
l Contact Information, including Home, Work and Mobile Phone, Fax and Email
l Employment Information, including Employment Type (Employed, Unemployed, Retired or Self-Employed),
Name and Business of Employer, Employer Work Phone and Employer Address (same information as Legal Res-
idence above)

To import contacts
1. Click Manage Clients > CRM.
2. Click the Import Contacts icon.

The Import Contacts page opens.

3. Click Browse for the type of file you want to import, and then select the desired Excel or VCard file.
4. Click Upload File.
5. In the popup, Identify the type of CRM record that this will be by selecting Contact or Prospect, and then click
Save.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 294

Chapter 7 CRM Icon Reference

Your contacts will now be stored in CRM as individual records.

CRM Icon Reference

You can use the icons to perform certain functions from the CRM home page and from an individual record.

Icon Description

Return to the CRM home page.

Create a new record.

Send a prospect or a client an electronic

invitation to open a new account.

Open your email in Rackspace in a new

browser tab. If you have not set up a Rack-
space email, you will see the email setup
instructions page.

Open the Groups page, where you can view

all of your groups, create, rename and
delete groups.

Set a password to access Notes and

Tasks.

Open the Advanced Search page.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 295

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 296
 8
Support
The Support menu gives you quick access to our Client Services offerings.

This chapter includes the following topics:

l Message Center
l Live Chat
l Contacts
l Service Tips
l Knowledge Base
l Tools
l System Status
l Paper Forms

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 297

Chapter 8 Client Services Message Center

Client Services Message Center

The Client Services Message Center lets you submit questions directly to Client Services using inquiry tickets and track
the status of your Client Services inquiries.

Use the Client Services Message Center to:

l Create a new inquiry ticket, and attach a file to the ticket

l Modify an existing inquiry ticket
l Set Ticket Notification Preferences
l Cancel or close a inquiry ticket
l View corporate actions
l Submit a Tax Reporting Correction Form
l Request a trade cancellation

The Client Services Message Center includes the following features:

l Every inquiry is assigned a reference number, called a ticket. This reference number can be used to efficiently
track the progress of the inquiry.
l The real-time status of an inquiry is always displayed in the main Message Center window. You will know if the
issue has been picked up by an service expert, which expert is handling your issue, and whether it is being
addressed by our main help team or by a specialty team.
l Both customers and staff can refine or add information to the ticket, permitting easy clarifications or follow up to
the original inquiry. In addition, customers can cancel or close tickets once the issue has been addressed, giving
them greater control over the process.
l History of both open and completed inquiries.
l Fast response - Tickets are assigned to an representative usually within a few minutes and always within 2 hours
during European and North American trading hours. During Asian trading hours, response times may be longer.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 298

Chapter 8 Message Center Window

Message Center Window

When you click Support > Message Center, the Message Center appears.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 299

Chapter 8 Viewing Tickets and Unread Messages

Viewing Tickets and Unread Messages

l View a list of the most recent inquiry tickets and unread messages by clicking the appropriate tab in the Client
Services Message Center window.
l For each ticket or message in the list, the Message Center displays the Ref# (unique for each message), the date
and time, a summary of the ticket or message, the most recent update, the person or group assigned and the status.
l View an individual inquiry ticket or message by clicking anywhere on the item in the list.
l View the status of an inquiry ticket in the Status column. The Legend defines all possible statuses.
l Sort a list of tickets or messages by clicking on any column heading.
l Sort the list by read and unread items by clicking the Sort Read/Unread button.
l Update the list of messages or tickets by clicking the Refresh button.
l Use the Search function to search for specific tickets or messages on the current tab. Type the word or phrase you
want to find, then click Search Active Tab.
l Delete old items from the list by checking the check box on the left side of an item, then click the Delete Selec-
ted button at the bottom of the window.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 300

Chapter 8 Changing the Display Language

Changing the Display Language

You can change display language to any of the following languages by clicking the map icon, then selecting the appro-
priate flag icon:

Viewing the Legend

The Client Services Message Center Legend shows what all the possible inquiry statuses and icons mean. To view the
Legend, click the Legend button.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 301

Chapter 8 Creating a New Ticket

Creating a New Ticket

You create a new ticket in the Message Center. Before you create a new ticket, make sure that pop-ups are allowed in
your web browser.

To create a new inquiry ticket

1. Click Support. The Message Center appears.
2. In the Message Center window, make sure New Ticket is selected in the list, then click Create.

The New Ticket window opens.

3. Select a category and subcategory for the inquiry. The combination of categories and subcategories let us route
your inquiry to the Expert who is specialized or is most experienced for your particular issue.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 302

Chapter 8 Modifying a Ticket

4. In the Brief Summary field, modify the brief description of your inquiry. This is the text that appears in the Sum-
mary column of the list of tickets in the main Message Center window.
5. In the Detailed Description field, modify the detailed description or question. Please be as specific and complete
as possible (for example, exact dates/times, desktop trading platform version, and so on), as this lets us accurately
research your inquiry to give you the best and fastest response. The Detailed Description field expands as you
type, so don’t worry about running out of space in which to describe your issue.
6. Optionally attach up to two files to your inquiry using the Attach Files fields. Click the Browse button to select a
file on your computer. You can attach files with a total size of 3MB, and each file you attach must not be more
than 2MB.
7. Click Send, then click OK to dismiss the confirmation message that appears.
Click Cancel if you change your mind and do not want to submit the ticket, or Reset Form to reset all the fields
in the New Ticket to blank.
8. Your new inquiry is listed on the Tickets tab in the Message Center, along with the ticket reference number and a
status of NEW.

Modifying a Ticket
To modify an existing inquiry ticket
1. Click Support. The Message Center appears.
2. Click the Tickets tab to view all of your tickets.
3. Click the row that contains the ticket you want to modify. The View Ticket window opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 303

Chapter 8 Modifying a Ticket

4. Click Reply. The Edit Ticket window opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 304

Chapter 8 Setting Ticket Notification Preferences

5. In the text box, replace the text "Additional comments here" with your own text, and attach any additional files
using the File fields at the bottom of the window.
6. Click Submit.

Setting Ticket Notification Preferences

If you prefer, you can tell us to send you additional notification when an inquiry ticket is updated. You can be notified
via email, IB TWS or SMS (Short Message Service) on your mobile telephone.

To set ticket notification preferences

1. Click Support. The Message Center appears.
2. Click Preferences in the top right corner of the Message Center.
The Message Preferences window appears.

3. Select a primary and secondary language for messages.

4. For each Message Type, select one or more the three available notification methods (IB TWS, Email or SMS) by
clicking the appropriate check box.
5. For email and SMS notification, select Secure or Non-Secure by clicking the appropriate radio button.
l Secure notification - you will be send a generic notification that contains no private information.
l Non-secure notification - you will receive the actual reply content. Note that this option may result in the content
being viewable by an unauthorized third party.
6. Click Save.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 305

Chapter 8 Closing a Ticket

Closing a Ticket
You can close open inquiry tickets in the Client Services Message Center.

Close an open ticket when your inquiry has been resolved (for example, an exchange access problem that has already
been fixed), or you if you have received a satisfactory answer. This changes the status of the ticket Closed. Close tickets
as soon as possible once you are satisfied. Client Services managers may close tickets in cases where the ticket appears to
be fully answered but has not been closed by the customer.

To close an open inquiry ticket

1. Click Support. The Message Center appears.
2. In the Message Center, click the Tickets tab.
3. Click the row that contains the ticket you want to close. The View Ticket window opens.

4. Click Close Ticket to cancel the ticket.

5. View closed inquiry tickets on the Tickets tab by clicking the Show All radio button.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 306

Chapter 8 Viewing Corporate Actions

Viewing Corporate Actions

You can view and participate in corporate actions from the Corporate Actions tab in the Client Services Message Center.
You can view notification of all upcoming corporate actions that may affect you, based on the positions you hold. This
means for example, that regardless of whether you hold a stock, option, bond, or SSF position in ABC company, you will
receive notification of any and all upcoming corporate actions on ABC stock. We notify you of impending actions up to
three months out, and track 14 different types of voluntary and mandatory corporate actions, including dividends, for-
ward and reverse splits, spinoffs and issuances, mergers, name/symbol changes, and a variety of tenders and offers.

To view corporate actions

1. Click Support. The Message Center appears.
2. Click the Corp Actions tab.
3. Each notification is displayed on a separate line along with the View and Edit icons in the Functions column. Do
one of the following:
l Click the View icon to display details and a full description of the corporate action.
l Click the Edit icon to open the Voluntary Corporate Action (CA) Election tool, which lets you submit instruc-
tions on voluntary corporate actions during an open election period. You can also access Corporate Actions using
the Corporate Action Tool, available on the Client Services Tools page.
The following figure shows an example of a corporate action notification.

Submitting a Tax Reporting Correction Form

You can submit a Tax Reporting Correction form from the Client Services Message Center. Use this form to request
changes or report problems with one of the tax statements (1099, 1042, T3/T5, etc). By submitting this special form
instead of submitting a normal inquiry ticket, you will help us process your requested corrections as quickly as possible.

You can also access the Tax Reporting Correction form from the Support > Tools page.

To submit a Tax Reporting Correction Form

1. Click Support. The Message Center appears.
2. Select Tax Correction Form from the drop-down, then click Create.

The Tax Reporting Correction Form opens.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 307

Chapter 8 Requesting a Trade Cancellation

3. Select the tax year for which you wish to report a correction from tax year list.
4. Select your taxpayer status by clicking the appropriate radio button:
l U.S taxpayer
l Canadian taxpayer
l Non-U.S. taxpayer
All available tax forms for your selected taxpayer status display in the form.

5. Click the check box for each tax form that you wish to correct.
The form displays additional options for each box in the selected tax form that can be corrected.

6. Click each check box that corresponds to the tax form box you wish to correct.
7. In the Security Details section, select the tax form you wish to correct from the Form list, then enter any under-
lying, the exchange, transaction date and reason for correction in the fields provided.
8. Type any additional information in the Reason for correction text field, then click Send to submit the completed
form.

Requesting a Trade Cancellation

You can bust a trade using the Order Cancellation Request form in the Client Services Message Center. After you submit
this form to inform us of problem or erroneous trades, we will report these trades to the appropriate exchange on a best

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 308

Chapter 8 Requesting a Trade Cancellation

efforts basis. Please note that this is a time-sensitive process. Most exchanges have very short time periods (as little as 8
minutes), during which they will accept a request for cancellation.

We recommend that traders find and report problematic trades using this tool and thereafter follow up immediately, con-
tacting us by telephone. In addition to uncertainties in response speed, trade cancellation requests initiated by telephone
are prone to delays identifying the correct account and transactions.

You can also access the Order Cancellation Request form from the Support > Tools page.

To request a trade cancellation

1. Click Support. The Message Center appears.
2. Select Trade Cancellation Request from the drop-down, then click Create.

The Order Cancellation Form opens.

3. Select the date of the problem or erroneous trade from the Trade Date list. Trade dates are based on EST (Eastern
Standard Time).
4. Select the type of instrument involved in the trade from the Contract Type list. Select Stock, Future, FutureOption,
Option, Warrant, Cash or Bond.
5. Type the reason for the request in the Reason for Request box.
6. Click Get Trades to display all available trades of the selected instrument type on the selected date.
7. Read the statement at the bottom of the form, then click the check box to confirm your agreement.
8. Click Send to submit the form.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 309

Chapter 8 Live Chat

Live Chat
Client Services Live Chat lets you communicate directly with an Client Services representative in real time. Because it is
authenticated and uses secure communications, staff are able to provide account specific information in a secure manner.
Transcripts are available on demand. We recommend using the Client Services Live Chat for funding/banking and
account application inquiries.

To access Client Services Live Chat

1. Click Support > Client Services > Live Chat. The Live Chat window opens.
2. In the Client Services Live Chat window, select a category from the Category list. This is the subject on which
you are seeking assistance.
3. Select a subcategory from the Sub-Category list.
4. Select your language by clicking the appropriate flag. A flag with a green dot below it indicates that support is
currently available in that language. A flag with a red dot indicates that support is NOT currently available in
that language.
5. Click Proceed.
A Client Services representative will appear online in a few moments.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 310

Chapter 8 Client Services Contact Information

Client Services Contact Information

This page gives you all the information you need to contact our Client Services department.

To access the Contacts page

1. Click Support > Client Services > Contacts.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 311

Chapter 8 Service Tips

Service Tips
The Service Tips page contains information to help you get the most out of your experience with Client Services.

To view the Service Tips page

1. Click Support > Client Services > Service Tips.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 312

Chapter 8 Knowledge Base

Knowledge Base
The Knowledge Base is a repository of how-to articles, troubleshooting tips and guidelines designed to assist customers
with the management of their accounts.

To access the Knowledge Base from Account Management

1. Click Support then click Knowledge Base.
The Knowledge Base opens in a new window.
To locate information, enter one or more of the keywords best describing your inquiry into the search field at the top of
the page, then click Search. A list of content links associated with your search criteria appears, with the top search res-
ults listed first.

You can also click the Article, Video or Glossary links at the top of the page for an alphabetical index of content by
type. The list of Tags to the right is sorted in order of those representing the most popular searches.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 313

Chapter 8 Client Services Tools

Client Services Tools

This page displays a list of links to useful Client Services information and tools.

To access the Tools page

1. Click Support then click Tools.
2. Click an icon or its text label to open a specific page or tool.
Use the scroll bar to view more tools.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 314

Chapter 8 System Status

System Status
This page lets you see the status of our system at a glance.

To view the System Status page

1. Click Support then click System Status.
The System Status page automatically displays in a new window.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 315

Chapter 8 Paper Forms

Paper Forms
A variety of Account Management forms are available on this page. The forms available from this page are in PDF format
and can be electronically completed by a client, or printed by an advisor and sent to the client to complete.

Who can access the Paper Forms page?

You can access this page if you are a(n):

l Advisor Master User

l Proprietary Trading Group Master User
l Investment Manager Master User

Using Account Management Forms

Clients can log into Account Management with their personal username and password and access and print a form then
manually complete it, or a master account user can log into Account Management and print the form for a client to com-
plete.

To access paper forms

1. Click Support > Paper Forms.
2. Click the name of the form that you want to access. The form displays in a new browser window. You can print
the form from there.

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 316

Index
A
Account Management login 23
about Account Management 22
Account Overview report 98
ACATS 218
account partitions xxv, xxvi
full ACATS transfer 218
account selector 38
ACATS transfers
searching for households 40
partial 219, 221
account selector for three-level accounts 41
position instructions for 223
account settings 269
access research provider websites xxxiii
Account Settings menu 300
access rights
account summary
user roles 394
printing 270
access rights availability 377
account type 303
access rights configuration 381
in Manage Clients menu; 231
access rights overview 377
account types
Access Rights tab 377
IRA 332
account alias 322
account values on Home page 24
for client accounts; 223
ACH Initiated at IB process 207
account closing 325
Activate Security Device 365
account closure status 327, 116, 158
activating security device for client accounts 373
account information
activity data
modifying 272
downloading to third parties 174
Account Information menu 270
activity downloads 63
Account Management
downloading a zip file to IE7 or IE8 66
for linked accounts xxii, xxiv
activity flex queries 67
menus 30

Account Management home 24

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 317

Index

Activity Flex Queries adding an account representative 89, 127

batch processing 72 adding an advisor to a fully disclosed broker 89, 127,

133
Activity menu 54
adding an advisor to an advisor account 132
activity statements 54
Adding an SMA account 137
about 54
adding an STL account to a fully disclosed broker 90,
archive policy 55 128

by account type 54 adding an STL account to an advisor account 132-133

creating customized 59 adding external accounts to PortfolioAnalyst 118

delivery settings for 157 adding money manager xxxv

downloading 63 additional advisor authorizations 72

quarterly for advisor clients 76 additional broker authorizations 74

viewing 56 Advanced Search in CRM 283

viewing guidelines 56 advisor

Activity Statements adding to a fully disclosed broker 89, 127

batch processing 72 adding to an advisor 133

add a client account 82, 120 advisor-managed account

add new CRM group 288 linking to xxv

Add or Link Accounts menu xxi transferring positions to 236

adding a fully disclosed broker client 88, 126 advisor client fee authorization 177

adding a multiple hedge fund account to a fully advisor client fees 161, 166
disclosed broker 90, 128
for hedge fund investments 219
adding a new owner to an organization 298
overview 162
adding a non-disclosed broker client 94, 137
reimbursing to client 161
adding a second username 392, 251
advisor client hedge fund investment 76
adding a Security Officer 394
advisor client templates 96, 145
adding a user 385, 244

adding a user role 394

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 318

Index

advisor clients Allocation by Sector report 98

quarterly summaries for 76 allocation details 81

Advisor Compliance 308 application process 84, 122

monitoring groups 310 archive policy for activity statements 55

advisor dashboard 57 Asia Gateway Access 356

advisor fee cap formulas 177 asian assets

advisor fee cap report 143 transferring 237

advisor fee invoices assigning a synopsis to a PortfolioAnalyst report 111

viewing 146 assigning access rights to new users 385

advisor fee reimbursement 161, 188 ATON position instructions 229

advisor invoices ATON transfers 224

uploaded 184 full 224

Advisor Invoicing 178 partial 225, 227

advisor qualifications 286 audit trail 375, 239

advisor registration information 286 authorized traders xxx, 153

advisors automatic billing for advisor client fees 162

adding to a fully disclosed broker 89, 127 available reports in Detailed PDF Reports 98

Advisors B

investing in a hedge fund for a client 76 Back and Continue buttons 35

advisors and hedge funds bank information 209, 253

rules for linking and delinking xxxii modifying 254

Advisors fees bank information fields 254

maximum amount or percentage fee cap 164 bank instructions 209

alert notification 354 base currency 300, 230

Allocation by Asset Class report 98 Batch reports 72

Allocation by Region report 99

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 319

Index

beneficiaries broker registration information 285

Transfer on Death 287 bulk advisor invoices 184

Bloomberg Black Service 174 C

borrow rate broker markups 200 calendar of events in CRM 279

Breakdown of Accounts report 98 Canadian EFT process 207

broker-managed account cancel a transaction 184

linking to xxv cancelling a trade 308

broker client application approvals 224 Cash Forex trading 345

broker client approvals 224 CashEdge/Fiserv Aggregation Services 174

broker client fees 193, 202 change advisor or broker client trading access from
dashboard 68
pricing structure 193
change security questions 363
rules 193
changing display language 43
templates for;templates for broker client fees;cli-
ent fee templates for brokers 213 changing money manager assignments xliii

types of 194 changing the default tax lot-matching method 149

broker client invoicing 206 changing your email address 362

Broker Client Revenue and Expense Summary changing your password 359
Report 147
checking fund status 199
broker client statements
client account details 61
delivery settings for 165
change trading access 68
broker client templates 99, 148
client account templates 95, 99, 144, 148
broker clients
using a custom ID 103, 152
adding account representatives 89, 127
client accounts
OATS setting for 178
activating security device for 373
broker dashboard 57
adding 82, 120
broker declaration 285
selecting 38
broker exception reports 144
viewing 59

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 320

Index

viewing account management requests for 375 closing a client account 325, 112, 155

client authorization of advisor fees 177 closing a non-disclosed broker client account 114, 156

client fee templates closing an account 325

default 214 status 327

client fees 160 closing an account;account closure process 323

authorization of advisor fees 177 closing an inquiry ticket 306

for advisors 166 compliance for advisors 308-310, 315

for SMAs in Multiple Hedge Fund designating aggregated report recipients 318
accounts 218
handshake requests 315
high water mark setup 173
Compliance Reports 142
high water marking 172
compliance reports for advisors 315
modifying for a money manager xxxvii
configure broker fees 202
client fees templates for money managers xxxvii
Configure Fees 166
client invoicing 206
Configure tab 300
client referrals lii
configure trading 339
client security 373
configuring access rights 381
client services 297
contacting customer service 311
contacts 311
corporate actions
tools 314
viewing in the Message Center 307
Client Services Message Center 298-299
Corporate Actions report 104
Client Services messages 28
Corporate Actions tab 29
client services tips 312
correcting a tax form 307
Client Summary Report 144
cost basis for ACATS or ATON 152
client trading 232
cost basis for Forex balances 153
clietn services live chat 310
cover letters in PortfolioAnalyst 110
closed accounts
create a new linked account xxi
reopening 328

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 321

Index

Create and Link Accounts menu 82 view accounts for a client 275

Create Linked Account xxi view members of a group 287

Create menu for Multiple Fund Investment Man- viewing and sorting records 257
agers 120
viewing current tasks and events 258
creating a new support ticket 302
CRM home page
creating a synopsis 110
tasks and events 258
creating custom benchmarks for
PortfolioAnlayst 107 CSV files

crm using for position transfers 248

emails 278 Cumulative Benchmark Comparison report 100

import contacts 293 Cumulative Performance Statistics report 100

notes password 276 custom benchmarks

CRM 254 creating in PortfolioAnalyst 107

add a new group 288 custom IDs for advisor and broker client
applications 103, 152
adding tasks to a record 273
Customer Relationship Management 254
additional tasks for individual records 266
customer service 297
advanced search 283
customized statements 59
bulk emails to groups 292
profit and loss 62
delete a group 290
cutoff times for daily statements 54
edit an existing record 264
D
enter a new record 260
dashboard
groups 286
uploading documents for pending Non-Disclosed
icons 295 Broker clients 80

notes 267 Dashboard 57

rename a group 291 view information about all clients 59

scheduling events 279 viewing client account details 61

sharing with another user 257 data services 347

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 322

Index

Debit Card Signup 228 Details tab 270

default activity statements 56 Digital Security Card+ 370

default client fee templates 214 display language 43

default tax lot-matching method Message Center 301

changing 149 dividend reinvestment 283

defining an alias for your account ID 322 Dividends report 104

delete a CRM group 290 documentation 34

deleting a user 393, 252 downloading activity data to third-party services 174

deleting a user role 396 downloading activity statements 63

deleting external accounts from downloading client disclosures 88, 125

PortfolioAnalyst 123
DRS transfers 233
deleting PortfolioAnlayst reports 113
duplicate client account settings 79, 143
delinking from an advisor xxxii
duplicate client accounts 77, 141
Delivery menu 156
DWAC transfers 235
delivery of security devices 367
E
delivery settings
editing Account Representatives 70
broker client activity statements 165
editing an existing CRM record 264
PortfolioAnalyst 162
editing PortfolioAnalyst reports 113
Delivery Settings 156
eligibility of positions for transfer 230
delivery settings for flex queries 161
eligible security officers 389
deposit notification 201
email address
deposit transaction history details 185
changing 362
depositing funds 201
enable SMS alerts 160
Deposits and Withdrawals report 103
entering a new CRM record 260
designating compliance report recipients 318
error codes for Flex Web Service Version 3 173
Detailed PDF Reports 94

available reports in 98

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 323

Index

european assets trade confirmations 82

transferring 237 via HTTPS 166

events in CRM records 279 Flex Web Service 166-167, 170

Excel contacts error codes for Version 3 173

importing 293 Flex Web Service Version 2 167

excess funds sweep 304, 227 Flex Web Service Version 3 170

execution reports 79 FOP position transfers 241

explain links 34 FOP transfers 241, 243

export transaction history to Excel 185 position instructions for 245

external account portfolios 118 Forex cost basis 153

external account summaries 115 Free of Payment transfers 241

External Account tab in PortfolioAnalyst 118 full ACATS transfers 218

external accounts full ATON transfeers 224

adding to PortfolioAnalyst 118 full IRA conversion 329

deleting 123 fully disclosed broker clients 88, 126

external accounts in PortfolioAnalyst 114, 122 fully disclosed brokers

F adding Advisors, STLs and Multiple Hedge

Funds 89, 127
Fee Summary report 104
fund investment manager client account templates 96,
fees for advisor clients 166 145

Fees tab 304 fund transfers

financial information 281 withdrawing funds to a third party 212

finishing an application for a new linked fund withdrawals 203

account xxii
funding 181
Flat Rate 305
deposits 201
flex queries
internal transfers 208
activity statements 67
withdrawals 203
delivery settings for 161

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 324

Index

funding instructions 253 rules for creating 104

funds status 199 I

futures arbitration agreement 356 IBIS 347

FYIs 352 IBroker exception reports 144

G icons used in CRM 295

generating margin reports 135 importing contacts into CRM 293

Getting Started 21 Inbound Position Transfer Cost Basis 152

grouping accounts into a household 103 inbound position transfer history details 193

groups in CRM 286 individual account user rules 384

H inquiry tickets 302

handshake requests for advisors 315 closing 306

Hedge Fund Investor Site modifying 303

advisor invests for a client 76 preferences for 305

help 34 instructions 253, 260

HFCIP Fees 219 settlement 263

high water mark setup 173 instructions for position transfeers 262

high water marking 172 Interactive Brokers Asset Management 116

Historical Performance report 103 Interest Details report 104

Home page 24 internal fund transfers 208

corporate actions 29 internal position transfers 247

messages 28 internal transfer transaction history details 197

pending items 27 international position transfers 237

Positions tab 26 introduction to access rights 377

real-time summary 24 investment experience 281

Refresh button 25 investment objectives 281

households 103 investory categories 292

in the account selector 40

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 325

Index

inviting clients to start electronic application 84, limit client trading 352
122
limitations of paper trading accounts 322
IP restrictions 358
limits on withdrawals 371
IPO Subscriptions 49
link existing account xxiii
IRA account types 332
guidelines;guidelines for linking existing
IRA Contribution 333 accounts; xxiii

IRA conversion link existing accounts to three-level accounts xxiii

partial 330 link existing client accounts 111

IRA conversion to IB Roth IRA account 329 link multiple accounts xxiii

IRA conversions 335 link to a new account xxi

IRA Direct Rollover 333 finishing the application xxii

IRA margin accounts 332 link to advisor or broker managed account xxv

IRA recharacterization 331 linked accounts

IRA recharacterizations 335 Account Management for xxii, xxiv

IRA reference 332 linking advisor client accounts 111

IRA Rollover 333 linking to an advisor xxxii

IRA tab 329 linking to an advisor/broker-managed account

IRA transfer methods 333 account partitions xxvi

IRA Trustee-to-Trustee 333 linking to and delinking from a hedge funds xxxii

IRAs 332, 335 Live Chat 310

K logging in 23

Knowledge Base 313 logging out 45

L Login Go To menu 23
Language menu 43 Login Problems link 23
Large Trader Identification 292 Logout link 45
legend M
Message Center 301 Manage Account 269

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 326

Index

Manage Clients > Create menu 82 Messages tab 28

Manage Clients menu 55 metals

Manage Funds menu 55 trading 342

Manage Traders menu 55 methods of completing an account application 83, 121

managing groups in CRM 286 Mint Service 174

map icon 43 Mobile 319

margin account models 73

upgrading to 303 modify a pending deposit 184

margin reports 135 modifying a recurring transaction 261

market data modifying an inquiry ticket 303

for residents of China 356 modifying bank information 254

Market Data Assistant 350 modifying client fees for a money manager xxxvii

market data subscriber status 348 modifying financial information 281

market data subscriptions 346 modifying personal information 272

searching for 350 modifying trading permissions for money

managers xxxix
Markup Summary 212
modifying Transfer on Death beneficiaries 291
maximum invoice amounts for advisors 164
modifying user access rights 390, 249
menus 30
modifying user roles 395
message center 298
money manager
Message Center
adding xxxv
changing display language 301
changing assignments xliii
legend 301
create a client fees template xxxvii
modifying a ticket 303
modifying client fees xxxvii
new ticket 302
modifying trading permissions for xxxix
viewing corporate actions 307
removing xlviii
Message Center Window 299
Money Manager Assignment xxxiv

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 327

Index

Money Manager menu xxxiv O

monitoring groups 310 OATS settings 178

handshake requests 315 Open Position Summary Report 98

Move, Link or Partition an Account xxv opening a paper trading account 320

multiple accounts options trading permissions for broker clients 224

switching between 36 Order Cancellation Request 308

multiple CRM users 257 organization owner

multiple hedge funds adding new 298

adding to a fully disclosed broker 89-90, 127- overview of security officers 380
128
owner
setting fees for SMAs 218
adding to an organization 298
N
ownership percentage 278
name and address
P
modifying 272
P/L Markup Summary Report 145
navigating a sequence of pages 35
paper forms 316
navigating CRM pages 257
paper trading
navigating the menus 30
how it works 321
new account
limitations 322
linking to xxi
paper trading account
non-disclosed broker client
reset password 360
closing account 114, 156
paper trading accounts 320
non-disclosed broker client accounts 94, 137
partial ACATS transfer 219
Non-Disclosed Brokers
partial ACATS transfers 221
uploading documents for pending clients 80
partial ATON transfers 225, 227
non-professional status 348
partial IRA conversions 330
notification settings for statements 157
partial IRA recharacterizations 331

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 328

Index

partial position transfers position instructions 262

uploading positions in a CSV file for 249 ATON 229

password change 359 position instructions for ACATS transfers 223

PDF forms 316 position instructions for FOP transfers 245

pending items 27 position transfer cost basis 152

pending user access rights 389 position transfers 217

Percent of P&L 172 ACATS 218

percentage cap for Advisor fees 164 ATON 224

performance attribution charts 106 between master and sub accounts 246

Performance Attribution report 101, 105 checking position eligibility for 230

performance attribution scatter plot 107 DRS 233

Performance by Asset Class report 101 DWAC 235

Performance by Sector report 101 FOP 241

Performance by Symbol report 102 internal 247

personal information of international assets 237

modifying 272 to an advisor-managed account 236

PortfolioAnalyst 87 US futures 246

adding external accounts 118 Positions tab 26

available reports in Detailed PDF Reports 98 pricing structure 305

custom benchmarks in 107 Print Account Details 270

delivery settings for 162 Print link 44

Detailed PDF Reports 94 print transaction history 185

editing and deleting reports in 113 printing 44

Snapshot PDF Reports 89 products and countries to trade 339

synopses 110 Profile page 272

viewing external account portfolios 114, 118

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 329

Index

profit and loss reports

affect on statements 62 on demand compliance 315

PTG sub accounts Reports 53

limiting trading of 350 Request Security Device 365

Q Research Services xxxiii

quarterly summaries 76 research subscriptions 347

QuickTrade 48 Research Website Login xxxiii

R resetting password
read-only access 319 paper trading account 360
Real-time Summary 24 restrict trading on entire account structure 352
recharacterizations 335 restricting user access to TWS 358
recharacterizing an IB Roth IRA account 331 returns and attributions effects by sector 106
recurring transactions 211, 260 RIA compliance system 308-309
modifying 261 Risk Measures Benchmark Comparison report 101
Refresh button on Home page 25 Risk Measures report 100
Registered Representatives 70 Risk reports 134
regulatory information 282 rule for three level advisor accounts 134
reimbursing fees to advisor clients 188 rules
reinvesting stock dividends 283 for uploading positions in a csv file 251
removing money managers xlviii rules for broker client fees 193
rename a CRM group 291 rules for three-level accounts 91, 129
reopening a closed account 328 S
report delivery 156 saving bank information 209

via SMS 160 searching CRM records 257

report delivery settings searching for market data subscriptions 350

for activity statements 157 SEC large trader ID numbers 292

for trade reports 157

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 330

Index

second username 392 SLS Opt Out 371

Secure Login Device sharing 367 SMA accounts

Secure Login System 364 adding 137

enrolling in 365 SMAs

opting out 371 fees for 218

security devices 369 SMS address 354

Security Code Cards 369 SMS alerts 160

security device 365 Snapshot PDF Reports 89

activating for client accounts 373 Soft Dollar Disbursement 265

security devices 369 soft dollars

delivery schedule 367 requesting 306

Security menu 358 sort notes in a CRM record 267

Security menu in Manage Clients menu 239 starting a semi-electronic application 86, 124

Security Officer status of account closure request 327

adding 394 steps in the application process 84, 122

Security Officers 378, 380-381 STL account

selecting accounts 38 adding to a fully disclosed broker 90, 128

send an email to all CRM group members 292 adding to an advisor account 133

set up and use a CRM mailbox 278 STL accounts

setting a CRM notes password 276 adding to a fully disclosed broker 89, 127

setting alert preference 354 stop payment on a check withdrawal 184

setting up high water marking 173 Stress Test report 137

Settings menu in Manage Clients menu 223 sub accounts

settlement instructions 263 selecting 38

sharing a security device 367 submitting advisor fee invoices 178

simulated trading environment 320

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 331

Index

subscribing three-level advisor accounts 132

data services 347 rules for 134

market data 346 three-level fully disclosed broker accounts 89, 127

Summary tab in PortfolioAnalyst 115 rules for 91, 129

supplemental reports 144-145, 147 three-level multiple hedge fund accounts 132

Supplemental Reports 142 three-tier account linking xxiii

support three-tier accounts 132

tips for best service 312 ticket notification preferences 305

Support menu 297 Time Period Benchmark Comparison report 99

sweep excess margin funds 304 Time Period Performance Statistics report 99

swtiching between accounts 36 tools for customer service 314

synopses 110 trade allocations report 81

system status 315 trade cancellation 308

T Trade Configuration menu 338, 230

take up fees for broker prime clients 201 Trade Confirmation Flex Queries 82

tasks and events in CRM 258 trade confirmation reports

Tax Correction Form 307 delivery settings for 157

Tax Form Collection 295 trade confirmations

tax forms 150 generating 79

Tax Information menu 295 Trade Confirmations menu 78

Tax menu 148 Trade menu 47

Tax Optimizer 149 Trade Summary report 103

third-party services 174 Trader ID 175

third-party withdrawals 212 Trader Referral Program lii

three-level account linking xxiii payout rules lii

Traders 153

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 332

Index

trading 47 transferring positions between master and sub

accounts 246
trading Cash Forex 345
types of broker client fees 194
trading limits 350, 235
U
trading notifications in TWS 352
UK CFDs 342
trading permissions 339, 234
updating a client W8 or W9 241
modifying for a money manager xxxix
updating broker registration information 285
trading platforms read-only mode 319
updating financial information 281
trading restrictions 235
updating ownership percentage 278
on entire account structure 352
updating regulatory information 274
Trading Sub Accounts 285, 153
updating W8/W9 forms 295
trading UK CFDs and metals 342
upgrading to a margin account 303
Transaction Cost Analysis 125
uploading advisor invoices 184
glossary 129
uploading positions in a csv file
understanding 129
rules for 251
transaction history 182
uploading positions in a CSV file 249
deposits 185
US Futures
inbound position transfers 193
transferring 246
internal transfers 197
user access rights 377, 243
withdrawalws 190
modifying 390, 249
transfer methods for IRAs 333
user information displayed on 244
Transfer on Death 287
user information on User Access Rights page 384, 244
removing a beneficiary 291
user roles 379, 394
transferring assets to an IB Roth IRA account 329
adding 394
transferring funds internally 208
deleting 396
transferring position to advisor-managed
account 236 modifying 395

transferring positions 217 user rules for individual accounts 384

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 333

Index

users 243 viewing eligible security officers on pending

items 389
adding to your account 385
viewing history of transactions 182
deleting 393
viewing portfolios in non-IB accounts 115
users and access rights 383
viewing portfolios of non-IB accounts 114
adding a user 385
viewing Proprietary Trading Group sub accounts 285
users guide 34
Volume Tiered 305
Users page 383
voting 374
users roles
voting subscriptions 374
view details 396
W
V
W-8 update 295
Value at Risk report 140
W-9 update 295
VAR report 140
W8 241
VCard files
W9 241
importing 293
Wealth Manager Assignment xlix
view advisor fee invoices 146
wealth manager tasks xxxiv
view members of a CRM group 287
weighting by sector 106
view user role details 396
who can configure access rights 377
viewing
withdrawal limits 371
activity statements 56
withdrawal transaction history details 190
margin reports 135
withdrawals 203
tax forms 150
withdrawing funds to a third party 212
trade confirmations 79
withholding 297
viewing account management requests for client
accounts 375 Withholding Statement 297

viewing and editing external accounts 122

viewing client account details 61

viewing corporate actions 29

Account Management Users' GuideUser Access Rights Guide 334